TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...1.07. CONSTRUCTION PERMITS A. Contractors shall obtain and pay for...

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

Charles County Department of Utilities

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE PAGE DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work ..................................................................................................... 1 thru 3 01019 Contract Considerations ............................................................................................ 1 thru 4 01026 Lump Sum Items ....................................................................................................... 1 thru 1 01039 Coordination and Meetings ....................................................................................... 1 thru 4 01300 Submittals ................................................................................................................. 1 thru 4 01400 Quality Control ........................................................................................................... 1 thru 3 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls ....................................................... 1 thru 3 01540 Bypass Pumping System ......................................................................................... 1 thru 4 01564 Erosion Control.......................................................................................................... 1 thru 5 01600 Material and Equipment ............................................................................................ 1 thru 3 01640 Equipment - General ................................................................................................. 1 thru 8 01650 Starting of Systems ................................................................................................... 1 thru 3 01700 Contract Closeout ..................................................................................................... 1 thru 5 DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK 02030 Demolition ................................................................................................................. 1 thru 3 02141 Removal of Water ..................................................................................................... 1 thru 4 02161 Sheeting and Bracing ................................................................................................ 1 thru 4 02205 Protection of Existing Facilities ................................................................................. 1 thru 4 02222 Excavating ................................................................................................................. 1 thru 4 02223 Backfilling .................................................................................................................. 1 thru 6 02225 Trenching ................................................................................................................ 1 thru 12 02228 Compaction ............................................................................................................... 1 thru 4 02553 Water Services, Water Meter Settings, and Vaults ................................................... 1 thru 5 02710 Fences ...................................................................................................................... 1 thru 5 02733 Sanitary Sewer Piping ............................................................................................. 1 thru 18 02735 Leakage Tests of Sewers.......................................................................................... 1 thru 7 02740 Sewage Force Mains................................................................................................. 1 thru 9 02741 Pressure Tests of Force Mains ................................................................................. 1 thru 6 02980 Site Rehabilitation ..................................................................................................... 1 thru 7 DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03001 Concrete .................................................................................................................... 1 thru 9 03481 Precast Concrete Vaults ........................................................................................... 1 thru 6 DIVISION 5 – METALS 05500 Miscellaneous Fabrications ....................................................................................... 1 thru 4 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09900 Painting ..................................................................................................................... 1 thru 6

Mattawoman WWTP Grit Removal Upgrade 8614477 TOC-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE PAGE DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11300 Pumping Equipment – General ................................................................................. 1 thru 3 11310 Submersible Sewage Pump Station ........................................................................ 1 thru 13 11316 Sump Pumps ............................................................................................................. 1 thru 3 DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13120 Precast Concrete Building ......................................................................................... 1 thru 6 DIVISION 15 – EQUIPMENT 15170 Motors ....................................................................................................................... 1 thru 9 15870 Power Ventilators ...................................................................................................... 1 thru 4 DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL 16055 Electrical Work ........................................................................................................ 1 thru 30 16100 Grounding.................................................................................................................. 1 thru 6 16191 Electrical Supports, Anchors and Fasteners ............................................................. 1 thru 6 16421 Utility Service Entrance ............................................................................................. 1 thru 4 16484 Contactors and Motor Starting Equipment ................................................................ 1 thru 6 16497 Transfer Switches ................................................................................................... 1 thru 10 16620 Packaged Engine Generator Systems ................................................................... 1 thru 10 16900 Instrumentation - General ....................................................................................... 1 thru 17 16901 Gas Detection Systems ............................................................................................. 1 thru 5 16902 Antenna and Mounting .............................................................................................. 1 thru 6 16903 Auxiliary Controls and Relays.................................................................................... 1 thru 8 16950 Testing and Inspection .............................................................................................. 1 thru 8 16990 Control Panels ......................................................................................................... 1 thru 13 Appendices Appendix I Stormwater Exemption Letter Appendix II Geotechnical Evaluation

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 TOC-2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 01010

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01. SECTION INCLUDES

A. Project - Work covered by Contract Documents.

B. Sequence of Construction.

C. Contractor use of site.

D. Limits of work area.

E. Construction permits.

F. Owner occupancy.

1.02. RELATED SECTIONS

A. General Provisions

1.03. PROJECT - WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Work of this contract comprises the Project, for construction of the Wakefield Pumping Station.

B. Perform Work under a lump sum price contract with Owner.

C. Work not specifically identified on the Drawings or in the Bid Item Description pages, but required in the Contract Documents, shall be performed as specified.

1.04. SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

A. General

1. Contractor shall be responsible for the means, manpower, techniques, schedule, sequences and procedures for construction.

2. Contractor shall be responsible for sequencing and coordinating the construction and installation of the materials and equipment shown on the Contract Drawings and described in the Contract Specifications.

B. Contractor shall provide a written sequence of construction to the Owner describing how the work will be accomplished prior to commencing with construction. The written sequence of construction shall indicate temporary equipment, water service requirements, electrical connections and temporary piping required to install and test the new pumping station. Any bypass pumping required by the Contractor to implement the Work will be provided in the written sequence of construction. The period of bypass pumping required will be included in the written sequence of construction description.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 01010-1 SUMMARY OF WORK

C. Sequencing Requirements

1. The existing pumping station is to remain in service until the new pumping station, flow meter, pump control and piping have been tested and approved by the Owner and have been continuously operated successfully (without failure) for a continuous 2 week period.

2. The Contractor is required to give the Owner a 72-hour written notice prior to pressure and leak testing piping, leak testing the wet-well and testing the pumps and controls. Contractor shall have all temporary equipment, tools, etc. on site prior to commencing with the test.

3. Contractor shall provide temporary bypass pumping equipment if he or she determines it to be necessary to complete the Work. Contractor shall coordinate bypass pumping operation with the Owner. All temporary piping connections, piping, valves, pipe plugs, etc. for the bypass pump operation shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

1.05. CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE

A. Limit use of site to allow Owner occupancy.

1.06. LIMITS OF WORK AREA

A. Confine construction operations within the Contract Limits shown on the Drawings. Storage of equipment and materials, or erection and use of sheds outside of the Contract Limits, if such areas are the property of Owner, shall be used only with Owner’s approval. Such storage or temporary structures, even within the Contract Limits, shall be confined to Owner’s property and shall not impede Owner’s access to the existing pumping station, be placed on properties designated as easements or rights-of-way.

1.07. CONSTRUCTION PERMITS

A. Contractors shall obtain and pay for necessary construction permits from those authorities or agencies having jurisdiction over land areas, utilities or structures which are located within the Contract Limits and which will be occupied, encountered, used, or temporarily interrupted by Contractor’s operations.

B. When construction permits are accompanied by regulations or requirements issued by a particular authority or agency, it shall be Contractor’s responsibility to familiarize himself and comply with such regulations or requirements as they apply to his operations on this project. Any costs associated with additional field supervision by authorities or agencies shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

1.08. OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. Cooperate with Owner to facilitate Owner’s operation and maintenance of the existing pumping station while it is in service.

B. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.


PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01019

CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Schedule of Values.

B. Application for Payment.

C. Change Procedures.



B. Section 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

1.03. SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Submit hard-copy and electronic schedule in accordance with the format below for each pump station.

B. Submit a separate Schedule of Values for each pumping station in duplicate within 10 work days after the Notice to Proceed.

C. Include within each line item a direct proportional amount of Contractor’s overhead and profit.

D. Payments during the course of the work for lump sum items will be made on the basis of percentage completion of the work items listed in the schedule of values for each lump sum item. The Schedule of Values shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner as specified herein. The Schedule of Values shall serve as a breakdown of the lump sum bid for the purpose of arriving at a basis for the monthly estimate. The schedule shall be broken down into schedule of values categories and each category shall be further broken into each applicable specification section. The Schedule shall add up to 100% of the Lump Sum bid.

E. Format - Contractor’s Schedule of Values shall conform to the following format:

1. Eligible payment items shall be separated on the Schedule of Values into the following categories:

a. Sitework

b. Yard Piping

c. Demolition

d. Overall Electrical Power Distribution and Controls

e. Pumping Station

f. Generator

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 01019-1 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

g. Startup

h. Contract Closeout

i. Change Orders

2. Additional categories may be added if required.

3. Each eligible payment item shall be separated into two distinct line-items on the Schedule of Values. One line item shall be for the supply of materials/equipment (for example: “furnish submersible chopper pumps) and the second line item shall be for installing the materials/equipment (for example: “install submersible chopper pumps”).

4. The category “Sitework”, in the Schedule of Values, shall be further subdivided into itemized quantities and unit costs for all individual construction components. Items shall be separated according to Specification Sections Titles in the Table of Contents (for example: “Removal of Water”, “Site Rehabilitation”, “Sheeting and Bracing”, “Chain Link Fences and Gates”, “Manholes”, etc.).

a. The “Sitework” category shall not include yard piping, valves, or construction items such as excavation or concrete work specific to the pumping station or vaults.

b. Include Sediment and Erosion Control under “Sitework”.

c. Bypass Pumping shall be listed under “Sitework” and shall include daily, weekly, or monthly unit costs for providing and operating the bypass pumping system.

d. Dewatering shall be listed under “Sitework” and shall include daily costs for each structure.

e. Off-site hauling of fill material shall be listed under “Sitework”.

5. The category “Yard Piping”, in the Schedule of Values, shall apply to all exterior piping and valves not within the pumping station wet-well or vaults indicated on the Contract Drawings. Piping shall include labor, material, trenching, bedding, backfilling, and compaction and be indicated on a $/LF basis.

6. The category “Demolition” in the Schedule of Values, shall include the Work shown on the Contract Drawings.

7. The category “Pumping Station” in the Schedule of Values shall encompass the pumping station, valve vault and meter vault and include the precast concrete structures, piping, valves, pipe supports, pumping equipment, guard rail, access hatches, excavation, backfill, and compaction. Pump station controls and instrumentation shall be listed under “Overall Electrical Power Distribution and Controls” of the Schedule of Values.

8. Under “Startup”, Contractor shall list each piece of equipment (submersible chopper pump, generator, etc.) that will require startup and initial testing. Values shall include troubleshooting, manufacturer field services, field testing equipment, and initial operation.

9. The category “Contract Closeout” should include all items listed in Specification Section 01700, Contract Closeout.


10. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment. Each Change Order shall list separately the individual Proposed Change Orders (PCOs) that make up the Change Order.

1.04. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Submit three copies of each application on forms furnished by Owner.

B. Content and Format - Approved Schedule of Values will be used to list items in Application for Payment. Certification by Contractor must accompany each application.

C. Payment Period - Monthly.

D. Attach required documents and Contractor’s back-up data, including updated schedule and all invoices for stored materials.

E. Contractor must have all as-builts/record drawings current and up to date prior to submitting Application for Payment.

1.05. CHANGE PROCEDURES

A. The Owner will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Times by issuing supplemental instructions in a Field Order.

B. The Owner may issue a Proposal Request or Notice of Change which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit an estimate within 15 calendar days.

C. The Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for change to the Owner, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time with full documentation.

D. Lump Sum/Price Change Order - Based on Proposal Request or Notice of Change and Contractor’s fixed or estimated price quotation.

E. Unit Price Change Order - For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not predetermined, execute Work under a Work Change Directive. Changes in Contract Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order.

F. Work Change Directive - Owner may issue a directive,oon Attachment Form 43 - Work Change Directive, signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change.

G. Time and Material Change Order - Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. Owner will determine the change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents.

H. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work.


I. Change Order Forms.

J. Execution of Change Orders - Owner will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties in the following order: Contractor, Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


CHANGE ORDER NO.

Date:

Owner: Contractor:

Project: Engineer’s File No.:

Contract No.: Government Project No.:

The contractor is hereby authorized and directed to make the changes described below, and agrees to furnish all labor, materials, and equipment to accomplish the changes in accordance with the applicable portions of the Contract Documents for this project.

Description of Change (Including Location and Reasons Therefore):

See attached “Description of Change Summary.”

Enclosures and References:

See attached “List of Attachments.”

In executing this change order, it is mutually agreed that the amounts provided for herein will be accepted by the contractor as full compensation for all known costs associated in the work, including all direct and indirect costs, and any and all known costs associated with delays or additional time, if any, which may be required as a result of said changes.

AMOUNT CONTRACT

TIME Original Contract Price Substantial Completion Date Prior to Change Order

Contract Price Prior to Change Order Final Payment Date Prior To Change Order

Net Amount This Change Order Net Time This Change Order days

Revised Contract Price Revised Substantial Completion Date

Revised Final Payment Date

ENGINEER OWNER CONTRACTOR GHD Inc. Approved: Approved:

Recommended: Title: Title:

Date: Date: Date:

Telephone: Telephone: Telephone:

Remarks:

1. The party initiating the change order request is . 2. Does this change order: a. Affect the work of other contractors? No b. Require additional work by other contractors? No c. Constitute entire cost of the change? No (If not, explain.)

G:\86\12289\Word Proc\Specs\Div 01\01019 Attachment Form 55 - Change Order.doc

CHANGE ORDER NO. ___ (PAGE 2)

Description of Change Summary: List of Attachments:

G:\86\12289\Word Proc\Specs\Div 01\01019 Attachment Form 55 - Change Order.doc

APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT

Project: Contractor: Payment No.:

To (Owner): Contract No.: Application Date:

Attention: Contract For: Construction Period Ending:

Application is made for payment, as shown below, in connection with the contract. Continuation sheet is attached. The present status of the account for this contract is as follows:

Original Contract Sum .................................... $

Net Change by Change Orders .......................... $

Other Adjustments ............................................. $

Contract Sum to Date ...................................... $

Total Completed and Stored to Date (Column J on Continuation Sheet) ....................... $

Retainage ______% ............................................ $

Total Earned Less Retainage ............................. $

Less Previous Certifications for Payment ........ $

Current Payment Due ........................................ $

The undersigned contractor certifies that: (1) all previous progress payments received from owner on account of work done under the contract referred to above have been applied to discharge in full obligations of contractor incurred in connection with work covered by prior Applications for Payment Nos. 1 through ____ inclusive; and (2) title to all materials and equipment incorporated in said work or otherwise listed in or covered by this Application for Payment will pass to owner at time of payment free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests, and encumbrances (except such as covered by bond acceptable to owner). Contractor: By: Date:

Payment of the above amount due this application is recommended. GHD Inc. By: This certificate is not negotiable. It is payable only to the payee named herein and its issuance, payment, and acceptance are without prejudice to any rights of the owner or contractor under this contract.

The amount due this application is approved. Charles County Department of Utilities By: Date:

G:\86\12289\Word Proc\Specs\Div 01\01019 Attachment Form 146 - Payment Application.DOC

APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT PAGE 2

Project: Payment No.:

Contract No.: Work Completed S&W No.:

Item No. (C)

Description of Work (D)

Scheduled Value

(E)

Previous Applications

(F)

This Application Total Completed and Stored to Date

(J) (F+G+H)

% Complete (A)

Balance to Finish Retainage

Work in Place Stored Materials (H)

G:\86\12289\Word Proc\Specs\Div 01\01019 Attachment Form 146 - Payment Application.DOC

WORK DIRECTIVE CHANGE NO.

PROJECT: DATE OF ISSUANCE: OWNER: (Name, Address) OWNER’S Project No.:

CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER:

CONTRACT FOR: ENGINEER’s Project No.: You are directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s): DESCRIPTION:

PURPOSE OF WORK DIRECTIVE CHANGE:

ATTACHMENTS: (list documents supporting change)

If a claim is made that the above change(s) have affected Contract Price or Contract Time, any claim for a Change Order based thereon will involve one of the following methods of determining the effect of the change(s). Method of determining change in Contract Price: Method of determining change in Contract Time:

Time And Materials Contractor’s Records

Unit Prices Engineer’s Records

Cost Plus Fixed Fee Other

Other

Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Price: $ . If the change involves an increase, the estimated amount is not to be exceeded without further authorization.

Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Time: days. If the change involves an increase, the estimated time is not to be exceeded without further authorization.

RECOMMENDED: AUTHORIZED:

By: Engineer By: Owner

G:\86\12289\Word Proc\Specs\Div 01\Section 01019 ~ x 43-Work Directive Change.doc

ENGINEER’S FIELD ORDER NO.

To: Date:

Project: Engineer’s File No.:

Contract No.:

In accordance with the General Conditions, you are hereby directed to execute this field order, which interprets the contract documents or orders minor changes in the work.

Description:

Attachments:

cc: Signed:

Form 143 (7/07) G:\86\12289\Word Proc\Specs\Div 01\Section 01019 ~ x 143-Engineer's Field Order.doc

SECTION 01026

LUMP SUM ITEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Price make-up.


A. Bid Form - Schedule of Lump Sum Items.

B. Section 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK: Identification of the Project and work covered by the Contract Documents.

1.03. PRICE MAKE-UP

A. Lump sum prices bid by Contractor are deemed to be full compensation for all required labor, products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, testing, inspection, services, incidentals, administrative procedures, applicable taxes, permit fees, overhead, profit, insurance, bonds, and other miscellaneous expenses.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 01026-1 LUMP SUM ITEMS

SECTION 01039

COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Coordination.

B. Field engineering.

C. Preconstruction conference.

D. Progress meetings.

E. Pre-installation conference.



1.03. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate scheduled work sequences and related operations beforehand with appropriate local, county, or state officials and agencies including affected property owners, when project is to be located in or adjacent to the public right-of-way.

B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements.

C. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, and conduit, as closely as practicable. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion.

G. Coordinate with Owner access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, which minimizes disruption of Owner’s activities.

1.04. FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Control datum for survey work and construction staking of structures is shown on the Drawings.

B. Two control points are provided on the Drawings.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 01039-1 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

C. Owner reserves right to inspect or check results of field engineering services provided under Paragraph D for conformance with Contract Documents.

D. Contractor shall provide field engineering services as follows:

1. Employ a land surveyor licensed in the State of Maryland and acceptable to Owner.

2. Protect all control and reference points. Accurately replace any such point which is damaged or moved.

3. Provide correct lines, grades, locations and elevations for construction of all Project components.

4. Provide correct information for preparation of Project record documents.

5. Submit a copy of registered site drawing and certificate signed by the land surveyor who provided field engineering services that the locations and elevations of the Work are in conformance with the Contract Documents.

1.05. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Owner will schedule a conference after the Effective Date of Agreement.

B. Attendance Required – Owner, General Contractor and major subcontractors.

C. Agenda

1. Distribution of extra sets of Contract Documents by Owner to General Contractor.

2. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule.

3. Designation of personnel representing the parties for Contractor and Owner.

4. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, change orders and contract closeout procedures.

5. Scheduling.

6. Temporary facilities to be provided by Owner; and by Contractor.

7. Procedures for testing.

8. Procedures for maintaining record documents.

9. Periodic cleanup of site.

10. Notification of utilities’ owners.

11. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.

12. Owner’s requirements.

13. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.

14. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.


15. Survey.

16. Security and housekeeping procedures.

17. Schedules.

18. Procedures for testing.

19. Procedures for maintaining record documents.

20. Requirements for start-up of equipment.

21. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.

22. Requirements of regulatory agencies.

D. Owner will record minutes and distribute copies within five business days after meeting to participants, and to those affected by decisions made.

1.06. PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Owner will schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals.

B. Owner will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies within five days to participants, and those affected by decisions made.

C. Attendance Required - Owner, Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.

D. Distribution of monthly CDs containing previous month’s construction photographs.

E. Evidence of Contractor’s upkeep of record drawings.

F. Agenda

1. Review minutes of previous meetings.

2. Review of Work progress.

3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.

4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress.

5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.

6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.

7. Maintenance of progress schedule.

8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.

9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.

10. Coordination of projected progress.


11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.

12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.

13. Other business relating to Work.

1.07. PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A. When required in individual specification sections, Contractor shall convene a pre-installation conference at work site prior to commencing work of the Section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section.

C. Notify Owner at least four days in advance of meeting date.

D. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days after conference to participants.

E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01300

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Submittal procedures.

B. Construction progress schedules.

C. Proposed products list.

D. Product data.

E. Shop drawings.

F. Manufacturers’ instructions.

G. Manufacturers’ certificates.

H. Construction photographs.



B. Section 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK

C. Section 01640 – EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

D. Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

1.03. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Transmit each required submittal using Engineer accepted form.

B. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals to have original number with an alphabetic suffix.

C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate.

D. Apply Contractor’s stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. Stamp shall show the following information:

1. Shop Submittal Number______________________

2. Deviations: None________; As Listed___________

3. Reference Specification Number_______________

4. Reference Drawing Number___________________ Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 01300-1 SUBMITTALS

5. Space Requirement: As Designed____________ Different, As Listed____________

6. Representation is made to the Owner that the Contractor has determined and verified all field measurements and quantities, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data, that he has reviewed and coordinated the information in each shop drawing with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents, and hereby approves this submittal. Contractor_________________________________ Signature__________________________________ Date______________________________________

E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Owner at business address. Coordinate submission of related items.

F. Identify deviations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. Identify space requirements which differ from those designed or shown on the Contract Documents.

G. Provide space for Contractor and Owner review stamps.

H. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal.

I. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.

J. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.

1.04. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Submit a separate preliminary progress schedule for each pumping station in duplicate within 15 calendar days after date indicated in the Notice to Proceed for Owner review.

B. Submit finalized progress schedule at least 15 calendar days before submission of the first Application for Payment.

C. Submit revised schedules at each progress meeting, identifying changes since previous version.

D. Prepare a computer generated, horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major section of Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week.

E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration.

F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each progress meeting.

G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and under Allowances.

1.05. PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST

A. Within 10 work days after date indicated in the Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product, and appropriate Specification Section Number.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 01300-2 SUBMITTALS

B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards.

1.06. PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit five copies to Owner, three copies of which will be retained by the Owner.

B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers’ standard data to provide information unique to this Project.

C. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

D. After review and approval by Engineer, distribute in accordance with Article on Submittal Procedures (above). Provide copies for required Record Documents described in Section 01700, Contract Closeout.

1.07. SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit five opaque reproductions to Owner, three copies of which will be retained by the Owner.

B. After review and approval by Owner, distribute copies in accordance with Article on Submittal Procedures. Provide copies for required Record Documents described in Section 01700, Contract Closeout.

1.08. MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers’ printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. When specified in Section 01640, Equipment - General, submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instructions for equipment supplied for this project. Manuals shall be delivered prior to 60 percent completion point of project, and shall be prepared in accordance with Section 01640, Equipment - General.

C. Identify conflicts between manufacturers’ instructions and Contract Documents.

1.09. MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer’s certificate to Owner for review, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Indicate that material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Engineer.

D. When specified in Section 01640, Equipment – General, or individual specification sections, submit manufacturer’s performance affidavit for equipment to be furnished for this project. Affidavits shall be of format and content prescribed in Section 01640, Equipment – General, and shall be included with the shop drawing or product data submittal for the item of equipment to be furnished.


1.10. CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Take digital photographs before and during construction of physical features on private and public property which may be disturbed by Contractor’s operations:

1. Take preconstruction photographs before mobilizing or disturbing any land.

2. Camera angle, direction, and frequency will be dictated by range and nature of physical features to be recorded.

3. Take at least 10 photographs each day of work.

4. Submit prints and a CD with digital photos.

PART 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01400

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Quality assurance and control of installation.

B. References and standards.

C. Tolerances.

D. Inspection and testing services.

E. Testing by Contractor.

F. Manufacturers’ field services and reports.



B. Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS: Manufacturers’ instructions and certificates.

C. Section 01600 – MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply fully with manufacturers’ instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.

D. Should manufacturers’ instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding.

E. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

F. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

G. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.

1.04. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids, except where a specific date is established by code.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 01400-1 QUALITY CONTROL

B. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding.

1.05. TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers’ tolerances. Should manufacturers’ tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

1.06. INSPECTION AND TESTING BY LABORATORY SERVICES

A. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory, acceptable to Owner, to perform tests and inspections required by the Contract Documents.

B. Independent testing laboratory shall:

1. Perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in the individual specification sections and as required by Owner.

2. Perform inspecting, testing, and source quality control which may occur on or off project site, as required by Owner.

3. Prepare and submit reports to the Owner, in duplicate indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. Owner will forward copy of report(s) to Contractor.

C. Contractor shall:

1. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials; furnish design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested.

2. Notify Owner and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services.

3. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor’s own use.

D. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed, on instructions by the Owner, by the same independent firm which performed the initial tests and inspections.

E. Payment for retesting will be the Contractor’s cost with no change in the contract price.

1.07. TESTING BY CONTRACTOR

A. Contractor shall furnish required labor, facilities, tools, equipment, compressed air, water and electric power for tests, and:


1. Conduct hydrostatic and/or pressure tests on installed utilities, process piping, valves, and structures, in accordance with individual Sections of the Specifications.

2. Pay all costs associated with such tests.

1.08. MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

B. Report observations, site conditions, or instructions given to applicators or installers, that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers’ written instructions.

C. Submit report in duplicate within 10 work days of observation to Owner for review.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01500

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Temporary Utilities – Electricity and sanitary facilities.

B. Temporary Controls - Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, water control and Pollution Controls.

C. Construction Facilities - progress cleaning.



B. Section 01019 – CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

C. Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: Final cleaning.

1.03. TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY

A. General Contractor shall provide and pay for temporary power service required from utility source for his operations and those of subcontractors, including equipment, job trailers, etc.

B. General Contractor’s temporary power service shall not disrupt Owner’s existing pumping station while in service.

1.04. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. General Contractor shall provide and maintain required sanitary facilities and enclosures for use by all persons employed at the site. Provide at time of mobilization.

B. General Contractor shall remove facilities from site at end of construction.

C. Facilities shall be maintained in conformance with applicable State Regulations and Local ordinances. Contents shall be removed and disposed of in satisfactory manner by General Contractor as occasion requires.

D. Contractor shall enforce sanitary regulations amongst employees and take precautions against infectious diseases as deemed necessary. Isolate infected employee(s) and arrange for immediate removal of such person(s) from site.

1.05. FENCING

A. Contractor shall provide fencing as specified on the drawings around construction site; equip with vehicular gates with locks.

B. Construction - Commercial grade chain link fence as specified on the Drawings

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 8612289 01500-1 AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

1.06. PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed Work from damage and deterioration due to floods, driving rain, wind, snow storms or freezing temperatures; provide special protection where specified in individual Specification Sections.

B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage.

C. Prohibit traffic over landscaped areas.

D. Owner reserves right to order that additional protective measures be taken beyond those proposed by Contractor[s], to safeguard the Work.

1.07. SECURITY

A. Provide facilities to protect Work, including existing facilities, and Owner’s operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.

B. Coordinate security measures taken with Owner’s own security program.

1.08. PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site.

B. Store unused tools and equipment.

1.09. POLLUTION CONTROLS

A. Erosion and Sediment Control

1. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas.

2. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time.

3. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to regulate water flow and prevent soil erosion.

4. Periodically inspect earthwork in disturbed areas to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures.

B. Noise Control

1. All construction equipment and tools exhibiting potential noise nuisance shall be provided with noise muffling devices.

2. Confine use of such equipment and tools during regular working hours, between 7:30 am to 5.00 pm.

3. For more information on Noise Control, check the Charles County web documents for Noise Ordinance from the following link: http://www.charlescounty.org/webdocs/comm/boardofcommissioners/boarddocs/Nov%2018%2019%2008/Charles%20County%20Noise%20Ordinance.pdf


http://www.charlescounty.org/webdocs/comm/boardofcommissioners/boarddocs/Nov%2018%2019%2008/Charles%20County%20Noise%20Ordinance.pdf


C. Pollutants Control - Provide methods, means and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.

1.10. FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

A. No office shall be established at the site.

B. Portable storage units may be temporarily placed at site. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.11. REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS

A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, controls, materials, immediately after substantial completion.

B. Remove temporary barriers, enclosures, etc. in concert with completion of those segments of Work which no longer require such measures.

C. Remove temporary underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet.

D. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.

E. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01540

BYPASS PUMPING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The Contractor is required to furnish all materials, labor, equipment, power, maintenance, associated items, and superintendence to implement temporary bypass pumping systems as needed for the purpose of diverting wastewater flow around the work area for the time that is required in order to install the Work shown on the Contract Drawings.


A. Section 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK

B. Section 01026 – LUMP SUM ITEMS

C. Section 01039 – COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

D. Section 01300 – SUBMITTALS

E. Section 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL

F. Section 01500 – CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

1.03. SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall provide a specific detailed description of each proposed bypass pumping system at least 30 days prior to the intended full time use of any bypass pumping system.

B. The submittal shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. A written description of the plan.

2. Quantity, capacity, and location of all pumping equipment.

3. Pump performance curves.

4. The size, type and routing of all suction and discharge pipes and the means of connecting the system.

5. Description of controls and emergency power supply.

6. Certification indicating the person or persons operating the pumping system are trained to operate the system. Provide references for the person or persons manning the system. Each responsible person manning the system shall have a minimum experience of 3 pumping system operations at 3 different sites of 0.5 mgd or greater.

C. Owner shall review, but not approve the bypass pumping system submittal for compliance to performance requirements only.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 01540-1 BYPASS PUMPING SYSTEM

1.04. BYPASS PUMPING COORDINATION MEETING

A. Once the bypass pumping submittal has been reviewed by the Owner and at least 14 days prior to the intended full time use of any bypass pumping system, a coordination meeting shall be held. Participants shall include: General Contractor, Bypass Pumping System Supplier and Owner.

B. No bypass pumping shall take place until the submittal has been reviewed by the Owner and the coordination conference issues, if any, are resolved.

1.05. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. The design, installation and operation of the temporary bypass pumping system shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. The bypass system shall meet the requirements of all codes and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction, including local noise and light ordinances.

B. Charles County web documents for Noise Ordinance can be found in the following link” http://www.charlescounty.org/webdocs/comm/boardofcommissioners/boarddocs/Nov%2018%2019%2008/Charles%20County%20Noise%20Ordinance.pdf

C. Bypass pumping capacity must be provided such that the temporary bypass pumps convey 350 gpm of flow. The pumped flow is conveyed to a receiving manhole about 300 feet away on Paddington Court. A back-up pump of the same capacity as the largest temporary bypass pump in service must also be provided. In case of pump failure, the supplier shall certify that it will be capable of having a new back-up pump on-site within 2 hours of a pump failure. Adequate fuel supply for one day of operation must be on site and stored in accordance with Federal, State, County and City regulations. Contractor shall be responsible for all spills and regulatory fines due to failure of their system. In addition, one of the following two conditions must be met:

1. In the event of pump failure, the backup pump shall automatically and immediately commence with pumping.

2. If bypass pumping overnight is required overnight, the pumps shall be provided with a dialer system. The dialer system shall notify contractor and Owner of high wet well conditions.

D. The bypass pumping system shall be tested for conformance with the requirements of the specifications prior to use and in the presence of the Owner to demonstrate a state of readiness of all of the equipment and in accordance with Article 3.01.D.

E. Bypass pumping system shall be equipped with noise reduction features that limit the noise output to 65 db within 50 feet of the equipment.

1. Contractor shall measure the noise output during the demonstration phase and provide the results to the Owner.

2. Hay bales and tarping systems may be used to enclose all exterior pumps and engines.

1.06. SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS

A. If any spills of raw wastewater occur due to the failure of the Contractor to maintain the temporary pumping when needed, the Contractor shall be responsible for any fines levied on the Owner by the state, federal or any other applicable agency.




B. Jersey barriers shall be provided in all locations where bypass pumps, piping, or other accessories are located in plant roadways, driveways, or other vehicle-accessed areas.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. PUMPS

A. The pumps and drives shall be rated for continuous duty and shall be capable of pumping the specified flow range without surging, cavitation or vibration. The pump shall not overload the driver at any point on the pump operating curve. The pump shall be suitable for use with raw unscreened sewage and trash. The pump shall be a self-contained unit designed for temporary use.

B. All pumps used shall be fully automatic self-priming units that do not require the use of foot-valves or vacuum pumps in the priming system or they can be submersible pumps. The pumps shall be diesel powered.

C. Pumps that are engine driven shall be on skid bases with a centralized lifting bracket and integral fuel tank. The pump shall be direct coupled to an electric start diesel engine. Provide an integral belt driven compressor to operate the air ejector priming system.

D. Contractor shall provide the necessary start/stop and level controls for each pump.

2.02. PIPING

A. In order to prevent the accidental spillage of flows, all discharge systems must be constructed of rigid pipe with positive, leak-proof connections.

B. Pipe shall be quick connect galvanized steel or HDPE. Lay flat hose is not acceptable.

2.03. TEMPORARY PLUGS

A. Temporary plugs shall be provided, as needed, for the successful operation of the bypass pumping system.

B. Plugs shall be inflatable and constructed of specially treated industrial fabric and reinforced neoprene. Plugs shall be equipped with steel pull rings and aluminum end clamps.

C. All plugs shall be firmly attached to a stationary object at ground level by a steel cable in order to prevent loss of plug in the pipeline.

2.04. PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Pipe supports shall be provided by the supplier for all piping that is elevated above the ground.

B. Pipe support design and spacing shall be by the supplier and included in the shop drawing submittal for Engineer’s review.

C. Pipe support type and location shall be indicated in the shop drawing submittal.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Installation shall include furnishing oil, fuel, grease, lubricants, tools and spare parts that may be required to maintain the operation of the pump throughout the construction period, as recommended by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for maintaining the temporary bypass pumps and appurtenances. At the end of the construction period, the Contractor shall remove the pump and appurtenances.

B. The pumps shall be installed for temporary use only. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper operation of the complete pumping system, which includes pump, driver, controls and appropriate pipe connections, during the construction period.

C. Adequate hoisting equipment for each pump and accessories shall be maintained on the site.

D. Contractor shall ensure that the conditions defined in Article 1.05 B are met.

E. The temporary pumping system shall be placed in service a minimum of 72 hours before any work may begin and shall demonstrate continuous trouble-free operation. It shall remain operable until all components of the new structure, process, piping, etc. have been tested and approved for operation. At that point, the bypass system shall be shut off and regular operation of the structure will begin. The Bypass Pumping system shall stay intact until the new structure, process, piping, etc. demonstrates 48 hours of continuous trouble-free operation.

F. Once written permission is issued by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove all components of the temporary pumping system. The Contractor shall perform all restoration work to the satisfaction of the Owner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01564

EROSION CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Installation of sedimentation and erosion control barriers.

B. Anchoring all topsoil stockpiles with straw mulch and ringing with hay bales.

C. Protection of catch basins with haybale or silt fence rings.

D. Inspection of all erosion measures after each rainfall and at least daily during prolonged rainfall.

E. Repairing immediately any failed sedimentation and erosion control barrier.

F. Removing and disposing sediment deposits in a manner that does not result in additional erosion or pollution.

G. Removal of hay bales or silt fences after completion of construction and permanent stabilization of erosion.

H. Removal of sedimentation barriers after completion of construction.


A. Section 01026 - LUMP SUM ITEMS: Requirements applicable to lump sum prices for work of this Section.

B. Section 02222 – EXCAVATING

C. Section 02223 – BACKFILLING

D. Section 02225 - Trenching

E. Section 02228 - COMPACTION

F. Section 02980 - SITE REHABILITATION


A. Observe government policy established by United States Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA) Memorandum 78-1.

B. Observe requirements set forth by the Federal Highway Administration Task Force 25.

C. Conform all erosion and sedimentation control measures of the Maryland Department of the Environment, January 1994 standards, as amended.

D. Temporary erosion and sediment control measures shall be installed as the first step in construction and shall not be removed until permanent cover is completely established and stabilized.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 01564-1 EROSION CONTROL

PART 2 MATERIAL AND PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS

A. Hay/Straw Bales - Shall be securely tied and measure 14 inches by 18 inches by 30 inches long or greater.

B. Silt Fence

1. Propex - Silt stop, Mirafi 100X or equal meeting the physical and mechanical requirements of FHA Task Force 25 specification guide for temporary silt fence.

2. Silt fence shall be constructed using fence posts and wire fence or prefabricated units in accordance with Maryland guidelines for urban erosion and sediment control.

C. Stakes and Fasteners

1. Shall be two #3 rebar or two 2-inch by 2-inch hardwood stakes for each hay/straw bale.

2. Shall be a 2-inch by 2-inch by 48-inch hardwood post for silt fences.

D. Erosion Control Fabric - North American Green Type S75 or equal shall be used.

2.02. PRODUCTS

A. Sediment Barriers - Sediment barriers shall be hay or straw bales, stone, silt fences or other approved materials that will prevent migration of silts and sediment to receiving waters.

B. Mulch and Seeding - Mulch and seeding shall be in accordance with requirements of the 1994 Maryland Standards and Specifications for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. General drawings do not show all of the necessary control measures to prevent erosion and sedimentation.

1. The Drawings only show several techniques such as silt fence details. There are a number of control techniques discussed in this Section.

2. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to design, implement and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures which effectively prevent accelerated erosion and sedimentation.

3. The erosion and sedimentation control measures described herein are intended as a general guide for the Contractor. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide any and all work necessary to prevent erosion of soil from the construction site and to provide silt fences, hay bales or other control measures as the need arises during construction at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Earthmoving activities shall be conducted in such a manner as to prevent accelerated erosion and sedimentation.


C. All erosion and sedimentation control measures shall be inspected by the Contractor daily and immediately after periods of rainfall.

1. Repair and/or maintenance of sedimentation and erosion control measures will be made as soon as needed.

2. The Contractor will be held responsible for the implementation and maintenance of all control measures on this site.

D. Land disturbance shall be kept to a minimum.

1. Restabilization will be scheduled immediately after any disturbance.

E. Silt fences will be installed along the toe of all critical cut and fill slopes.

F. Catch basins will be protected with silt fences or hay bales throughout the construction sequence and until all disturbed areas are stabilized.

G. Erosion and sedimentation control measures will be installed prior to all construction activities.

H. Sediment removal from control structures shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

1. Sediment shall be disposed of in a manner which is consistent with overall intent of plan and which does not result in additional erosion.

I. The erosion and sedimentation control measures described herein are intended as a general guide for the Contractor.

1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide any and all work necessary to prevent erosion of soil from the construction site and to provide silt fences, hay bales or other control measures as the need arises during construction at no additional cost to the Owner.

J. Remove all sedimentation and erosion control barriers after completion of construction and permanent stabilization of erosion.

K. In the event that the Contractor utilizes borrow pits or waste areas located outside of Charles County, the location of such sites shall be designated at the time of contract award and the Contractor shall be held solely responsible for complying with the applicable laws and regulations of such other County or political jurisdiction.

L. Failure to obtain the required permit shall not be a basis for authorized delay or extra payment.

M. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all existing inlets from sediment runoff. Approved sediment control measures shall be utilized, as necessary, for all inlets in the vicinity of the proposed construction. The failure of plans to indicate required measures shall not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility. In the event sediment is carried into existing inlets, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning and restoring the entire drainage system affected at his own expense.

N. In case of repeated failures on the part of the Contractor to control erosion or siltation, the Owner reserves the right to employ outside assistance or to use his own forces to provide the necessary corrective measures. Such incurred direct costs plus project engineering cost will be charged to the Contractor and appropriate deductions made from the Contractor’s monthly invoice.


3.02. SEDIMENT BARRIERS

A. Sediment barriers shall be used at storm drain inlets; across minor swales and ditches; and at other applications where the structure is of a temporary nature and structural strength is not required.

1. Sediment barriers are temporary berms, diversions, or other barriers that are constructed to retain sediment on-site by retarding and filtering storm runoff.

B. Recommended Materials and Dimensions

1. Silt Fence

a. Synthetic fabric 48 inches wide for fencing material.

b. 2-inch by 4-inch wooden stakes at 8 to 10 feet apart for posts.

c. Height - +30 inches above ground.

3.03. MULCH

A. Used alone or in conjunction with other structural or vegetative erosion control measure, mulch is applied on any disturbed area which is subject to erosion, for protection of disturbed soil or newly reseeded areas.

3.04. VEGETATION

A. Permanent Vegetation

1. Planting of various permanent vegetative covers shall be performed on disturbed areas where the earthmoving activities have ceased. The vegetation shall reestablish ground cover for the control of surface runoff and erosion.

2. The seed bed for permanent vegetative cover shall be prepared by using lime and fertilizer.

a. If the time of the seeding occurs during a dry period, mulch shall be applied to conserve soil moisture.

3.05. SPECIAL CONDITIONS

A. Prohibited Construction Practices - Prohibited construction practices include but shall not be limited to the following:

1. Dumping of spoil material into any stream corridor, any wetlands, any surface waters or at unspecified locations, even with permission of the property owner.

2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary or capricious operation of equipment in any stream corridors, any wetlands or any surface waters.

3. Pumping of silt-laden water from trenches or other excavations into any surface waters, any stream corridors or any wetlands.

4. Damaging vegetation adjacent to or outside of the access road or the right-of-way.

5. Disposal of trees, brush and other debris in any stream corridors, any wetlands, any surface water or at unspecified locations.


6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of the stream.

7. Open burning of construction project debris.

B. Defective Devices - Any erosion and sediment control devices which become damaged, clogged or otherwise non-functional shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor, without additional compensation.

C. Adjustment

1. If the planned measures do not result in effective control of erosion and sediment runoff to the satisfaction of the regulatory agencies having jurisdiction over the project, the Contractor shall immediately adjust his program and/or institute additional measures so as to eliminate excessive erosion and sediment-runoff.

2. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Owner may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost due to any such stop orders shall be made the subject of a claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01600

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Products.

B. Transportation and handling.

C. Storage and protection.

D. Substitutions.



B. Section 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL: Product quality monitoring.

1.03. PRODUCTS

A. Products - Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse.

B. No product shall be unloaded, stored, or used at the site without approval of the shop drawing submittal by the Owner.

1.04. TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accordance with construction progress schedules. Allow time for inspection prior to installation.

B. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with work, conditions at site, and availability of personnel and handling equipment.

C. Transport Products by methods to avoid Product damage; deliver in undamaged condition in manufacturer’s unopened containers or packaging, dry, with identifying labels intact and legible.

D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling or damage. Protect sensitive equipment and finishes against impact, abrasion and other damage.

E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and Products are undamaged.

F. Provide Owner a copy of all delivery invoices.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 01600-1 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

1.05. STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive Products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures in an environment favorable to Product.

B. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports, above ground.

C. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.

D. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of Products.

E. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

F. Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

G. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure Products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

1.06. SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Owner will consider requests for Substitutes or “Or Equal” items after the Effective Date of the Owner-Contractor Agreement.

B. Substitutions may be considered when a Product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. Furnish evidence that Product is unavailable.

C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents.

D. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor:

1. Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified Product.

2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified Product.

3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.

4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent.

5. Will reimburse Owner the costs incurred by Owner for review and any subsequent redesign services by Owner, including Owner’s revisions to the Contract Documents, and Owner’s assistance in connection with review by authorities when re-approval is required, if owner determines that the item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is a substitute item.

E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or Product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.


F. Substitution Submittal Procedure

1. Submit three copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution.

2. Submit shop drawings, Product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed Product equivalence.

3. The Owner will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request.


Not used.

PART 3 PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01640

EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Performance affidavit.

B. Shop drawings.

C. Equipment design.

D. Spare parts.

E. Equipment identification.

F. Standardization of grease fittings.

G. Anchors and supports.

H. Shop tests.

I. Installation of equipment.

J. Field tests.

K. Services of manufacturer’s representative.

L. Operation and maintenance instructions.

M. Failure of equipment to perform.

N. Guarantee.

O. Schedule of Equipment Testing and Manufacturer’s Services.


A. Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS: Submittal procedures and submittal items.

B. Section 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL: Installation, testing and field services.

C. Section 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

D. Section 01650 - STARTING OF SYSTEMS: Field testing.

E. Section 11300 - PUMPING EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

F. Section 11310 – SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPING STATION

G. Section 16620 – PACKAGED ENGINE GNERATOR SYSTEMS

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 01640-1 EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

1.03. PERFORMANCE AFFIDAVITS

A. Provide performance affidavits for products listed in the Schedule of Equipment Testing and Manufacturer’s Services, included at the end of this Section, and as required in the individual technical sections.

B. Submit performance affidavits in conformance with Section 01300, Submittals.

C. By these affidavits, each manufacturer must certify to the Contractor and the Owner, jointly, that he has examined the Contract Documents and that the equipment, apparatus, process or system he offers to furnish will meet in every way the performance requirements set forth in the Contract Documents. Equipment design, manufacturing and assembly specifications are an integral part of the performance requirements.

D. Shop drawings will not be reviewed prior to receipt by the Owner of an acceptable performance affidavit.

E. The performance affidavit must be signed by an officer (vice president or higher) of the basic corporation, partnership or company manufacturing the equipment, and witnessed by a notary public.

F. The performance affidavits shall be in the following format:

Addressed to: (Contractor) and (Owner) Reference: Contract No.

(Project) Text: “(manufacturer’s name) has examined the Contract Documents and

verified that the (product) meets in every way the performance requirements and design specifications set forth in Section(s) of the Contract Documents.”

Signature: Corporate officers shall be vice president or higher (unless statement authorizing signature is attached).

Notary: Signature(s) must be notarized.

1.04. SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Provide shop drawing submittals as specified in Section 01300, Submittals.

B. Shop drawing submittals shall include all descriptive data, performance characteristics, material specifications, spare parts list, drawings, piping diagrams, wiring schematics, and shall be complete and accurate to indicate item-by-item compliance with the Contract Documents.

C. All catalog cuts, manufacturer’s specifications, drawings, and verbal descriptions shall be clearly marked to allow identification of the specific products used.

D. If the submittal deviates from the requirements of the Specifications in any way, it shall be clearly marked in the submittal with the justifying reason stated for evaluation by the Owner.

E. Electrical and control submittals shall include a verbal description of the functions, metering equipment, alarm points, alarm sequences, and any other specific features provided.

F. All electrical equipment submittals shall be in accordance with Division 16, Electrical Spe


1.05. EQUIPMENT DESIGN

A. Equipment and appurtenances shall be designed in conformity with ANSI, ASME, IEEE, NEMA and other generally accepted applicable standards.

B. Equipment and appurtenances shall be of rugged construction and of sufficient strength to withstand all stresses which may occur during fabrication, testing, transportation, installation, all conditions of operation, or as required by Specifications.

C. All bearings and moving parts shall be adequately protected by bushings or other approved means against wear, and provision shall be made for adequate lubrication by readily accessible devices.

D. Details shall be designed for appearance as well as utility. Protruding members, joints, corners, gear covers, etc., shall be finished in appearance. All exposed welds on machinery shall be ground smooth and the corners of structural shapes shall be rounded or chamfered.

E. Machinery parts shall conform within allowable tolerances to the dimensions shown on the working drawings. The corresponding parts of identical machines shall be made interchangeable.

F. All machinery and equipment shall be safeguarded in accordance with the safety codes of the ANSI and OSHA and the State Industrial Code. All rotating shafts, couplings or other moving pieces of equipment shall be provided with suitable protective guards of sheet metal or wire mesh neatly and rigidly supported. Guards shall be removable as necessary to provide access for repairs.

G. Details promoting maintenance, ease of replacing parts, and lubrication shall be a prime consideration in design.

H. Products shall be designed for corrosion resistance and shall not be constructed of materials which may prohibit ease of maintenance due to corrosion. All fasteners on areas requiring access for maintenance and lubrication shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise specified. Zinc or cadmium plated fasteners for these areas shall not be used.

1.06. SPARE PARTS

A. Provide spare parts as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Provide spare parts that are identical and interchangeable with original parts.

C. For each part (or group of small parts), provide a tag which shall carry the following information: Identity of the equipment the part is for; identity or name of the part itself; date and manufacturer’s name and identification number of the part.

1.07. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial brass or stainless steel nameplate, securely fastened in a conspicuous place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer’s name, year of manufacture, serial number and principal rating data.

1.08. ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS

A. Obtain and install all necessary guides, bearing plates, anchor and attachment bolts, working drawings for installation, templates and all other appurtenances necessary for the installation


of the equipment specified. Subcontractors furnishing equipment shall also furnish anchors and templates to the General Contractor.

B. Anchor bolts shall be of size and strength suitable for purpose intended and shall be in accordance with Section 05500, Miscellaneous Fabrications, and the individual specification sections.

C. Pipe sleeves or other means of adjusting anchor bolts shall be provided where indicated or needed. Equipment shall be leveled by first using sitting nuts on the anchor bolts and then filling the space between the equipment base and concrete pedestal with grout. Where equipment bases (i.e., pumps) are installed with grout holes, subsequent to field testing, those bases shall be totally filled with grout.

D. Provide grout as required by Section 03001.

E. Provide concrete equipment pads or 4-inch high housekeeping pads for all mechanical and electrical equipment. Coordinate with other contractors before pad placement to confirm dimensions, location and anchor requirements.

1.09. SHOP TESTS

A. Arrange shop tests of the equipment indicated in the Schedule of Equipment Testing and Manufacturer’s Services and individual equipment specification sections.

B. Arrange for the Owner to witness performance tests in the manufacturer’s shop, if required by the individual specification section.

C. Pump shop tests shall be conducted and reported in accordance with the Standards established by the Hydraulic Institute. Pump tolerances shall be within limits acceptable by these standards.

D. Demonstrate by the tests that the equipment characteristics, including any specified pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency, performance, function or other special requirements, comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents and that it will operate in the manner specified.

E. Submit certified copies of the manufacturer’s test data and interpreted results as required by Section 01300, Submittals.

1.10. INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Install all equipment strictly in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer.

B. Submit all installation instructions as required by Section 01300, Submittals.

C. Install pumps in accordance with Section 11300, Pumping Equipment - General.

D. Install equipment on the foundations as specified in this Section and at the locations and elevations shown on the Contract Drawings.

1.11. FIELD TESTS

A. Perform field tests as specified in this Section and in the individual specification sections.

B. Preliminary field tests - Furnish all labor, materials and instruments to perform all preliminary field tests of equipment. Make all changes, adjustments and replacements required to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Demonstrate that:


1. Equipment is installed in the location and orientation specified in Project Manual or shown on the Drawings.

2. Equipment is prepared for operation in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and with manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Final Acceptance Tests - Perform final tests prior to startup. Provide services of the manufacturer’s representative if required by the Schedule of Equipment Testing and Manufacturer’s Services. Furnish labor, fuel, lubricants, energy, water and all other materials, equipment and instruments necessary for all acceptance tests. Schedule final acceptance test to consist of the following checks as a minimum:

1. That the equipment is properly lubricated, adjusted and aligned.

2. That the equipment meets the specified performance requirements in every detail and performs its intended function without any unusual vibration, noise or other signs of possible malfunction.

3. Where equipment is capable of operation in more than one mode or equipment performs more than one function, each operational mode or function shall be checked for proper performance.

4. All controls, both mechanical and electrical, shall be checked individually for proper connection and operation.

1.12. SERVICE OF MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE

A. Arrange for the equipment manufacturer to furnish the services of a qualified representative. The time period for the supervision and instructions is stated in the Schedule of Equipment Testing and Manufacturer’s Services. Where no specific duration of visit is listed, the length of time shall be such to allow the equipment representative ample time to follow the requirements outlined in this Section and the individual technical section covering the particular equipment item.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for any additional time required for the manufacturer’s representative to resolve equipment installation and/or operation problems due to a lack of coordination between the supplied equipment and the Contract Documents such as, but not limited to, dimensions, electrical problems or performance.

C. Arrange for the equipment representative to visit the plant on occasions after initial start-up and during the first year of operation if required by the individual Specification Sections. The purpose of these visits shall be to review equipment operation, assist the operators in correcting operational problems and basic inspection of the equipment.

D. Installation Service - Certify installation, recommend or make adjustments and supervise field testing of equipment.

E. Instructions - Instruct the Owner’s operating personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment. A written report by the representative covering instructions given shall be sent to the Owner and Contractor.

F. Certification of Equipment Compliance - Submit written certification jointly to the Owner and the Contractor that the equipment supplied or manufactured by their organization has been installed and tested to their satisfaction, and that all final adjustments thereto have been made. Certification shall include date of final acceptance field test, as well as a listing of all persons present during tests.


1.13. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Submit operation and maintenance instructions as required by the Schedule of Equipment Testing and Manufacturer’s Services, including those instructions required by the applicable technical sections, in accordance with Section 01700, Contract Closeout.

B. Organize the instructions as follows:

All instructions shall be bound into a series of identical heavy-duty, three-ring binders. Information shall be organized by section, each section covering a specific equipment item. Section shall be listed in a Table of Contents at the front of each volume. Each section shall contain the following as a minimum:

1. Section Table of Contents.

2. Written instructions, including technical bulletins and diagrams.

3. Complete parts lists and parts diagrams for all equipment, including motors and drive units, showing manufacturer’s identification numbers for each part.

4. Copies of shop drawings, where required, to adequately describe interrelation of components within a system.

5. Complete electrical and control schematics with labeled terminations.

6. List of special tools required for operation and maintenance.

7. List of spare parts supplied with the equipment, identified by manufacturer’s part numbers.

8. Source of replacement parts and address and telephone number of the manufacturer’s service representative.

Separate sections shall be clearly marked with dividers. Folded drawings or small items shall be provided in heavy-duty, three-ring plastic pockets. Information not applicable to a specific piece of equipment installed on this project shall be removed from or crossed off on the submission. At the end of each section, the Contractor shall include a detailed maintenance and lubrication schedule for equipment covered in the section. Schedule shall include the following, as a minimum, for each equipment item:

a. List and frequency of maintenance activities, other than lubrication.

b. Lubrication frequency and application points.

c. Lubricant type (weight or grade and recommended manufacturers) and method of application.

Motors and drive units furnished as part of the equipment shall be included in the schedule. Schedule forms will be provided by the Engineer.

1.14. LUBRICATION

A. Retain the services of a qualified lubrication specialist, acceptable to the Owner, to review the lubrication and maintenance instructions and schedules provided by the various equipment


manufacturers. The lubrication specialist shall represent a major oil company and shall have an office within a 40-mile radius of the project site.

B. Arrange for the lubrication specialist to prepare revised lubrication schedules for all equipment utilizing lubricants from as few companies as possible (preferably single source).

C. Include revised lubrication schedule(s) in the Operation and Maintenance Instructions.

1.15. FAILURE OF EQUIPMENT TO PERFORM

A. Promptly correct by replacement or otherwise any defects in the equipment, or failure to meet the guarantees or performance requirements.

B. If Contractor fails to make these correction, or if the improved equipment again fails to meet the guarantees or specified requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding his having made partial payment for work and materials which have entered into the manufacture of said equipment, may reject said equipment and order the Contractor to remove it from the premises at the Contractor’s expense.

1.16. GUARANTEE

A. Provide equipment guarantees in accordance with Article 13 of the General Conditions. Guarantee requirements may be added to or modified in the individual Specification Sections.

B. By supplying a product under the contract, the manufacturer and Contractor jointly agree that all manufacturer’s warranties, expressed or implied, pass through the Contractor to Owner. This warranty obligation starts on the date of the substantial completion and survives any inspection by, delivery to, acceptance by or payment by the Owner or Contractor for the goods furnished by the manufacturer. Further, this warrants that the equipment designed, manufactured and/or used meets all applicable federal, state and local laws, rules and regulations, including applicable OSHA standards. This requirement does not change or limit the requirements for performance affidavits described in Article 1.03.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

(continued)


SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT TESTING AND MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

SERVICES OF MFG. REP.

EQUIPMENT ITEM

SECTION

PERFOR- MANCE

AFFIDAVIT

SHOP TESTS

FIELD TESTS

INSTALLATION

VISITS

FINAL

ACCEPTANCE VISITS

TRAINING VISITS

Submersible Chopper Pumps 11310 Y Y Y 1 1 1 Packaged Engine Generator System

16620 Y Y Y 1 1 1

Flow Meter 16900 N N Y ½ ½ ½

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01650

STARTING OF SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Starting systems.

B. Demonstration and instructions.

C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.


A. Section 01019 - CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

B. Section 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL: Manufacturers’ field reports.

C. Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials.

D. Section 11310 – SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPING STATION

E. Section 16620 – PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS

F. Section 16900 – INSTRUMENTATION - GENERAL

G. Section 16990 – CONTROL PANELS

1.03. EQUIPMENT STARTUP

A. Coordinate schedule start-up of various equipment and systems with Owner.

B. Notify Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.

C. Prior to startup, the Contractor shall have completed the following:

1. Verification that final acceptance tests have been performed.

2. Certification of equipment compliance as required under Section 01640, Equipment - General.

3. Verification that all required lubrication equipment and materials are provided.

4. Verification that all piping and valves have been labeled, as indicated in the specifications.

5. Verification that all indicating and annunciating systems are installed and fully functional.

6. Verification all equipment O&M manuals have been provided to the Owner.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 01650-1 STARTING OF SYSTEMS

7. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage.

8. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

9. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

D. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer’s representative in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.

E. When specified in individual Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

F. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400, Quality Control, that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

G. All major equipment (as listed in Section 01640, Equipment - General) provided under this Contract shall be tested to demonstrate compliance with the specifications prior to decommissioning the existing pumping station. Any repairs, replacement of parts, adjustments or other corrections, including vendor field services required when conducting the testing of the equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Should the equipment fail to meet the performance specifications, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor with the vendor to correct the problem.

1.04. DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner’s personnel two weeks prior to date of startup of the system which shall be considered Substantial Completion for the Project.

B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner’s personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

C. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location.

D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

E. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that specified in Section 01640, Equipment - General.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.


PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01700

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Closeout procedures.

B. Final cleaning.

C. Adjusting.

D. Project record documents.

E. Operation and maintenance data.

F. Warranties and bonds.

G. Spare parts and maintenance materials.



B. B. Section 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK

C. Section 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS: Removal of Utilities, Facilities & Controls.

D. Section 01650 - STARTING OF SYSTEMS: System startup, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

1.03. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Owner’s inspection.

B. Correct or replace defective work.

C. Provide submittals to Owner that are required by governing or other authorities and Contract Documents.

Before the Certificate of Substantial Completion is issued, submit to the Owner the following:

1. Test results of project components.

2. Performance affidavits for equipment.

3. Certification of equipment or materials in compliance with Contract Documents.

D. Conform to procedures established by Engineer, in concert with requirements of General conditions and Supplementary Conditions, for final payment application, certificate of

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 01700-1 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

substantial completion, final inspection, release of liens, and other related documentations or conditions required by Contract Documents.

1.04. FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.

B. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, sheds, tools and construction facilities from the site.

1.05. ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

1.06. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:

1. Contract Drawings.

2. Specifications.

3. Addenda.

4. Change orders and other modifications to the contract.

5. Approved shop drawings, product data.

B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction.

C. Record information concurrent with construction progress; make available for periodic examination by Owner.

D. Ensure that entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.

E. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings - Legibly mark in red ink or pencil to show all changes in, or directly associated with, the work of this contract. Keep entire set of drawings current on day-to-day basis. Examples of types of changes which could occur and are to be recorded:

1. Change in location or elevation of structures.

2. Change in dimensions of structures.

3. Elimination of structures.

4. Unforeseen modifications to existing structures made necessary by work requirements.

5. Relocation of equipment.

6. Additions to or expansion of structures.

7. Changes in mechanical trades components.


8. Measured location of internal utilities or mechanical trade items, which are to be concealed from view, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure.

9. Change in location or elevations of underground utilities installed under this Contract.

10. Change in materials, such as pipe materials.

11. Relocation of existing underground utilities made necessary because of interference with work under this contract.

12. Change in topographical contours of finished earth and paved surfaces.

13. Change in elevations of finished surfaces along route of installed underground utilities (sewer, water).

F. Affix Contractor’s identification stamp, together with the label “Record Documents,” as follows:

1. On each Contract Drawing, just above the Engineer’s title block.

2. On each shop drawing, just above the preparer’s title block.

3. On the front cover or front page of all other documents.

G. Submit documents to Owner with final Application for Payment.

1.07. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals in paper and Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF).

B. Submit three sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch text pages, three D-side ring capacity expansion binders with durable plastic covers. When multiple volumes are necessary, they should be numbered (e.g. Volume I of III)

C. Prepare binder covers with printed title “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS,” title of project.

D. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

E. Contents - Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, type on pound white paper.

F. Part 1 – Project number, Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, and major equipment suppliers. Provide equipment type and serial number.

G. Part 2 - Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:

1. Significant design criteria.

2. List of equipment.

3. Parts list for each component.


4. Operating instructions.

5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.

6. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

7. List of spare parts, lubricants and other items delivered to Owner.

8. Performance curves

9. Troubleshooting guidelines

10. Assembling and disassembling diagrams and instructions

H. Part 3 - Project documents and certificates, including the following:

Shop drawings and product data. Wiring diagrams Air and water balance reports. Certificates. Testing results Photocopies of warranties. Completed Equipment File Maintenance Forms (forms to be provided by the Owner)

I. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be returned after final inspection with Owner comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal.

J. Submit final volumes revised, within 10 days after final inspection.

K. Provide folded drawings in a reinforced pocket.

L. Contractor shall provide three copies of the manual for review and comment when the project is 50 percent complete.

M. Contractor shall submit final draft manual when project is 80 percent complete.

N. Contractor shall submit 10 copies of the final manual prior to the final acceptance inspection.

O. Contractor shall provide a complete electronic copy of the final operation and maintenance manuals, bookmarked per Table of Contents for each equipment manual, as well as to include a bookmark for each section of the manual to serve as an overall Table of Contents. The electronic product literature shall be searchable PDF documents that are provided by the manufacturer and not a text conversion of a raster image.

1.08. WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Provide duplicate notarized copies of certifications for those items with extended transferable warranties beyond one year. Prepare separate submittal for each item.

B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.

C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic cover.

D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.


E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

1.09. SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections.

B. Deliver to project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02030

DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Demolition and removal of site-related construction.

B. Demolition and removal of process equipment and piping.

C. Demolition and removal of electrical construction.


A. Section 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK: Work sequence and Owner’s continued occupancy.

B. Section 01039 - COORDINATION AND MEETINGS: Cutting and patching.

C. Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS

D. Section 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS: security at Owner-occupied areas and cleanup during demolition operations.

E. Section 01600 – MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

F. Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: Project record documents.

G. Section 02223 - BACKFILLING: Fill material.

H. Section 02228 - COMPACTION

1.03. PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS AND PHOTOGRAPHS

A. A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700, Contract Closeout.

B. Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, and subsurface obstructions.

C. Contractor to take digital photographs of those items designated by Owner, prior to their scheduled demolition, removal, or relocation.

1. Produce and submit photographs in accordance with requirements of Section 01300, Submittals.

2. Allowance for number of acceptable photographs is included in the allowance stated for construction photographs under Section 01300, Submittals. Unacceptable photographs will not be charged against the allowance total.

1.04. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable codes for demolition of structures, protection of adjacent structures, dust control, runoff control, and disposal of materials.

B. Obtain required permits from authorities.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02030-1 DEMOLITION

C. Notify affected utility companies before starting demolition operations and comply with their requirements.

D. Do not close or obstruct roadways without required permits.

E. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures if a hazardous environmental condition is encountered at site or if hazardous material disposal is required.

1.05. HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. If an unknown unforeseeable hazardous environmental condition is encountered at the site, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a hazardous environmental condition, immediately:

1. Secure or otherwise isolate such condition;

2. Stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby; and

3. Notify Owner and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing.

B. Resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area only after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to Contractor a written notice specifying under what special conditions Work may be resumed safely.

1.06. SEQUENCING

A. Sequence demolition work to conform with provisions of Section 01010, Summary of Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. PREPARATION

A. Thirty days prior to performing any demolition, there shall be a coordination meeting between the Contractor and Owner to discuss the Contractor’s Demolition Plan and related procedures. Items to be discussed shall be, but not limited to, dust control, sequence of work, removal of material, protection of existing equipment, access and egress of material, etc. Demolition procedures must be coordinated with the Owner’s operating personnel and operations, and adjusted accordingly, if necessary.

B. Following the coordination meeting, begin demolition operations after obtaining written authorization to proceed from the Owner.

C. Notify Owner at least 48 hours in advance of intended start of demolition operations in each affected area.

D. Protect existing structures, equipment, appurtenances, and materials which are not to be demolished. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.

E. Protect existing site-related items which are not to be demolished.

F. Protect existing electrical; including related components, which are not to be demolished.


G. Mark location of underground utilities.

3.02. DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS

A. Confine demolition operations within the contract limits.

B. The new pumping station associated controls and generator shall have been tested and accepted by the Owner prior to commencing demolition of the existing pumping station.

C. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify Owner. Do not resume operations until directed.

D. Dispose of designated hazardous materials in accordance with the nature of the material, required handling and disposal procedures, regulatory requirements, and applicable permits.

3.03. DEMOLITION

A. Break up and remove concrete structures, including walls, cover slabs, etc. as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Backfill, compact, and rough grade areas excavated, including cavities created by removal of demolished items, in accordance with Sections 02223, Backfilling and 02228, Compaction.

C. Disconnect, cap, and identify utilities within demolition areas.

D. Disconnect and remove designated process piping systems, including valves and fittings as indicated on the Drawings.

E. Carefully disconnect support, protect, and remove designated equipment to be salvaged for Owner’s future use.

F. All removed materials and equipment salvaged for Owner’s future use shall be stored at location directed by the Owner.

G. Remove and dispose of demolished materials as work progresses. Do not burn or bury materials.

H. Remove and dispose of residual materials such as grit, sludge, debris, trash, and other scrap.

I. Upon completion of demolition operations, leave areas in a clean condition.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02141

REMOVAL OF WATER

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Providing equipment, materials and labor required to successfully complete the work included in this Section.

B. Maintaining and operating pumps and related equipment, including standby equipment, of sufficient capacity to adequately perform dewatering as required by this Section.

C. Lowering the groundwater table elevation.

D. Intercepting seepage from excavation slopes.

E. Controlling groundwater flow that may adversely affect excavation or construction activities.

F. Collecting, removing and disposing of all excess groundwater.

G. Collecting, removing, and disposing of all wastewater.

H. Removing and/or disposing of spoil, excess materials, equipment, trash and debris used for or resulting from the work included in this Section.


A. Section 01026 - LUMP SUM ITEMS: Requirements applicable to Lump Sum Prices for the Works of this Section.

B. Section 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

C. Section 01564 - EROSION CONTROL

D. Section 02222 - EXCAVATING

E. Section 02225 - TRENCHING


A. Conform to applicable local, state and federal codes for legal disposal of water.

B. Temporary water supplies shall meet requirements of local, state and federal regulatory agencies.

C. Conform to applicable OSHA standards.

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall at the preconstruction meeting or a minimum of 14 days prior to installation of the dewatering system, submit to the Owner a letter report, including working drawings and design data that is required to detail any or all of the following:

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02141-1 REMOVAL OF WATER

1. The proposed type of dewatering system, including relief of hydrostatic head and maintenance of excavation in a dewatered and in a hydrostatically relieved condition;

2. Arrangement, location, and depths of the components of the system;

3. A complete description of equipment to be used, with installation, operation, and maintenance procedures;

4. Standby equipment and power supply;

5. Location and size of berms, dikes, sumps, and discharge lines, including the relation to water disposal ditches.

6. Types of size of filters; and

7. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of the selected system and equipment.

1.05. WELLPOINT DEWATERING SYSTEM

A. If wellpoint dewatering methods are proposed by Contractor, he shall prepare a plan of dewatering system and discuss plan with Owner. Review or comments by Owner concerning the proposed plan shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibilities for dewatering his excavations in conformance with this Section of the Specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. PREPARATION

A. Review the subsurface investigation report and become familiar with the groundwater conditions at the site. Allocate sufficient time and use appropriate procedures based on these conditions for dewatering excavations.

B. Arrange for water sampling and analysis of each water supply source which may be affected by dewatering operations and submit a copy of the results to the Owner.

C. Examine adjacent structures and utilities, both existing and under construction, for possible settlement, movement or other adverse effects resulting from dewatering methods or water removal. Take necessary precautionary steps to protect such structures and utilities.

D. Should the drawdown of groundwater levels by removal or dewatering systems critically reduce or disrupt public or private water supplies, the Contractor shall be prepared to:

1. Provide adequate potable water to the Owners or users of the affected water supplies until groundwater levels have recovered, so as to sufficiently restore those deficient water supplies.

2. Provide to the Owner documentation to confirm that temporary water supplies meet the requirements of Local, State and Federal Regulatory Agencies.


3.02. REMOVAL OF WATER

A. Assume responsibility for site, surface and subsurface drainage. Maintain such drainage as specified herein during the life of the contract.

B. Supply all supervision, labor, material, equipment, including standby equipment, necessary to maintain a dry excavation as may be necessary to construct the project.

C. Maintain groundwater in or below the bearing strata at a safe level at all times by methods which prevent loss of fines, which preserves the undisturbed state of subgrade soils and which sufficiently lowers the groundwater level in permeable strata at or below excavation and fill levels such that blowing or unstable conditions do not develop in the bottom or sides of excavation or fill areas.

D. Protect all adjacent structures, existing and under construction, from settlement, flotation, damage or other adverse effects resulting from water removal or dewatering methods.

E. Install all drains, ditching, sluiceways, pumping and bailing equipment, wicking, sumps, wells, well points, cutoff trenches, curtains, sheeting and all other equipment and structures necessary to create and maintain a dry excavation and a groundwater level at a minimum of 2 feet below excavation subgrades.

1. As part of any dewatering system, observation wells or piezometers shall be provided and installed, as required, to effectively and efficiently monitor drawdown to required levels.

2. If observation wells are used, they shall be placed both perpendicularly and longitudinally along the excavation to demonstrate the effectiveness of the dewatering system and its impact on the surrounding unexcavated areas.

F. Discharge water removed from the site to natural water courses, storm drains or channels.

1. Large quantities of water shall not be discharged as overland flow. Overland flow is not permitted onto private property.

2. No unpolluted water shall be discharged to sanitary sewers.

3. Wastewater shall be disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the local Public Health Officer.

4. Assure that after 12 hours of initial pumping, no soil particles will be present in the discharge.

G. Dewatering operations shall cease when all foundations, structures, pipe installations and other excavated areas have been properly backfilled and compacted, and are safe from damage, flotation, settlement and displacement.

3.03 MAINTENANCE

H. Operate and maintain dewatering and removal operations on a 24-hour basis for the time required to complete that portion of the Work which requires dewatering prior to its construction and which requires protection from flotation or displacement of such Work until proper backfilling and compaction is completed.


3.03. REMOVAL

A. After groundwater levels have returned to elevations appropriate for conditions and time of year, without causing damage to the work, remove all dewatering equipment and related equipment from the site and restore site to original conditions or rehabilitate site to meet requirements of Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02161

SHEETING AND BRACING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Sheeting and bracing installation, removal, and left in place.

B. Design requirements.

C. Regulatory codes and requirements.

D. Materials.


A. Section 01026 - LUMP SUM ITEMS: Requirements applicable to lump sum prices for the work of this Section.


C. Section 02141 - REMOVAL OF WATER

D. Section 02205 – PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

E. Section 02222 - EXCAVATING

F. Section 02223 - BACKFILLING

G. Section 02225 - TRENCHING



A. All work shall comply with Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 26, Subpart P (and other applicable sections) of Occupational Safety and Health Regulations for Construction and the requirement of MOSHA, Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Regulations for Construction.

1.04. REFERENCES

A. ASTM A6/A6M - General Requirements.

B. ASTM A328 - Steel Sheet Piles.

C. NFPA - National Forest Products Association.

1.05. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor shall use sheeting where required to complete the Work.

B. All sheeting required to complete the Work shall be included in the Contractor’s lump sum bid price.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02161-1 SHEETING AND BRACING

C. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to select materials, methods, and equipment, to design an excavation support system which will:

1. Support earth pressures, utility loads, equipment, applicable traffic and construction loads, and other surcharge loads in such manner as will allow the safe and expeditious construction of the permanent facilities without movement or settlement of the ground and will prevent damage to or movement of adjacent existing facilities, utilities, and other miscellaneous items such as roads, trees, etc.

2. Support the maximum loads that can occur during construction. For the purpose of this section, the design load means the maximum load the support member will have to carry in actual practice, and the proof load means a specified test load greater than the design load.

3. Carry bottom of support system to a depth below the main excavation adequate to prevent lateral and vertical movement. Where additional excavation is carried below the main excavation, provide means to prevent movement of the main excavation supports.

4. Allow the required open excavated space.

5. Allow for staged removal to conform to construction and backfill sequence.

6. Provide diagonal bracing where needed for stability of the system. Arrange wales, struts, posts, and braces in such manner as will minimize interference with compaction of the backfill.

1.06. SUBMITTALS

A. None.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS

A. Wood - Tongue and groove, #3 Common Douglas Fir or Hemlock or Utility grade Southern Pine; NFPA grading or equal, meeting the requirements of the NFPA.

B. Steel Sheet Piling shall be continuous interlocking type, ASTM A-328, Z-sheet piling, provided with at least one 2-1/2 inch diameter handling hole on the centerline of the web located at least 6 inches from each of the sheet pile.

C. Trench Boxes shall be fabricated either from steel or aluminum.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. PROTECTION

A. When required to comply with local, state, or federal (OSHA) regulations, or when sloped excavations are not feasible, not possible or allowed or if excavations endanger adjacent facilities, sheeting and bracing shall be installed by the Contractor.


3.02. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. All sheeting and bracing shall be designed and monitored by a professional engineer, retained by the Contractor. This engineer shall be licensed in the state of Maryland.

B. Design shall include all loading conditions to which the sheeting and bracing will be subjected during construction.

C. Design sheeting and bracing systems against failure from the maximum loads that will occur during construction, including surcharge loads and additional loading due to construction equipment.

D. Design sheeting and bracing systems to enable safe construction of structures, utilities and appurtenances, and prevent excessive ground loss, displacement of adjacent foundations, and displacement of the bottom of the excavation.

3.03. INSTALLATION

A. Provide all materials, equipment and labor necessary to construct and maintain all required excavation support systems as determined by the Contractor.

B. Sheeting and bracing support systems shall include, but shall not be limited to, wall support such as wood sheeting, ringwales, lagging, soldier piles, steel sheeting, trench boxes and bracing members such as stringers, wales, struts, rakers, shores, tieback anchors, etc. necessary to prevent damage to the work and for the safety of workers, the general public or adjacent property.

C. Steel sheeting shall be driven in plumb position with each pile interlocked with adjoining piles for its entire length so as to form a continuous diaphragm throughout the length of each run of wall, bearing tightly against original ground. Drive to depth as determined by Contractor’s design or to a firm seat against or into bedrock.

D. No excavation shall be performed below a line drawn down and away at a slope of two horizontal and one vertical from the nearest footing or grade beam of any existing structure or without providing sheeting, shoring and bracing to provide lateral support for soils beneath the foundations and to prevent damage.

E. Do not brace to concrete without written approval of the Owner.

F. Install sheeting and bracing systems in a logical sequence as excavation operations are performed.

1. If a prefabricated mobile shield is used, the bottom of the shield shall be maintained as high as possible (preferably above the spring line of the pipe, maximum 2 feet) to prevent disturbance of the bedding material and tension forces on pipe joints.

2. Openings or troughs created by the use of a shield shall be filled and compacted in accordance with Sections 02223, Backfilling; 02225, Trenching; and 02228, Compaction.

3.04. MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain sheeting and bracing systems as functional on a 24-hour basis.

B. Provide a means of determining movement of excavation walls, and adjacent soil, and structures and utilities.


1. If movement or damage occurs, immediately cease all construction activities, install measures to prevent further movement or damage and notify the Owner.

2. Movement or damage due to failure of sheeting and bracing systems shall be permanently repaired as soon as possible, at no cost to the Owner and at no additional cost for time.

3.05. REMOVAL

A. Remove sheeting and bracing as the work progresses in a manner which shall prevent damage to finished work, adjacent structures and property.

1. All voids created by removal of sheeting and bracing shall be filled and compacted in accordance to the guidelines of Sections 02223, Backfilling; 02225, Trenching; and 02228, Compaction.

B. If the Contractor elects to leave Sheeting in place, it shall be new and unused material. Where approved, sheeting shall be cut off at a minimum of 2-1/2-feet below proposed final grade.

1. Contractor may elect to leave sheeting and bracing in place (cut off as described above) if he elects to do so at his own expense and with Owner’s approval.

2. Provide to the Owner a drawing of cut-off sheeting locations. Drawing should show site plan with dimensioned locations of sheeting, type of material remaining, and depths or elevations to top and bottom of remaining sheet.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02205

PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Location of facilities.

B. Notification of owners and authorities.

C. Coordination and preparation.

D. Protection of facilities.

E. Relocation of facilities.

F. Protection of sewers and storm drains.

G. Protection of water mains near sewers.

H. Abandonment of utilities.

I. Restoration of property markers.



B. Section 01039 - COORDINATION AND MEETINGS: Pre-Construction Meeting.

C. Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS: Construction Photographs.

D. Section 02161 – SHEETING AND BRACING

E. Section 02223 - EXCAVATING

F. Section 02225 - TRENCHING

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. LOCATION OF FACILITIES

A. Prior to construction, verify location of existing underground facilities near or adjacent to project.

1. Consult with appropriate Underground Facilities Protection Organization (UFPO) and arrange for field stake-out or other markings to show locations.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02205-1 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

2. Perform exploratory excavation at key junctures and other critical points to aid in ascertaining locations.

B. Report field stake-out findings and results of exploratory excavations to Owner if possible changes in project location or design are indicated because of suspected interferences with existing facilities. Allow Owner sufficient time to determine magnitude of changes and to formulate instructions in that regard.

C. If location of an existing underground facility is uncertain, apply careful excavation and probing techniques during construction to locate and avoid damage to same.

D. The site plan provided in the Contract Drawings is based on a field survey and the original as-built drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing exploratory excavations to locate the existing utilities shown on the site plan.

3.02. NOTIFICATIONS OF OWNERS AND AUTHORITIES

A. Prior to construction, notify owners of existing facilities, including local Police and Fire Departments, of general scope, nature and planned progress schedule of the Work.

B. Notify owners of nearby underground facilities when excavating or blasting is to take place in a particular area, allowing them reasonable time to institute precautionary procedures or preventive measures which they deem necessary for protection of their facilities.

C. When existing utilities, such as sewer, water, gas, telephone or electric power are damaged or disturbed during construction, immediately notify affected Owner and Project Owner.

D. Notify Police and Fire Departments, including affected owners, immediately if hazardous conditions are created or have the potential for occurring, as a result of damage to an existing facility or as a result of other activities at project site. Hazardous conditions could be created from: fire, explosion, escape of gas, escape of fuel oil, gasoline or industrial fluids, downed electrical wires, and disrupted underground electrical cables.

3.03. COORDINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Discuss anticipated work schedule with local authorities and owners of utilities at preconstruction meeting, including procedures to be followed if one or more utilities are damaged or disrupted. Develop contingency plans to address Contractor’s role in repair of damaged utilities.

B. Make preparations beforehand to repair and restore damaged utilities, including arrangements for standby materials and equipment to be promptly assembled at site and utilized immediately.

C. Adjust work schedules and personnel assignments as necessary to conform with requirements of utility owner whose utility is to be temporarily interrupted during construction. Cooperate with utility owner in this regard to minimize the time of interruption.

3.04. PROTECTION OF FACILITIES

A. Plan and conduct construction operations so that operation of existing facilities near or adjacent to the Work, including electric, telephone, sewer, water, gas or drainage utilities, are sustained insofar as the requirements of the project will permit.

B. Protect existing facilities from damage or movement through installation of adequate support systems and use of proper equipment, including application of careful excavation and backfilling techniques in sensitive areas.


C. Existing utilities and other facilities which are damaged by the Contractor’s construction operations shall be promptly repaired by Contractor to the satisfaction of the affected owner or, if he so elects, that owner will perform the repairs with his own forces. Under either arrangement, such repair work shall be done at Contractor's expense.

D. When aboveground visible facilities such as poles, wires, cables, fences, signs or structures constitute an unavoidable interference, notify Owner and consult with affected owner regarding temporary removal and later restoration of the interfering item. Arrange with that owner to remove and later restore the interfering item to the satisfaction of the owner, subject to approval of the project Owner; or, allow affected owner to perform such work with his own forces. Under either arrangement, such work shall be done at Contractor’s expense.

E. Take all necessary precautions to prevent fires at or adjacent to the work, buildings, and other facilities. No burning of trash or debris is permitted. If permanent fire extinguishers are used, they shall be recharged and in “new” condition when turned over to Owner.

3.05. RELOCATION OF FACILITIES

A. If the location or position of an existing gas or water pipe, public or private sewer or drain, conduit or structure be such as, in the opinion of Owner, to require its removal, realignment or change, such alteration shall be without cost to the Contractor for the work of removal, realignment or change only.

B. Uncovering, supporting and sustaining such facility before its removal or before and after its realignment or change, shall be the Contractor’s responsibility as part of the work of his Contract.

C. Contractor shall be entitled to extension of time for completion of entire Work as the Owner determines that the entire Work was delayed by the removal, realignment or change of such obstruction.

3.06. PROTECTION OF SEWERS AND STORM DRAINS

A. Where existing sanitary sewers or storm drain systems are being replaced or interrupted, provide temporary bypass pumping or piping to maintain flow around that segment of the Work such that no back-ups occur in existing systems.

B. Existing sanitary sewer laterals damaged in the work or temporarily disconnected shall be restored to operation by the end of each work day. Existing sanitary sewer laterals crossing over new pipelines to be restored in accordance with details shown on the Drawings.

C. Maintain existing manholes, catch basins, and other utility structures in their pre-work condition. Any material or debris entering same due to the Contractor’s operation shall be promptly removed.

3.07. PROTECTION OF WATER MAINS NEAR SEWERS

A. Where a minimum 10-foot horizontal separation or minimum 18-inch vertical separation (bottom of water pipe to top of sewer pipe) cannot be maintained between a water main and sewer line, one or more of the following remedies shall be incorporated in the work:

1. The sewer lines shall be encased in Mix “C” concrete for a length of 10 feet on either side of the water main.

2. Both the water main and sewer line shall be constructed of pressure type joints of ductile iron pipe, and shall be pressure tested to 100 psi to assure watertightness.


3. One full length of water main shall be centered over the sewer line, so that both joints will be as far from the sewer as possible.

4. Relocate water main to obtain 18-inches minimum vertical separation.

3.08. ABANDONMENT OF UTILITIES

A. Remove existing utilities to be abandoned within limits of trench excavation, or impinging on trench limits.

B. Open ends of abandoned utilities, or those scheduled for abandonment, shall be bulkheaded by brick masonry or Mix “C” concrete; or by cast iron plugs or caps in small diameter water mains.

C. Abandoned manholes and water valve casings shall be backfilled to grade with approved trench backfill material.

D. Frames, covers, grates, water valve casing, sections of water piping, hydrants (including standpipe and boot) valves and other items to be abandoned shall, if ordered by Owner, be salvaged for re-use and be delivered to Owner’s property yard.

3.09. RESTORATION OF PROPERTY MARKERS

A. Property corner markers, boundary monuments, etc., disturbed or moved by the Contractor’s operation shall be restored, in conformance with the property deed description, by a licensed land surveyor. Restoration of the property corner markers or boundary monuments shall be certified by said surveyor on a map prepared by him which shows the work accomplished. One copy of the map shall be given to the property owner and one copy given to the project Owner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02222

EXCAVATING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Excavation for site structures


A. Section 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL: Inspection of bearing surfaces.

B. Section 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS: Barriers, water controls, erosion and sediment controls.

C. Section 01564 – EROSION CONTROL

D. Section 02161 – SHEETING AND BRACING

E. Section 02205 - PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

F. Section 02223 - BACKFILLING


1.03. FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

B. Identify known underground, above ground, and aerial utilities. Stake and flag locations.

C. Notify utility company to remove and/or relocate utilities.

D. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.

E. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.

F. Protect benchmarks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic.

G. Excavations shall be in complete accordance with all details of applicable codes, rules, and regulations including all local, state, and federal regulations including the Occupational Safety

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02222-1 EXCAVATING

and Health Administration (OSHA) Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations Part 1926, Subpart P - Excavations and Trenching Standards. Contractor shall designate a “Competent Person” 29 CFR 1926.32(f) who shall be responsible for inspections of excavations on a daily basis and document and maintain daily trenching and excavation logs per OSHA 29 CFR 1926.

3.02. CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

A. Classifications of excavated materials are as follows:

1. Unclassified Excavation - “Unclassified excavation” shall include all material excavated within the authorized lines and grades prescribed in the Drawings. Unclassified excavation shall include “rock excavation” as well as “common excavation” as defined herein.

2. Common Excavation - “Common excavation” shall include all excavation except “rock excavation.” All unconsolidated and non-indurated material, rippable rock, loose rock, soft mineral matter, weathered rock or saprolite, and soft or friable shale which is removable with normal earth excavation equipment shall be considered “common excavation.” All boulders and detached pieces of solid rock or concrete or masonry less than 1 cubic yard in volume shall be classified as “common excavation.”

3. Rock Excavation - “Rock excavation” shall include all sound solid masses, layers and ledges of consolidated and indurated rock or mineral matter of such hardness, durability and/or texture that it is not rippable or cannot be excavated with normal earth excavation equipment. Should a conflict arise as to the classification of excavation as either “common” or “rock,” the following test shall be used in the appropriate determination:

a. Where practicable, a late model tractor mounted hydraulic ripper equipped with a one digging point of standard manufacturer’s design adequately sized for use with and propelled by a crawler-type tractor rated between 210 and 240 net fly-wheel horsepower, operating in low gear, shall be utilized. Should the suspect material not be effectively loosened or broken down by ripping in a single pass with the aforementioned ripper, the material shall be classified as “rock.”

b. In situations where interbedded strata of “common excavation” material and “rock excavation” material are encountered in the same excavation, the individual classification of those materials shall be made on an average percentage basis of the occurrence of those materials as measured in stratigraphic sections and as approved by the Owner.

c. When rock is encountered in excavations, it shall be removed by blasting methods, jackhammering or any other method suitable and safe considering the proximity of existing utilities or facilities.

4. For this project all excavated material shall be classified as either Unclassified Excavation or Common Excavation.

3.03. EXCAVATING

A. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work, including utilities and pipe chases.

B. Excavate subsoil required to accommodate site structures, construction operations, and utilities.


C. Machine-slope banks to angle of repose or less, until shored.

D. Excavation cut not to interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of foundation. Undercutting of excavation faces will not be permitted.

E. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.

F. Hand trim excavation to required undisturbed subgrade. Remove loose matter.

G. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock under 1 cubic yard, measured by volume. Refill voids with Mix “C” concrete or compacted gravel/crushed stone.

H. Notify Owner of unexpected subsurface conditions, or of questionable soils encountered at required subgrade elevations, and discontinue work in area until notified to resume operations.

I. Should the Contractor, through negligence or otherwise carry his excavation below the designated subgrade, Mix ”C” concrete or such other materials as may be approved by the Owner, shall be furnished and placed as backfill in sufficient quantities to reestablish the designated subgrade surface. Granular material used for backfilling shall be spread and compacted in conformance with the requirements of Section 02223, Backfilling, and to the percentage compaction outlined therein. The cost of this refilling operation, including any tests associated therewith, shall be borne by Contractor.

J. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on-site and remove excess material not being reused, from site.

3.04. DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL

A. All excavated material except reusable topsoil or reusable fill shall be classified as surplus material and disposed of off-site unless Owner designates an on-site location.

B. On-site disposal of surplus material will be allowed only at locations designated by Owner and approved by Owner. Reuse of excavated material as on-site fill shall conform with Section 02223, Backfilling.

C. Make all arrangements for disposal sites, unless the Owner designates special locations. All expenses for disposal shall be borne by the Contractor. Bidders shall carefully investigate all aspects of surplus material disposing operations.

D. Prior to depositing surplus material at any off-site location, obtain a written agreement between Contractor and the owner of the property on which the disposal of the material is proposed. The agreement shall state that the owner of the property gives permission for the Contractor to enter and deposit material of a particular classification on the owner’s property at no expense to the project Owner, and shall include any other conditions pertinent to the situation as agreed upon by each party. A copy of said agreement shall be furnished to the Owner.

3.05. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400, Quality Control.

B. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces.


3.06. PROTECTION

A. Protect excavations by methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation.

B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation, from freezing.

C. Exposed subgrade surfaces shall remain undisturbed, drained, and maintained as uniform, plane areas, shaped to receive the foundation components of the building or structure.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02223

BACKFILLING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Backfilling around site structures and backfilling to subgrade elevations.

B. Site filling and backfilling of utilities.

C. Fill under slabs-on-grade.

D. Classification of materials.

E. Consolidation and compaction.


A. Section 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL: Testing Fill Materials.


C. Section 02222 - EXCAVATING

D. Section 02228 - COMPACTION

1.03. REFERENCES

ASTM C136 Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM D1556 Density of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method ASTM D1557 Laboratory Compaction of Soil Using Modified Effort ASTM D2922 Density of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods ASTM D3017 Water Content of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Granular Materials

1. Granular materials required for filling, backfilling, subbase and other purposes shall be as shown on the Drawings. Prior to bidding, prospective contractors shall familiarize themselves with the available quantities of approved on-site and off-site materials.

2. For each on-site or off-site materials proposed, notify the Owner of the source of the material and furnish to the Owner for acceptance, a representative sample weighing approximately 50 pounds at least 10 calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use of such material.

3. The Owner reserves the right to inspect proposed source of off-site granular material and to order such tests of the materials as he deems necessary to ascertain its quality and graduation of particle size. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, engage an approved testing laboratory to perform such test, and submit certified test

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02223-1 BACKFILLING

results to the Owner. If similar tests of the material from a particular source were performed previously, submit results of these tests to the Owner for consideration.

4. No granular materials shall be used on this project for fill, backfill, subbase, or other purpose until approval is obtained from the Owner, and only material from approved sources shall be used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. ON-SITE MATERIALS

A. Type A, Excavated Material - Material under this classification shall be derived solely from excavations necessary to construct the project to the lines and grades specified. If the excavated material on-site is approved for reuse and is suitable, it shall be used for filling or backfilling purposes. If he so elects, the Contractor may, at his own expense, substitute other types of material in place of Type A Material, provided such substitution is approved in advance by the Owner.

1. Unclassified Excavated Material

a. Type A-1 - Referred to as “excavated material” and from which all frozen material, boulders, trash, foreign debris, and material greater than 6 inches in any dimension has been removed. Approved Type A-1 material shall be used for all backfilling except under structures.

b. Type A-2 - Referred to as “select excavated material” and from which all frozen material, humus, peat, roots, vegetation , ashes, trash, debris, and rocks or stones greater than 2 inches in any dimension have been removed.

2. Classified Excavated Material - Where the Contract Documents allow the reuse of excavated on-site materials as a substitute for off-site sources of Type “B” gravel or Type “C” sands, the minimum requirements for each of those excavated materials shall be the same as required for the equivalent off-site material. If such materials are used, submit for approval in writing the proposed methods of excavation, location of stockpiles, quantities of required sand and gravels, estimated excavation quantities and proposed excavation limits within the accepted excavation area. Provide a demonstration at least 10 days prior to commencement of excavation that the methods will provide consistent quantity and quality of material as specified for Type “B” gravels and Type “C” sands. The Owner will require subsurface investigations, sampling, and testing to confirm the extent and quality of the proposed material. Cost of all investigations, sampling, and testing shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

B. Type E - Borrow Material

1. “Borrow material” is defined as approved on-site material required for fill or backfill in excess of the quantity of available approved material designated as Type “A” material.

2. No such borrow material shall be used on this project unless specified in the Contract Documents and except within the limits of borrow areas designated on the Drawings.

3. Approval of all borrow material must be obtained from the Owner, and only material from approved sources shall be used.


4. Use of designated borrow areas shall be subject to the approval of the Owner at all times. Test pits and analyses of borrow material shall be provided as required by the Owner for each borrow area and at the expense of the Contractor. In addition, the Owner may require full excavation and restoration plans for each borrow area. All borrow areas shall be stripped of topsoil and organic materials far enough in advance of operations that contamination of borrow material is prevented.

a. Unclassified Borrow Material - This material consists of a naturally occurring mixture of sand, silts, clay, gravel, deteriorated rock or other inorganic particles.

b. Type E-1 - Referred to as “common borrow material,” from which all frozen material, boulders, trash or debris have been removed.

c. Type E-2 - Referred to as “select borrow material” and from which all frozen material, humus, peat, roots, vegetation, ashes, trash, debris, and rocks or stones greater than 6 inches in any dimension have been removed.

d. Classified Borrow Material - Where the Contract Documents allow the use of on-site borrow areas as a substitute for off-site sources of Type “B” gravels and Type “C” sands, the requirements for each of those on-site materials shall be the same as off-site sources.

e. In addition, all of the requirements for “classified excavated material” (Type “E” material) must be met at least 10 days prior to the acceptance of approved borrow areas for use as a source of Type “B” gravel or Type “C” sand.

2.02. OFF-SITE MATERIAL

A. Within the following specifications where grain size distribution requires a maximum of 10 percent or less material capable of passing the #200 mesh sieve, the percentage of material finer (than the #200 sieve) by weight shall be determined by wet screening in accordance with ASTM Standard D-1140.

1. It is the intent of the specifications to allow the use of granular materials from local suppliers.

2. Material Specifications shall conform to the requirements of the Maryland Department of Transportation, State Highway Administration.

B. No gravel, sand, crushed stone or crusher run material shall be used for this project until acceptance is obtained from the Owner, and only material from approved sources shall be used.

1. A certified sieve analysis from the supplier shall be submitted for the Owner’s acceptance prior to the use of any materials specified in Article 2.02, Off-Site Materials.

C. Bank Run Gravel

1. Shall be a mixture of hard, durable gravel and sand.

2. Shall be free from organic matter, trash, shale, debris, snow ice and other frozen or mechanically deleterious material.


3. Each type of gravel fill material shall meet the gradation requirements for Maryland Department of Transportation State Highway Administration Type BRG Base and Type BRG S/B.

4. Gravel Fill Materials

a. Type BRG Base - Bank run gravel for base courses.

b. Type BRG S/B - Bank run gravel for subbase courses.

D. Sand Bedding

1. Shall be a mixture of natural fine gravel and sand.

2. Shall be free from organic matter, trash, debris, snow, ice and other frozen or mechanically deleterious material.

3. Sand bedding shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M6.

E. Crusher Run

1. Each type of crusher run material shall meet the gradation requirements for Maryland Department of Transportation, State Highway Administration, Type GA Base and GA S/B.

2. Referred to as “Dirty Crusher Run,” the material shall be angular crusher run stone as delivered unsorted from the crusher. Limestone material shall be used, and shall be well graded, durable and composed of rock pieces, chips and fines. The amount of fine material shall be sufficient to fill all voids between large stones when the material is compacted.

a. ASTM D2940 GA Base - Shall be used where specified for pipe bedding or side fill and may be used for remainder of trench backfill where crusher run is specified. When used for pipe bedding, side fill, trench fill and beneath paving and structures, a maximum of 8 percent by weight shall pass the #200 size sieve.

b. ASTM D2940 GA S/B - May be substituted for trench backfill with the minus #200 sieve fraction having a maximum of 12 percent by weight. When used for sub-base under paving, a maximum of 8 percent by weight shall pass #200 size sieve.

3. All crusher run shall undergo a minimum of handling from the source to installation in order to minimize segregation of particles by size. Stockpiles which have undergone excessive particle segregation shall be remixed and approved by the Owner prior to using.

F. Stone

1. Shall be ¾” round, washed and uncrushed.


G. Required Materials

1. Pipe bedding from bottom of excavation to 6” above pipe


Under paving or below structure Crusher run Other areas Bank Run Gravel or Crusher Run Exception: PVC Sewer Pipe 1/4-inch clean stone

2. Trench backfill from 6” above pipe to subgrade

Under paving or below structure Crusher run Other areas Type A on-site excavated material

3. Backfill Below Structures: Type BRG

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Verify fill materials to be used are acceptable.

B. Verify that all subsurface installations for the project have been inspected and are ready for backfilling.

C. Verify that foundation walls are properly shored and braced to withstand lateral soil pressures created when backfilled material is placed against such walls.

D. Verify that underground tanks are anchored to their own foundation to avoid flotation after backfilling.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. Generally, compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.

B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of in situ compaction. Backfill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.

C. Inspect spaces to be backfilled and remove all unsuitable materials including sheeting, bracing, forms and debris prior to commencing backfilling operations.

3.03. BACKFILLING

A. Backfill areas to required contours, grades and elevations with unfrozen materials.

B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.

C. Backfill material shall be inspected prior to placement and all roots, vegetation, organic matter, or other foreign debris shall be removed. Stones larger than 12 inches in any dimension shall be removed or broken. Stones shall not be allowed to form clusters with voids.

D. Backfill material shall not be placed when moisture content is more than two percent above optimum or is otherwise too high to allow proper compaction. When material is too dry for adequate compaction, water shall be added to the extent necessary.


E. Hydraulic compaction by ponding or jetting will not be permitted except in very unusual conditions and then only upon written request and demonstration of its effectiveness by the Contractor and the written acceptance by the Owner.

F. Place and compact fill materials in continuous layers to meet appropriate requirements of Schedule at end of this Section.

G. Employ a placement and compaction method consistent with Section 02228, Compaction, that does not disturb or damage adjacent walls, drainage systems, damp-proofing, waterproofing, protective coverings, utilities in trenches, underground conduits or tanks.

H. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.

I. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place.

J. Rough grade all backfilled and filled areas to meet subsequent topsoiling or paving requirements. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.

K. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.

L. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials.

3.04. TOLERANCES

A. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Pavement Subgrade - +1 inch from required elevations.

B. Top Surface of General Backfilling - +1 inch from required elevations.

3.05. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect Finished Work under provisions of Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.

B. Regrade and recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02225

TRENCHING

PART 1 PART 1 GENERAL

1.01. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Excavating trenches for utilities.

B. Pipe foundations and bedding.

C. Backfilling and compacting.

D. Materials.


A. Section 01019 - CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

B. Section 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL

C. Section 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

D. Section 02161 - SHEETING AND BRACING


F. Section 02228 - COMPACTION: Testing Backfill Compaction.

G. Section 02733 - SANITARY SEWER PIPING

H. Section 02740 - SEWAGE FORCE MAINS

1.03. REFERENCES

Standard Material Specifications for gravel, sand, crushed stone and gravel-cement mixtures published by the Department of Transportation (DOT) of the State in which project is located ASTM C136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates ASTM D1556 Density of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method ASTM D1557 Laboratory Compaction of Soil Using Modified Effort ASTM D2922 Density of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods ASTM D3017 Water Content of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Granular Materials

1. Granular materials required for filling, backfilling, bedding, subbase and other purposes shall be as shown on the Drawings. Prior to bidding, prospective contractors shall familiarize themselves with the available quantities of approved on-site and off-site materials.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02225-1 TRENCHING

2. For each on-site or off-site materials proposed, notify the Owner of the source of the material and furnish to the Owner for acceptance a representative sample weighing approximately 50 pounds at least 10 calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use of such material. Except as specified herein, only off-site approved materials shall be utilized.

3. The Owner reserves the right to inspect proposed sources of off-site granular material and to order such tests of the materials as he deems necessary to ascertain its quality and graduation of particle size. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, engage an approved testing laboratory to perform such test, and submit certified test results to the Owner. If similar tests of the material from a particular source were performed previously, submit results of these tests to the Owner for consideration.

4. No granular materials shall be used on this project for fill, backfill, bedding, subbase, or other purpose until approval is obtained from the Owner, and only material from approved sources shall be used.


A. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as shown on Drawings, or as provided by the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. ON-SITE MATERIALS

A. Type A, Excavated Material - Material under this classification shall be derived solely from excavations necessary to construct the project to the lines and grades specified. If the excavated material on-site is approved for reuse and is suitable, it shall be used for filling or backfilling purposes. If he so elects, the Contractor may, at his own expense, substitute other types of material in place of Type A Material, provided such substitution is approved in advance by the Owner. All replaced or surplus material shall be disposed of by the Contractor.

1. Unclassified Excavated Material

a. Type A-1 - Referred to as “excavated material” and from which all frozen material, boulders, trash and foreign debris greater than 6 inches in any dimension has been removed. Approved Type A-1 material shall be used for all backfilling except under structures.

b. Type A-2 - Referred to as “select excavated material” and from which all frozen material, humus, peat, roots, vegetation, ashes, trash, debris, and rocks or stones greater than 2 inches in any dimension have been removed.

2. Classified Excavated Material - Where the Contract Documents allow the reuse of excavated on-site materials as a substitute for off-site sources of Type “B” gravel or Type “C” sands, the minimum requirements for each of those excavated materials shall be the same as required for the equivalent off-site material. If such materials are used, submit for approval in writing the proposed methods of excavation, location of stockpiles, quantities of required sand and gravels, estimated excavation quantities and proposed excavation limits within the accepted excavation area. Provide a demonstration at least 10 days prior to commencement of excavation that the methods will provide consistent quantity and quality of material as specified for Type “B” gravels and Type “C” sands. The Owner will require subsurface investigations, sampling, and testing to confirm the extent and quality of the proposed material.


Cost of all investigations, sampling, and testing shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

B. Type E - Borrow Material

1. “Borrow material” is defined as approved on-site material required for fill or backfill in excess of the quantity of available approved material designated as Type ”A” material.

2. No such borrow material shall be used on this project unless specified in the Contract Documents and except within the limits of borrow areas designated on the Drawings.

3. Approval of all borrow material must be obtained from the Owner, and only material from approved sources shall be used.

4. Use of designated borrow areas shall be subject to the approval of the Owner and Owner at all times. Test pits and analyses of borrow material shall be provided as required by the Owner for each borrow area and at the expense of the Contractor. In addition, the Owner may require full excavation and restoration plans for each borrow area. All borrow areas shall be stripped of topsoil and organic materials far enough in advance of operations that contamination of borrow material is prevented.

a. Unclassified Borrow Material

1) This material consists of a naturally occurring mixture of sand, silts, clay, gravel, deteriorated rock or other inorganic particles.

2) Type E-1 - Referred to as “common borrow material”, from which all frozen material, boulders, trash or debris have been removed.

3) Type E-2 - Referred to as “select borrow material” and from which all frozen material, humus, peat, roots, vegetation, ashes, trash, debris, and rocks or stones greater than 6 inches in any dimension have been removed.

b. Classified Borrow Material - Where the Contract Documents allow the use of on-site borrow areas as a substitute for off-site sources of Type “B” gravels and Type “C” sands, the requirements for each of those on-site materials shall be the same as off-site sources.

c. In addition, all of the requirements for “classified excavated material” (Type “E” material) must be met at least 10 days prior to the acceptance of approved borrow areas for use as a source of Type “B” gravel or Type “C” sand.

2.02. OFF-SITE MATERIAL

A. Within the following specifications where grain size distribution requires a maximum of 10 percent or less material capable of passing the #200 mesh sieve, the percentage of material finer (than the #200 sieve) by weight shall be determined by wet screening in accordance with ASTM Standard D-1140.

1. It is the intent of the specifications to allow the use of granular materials from local suppliers.

2. Material Specifications shall conform to the requirements of the Maryland Department of Transportation, State Highway Administration.


B. No gravel, sand, crushed stone or crusher run material shall be used for this project until acceptance is obtained from the Owner, and only material from approved sources shall be used.

1. A certified sieve analysis from the supplier shall be submitted for the Owner’s acceptance prior to the use of any materials specified in Article 2.02, Off-Site Material.

C. Bank Run Gravel

1. Shall be a mixture of hard, durable gravel and sand.

2. Shall be free from organic matter, trash, shale, debris, snow ice and other frozen or mechanically deleterious material.

3. Each type of gravel fill material shall meet the gradation requirements for Maryland Department of Transportation State Highway Administration Type BRG Base and Type BRG S/B.

4. Gravel Fill Materials

a. Type BRG Base - Bank run gravel for base courses.

b. Type BRG S/B - Bank run gravel for subbase courses.

D. Crusher Run Aggregate

1. Each type of crusher run material shall meet the gradation requirements for Maryland Department of Transportation, State Highway Administration, Section 901, CR-6.

2. Referred to as “Dirty Crusher Run,” the material shall be angular crusher run stone as delivered unsorted from the crusher. Limestone material shall be used, and shall be well graded, durable and composed of rock pieces, chips and fines. The amount of fine material shall be sufficient to fill all voids between large stones when the material is compacted.

3. All crusher run shall undergo a minimum of handling from the source to installation in order to minimize segregation of particles by size. Stockpiles which have undergone excessive particle segregation shall be remixed and approved by the Owner prior to using.

E. Stone

1. Shall be AASHTO No. 67.


F. Graded Aggregate Base

1. Material shall meet the gradation requirements of Maryland Department of Transportation, State Highway Administration, Section 901.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Submit for approval fill materials to be reused.

B. Verify that all subsurface installations for the project have been accepted and are ready for backfilling.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

B. Prior to start of construction, notify the appropriate organization identified in Section 02205, Protection of Existing Facilities, (under Article 3.01), and have staked or marked all underground utilities. Utilities include water, gas, electrical, telephone, cable, storm sewer, sanitary sewers, laterals, and services. In the event such locations indicate a possible interference, or when needed to locate points of connection to existing facilities, perform exploratory excavations to determine the utilities’ location and elevation. Provide the Owner with the results of the exploratory excavations for his review. Allow the Owner sufficient time to determine any changes required as a result of such exploratory excavations prior to start of construction.

C. Abandoned pipes and laterals shall be plugged in with 12 inches of concrete or grout or for large pipes with solid brick masonry.

D. Conduct the operations such that no interruptions to the existing utility system shall occur. Where existing sanitary sewers or storm drain systems are being replaced or interrupted, provide temporary bypass pumping or temporary piping to maintain flow around the work site such that no backups occur in these sewer systems.

E. Maintain existing manholes, catch basins, and other utility structures above and below grade which are to remain in their pre-work condition. Any material or debris entering same due to the operation shall be promptly removed.

F. Protect plant life and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.

G. Protect control points, bench marks, existing structures, fences, and paving from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic. Preserve the control points provided by the Owner throughout the life of the project, and accurately replace any such point, which is damaged or moved, at Contractor’s expense.

H. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of insitu compaction. Backfill with Type III pipe foundation and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.

I. Brace walls and slabs of structures to support surcharge loads and construction loads imposed by backfilling operations.

J. Remove all water, snow, ice and debris from surfaces to accept fill materials and from the backfill material. No calcium chloride or other chemicals shall be used to prevent freezing.

K. No fill or backfill material may be used without approval of the Owner.

L. No geotextile fabric may be used without approval of the Owner.


M. Backfill operations shall be started at the lowest elevation in the area to be backfilled, and continue, in horizontal layers, upward to the limits specified.

N. Backfill material shall be within 2 percent of the optimum moisture content for that material.

O. Any Type D-R crushed gravel stockpiles which have undergone excessive particle segregation shall be reviewed and approved by the Owner prior to placement.

3.03. TRENCH EXCAVATION

A. Trenches for underground piping, ductwork, drains, and similar utilities shall be excavated and maintained as shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section. If a prefabricated, mobile shield is utilized in lieu of conventional sheeting and bracing in pipe trenches, the bottom of the shield shall be maintained as high as possible (preferably above the spring line of the pipe) so as to prevent disturbance of the pipe foundation material and to avoid forces which would tend to pull pipe joints apart when the shield is dragged forward. Gouged openings or troughs left by the shield shall be filled with additional pipe foundation material and thoroughly compacted. Installation of sheeting and bracing and use of mobile shields shall be in complete accordance with all details of applicable safety codes, rules and regulations including all applicable local, State, Federal, OSHA, and the Maryland Occupational Safety and Health regulations for Construction (MOSH).

B. Excavation shall be such that a flat bottom trench of allowable width is established at the required subgrade elevation for subsequent installation of pipe foundation material.

C. If indicated on the Drawings or when required as a result of unsuitable soil conditions, trench excavation shall be carried below the required subgrade and a special pipe foundation installed in conformance with the Contract Documents. In any event, operations shall result in stable trench walls and a stable base free from standing water, consistent with trench width requirements.

D. Bedrock, boulders and cobbles greater than 6 inches shall be trimmed back or removed on each side of the trench so that no rock protrudes within 6 inches of the installed pipe. Rock shall also be trimmed back across the bottom of the trench so that no rock, boulder or cobble protrudes within 4 inches of the installed pipe.

E. In general, trenches shall not be opened for more than 50 feet in advance of installed pipe. Excavation of the trench shall be fully completed at least 5 feet in advance of pipe laying operations. No more than 40 feet of trench shall be left open overnight.

3.04. EXCAVATION CLASSIFICATION

A. All material excavated will be measured and classified as provided herein.

1. Unclassified Excavation - “Unclassified excavation” shall include all materials excavated within the authorized lines and grades prescribed in the Drawings. Unclassified excavation shall include “rock excavation” as well as “common excavation” as defined herein. Unless specifically designated otherwise in the appropriate bid items of the Bid Proposal, all excavation shall be considered to be “unclassified excavation.”

2. Common Excavation - “Common excavation” shall include all excavation except “rock excavation.” All unconsolidated and non-indurated material, rippable rock, loose rock, soft mineral matter, weathered rock or saprolite, and soft or friable shale which is removable with normal earth excavation equipment shall be considered “common excavation.” All boulders and detached pieces of solid rock or concrete or masonry less than 1 cubic yard in volume shall be classified as “common excavation.”


3. Rock Excavation - “Rock excavation” shall include all sound solid masses, layers and ledges of consolidated and indurated rock or mineral matter of such hardness, durability and/or texture that it is not rippable or cannot be excavated with normal earth excavation equipment.

3.05. UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation for unauthorized excavations carried beyond or below the lines and subgrades prescribed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall refill such unauthorized excavations at his own expense, and in conformance with the following provisions of this Article.

B. Should the Contractor, through negligence or for reasons of his own, carry his excavation below the designated subgrade, fill concrete or such other material as may be approved by the Owner, as specified in PART 2, shall be furnished and placed as backfill in sufficient quantities to reestablish the designated subgrade surface. Granular material used for backfilling shall be spread and compacted in conformance with the requirements of later Articles of the section, and to the percentage compaction outline therein. The cost of any tests associated with this refilling operation shall be borne by the Contractor.

C. If the maximum widths of pipe trenches are exceeded, the installed pipes shall be fully cradled in a minimum of 6 inches of fill concrete, as specified elsewhere, and at the Contractor’s expense. Excavation below subgrade which is ordered by the Owner because the normal subgrade has been disturbed by the Contractor’s operations shall be considered as unauthorized excavation.

3.06. MAINTENANCE OF EXCAVATIONS

A. All excavations shall be properly and legally maintained while they are open and exposed. Sufficient and suitable barricades, warning lights, flood lights, signs, etc., to protect life and property shall be installed and maintained at all times until the excavation has been backfilled and graded to a safe and satisfactory condition. All signs, markers, barricades shall conform to the requirements of the manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. All barricades, signs and markers shall be reflectorized.

B. To maintain traffic and safety temporary plating over trenches consisting of steel plates shall be used to temporarily bridge trench excavations. Plates shall be of size and positioned to provide adequate bearing at plate edges, shall be securely anchored, and shall be fitted in place in a manner to minimize noise when crossed by traffic. Plates shall be of sufficient thickness to safely carry heavy traffic without detrimental deflection; however, unless otherwise specified, the minimum thickness of plates shall be 1-inch.

C. Plate edges exposed to traffic shall be feathered with asphalt mix as part of trench excavation work. Work includes surveillance and adjustment of plating over trenches which shall be provided by the Contractor during non-working hours, weekends, and holidays.

3.07. PIPE FOUNDATIONS

A. All pipes, fittings or specials which are to be installed in the open trench excavation shall be properly bedded in, and uniformly supported on pipe foundations of the various types specified herein and shown on the Drawings. Flat-bottom trenches of required width shall be excavated to the necessary depth and maintained in accordance with this section prior to installing the foundation. Trenches shall be dewatered and all work performed in a dry trench.

B. Bedding material shall be spread in maximum of 8-inch layers to the midpoint of the pipe and each layer shall be compacted until the required total depth of the bedding has been built up.


Compaction methods include hand tamping with T-bars, flat heads, shovel slicing, as well as mechanical compactors. The Contractor shall perform his bedding operations with care to maintain line and grade.

C. The pipe foundation above the midpoint of the pipe shall be spread and compacted in 12-inch layers to 12 inches above the top of the pipe. When PVC, plastic or polyethylene pipe is used, do not compact directly over pipe until the depth of backfill has reached 2 feet above the top of the pipe.

D. Type I - Normal Soil Conditions - Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, all pipe shall be supported on Type I foundation. The trench shall be excavated from four to eight inches deeper than the bottom of the pipe, depending on the diameter of the pipe. In accordance with the details, bedding material shall be furnished, placed and compacted in the trench for its full width such that, after the pipe has been uniformly bedded in this material, the required minimum depth remains between pipe and undisturbed trench bottom. Suitable holes shall be provided in the trench bottom to permit adequate bedding of bells, couplings, or similar projections. The bedding material shall extend upward to a point 12 inches over the top of the pipe. Minimum width of pipe foundation shall be as shown on the Drawings.

E. Type II - Moderately Unstable Soil Conditions - When specifically called for on the Drawings, or when ordered by the Owner, the pipe shall be supported on Type II foundation. The foundation shall be installed where a suitable supporting soil or rock stratum occurs within two feet, more or less of the bottom of the pipe. The trench shall be excavated to the depth necessary to reach the suitable supporting stratum. Type “D-R-1" material or Type “D-2" crushed stone, as ordered by the Owner as described above, shall then be furnished and placed in the trench for its full width. The material shall be spread in 12-inch layers, and each layer shall be compacted. The crushed stone or gravel depth shall extend from the supporting stratum up to an elevation 4, 6 or 8 inches below the bottom of the pipe depending upon the pipe diameter. The bedding material shall then be installed in accordance with Type I pipe foundation requirements.

F. Type III - Unstable Soil Conditions - When specifically called for on the Drawings, or when ordered by the Owner, the pipe shall be supported on Type III foundation. The foundation shall be installed where no suitable supporting soil or rock stratum exists within two feet of the bottom of the pipe. The trench shall be excavated two feet deeper then the bottom of the pipe. Each side of the trench shall be supported and maintained by a permanent system of tight, continuous sheeting (and bracing) which shall be driven below the trench bottom as shown and which shall extend to an elevation of at least 12 inches above the top of the pipe.

G. Type “D-R-2" material shall then be furnished and placed in the trench for its full width, and to a depth of 8 inches. The pipe foundation material to be supported on a Type VII Foundation, Geotextile Fabric Foundation. Crushed stone, “Type D-3" material shall then be furnished and placed in the trench for its full width. All material shall be spread in layers and each layer shall be compacted until their respective total depths have been built up as required. The “Type D-3" material depth shall extend a distance of 12 inches from the top of the compacted trench lining up to an elevation 4, 6 or 8 inches below the bottom of the pipe, depending upon the pipe diameter. Bedding material shall then be installed in accordance with Type I Pipe Foundation requirements. All installed sheeting below an elevation established at 12 inches above the top of the pipe shall be left in place and undisturbed. Only the cross struts and whalers shall be gradually removed as construction proceeds.

H. Type IV - Reinforced Concrete Encasement - When specifically called for on the Drawings, or when ordered by the Owner, the pipe shall be supported on Type IV foundation. The trench shall be excavated to a depth below the bottom of the pipe equal to one-quarter of the inside diameter of the pipe or 6 inches, whichever is greater. The excavated space shall then be completely filled with, and the entire pipe encased in, concrete such that the minimum concrete encasement at any point around the outside barrel of the pipe measured 6 inches thick. The total minimum width of the concrete encasement shall equal the outside diameter


of the pipe plus 12 inches and such minimum width shall be constant for the entire length of the encasement. Concrete mix, formwork, reinforcing, curing, etc., shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 03001, Concrete. Freshly placed concrete shall be maintained free from groundwater and no backfilling of the trench shall begin until initial set has taken place, but not less than 3 hours has elapsed after the encasement has been cast. Backfill a depth of 12 inches over top of concrete before beginning compaction with mechanical equipment.

I. Type V - Concrete Cradle - When specifically called for on the Drawings or when ordered by the Owner, the pipe shall be supported on Type V foundation. The foundation shall be furnished and installed equal to the Type IV foundation, “Concrete Encasement,” except that only that portion of the encasement at and below the horizontal diameter of the pipe shall be encased, forming a true cradle under the bottom half of the pipe. Maintain cradle free from groundwater for a period of 3 hours or until initial set has taken place. Complete pipe foundation in 12-inch lifts as for Type I pipe foundation.

J. Type VI - Plain Concrete Encasement - When specifically called for on the Drawings, or when ordered by the Owner, the pipe shall be supported on Type VI foundation. The foundation shall be furnished and installed equal to the Type IV foundation, “Reinforced Concrete Encasement,” except that no steel reinforcing is required. Maintain encasement free of groundwater for a period of 3 hours or until initial set has taken place.

K. Type VII - Geotextile Fabric Foundation - When specifically called for on the Drawings, or when ordered by the Owner, the pipe foundation shall be supported on a geotextile fabric foundation. The fabric to be placed on the bottom of the excavated foundation and extended upwards to the top of the Type I pipe foundation where it can then be placed flat with a minimum overlap of 6 inches. Longitudinal overlaps to be a minimum of 2 feet. Fabrics to be installed and stretched tight, have no wrinkles so that the fabric will be in tension when placing the pipe foundation material. Geotextile material to be Trevia Type S 1127 by Hoechat Corporation; Mirafi Type 500X by Celanese Corporation; or equal.

L. Type VIII - Pressure Pipe Foundation

1. Pipe and fittings shall be laid on stable foundations, free from standing water, and trimmed to shape. Type A-2 material as described above in PART 2 shall be used for pipe foundation unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. In particular, stones 2 inches or larger shall be removed from the bearing surface of the pipe foundation. At the joints, enough depth and width shall be provided to permit the pipe layer to reach entirely around the pipe so that the joints may be made in a proper manner. Pipes shall have full bearing throughout their entire length, which shall be accomplished by shaping the bottom of the ditch or adequately tamping the backfill under the pipe in accordance with Minimum Compaction Requirements, of Section 02228, Compaction. When laid in tunnels, pipes shall be blocked in such a manner as to take the weight off the bells. Pipe laid in normal trench excavation shall not be laid on wood blocking. Mechanical type joints shall be tightened within the AWWA recommended torque range.

2. The following sources shall be reviewed by the Contractor for installation guidelines and requirements:

PIPE MATERIAL

SOURCES Ductile Iron AWWA Standard C600; Project Specification, Project Drawings;

manufacturer’s recommendations. PVC Pipe ASTM Standard D2321; Project Specification, Project Drawings;

manufacturer’s recommendations. Copper Project Specification, Project Drawings; manufacturer’s


PIPE MATERIAL

SOURCES

recommendations.

3. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, as a minimum, all pipe shall be backfilled to the springline, including hand tamping with T-bars, shovel slicing, and flatheads, and mechanically compacted and the remaining backfill placed in 12-inch lifts to 1 foot above the crown of the pipe in accordance with Minimum Compaction Requirements, of Section 02228, Compaction. Backfill material within 12 inches of the pipe shall be free of stones greater than 2 inches in any dimension. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the minimum total finished cover over the top of the pipe barrel of all pressure pipe shall be 5 feet.

3.08. GENERAL BACKFILLING REQUIREMENTS

A. Backfilling shall be started as soon as practicable and after structures or pipe installations have been completed and inspected, concrete has acquired a suitable degree of strength, and subgrade waterproofing materials have been in place for at least 48 hours. Backfilling shall be carried on expeditiously thereafter. Backfill shall be started at the lowest section of the area to be backfilled. Natural drainage shall not be obstructed at any time.

B. Backfill spaces shall be inspected prior to backfilling operations and all unsuitable materials, including sheeting, bracing forms and debris, shall be removed. No backfill shall be placed against foundation walls on structural members unless they are properly shored and braced or of sufficient strengths to withstand lateral soil pressures.

C. Backfill material shall be inspected prior to placement and all roots, vegetation, organic matter, or other foreign debris shall be removed. Stones larger than 12 inches in any dimension shall be removed or broken. Stones shall not be allowed to form clusters with voids.

D. Backfill material shall not be placed when moisture content is more than 2 percent above optimum or is otherwise too high to allow proper compaction. When material is too dry for adequate compaction, water shall be added to the extent necessary.

E. No backfill material shall be placed on frozen ground nor shall the material itself be frozen or contain frozen soil fragments when placed. No calcium chloride or other chemicals shall be added to prevent freezing. Material incorporated in the backfilling operation which is not in satisfactory condition shall be subject to rejection and removal at the Contractor’s expense.

F. If the Contractor fails to stockpile and protect on-site excavated material acceptable for backfill, then the Contractor shall provide an equal quantity of acceptable off-site material at no expense to the Owner.

G. Remove surplus backfill material from site.

3.09. PIPE TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Pipe foundations, to a depth of 1 foot above the pipe, shall be placed in 12-inch layers and thoroughly compacted by approved mechanical methods to ensure firm bedding and side support. Refer to Section 02228, Compaction, for density requirements. For plastic or polyethylene pipe materials, do not compact directly over pipe until the 2 feet of cover has been installed. Pipe foundations are specified in the appropriate sections covering underground piping. The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled and consolidated in accordance with Section 02228, Compaction, and by one of the following methods, depending on the nature of backfill material and location of trench.


B. Procedure I - For cross-country pipelines under uncultivated areas where subsequent settlement can be tolerated:

1. Backfill material shall be placed in the trench and consolidated by packing with the backhoe bucket or other means to prevent voids. Refer to Section 02228, Compaction, for density requirements. The top layer shall be thoroughly compacted mechanically and slightly mounded to allow for subsequent settlement. Maintain trench surface until completion of contract and regrade as necessary within guarantee period.

C. Procedure II - For lawns, cultivated fields, gardens and non-paved areas where minimum subsequent settlement is required: Same as for Procedure I, refer to Section 02228, Compaction, for density requirements. Top of back fill shall be compacted by mechanical means and surface maintained prior to topsoil installation, fine grading, and seeding.

D. Procedure III - For streets, driveways, parking areas, highways, shoulder areas, miscellaneous type pavements, walks, curbs, gutters and other specified areas:

1. Backfill material shall be placed in layers not exceeding 18 inches thick and each layer thoroughly compacted by a backhoe mounted hydraulic or vibratory tamper, up to 4 feet under pavement (below top of subgrade). The upper 4 feet shall be compacted using hand-guided or small self-propelled vibratory or static rollers or pads in layers not exceeding 12 inches in thickness. Refer to Section 02228, Compaction, for density requirements.

2. For pipelines in or across State Highways, backfill material and compaction shall conform with the Standard Specifications or specific requirements of the State in which the project is located.

3. Where a gravel-cement mixture (Type F) backfill is specified, the dry gravel and cement mixture shall be placed in the trench, in 6-inch layers and thoroughly tamped using mechanical or vibratory tampers. Water shall not be introduced to the gravel-cement mixture during placing and compacting thereof.

3.10. BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES

A. Backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 8-inches thick and thoroughly compacted by mechanical means.

B. Where pipelines or conduits are to be placed on structural backfill, all backfill under the pipes shall be Size D-2 crushed stone placed in 8-inch layers and mechanically tamped, unless an alternate method of supporting such pipes is specified.

C. Hydraulic compaction by ponding or jetting will not be permitted except in very unusual conditions and then only upon written request and demonstration of its effectiveness by the Contractor and the written acceptance by the Owner.

3.11. PERIODIC CLEAN-UP; BASIC RESTORATION

A. When work involves installation of sewers, drains, water mains, manholes, underground structures, or other disturbances of existing features in or across streets, rights-of-way, easements or private property, the Contractor shall (as the work progresses) promptly backfill, compact, grade and otherwise restore the disturbed area to a basic condition which will permit resumption of pedestrian or vehicular traffic and any other critical activity or function consistent with the original use of the land. The requirements for temporary paving of streets, walks, and driveways are specified elsewhere. Unsightly mounds of earth, large stones, boulders and debris shall be removed so that the site presents a neat appearance.


B. The Contractor shall perform the clean-up work on a regular basis and as frequently as required. Basic site restoration in a particular area shall be accomplished immediately following the installation or completion of the required facilities in that area. Furthermore, such work shall also be accomplished if partially completed facilities must remain incomplete for some time period due to unforeseen circumstances.

C. Upon failure of the Contractor to perform periodic clean-up and basic restoration of the site to the Owner’s satisfaction, the Owner may, upon five days prior written notice to the Contractor, without prejudice to any other rights to remedies of the Owner, cause such work for which the Contractor is responsible to be accomplished to the extent deemed necessary by the Owner, and all costs resulting therefrom shall be charged to the Contractor and deducted from the amounts of money that may be due him.

3.12. TOLERANCES

A. Top Surface of Backfilling - Under Paved Areas +1/2-inch from required elevations.

B. Top Surface of General Backfilling - +1-inch from required elevations.


A. Field testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400, Quality Control.

B. The Contractor shall designate an experienced person who shall be responsible for inspection of excavations on a daily basis, document, and maintain daily trenching and excavation logs per OSHA 29 CFR 1926.

C. Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1557 and with Section 02228, Compaction.

D. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D2922, and with Section 02228, Compaction.

E. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.

F. Owner reserves the right to request field testing up to 3 times during the project to confirm adequate compaction.

3.14. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.

B. Regrade and recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02228

COMPACTION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Compaction requirements and test methods.

B. Compact all subgrades, foundations, embankments, trench backfills, filled and backfilled material as specified.


A. Section 01026 - LUMP SUM ITEMS: Requirements applicable to Lump Sum Prices for the Work of this Section.

B. Section 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL: Inspection and Testing by Laboratory Services.

C. Section 02223 - BACKFILLING

D. Section 02225 - TRENCHING

1.03. REFERENCES

ASTM D698 Laboratory Compaction of Soil Using Standard Effort ASTM D1556 Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method ASTM D1557 Laboratory Compaction of Soil Using Modified Effort ASTM D2922 Density of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods ASTM D3017 Water Content of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods

1.04. SUBMITTAL

A. Submit in writing a description of the equipment and methods proposed to be used for compaction.


A. The Contractor shall adopt compaction methods which will produce the degree of compaction specified herein, prevent subsequent settlement, and provide adequate support for the surface treatment, pavement, structure and piping to be placed thereon, or therein, without damage to the new or existing facilities.

B. The natural subgrade for all footing, mats, slabs-on-grade for structures or pipes shall consist of firm undisturbed natural soil, at the grades shown on the Drawings.

C. After excavation to subgrade is completed, the subgrade shall be compacted if it consists of loose granular soil or if its surface is disturbed by the teeth of excavating equipment.

1. This compaction shall be limited to that required to compact loose surface material and shall be terminated in the event that it causes disturbance to underlying fine-grained soils, as revealed by weaving or deflection of the subgrade under the compaction equipment.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02228-1 COMPACTION

2. If the subgrade soils consist of saturated fine or silty sands, silts, or clay or varved clays, no compaction shall be applied.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS

A. Materials to be compacted shall be as specified in Section 02223, Backfilling.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Examine spaces to be filled beforehand and remove all unsuitable materials and debris including sheeting, forms, trash, stumps, plant life, etc.

B. Inspect backfill and fill materials beforehand and remove all roots, vegetation, organic matter, or other foreign debris. Stones larger than 12 inches in any dimension shall also be removed or broken into smaller pieces.

C. No backfill or fill material shall be placed on frozen ground nor shall the material itself be frozen or contain frozen soil fragments.

D. Spaces to be filled shall be free from standing water so that placement and compaction of the fill materials can be accomplished in “dry” conditions.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. Brace walls and slabs of structures to support surcharge loads and construction loads imposed by compaction operations.

B. Each layer of fill shall be compacted to the specified density the same day it is placed.

1. The moisture content of backfill or fill material shall be adjusted, if necessary to achieve the required degree of compaction.

C. Compact each lift in accordance with Table 1.

D. Match compaction equipment and methods to the material and location being compacted in order to obtain specified compaction, with consideration of the following guidelines:

1. Vibratory compaction is preferred for dry, granular materials.

2. Hand compaction equipment such as impact rammers, plate or small drum vibrators, or pneumatic buttonhead compactors should be used in confined areas.

3. Hydraulic compaction by pounding or jetting will not be permitted except in unusual conditions, and then only upon written approval by the Owner and after a demonstration of effectiveness.

4. Backhoe mounted hydraulic or vibratory tampers are preferred for compaction of backfill in trenches under pavements over 4 feet in depth. The upper 4 feet shall be compacted as detailed above or with hand-guided or self- propelled vibratory compactors or static roller.


5. For plastic pipelines (PVC, PE or PB) do not compact directly over center of pipe until backfill has reached 2 feet above top of pipe.

TABLE 1

COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS

CONSTRUCTION ELEMENT

MAXIMUM COMPACTION

LAYER THICKNESS (INCHES)

ASTM

MINIMUM COMPACTION

I. STRUCTURES a. Fill beneath foundation elements and under slabs-on-

grade - hand-guided compaction 6 D1557 95%

Fill beneath foundation elements and under slabs-on-grade - self-propelled or tractor-drawn compaction

8 D1557 95%

b. Fill around structures and above footings 8 D1557 95% II. TRENCHES** a. Fill under pipelines and pipe bedding 8 D1557 95% b. Pipe sidefills to 4 feet above pipe 12 D1557 93% c. Backfill above 4 feet over pipe to grade 18 D1557 90%

** The first 1 foot above pipelines shall have a compacted thickness of 12 inches unless otherwise

noted for various pipe types as listed in Section 02225, Trenching.


A. Material Testing

1. The Owner reserves the right to order testing of materials at any time during the work.

2. Testing will be done by a qualified, independent testing laboratory in accordance with this Section and Section 01400, Quality Control.

3. The Contractor shall aid the Owner in obtaining representative material samples to be used in testing.

4. For each material which does not meet specifications, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of the test and shall supply an equal quantity of acceptable material, at no additional compensation.

5. The Contractor shall anticipate these tests and incorporate the time and effort into procedure.

B. Compaction Testing

6. The Owner reserves the right to order the qualified independent testing laboratory to conduct in-place density tests of compacted lifts.

7. Testing may be conducted for every 200 cubic yards of fill or backfill or every 20 linear feet of trench backfill placed.

8. The Contractor shall dig test holes and provide access to all backfill areas at no additional compensation when requested by the Owner.


9. For each test which does not meet specifications, the Contractor shall retest at his cost. If the retest does not meet specifications, the Contractor shall replace and recompact material to the specifications at no additional cost to the Owner.

10. The Contractor shall anticipate these tests and incorporate the time and effort into procedures.

11. Nuclear moisture density testing by “probe” methods will be acceptable for compacted layers not exceeding 8 inches in thickness.

a. Nuclear “backscatter” methods will be acceptable only for testing asphalt paving layers not in excess of 3 inches in thickness.

b. Only certified personnel will conduct nuclear testing.

c. If the nuclear method is utilized, the results shall be checked by at least one in-place density test method described above.

B. Unacceptable Stockpiled Material - Stockpiled material may be tested according to Material Testing Materials.

C. Alternate Methods of Compaction - The Contractor may employ alternate methods of compaction if the desired degree of compaction can be successfully demonstrated to the Owner’s satisfaction.

D. Select Material - On-Site

1. Any on-site material may be used for select fill material provided it meets all the requirements of the equivalent off-site material.

2. No on-site material shall be used without prior approval of the Owner.

E. Systematic Compaction - Compaction shall be done systematically, and no consideration shall be given to incidental coverage due to construction vehicle traffic.

3.04. PROTECTION

A. Prior to terminating work for the day, the final layer of compacted fill, after compaction, shall be rolled with a smooth-wheel roller if necessary to eliminate ridges of soil left by tractors or equipment used for compaction or installing the material.

B. As backfill progresses, the surface shall be graded so as to drain off during incidence of rain such that no ponding of water shall occur on the surface of the fill.

C. The Contractor shall not place a layer of fill on snow, ice or soil that was permitted to freeze prior to compaction.

1. These unsatisfactory materials shall be removed prior to fill placement.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02553

WATER SERVICES, WATER METER SETTINGS, AND VAULTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Water services, water meter setting, and ancillary components installation shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, furnishing and placing water services with appurtenant meter housings and connection to the water main in accordance with the Contract Documents.


A. Section 02205 - PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

B. Section 02225 - TRENCHING

C. Section 03001 - CONCRETE

1.03. SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300, Submittals.

B. Product Data - Provide data indicating conformance to ASTM/AWWA codes, pipe material, sizes, class, dimensions, joint type and accessories.

C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions - Indicate special procedures required to install products specified.

D. Manufacturer’s Certificate - Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Certified Test Results – Certified test results shall be submitted for pipe and fittings.


A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of work of this section and all Charles County requirements for water systems.

1.05. FIELD TESTS

A. Water services and water meter settings will be visually inspected for leakage by the County at the existing water main line pressure before the excavation is backfilled. The corporation stop, water service and valves shall be tested in accordance with the water main at 150psi. Meter settings, piping, and connections shall be leak free under line pressure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS FURNISHED BY THE COUNTY

A. The County will furnish for installation, only to a master plumber, meter bottoms in excess of 1 inch with the meter head set by the County.

B. The master plumber will furnish and install meter appurtenances for all water service connections.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade WATER SERVICES, WATER METER 8612289 02553-1 SETTINGS, AND VAULTS

2.02. DETAILED MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Water meters

1. In-ground water meter vaults shall not be installed in sidewalks, driveways, traffic areas, paved areas, areas where access to the meters can be restricted by shrubbery, vehicles, fences, or equipment.

2. In-ground water meter covers: All covers shall be Ford Company electronic meter cover with removable plug or County approved equal, as specified in the Standard Details.

B. Water Services

1. Water services for 1-inch through 2-inch shall be Copper tubing Type K, annealed, and shall meet the material , chemical, and mechanical requirements of ASTMB 88.

C. Corporation stops with flared coupling nuts shall be Mueller Catalog Number H-15000, or County approved equal.

D. Copper tube couplings shall be flared type per Mueller Catalog H-15400, or County approved equal.

E. Meter Settings

1. Outside setting- All fittings, yokes and appurtenances, dual check valves, pressure reducing valves, backflow preventors, shall be manufactured by the Ford Company, provided and installed by a master plumber and as specified in the Standard Details.

2. Inlet service line, angle valve, meter vault, lids and covers shall be provided and installed by the contractor as specified in the Standard Details.

3. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer (RPZBP) will be required for all Commercial and Industrial services. It is prohibited to install RPZBP’s in vaults below ground. Flooding of the vault can result in cross connection contamination. The RPZBP is to be installed inside the building in a mechanical room with a drain on the floor. If a RPZBP has to be installed outside, it must be located above ground and insulated to prevent freezing per the manufacturer’s recommendations. The location of RPZBP shall allow no obstacles or enclosures to prohibit County access, operation or maintenance.

F. Tapping saddles shall be manufactured of high tensile ductile iron, ASTM A 536, protected with a fusion applied epoxy coating. Saddles shall be furnished with stainless steel straps, with a minimum 2 ½ -inch wide bearing area, and a rubber gasket suitable for potable water. Saddles shall be Romac or equal.

G. Round prefabricated polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic water meter vaults shall be used in high groundwater locations in lieu of precast meter vaults outside of traffic bearing areas. They shall be manufactured by the Meuller Company for the following sizes:

1. 5/8 and ¾ -inch service 15-inch diameter vault

2. single meter (Model 250CS 1536LA)

3. 5/8 and ¾ -inch service 8-inch diameter vault

4. twin meters (Model 250CD 1836LA)


5. 1-inch service 18-inch diameter vault

6. single meter (Model 330 CS 1836 LA)

7. 1-½ inch service and above submit shop drawings to County Engineer for approval

8. The prefabricated meter vaults shall also comply with the following:

a. Prefabricated water meter vaults shall be furnished with a standard Charles County Meter Frame and Cover as shown on the Standard Details

b. The meter setting shall be furnished with a bleed valve on the outlet side of the setting.

c. The angle meter valve and angle meter coupling shall be as shown on the Standard Detail to assure interchangeability of County standard meters.

d. The meter yoke will not be required for prefabricated meter vaults using a rigid moveable internal platform which permits the meter to be raised to the surface for reading and servicing without disconnecting any piping.

2.03. VALVE BOXES

A. Valve boxes shall be provided for all buried valves unless they are housed in valve chambers.

B. Valve boxes shall be made of good quality cast iron and shall be of the sectional adjustable type. The long section shall be a minimum of 5 inches in inside diameter and fit around the stuffing box of the valve; or over the valve operator, if a two-section box is used; or to fit a circular or oval-base section if a three-section box is used.

C. The upper section shall be arranged to screw on over the adjoining long section and shall also be full diameter. Screw-type valve boxes shall be used unless otherwise specified. Valve boxes shall be provided with cast iron lids or covers.

D. Lids or covers shall be marked for the service for which the valve is used by casting words such as “WATER” for potable water system, “GAS”, etc. An arrow shall be provided on the cover to indicate the direction in which the valve is turned to open; this arrow shall be labeled with the word “OPEN”.

E. The overall length of each valve box shall be sufficient to permit the top of the box to be set flush with the established finished grade. In asphalt concrete pavements, the top of the box to be set 1/2-inch below finished grade. Asphalt concrete to be compacted 12 inches wide around the upper section for a depth of 12 inches below finished grade.

F. Valve boxes shall be set truly vertical and fully supported until sufficient backfill has been placed and compacted to ensure vertical alignment of the box.

2.04. REDUCED PRESSURE ZONE BACKFLOW PREVENTER (RPZ)

A. Backflow preventer shall be furnished and installed in accordance with Charles County Ordinance for the Cross Connection Control Program and details provided on the Detail Drawings.

B. RPZ shall meet ASSE 1013 for High-hazard applications.

C. The RPZ shall protect against both backsiphonage and backpressure.


D. Provide model size to match water service size as indicated on the drawings.

E. Body and access covers shall be bronze with full-port ball valves and four ball valve test cocks. Provide strainer. Provide unions on both side of RPZ.

F. RPZ shall be Zurn/Wilkins 975XL.

2.05. HOSE

A. Hose shall be 1-inch diameter, 50 foot length.

B. Hose shall be 100 percent premium rubber from USA Bluebook, Stock Number MC-60560.

2.06. HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose bibbs shall be supplied and installed where shown on the Drawings.

B. Provide 1 inch bronze, three-piece body, full port with 316 stainless steel trim with 1 inch male-by-male hose and pipe nipple. Hose bibbs shall be as manufactured by Apollo 35-201-10; Nibco N-54-C-006; or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. WATER SERVICES, WATER METER SETTINGS, AND VAULTS

A. Water services, water meter settings, and vaults shall be installed in accordance with the requirements for the specific materials indicated above, in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the following:

1. Where open cutting is authorized, trench widths shall not exceed 24 inches. Water services installed in areas other than paving areas may be open cut or driven at the Contractor’s option.

2. All services shall be laid to the grade and lines in accordance with the Contract Documents or as directed by the County Engineer.

3. All meter vaults shall be set at the location, and constructed of the materials shown in the contract documents.

4. Special care shall be taken to insure that the services are well bedded on a solid foundation. Any defects resulting from settlement shall be repaired by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense. All meter vaults shall be bedded on firm undisturbed earth. The pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before being installed, and shall be kept clean until the acceptance of the complete work.

5. All services shall be thoroughly flushed with potable water.

6. Meter settings shall be level and the long axis of the setting shall be perpendicular to the proposed curb and gutter or edge of pavement in the case of open section roadways. Where the setting is remote from the roadway the long axis of the meter setting shall be aligned with the center line of the water service.

3.02. CONNECTIONS TO WATER MAINS

A. Service connections to existing water mains shall be made with tapping saddles or sleeves except for connections 1-inch and less to ductile or cast iron pipe which may be made by


direct tap. Direct taps larger than 1-inch to ductile or cast iron pipe shall be allowed only where authorized by the County Engineer.

B. Service connections to new water mains shall be made by direct tapping ductile iron water mains for up to 1-inch services only, by installing appropriate outlet fittings and valves as the water main is being constructed, or by installing tapping saddles, tees, or sleeves.

C. Corporation taps or tapping sleeves and service laterals with curb stops shall be installed on new water mains before the water mains have been chlorinated and tested in accordance with the Specifications.

D. When dissimilar materials are encountered between the existing water main and new water service, dielectric unions shall be installed.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02710

FENCES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Construction of fence and gates.

B. Barbed wire, chain link fabric, concrete, fence fittings and hardware, and mowing strips.


A. Section 01026 - LUMP SUM ITEMS

B. Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS

C. Section 02030 – DEMOLITION

D. Section 02980 – SITE REHABILITATION

E. Section 03001 – CONCRETE

1.03. REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 121 - Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed Wire

B. AASHTO M 181 - Chain-Link Fence


A. The Owner shall inspect all materials and work to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents.

1.05. SUBMITTALS


B. Shop drawings shall include dimensional information, coating details, and such other information as may be required to verify compliance with the Contract Documents.

C. Certificates of Compliance shall state that the materials furnished meet the requirements as specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIAL

A. Barbed Wire

1. Barbed wire shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 121. The barbed wire shall be 12 ½ gage with four-point, round barbs at 5-inch spacings and meet Class 3 coating requirements.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02710-1 FENCES

2. Provide 3 strands of barbed wire atop the chain link fabric.

B. Chain Link Fabric

1. Chain link fabric shall be 2-inch mesh woven from coated wire gage No. 9.

2. Fence height shall be as noted on the Contract Drawings.

3. The ends shall have a knuckled selvage at the bottom and barbed selvage at the top.

4. The fabric shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 181.

5. Type 1 fabric shall conform to Class D coating. Vinyl coated steel fabric shall conform to F668, Class 2B thermally fused. Vinyl shall be black color as specified on the Contract Drawings.

6. Fabric shall be one piece for the height specified.

C. Portland Cement Concrete

1. Portland cement concrete for fence post encasements shall be Mix No. 2 as specified in Section 3001, Concrete.

D. Fence Fittings and Hardware

1. Posts, Rails, Braces, Fittings, and Hardware.

a. All posts, rails, braces, fittings and hardware shall be of the size and shape shown on the Contract Drawings.

b. All posts, rails, braces, gate frames and hardware shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO 181. When these items are specified to be PVC coated, they shall be thermally fused bonded. The PVC thickness shall be 10 to 15 mil (0.25mm to 0.33mm) expect that bolts, nuts, and washers shall be metallic coated steel.

c. When using round posts, the posts shall conform to industry standards for Class 1 and 2.

2. Tie Wires, Line Post Clips, Tension Wires, and Tension Wire Clips

a. The wires, line post clips, tension wire and tension wire clips shall conform to AASHTO M 181. The galvanized coatings shall weigh a minimum of 1.2 ounces per square foot. These items, when used with aluminum coated steel fabric, shall be coated with aluminum at a minimum weight of 0.40 cubic ounces per square foot. The tension wire used with PVC coated steel fabric shall have the same coating thickness and color requirements as the fence fabric.

3. Gates

a. The fabric used for gates shall be identical to the fencing fabric. When the gates frame is PVC coated, movable fittings, such as hinges and latches, shall be field coated with a PVC coating specifically prepared for this purpose.


b. Gates may be fabricated using welded construction or heavy pressed steel or malleable corner fittings securely riveted.

c. Gates shall be properly braced to eliminate sagging or twisting and shall be equipped with a positive latching type device with means for padlocking.

d. The gate frame and other hardware shall conform to items 1 and 2 above.

E. Mowing Strips

1. Where specified, a mowing strip shall be provided at the base of the fence in accordance with the Contract Documents.

F. Type of Fence

1. The type of fence shall be the specified height and constructed of one of the seven alternatives as listed herein, unless specified as a single type.

a. Fence composed of galvanized coated steel fabric and malleable iron posts and fittings.

b. Fence composed of galvanized coated steel fabric, galvanized steel corner and brace posts, and aluminum line posts.

c. Fence composed of aluminum coated steel fabric and galvanized steel line posts.

d. Fences composed of aluminum coated steel fabric; galvanized steel terminal, corner, and brace posts; and aluminum line posts.

e. Fence composed of bonded vinyl coated steel fabric, galvanized steel or galvanized bonded vinyl coated steel line posts and fittings.

f. Fence composed of bonded vinyl coated steel fabric; galvanized steel or galvanized bonded vinyl coated steel terminal, corner, and brace posts; and aluminum line posts.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Activities and operations shall be confined to the area immediately adjacent to the right-of-way of property lines and within the right-of-way or site except that permission will be granted by the Owner for normal construction activities through lands owned by or under the control of the Owner.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for satisfactory arrangements for obtaining permission to occupy portions of the lands of adjacent property owners as may be required by the Contractor’s plan for completing the required work.

B. In areas where any privately owned fence or other property is within the Owner’s right-of-way or site, the Owner will endeavor to arrange for the relation of such items. When directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall carefully relocate the items where directed. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to privately owned items during handling.


1. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to privately owned items during handling.

3.03. INSTALLATION

A. Areas to be Developed

1. The fence shall be erected at locations shown on the Contract Drawings, or where directed by the Owner to grades conforming to the existing ground contours with tolerances shown on the Contract Drawings.

B. The bottom of the fabric shall be placed a normal distance of 1-inch above the ground line, however, over irregular ground, a minimum clearance of 1-inch and a maximum clearance of 6-inches will be permitted for a horizontal distance not to exceed 8 feet.

C. Any excavation or backfill required in order to comply with these provisions shall be made as directed by the Owner.

D. The fence shall be true to line, taut, and shall comply with best practices for chain link fence construction.

E. The fence fabric shall be placed on the site side of the posts.

F. Barb wire strands at the top of the fence should project outward.

G. All posts shall be plumbed and placed at the specified spacing shown on the Contract Drawings with a tolerance of minus 2 feet.

1. Spacing of posts shall be as uniform as practicable under local conditions.

2. The distance between line posts shall not exceed 10 feet.

H. Terminal posts shall be installed at all ends, abrupt changes in grade, and at changes in the horizontal alignment greater than 10 degrees. In no case shall the distance between terminal posts exceed 500 feet.

I. Post lengths must be adequate in all cases to accommodate the fabricated width of the fence fabric without stretching or compressing the fabric and to obtain, as a minimum, the distance required below the bottom of the fabric.

J. Post caps are required for all round line posts, and all terminal and corner posts. Post caps shall be watertight with openings for top rail where required.

K. A tension wire shall run continuously between terminal posts near the top and bottom of the fabric and attached to the fabric with hog ring fasteners at 18-inch intervals.

L. Horizontal brace rails shall be installed at all gate, pull, and corner posts. Horizontal brace rails with diagonal truss rods and turn buckle shall be installed at all terminal posts. Sufficient braces shall be supplied to allow complete bracing from each terminal post to all adjacent line posts.

M. Fabric shall be tied to brace rails at 2-foot intervals maximum and to posts at 12-inch maximum spacing. Stretcher bats shall be attached to terminal posts by connectors equally spaced at 16-inch centers maximum. Each connector shall be as close as possible to the ends of the fabric.


N. Gates shall be installed so as to be easily opened and closed by one person and shall be arranged to be swung back parallel with fence unless otherwise noted.

O. Concrete

1. Concrete footings shall be constructed in accordance with dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings.

2. Posts shall be centered in cylindrical concrete foots. Aluminum parts, where embedded in concrete, shall be coated with zinc chromate.

3. The concrete shall be thoroughly compacted around the post by tamping or vibrating.

4. The finish top surface shall be a troweled smooth finish, slightly above the ground line, and uniformly sloped to drain away from the post.

5. The post shall not be disturbed in any manner within 72 hours after the individual post footing is completed.

6. Hand mix concrete shall not be used without written permission of the Owner. If permitted, the hand mixed batch shall not exceed ½ cubic yard.

7. Where rock is encountered at a depth less than the specified footing depth, a hole 1-inch larger than the greatest dimension of the post shall be drilled at a depth 12-inches or to the planned footing depth, whichever is less. After the post has been set, the remainder of the drilled holes shall be filled with grout composed of one part Portland Cement and two parts mortar sand by dry volume. The space above the rock shall be filled with concrete.

3.04. ANCHORAGE FOR LINE POST AND TERMINAL POSTS

A. The following alternative will be allowed in case of line posts only. The device and procedure shall have prior approval of the owner.

1. After being driven in the ground, the line posts shall be held rigidly upright by means of two galvanized steel drive anchor blades. Blades shall be driven diagonally through galvanized steel fittings attached to opposite side of the posts. The approximate spread of the blades at their full depth shall be 39 inches. The top of the device shall be a minimum of 3-inches below the finished grade.

B. The following alternative will be allowed for terminal posts (end, pull, and corner posts). The device and procedure shall have prior approval of the Owner.

1. After being driven into the ground the terminal post shall be held rigidly upright by means of two anchor units spaced approximately 6 inches apart along the terminal post, and each anchor unit driven in a direction to offset the stresses caused by the tension of the fence wire. Galvanized steel drive anchor blades which are driven through galvanized steel fittings shall be attached to the opposite sides of the post. The approximate spread of the blades at their depth shall be 39 inches. The top of the device shall be a minimum of 3-inches below the finished grade.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02733

SANITARY SEWER PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Gravity flow sanitary sewers, fittings, and accessories materials and installation.

B. Connection of sanitary sewers to manholes, pump stations, and existing sewers.

C. Tests and inspections.


A. Section 01039 - COORDINATION AND MEETINGS





F. Section 02222 – EXCAVATING



I. Section 02735 - LEAKAGE TESTS OF SEWERS

1.03. REFERENCES

A. Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe

ASTM A746 Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe ANSI/AWWA A21.11/C111

Push-On Joints and Mechanical Joints

B. Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe

ANSI/AWWA A21.51/C151

Ductile Iron Pipe


Cement-Mortar Linings and Asphaltic Lining and Coating

AWWA C203 Coal Tar Enamel Lining and Coating ANSI/AWWA A21.11/C111

Push-On Joints and Mechanical Joints


Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids

ANSI/AWWA Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3-Inch Through 48-Inch, for Water and Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02733-1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING

A21.10/C110 Other Liquids

1.04. SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data - Provide data indicating conformance to ASTM/AWWA codes, pipe material, sizes, class, dimensions, joint type and accessories.

C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions - Indicate special procedures required to install products specified.

D. Manufacturer’s Certificate - Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Certified Test Results – Certified test results shall be submitted for pipe and fittings.


A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 01700, Contract Closeout.

B. Submit marked-up record contract drawings, including location and length of sewer sections, service connection stationing from downstream manhole, service lateral length and depth at property line, manholes, and rim and invert elevations where the pipe enters or exits a structure. Mark up detail drawings to indicate as-built conditions.

C. Identify and locate (horizontally and vertically) on record drawings during the discovery of exposed uncharted existing utilities and services.


A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of the work of this Section.


A. Prior to start of construction, verify the field measurements and elevations that existing conditions and structures are as shown on Drawings. Notify Owner of specific differences.

B. Prior to start of construction, verify by exploratory excavations that existing underground utility locations and elevations are as shown on drawings or to confirm marked location and elevation of underground utilities by the organization identified in Section 02205, Protection of Existing Facilities. Notify Owner of potential interference and allow Owner sufficient time to determine any changes required as a result of such interferences.

1.08. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work under provisions of Sections 01039, Coordination and Meetings and 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, including field engineering, maintenance of traffic, access to site, and emergency vehicle access.

B. Coordinate work with local utility companies (private and municipal).

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02733-2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. SANITARY SEWER PIPE MATERIALS

A. C900 PVC

1. Minimum class raiting shall be DR-18.

2. Pipe shall conform to AWWA C-900, “Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe,” and shall be furnished in cast-iron pipe equivalent outside diameters.

3. All PVC fittings for C-900 PVC pipe shall be manufactured in one piece of injection molded PVC compound conforming to ASTM D-1784. Fitting shall conform to the thickness and class rating of DR-18. Fittings shall be manufactured to withstand 755 psi quick burst pressure tested in accordance with ASTM D-1599 and withstand 500 psi for a minimum of 1,000 hours testing accordance with SASTM D-1598. Fittings shall also conform to Dimensional Checks, per ASTM D-2122, and Acetone Tests, per ASTM D-2152.

4. Ductile Iron fittings with mechanical or push on joints conforming to AWWA C-153 or C-110 shall be allowed as an alternative when PVC sizes are not available. Cast Iron fittings are an approved substitute for Ductile Iron, if Ductile Iron fittings are not manufactured and must conform to the same AWWA standards. Fittings shall be as manufactured by the Harrington Corporation (HARCO), or equal.

5. Bells shall be gasketed push on type conforming to ASTM D-3139 with elastometric gaskets conforming to ASTM F-477.

6. Restraint for PVC pipe bell (AWWA C900) shall consist of the following: The restraint shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. The restraint devices shall be coated with MEGA-BOND. (For complete specifications on MEGA-BOND visit www.ebaa.com.) A split serrated ring shall be used behind the pipe bell. A split serrated ring shall also be used to grip the pipe, and a sufficient number of bolts shall be used to connect the bell ring and the gripping ring. The combination shall have a minimum working pressure rating shown in the product brochure. The restraint shall be the Series 1500, as manufactured by EBAA Iron, Inc., or approved equal.

2.02. PIPE ACCESSORIES

A. Fittings - Same size, material and class as pipe, molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, couplings, adapters and other configurations required.

B. Pipe Connection Table - When connecting dissimilar pipe materials or when connecting new pipe to existing pipe, the following connections shall be used:

Type to Type

Solvent Cement Socket

Coupling

SDR 35 to Schedule 40 (GSX/SXS)

PVC Gasketed

Repair Sleeve

Cast Coupling

Rubber Adapter with Shear Ring

Repair Clamp

Sch 40 to Sch 40 Sch 40 to SDR 35 Sch 80 to Sch. 80


http://www.ebaa.com/

Type to Type


Coupling

SDR 35 to Schedule 40 (GSX/SXS)

PVC Gasketed

Repair Sleeve

Cast Coupling

Rubber Adapter with Shear Ring

Repair Clamp

Sch 40, 80, or SDR 35 to DIP/CIP

Sch 40, 80, or SDR 35 to clay

Sch 40, 80, or SDR 35 to asbestos cement

DIP/CIP/C900 to clay Asbestos cement to clay SDR 35 to SDR 35 DIP/CIP to DIP/CIP C900 to C900 Asbestos cement to CIP/DIP

1. Rubber Adapter With Stainless Steel Shear Rings (4 to 15 Inches) - Fernco Flexible Couplings by the General Engineering Company, Box 609, Frederick, MD 21701; or equal.

2. Repair Clamp - Dresser Model 360 “All-Around” pipe repair clamps in stainless steel; or equal.

3. Cast Coupling (2 to 16 Inches) - Dresser Model 253 “Modular Long Sleeve” cast coupling, Smith-Blair Model 442 “Long Sleeve,” or equal.

C. Identification - Each pipe length and fitting shall be clearly marked with:

1. Manufacturer’s name and trademark.

2. Nominal pipe size and class.

3. Material designation.

D. Connections to Manholes - Provide rubber boot-type connectors with all stainless steel hardware as manufactured by NPC, Inc., Model Kor N’ Seal; Press Seal Gasket Corporation, Model PSX; or equal as shown on the Contract Drawings.

2.03. SHOP TESTS

A. General

1. All shop tests of pipe and pipe materials required by this section and/or the applicable ASTM/AWWA specifications shall be performed at the Contractor’s expense.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. The drawings and specifications may contain information relating to conditions below the ground surface at the site of proposed work, but such information is furnished without


guarantee as to it being complete or correct. The Contractor shall assume all risk and responsibilities and shall complete the work in whatever manner and under whatever conditions he may encounter or create without extra cost to the Owner. Location of existing underground facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to the Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others, and Owner and Engineer do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof.

B. The Contractor shall perform exploratory excavations in advance of this work to verify the location, depth, size, and material of existing utilities which may interfere with the work to be performed under this contract. All damage to existing utilities shall be the Contractor’s cost to repair or replace.

C. Verify that trench cut, excavated base and pipe bedding is ready to receive work and pipe bedding dimensions and elevations are as indicated on drawings.

D. All pipe, fittings, and specials shall be carefully inspected in the field before lowering into the trench. Cracked, broken, warped, out-of-round, damaged joints, including damaged pipe linings or coatings or otherwise defective pipe, fittings or specials, as determined by the Owner, shall be removed and not installed. Such rejected pipe shall be clearly tagged in such manner as not to deface or damage it, and the pipe shall then be removed from the job site by the Contractor at his own expense.

E. Any pipe showing a distinct crack with no evidence of incipient fracture beyond the limits of the visible crack, if approved, may have the cracked portion cut off by, and the expense of, the Contractor before the pipe is laid so that the pipe used is perfectly sound and will form an approved joint. The cut shall be made in the sound barrel at a point at least 12 inches from the visible limits of the crack.

F. If authorized, cutting of the pipe shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe lining. All pipe cutting shall be done by means of an approved type of power cutter and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. The use of hammer and chisel, or any other method which results in rough edges, chipped or damaged pipe, is prohibited.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. The Contractor shall have on the job site with each pipe laying crew, all the proper tools, gauges, pipe cutters, lubricants, etc., to handle, cut, pipe laying and join the pipe.

B. Prior to installing the foundation, trenches shall have all water removed and all work performed in a dry trench. Pipe installation in frozen trench bottoms is not permitted.

C. All pipes, fittings or specials which are to be installed in the open trench excavation shall be properly bedded in, and uniformly supported on pipe foundations of the various types specified in Section 02225, Trenching, and shown on the Contract Drawings.

D. Flat-bottom trenches of required width shall be excavated to the necessary depth as required and maintained in accordance with Section 02225, Trenching.

E. Bedding material shall be spread in a maximum of 8-inch layers for the pipe foundation and each layer shall be compacted until the required total depth of bedding has been established.

F. Suitable holes or depressions shall be provided in the pipe bedding to permit adequate bedding of the bell, coupling or similar pipe projections.

G. Use of hydrohammer for compaction will not be permitted within 4 feet of the top of pipe.


H. The Contractor shall perform bedding operations with care to maintain straight alignment and consistent grade.

3.03. LINES AND GRADES

A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, surveying instruments, and tools to establish and maintain all lines and grades. The Contractor shall have personnel on duty or on standby call, at all times, who are qualified to set and verify sewer slope and manhole elevations as they are installed.

B. Easement and property lines and staked center of manholes and other control lines necessary for locating the work as well as elevations used in the design of the work are shown on the Drawings. Bench marks are shown on the drawings or the Contractor will be provided a list of bench marks.

C. The Contractor shall use this information to set line and use laser equipment to set line and grade. The Contractor shall check the grade of pipe by use of level instrument and rod at not more than 50-foot intervals.

D. The use of string levels, hand levels, carpenter’s levels or other crude devices for transferring grade or setting pipe are not permitted.

E. During construction, the Contractor shall provide the Owner, when requested, all reasonable and necessary materials, opportunities, and assistance for setting stakes and making measurements, including the furnishing of rodmen or chainmen as needed at intermittent times.

F. The Contractor shall carefully preserve bench marks, reference points and stake established by the Engineer or Owner, and in case of willful or careless destruction by his own operations he will be charged with the resulting expense to re-establish such destroyed control data and shall be responsible for any mistakes or delay that may be caused by the unnecessary loss or disturbance of such control data.

3.04. TOLERANCES

A. Pipes shall be installed at the lines and grades shown on the Drawings.

B. Pipes shall be straight between manholes or between points of connection to structures.

C. The grade of the sewer between manholes and from pipe length to pipe length shall not vary from the design grade shown on the Contract Drawings by more than 0.15 times the design grade, unless a change in grade has been ordered by the Owner, in which case the same tolerance shall apply.

D. Invert elevations at any location shall not vary from the design elevations by more than 0.05 feet, unless a change in invert elevation has been ordered by the Owner, in which case the same tolerance shall apply.

E. Any sewer grade or invert elevation which exceeds these tolerances shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense in a manner prescribed, and to the extent requested, by the Owner.

3.05. INSTALLATION

A. The Contractor shall furnish slings, strap and/or approved devices to provide satisfactory support of the pipe when it is lifted. Transportation from storage areas to the trench shall be restricted to operations which can cause no damage to the pipe or lining or coatings.


B. The pipe shall not be dropped from trucks onto the ground or into the trench.

C. Pipe laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends pointing in the direction of flow.

D. Each pipe section shall be placed into position in the trench on the pipe bedding in such manner and by such means required to cause no injury to the pipe, persons, or to any property.

E. Pipe size up to and including 15 inches I.D. shall be installed so that a pipe joint occurs not more than 2 feet from the outside face of the wall of manholes or structures.

F. The pipe fittings and specials shall be firmly bedded in the pipe foundations so that the pipe barrel is uniformly supported and cradled throughout its length.

G. Blocking will not be permitted under the pipe, except where the pipe is to be installed on concrete encasement or concrete cradle.

H. Holes and depressions in the pipe foundation shall be provided to receive bells, couplings, or similar projections to assure proper bedding of the pipe barrel.

I. When the pipe is in proper position it shall be joined or coupled to the mating end of the previously laid pipe, using the required joint and following the manufacturer’s recommended assembly procedure.

J. After the pipe has been joined, the pipe bedding material to be placed and spread in maximum 8-inch layers to the midpoint of the pipe.

K. Each layer shall be compacted using mechanical compactors and hand tamping with T-bars or shovel slicing so the pipe barrel is firmly embedded in the pipe bedding material.

L. If pipe inspection indicates that the pipe has been properly installed as determined by the Owner, the Contractor may then continue to spread the pipe foundation material to 6 inches over the top of pipe.

M. The pipe foundation above the midpoint of the pipe shall be spread and compacted in 12-inch layers to 12 inches above the top of the pipe.

N. After completing the pipe foundation to 6 inches above the top of pipe, the Contractor may then backfill the remainder of the trench in accordance with Sections 02225, Trenching; 02228, Compaction; and the typical trench details shown on the Drawings.

O. At the end of each day’s work or at intervals of length at the option of the Owner, the Owner, with the Contractor, will check the grade and inspect the pipe for alignment. Defective work shall be dug up and reinstalled to the satisfaction of the Owner.

P. The completed assembly of pipe sections shall form a sewer with uniform slope.

Q. Manufactured pipe plugs or temporary bulkheads shall be placed in the open ends of sewer pipes whenever pipe installation is stopped overnight, over weekends, or whenever dirt or debris could enter the pipe during construction. Newly installed pipe shall not be used to remove groundwater from trench.

R. Except where direct replacement of existing sewers is required, no connections to existing live sewers or laterals shall be made until the leakage test and all other requirements are met and connections approved by the Owner.


S. Any section of sewer or drain, or portions thereof, which do not comply with the inspection criteria defined above, shall be promptly corrected or repaired by the Contractor at his own expense.

T. Pipe which is cracked or collapsed shall be replaced with new pipe. Pipe which is either out of line or grade shall be dug up and reinstalled to the correct line and grade.

U. Where deposits of dirt and debris exist, the sewer main shall be flushed with water to the downstream manhole and removed.

V. At points of leakage, the pipe shall be replaced or repaired with pipe connections made in accordance with the pipe connection table so as to permanently stop the leak in a manner which shall receive the prior approval of the Owner.

3.06. CONNECTION TO EXISTING STRUCTURES

A. Where sewer mains or service laterals are to be connected to existing manholes or other structures, and where no stub or opening has been provided for the connection, the Contractor shall cut an opening of minimum diameter through the side wall of the structure for inserting the pipe, at the required location and elevation.

B. In making connections to existing manholes or structures, care shall be taken to avoid damage to the manhole or structure or allowing debris to enter the pipelines. Any damage resulting from the Contractor’s operations shall be repaired and made good by the Contractor at his own expense.

C. Before inserting pipe, Contractor shall install rubber gasket compression ring with stainless steel straps. Use of oakum, grout, or manhole rubber adapter rings (also known as rubber donut waterstop rings) is prohibited.

D. The pipe shall be positioned so that the finished or trimmed end of the pipe is flush with the inside wall surface of the structure. The mortar filler shall be struck off neatly to form a smooth, dense surface flush with the inside wall surface of the structure.

E. Benchwalls in existing structures shall be altered to form a new trough so that the new connection will enter the existing flow channel at 45-degree angle in the direction of flow.

F. Benchwalls to be extended upwards to the top of pipes as shown on the Drawings.

G. Existing flow to be maintained through manhole or by bypass pumping or piping.

3.07. TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Leakage Testing

1. All installed sanitary sewer pipe, laterals and manholes shall be subject to a leakage test as described in Section 02735, Leakage Tests of Sewers.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02735

LEAKAGE TESTS OF SEWERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Leakage testing by air pressure methods.

B. Manhole vacuum testing.


A. Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

B. Section 02733 - SANITARY SEWER PIPING

1.03. REFERENCES

A. Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association - UNI-B-6-98 Recommended Practice for Low Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe. Refer to example calculation at end of this Section.

1.04. TEST REQUIREMENTS

A. Backfilling of the sewer trench to ground or road surface shall be in place and completed for 30 calendar days, or as approved by Owner, prior to start of testing of each Section of sewer.

B. Testing shall be completed prior to final restoration.

C. Low pressure air test shall not exceed drop of 1.0 psig for time period listed in attached Table 02735-1. Test procedure shall conform to ASTM C828 except as modified by the UNI-Bell Plastic Pipe Association Publication UNI-B-6-98, for Low Pressure Air Testing Of Installed Sewer Pipe. Refer to Table 02735-1 for maximum allowable time for a 1.0 psig drop.

D. Deflection Test - Maximum deflection 5 percent. Refer to Section 02733, Sanitary Sewer Piping, for detail of GO-NO-GO mandrel.

E. Maximum test length shall not exceed 1,000 feet.

1. In the case of sewers laid on steep grades, the length of line to be tested at any one time may be limited by the maximum allowable internal pressure on the pipe and joints at the lower end of the line. The recommendations of the pipe manufacturer shall be followed in this regard.

F. The Owner shall witness all tests. Notify Owner at least 48 hours before testing.

G. Leakage Tests - Replacement of Existing Sewer Systems - Leakage tests shall be performed on new sewer and manholes, replacing existing sewers and manholes, using the following method:

1. Where existing live sewers and live laterals have been replaced with new piping, leakage tests shall be performed by the above-described methods if (a) the section has no laterals between manholes; (b) can be plugged off without affecting existing connected facilities; and (c) the flow at the upstream manhole can be pumped around the section to be tested.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02735-1 LEAKAGE TESTS OF SEWERS



B. The following copies of forms for testing are attached to the end of this Section.

1. Low Pressure Air Testing of New Sewers.

2. Table 02735-1, Low Pressure Air Testing of Sewers, including attached Appendix I.

3. Manhole vacuum tests.


A. Low Pressure Air Testing

1. Measure length of section to be tested.

2. Measure time interval and pressure drop.

3. Record measurements on GHD Form 169.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Backfill has been in place the required time before start of test.

B. No connections to live sewers or live laterals have been made unless directly replacing existing sewer.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. Pipelines and manholes have been flushed and cleaned of all debris, stones, silt, etc. such that all surfaces of pipe and manholes are visible.

B. The Contractor shall have on the job all the proper tools, pipe plugs, air bags, gauges, pumps, wires, water trucks, compressors, etc. necessary to properly test the pipe and manholes.

3.03. TESTING

A. Low Pressure Air Testing

1. Prior to start of test permanently repair all visible leaks.

2. Isolate each section to be tested with air tight plugs.

3. Low pressure air testing procedures shall conform to ASTM C-828 as modified by UNI-B-6-98.


4. On ductile iron pipe sewer sections, no pressure drop is permitted.

5. On PVC sewers, the maximum allowable drop in pressure from the test pressure shall be 1.0 psig during the minimum holding time.

a. Test pressure shall be calculated using the following equation:

(psig)2.31H

3.5 P +=

where:

P = Test pressure, maximum of 10 psi

H = Height of groundwater above invert

6. All pressurizing equipment used for low-pressure air testing shall include a regulator or relief valve set no higher than 10 psig to avoid over-pressurizing and displacing temporary or permanent plugs. In no case should the starting pressure exceed 10.0 psig.

7. Either mechanical or pneumatic plugs may be used. All plugs shall be designed to resist internal testing pressures without the aid of external bracing or blocking. If pneumatic plugs are utilized, a separate hose shall also be required to inflate the pneumatic plugs from the above ground control panel. Plug the upstream end of the line first to prevent any upstream water from collecting in the test line. This is particularly important in high groundwater situations. When plugs are being placed, the pipe adjacent to the manhole shall be visually inspected to detect any evidence of shear in the pipe due to differential settlement between the pipe and the manhole. A probable point of leakage is at the junction of the manhole and the pipe, and this fault may be covered by the pipe plug, and thus not revealed by the air test.

8. To facilitate test verification by the Owner, all air used shall pass through a single, above ground control panel. The above ground air control equipment shall include a shutoff valve, pressure regulating valve, pressure relief valve, input pressure gauge, and a continuous monitoring pressure gauge having a pressure range from 0 to at least 10 psi. The continuous monitoring gauge shall have minimum divisions of 0.10 psi and an accuracy of +0.04 psi. The equipment to include a separate certified test gauge for periodic checking of the accuracy of the basic equipment gauges.

9. Two separate hoses shall be used to: (1) connect the control panel to the sealed line for introducing low-pressure air, and (2) a separate hose connection for constant monitoring of air pressure build-up in the line. Low pressure air shall be slowly introduced into the sealed line until the internal air pressure reaches 4.0 psig greater than the average back pressure of any groundwater above pipe, but not greater than 10.0 psig. After a constant pressure of 4.0 psig is reached, the air supply shall be throttled to maintain that internal pressure for at least 2 minutes or until the temperature of the entering air to equalize with the temperature of the pipe wall. When temperatures have been equalized and the pressure stabilized at 4.0 psig, the air hose from the control panel to the air supply shall be disconnected.

10. The continuous monitoring pressure gauge shall then be observed while the pressure is decreased to no less than 3.5 psig (greater than the average back pressure of any groundwater over the pipe). At a reading of 3.5 psig, timing shall commence with a stop watch or other timing device that is at least 99.8 percent accurate.


11. If the time shown in Table 02735-1 (at the end of this Section) for the designated pipe size and length elapses before the air pressure drops 1.0 psig, the section undergoing test shall have passed the leakage test. The test may be discontinued once the prescribed time has elapsed even though the 1.0 psig drop has not occurred.

12. If the pressure drops 1.0 psig before the appropriate time shown in Table 02735-1 has elapsed, the air loss rate shall be considered excessive and the section of pipe has failed the test.

13. If the section fails to meet the above requirements, the Contractor shall determine at his own expense the source, or sources of leakage, and he shall repair or replace all defective materials and/or workmanship to the satisfaction of the Owner. The extent and type of repair as well as results, shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. The completed pipe installation shall then be retested and required to meet the requirements of this test.

14. The times shown in Table 02735-1 are for the length of main sewer tested. For lengths other than those shown, the time to be interpolated. Further, the tables do not have any reduction of time for length of laterals connected to the section of sewer being tested since it normally is not significant. For all precise calculation of time allowance including laterals, refer to UNI-Bell UNI-B-6 publication and the sample calculations and formula shown at the rear of this section.


TABLE 02735-1

LOW PRESSURE AIR TESTING OF SEWERS

PIPE DIAMETER (INCHES)

*SHORTEST TIME

(MIN:SEC)

LENGTH FOR

SHORTEST TIME (FT.)

TIME FOR LONGER LENGTH (SEC.)

TIME (MIN:SEC) FOR LENGTH (L) SHOWN

100 FT.

150 FT.

200 FT.

250 FT.

300 FT.

350 FT.

4

3:46

597

0.380

3:46

3:46

3:46

3:46

3:46

3:46

6

5:40

398

0.855

5:40

5:40

5:40

5:40

5:40

5:40

8

7:34

298

1.520

7:34

7:34

7:34

7:34

7:36

8:52

10

9:26

239

2.374

9:26

9:26

9:26

9:53

11:52

13:51

12

11:20

199

3.418

11:20

11:20

11:24

14:15

17:05

19:56

15

14:10

159

5.342

14:10

14:10

17:48

22:15

26:42

31:09

18

17:00

133

7.692

17:00

19:13

25:38

32:03

38:27

44:52

21

19:50

114

10.470

19:50

26:10

34:54

43:37

52:21

61:00

24

22:40

99

13.674

22:47

34:11

45:34

56:58

68:22

79:46

27

25:30

88

17.306

28:51

43:16

57:41

72:07

86:32

100:57

30

28:20

80

21.366

35:37

53:25

71:13

89:02

106:50

124:38

33

31:10

72

25.852

43:05

64:38

86:10

107:43

129:16

150:43

36

34:00

66

30.768

15:17

76:55

102:34

128:12

153:50

179:29

*Time allowed for 1.0 psig drop in pressure.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02735-5 LEAKAGE OF SEWER TESTS

Job No. _______________ Contract No.___________

LOW PRESSURE AIR TESTING OF NEW SEWERS Date: _____________________ Project: ________________________________________________________ Contractor: _____________________________________________________ Weather: _______________________________________________________

Section Tested

(List Manholes)

Length (Feet)

Diameter (Inches) Material

Time Start/Time

Finish

Time Interval

(Minutes)

Air Pressure

Initial/Final (psig)

Total Pressure

Loss (psig)

Pass/ Fail

to

to

to

to

to

to

to

to COMMENTS: WITNESS:

OWNER Name Title Signature

WITNESS: CONTRACTOR Name Title Signature

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02740

SEWAGE FORCE MAINS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Sewage force main piping, including fittings, tapping sleeves, valves, accessories and materials.

B. Shop tests.

C. Installation.

D. Testing.


A. Section 01039 - COORDINATION AND MEETINGS





F. Section 02222 - EXCAVATING

G. Section 02223 – BACKFILL

H. Section 02225 - TRENCHING

I. Section 02741 - PRESSURE TESTS OF FORCE MAINS

1.03. REFERENCES

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Water Works Association (AWWA) American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)

A. Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pipe

ANSI A21.4/AWWA C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water

ANSI A21.4/AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids

ANSI A21.10/AWWA C110 Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3-inch through 48-inch, for Water and Other Liquids

ANSI A21.11/AWWA C111 Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

ANSI A21.50/AWWA C150 Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02740-1 SEWAGE FORCE MAINS

ANSI A21.51/AWWA C151 Ductile Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds and Sand Lined Molds for Water and Other Liquids

AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances

1.04. SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data - Provide data describing conformance to ANSI/AWWA/ASTM codes, material, sizes, class, dimensions, joint type, fittings, pipe accessories.



B. Submit marked-up contract drawings including location if different from plan, variations in specified depth of more than +6 inches, cleanouts, air relief valves, bends, and specials.

C. Identify and locate (horizontally and vertically) on record drawings the exposed unmapped utilities or services.

D. Mark up detail drawing(s) to indicate as-built conditions.


A. Conform to requirements of regulatory agencies having jurisdiction over the work.

B. Conform to permit requirements obtained by Owner.


A. Prior to start of construction, verify by field measurements that existing conditions and structures are as shown on Drawings, notify Owner of specific discrepancies or potential interferences.

B. If required by Owner or shown on Drawings confirm location and elevation of existing utilities or sewers by exploratory excavations.

1.08. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate field work under provisions of Sections 01039, Coordination and Meetings and 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, including field engineering.

B. Coordinate work with local utility companies (private and municipal).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. SEWAGE FORCE MAIN

A. Pipe material, sizes, classes, etc. shall be furnished and installed as listed herein.

B. Ductile Iron Pipe - ANSI A21.51/AWWA C151 - Ductile iron pipe material, thickness design conforming to ANSI A21.50/AWWA C150, pressure Class 350.


C. Ductile iron pipe shall have cement mortar linings which shall conform to ANSI A21.4/AWWA C104 as follows:

1. Double Thickness - Linings shall consist of cement mortar, centrifugally applied and shall not be less than 1/8-inch for 3 inches to 12 inches inclusive, 3/16-inch for 14 inches to 24 inches inclusive, and 1/4-inch for 30 inches to 54 inches inclusive. The inside shall be given a seal coat of asphalt material as described in ANSI A21.4/AWWA C104.

D. All wastewater force mains shall be constructed with ductile iron pipe provided with interior corrosion protection coatings as specified herein. All ductile iron wastewater force mains and fittings for sewer construction shall receive an interior ceramic epoxy coating, consisting of an amine cured novalac epoxy containing at least 20% by volume of ceramic quartz pigment, such as manufactured by Protecto 401. The interior coating shall be applied at a nominal dry film interior thickness of 40-mils. All DIP bells and spigots shall be lined with 8-mils of joint compound by Protecto 401 or approved equal applied by brush to ensure full coverage. All pipe supplied with Protecto 401 interior lining shall be provided free of holidays. Pipe installed with defects in the lining will be rejected. Patching of Protecto 401 coating defects after installation shall not be approved.

E. Protective coatings for ductile iron pipe shall be an asphaltic coating approximately 1 mil thick and conform to requirements of ANSI 21.51/AWWA C151.

F. Restrained push-on joint pipe and fittings - The rubber gasket joint shall be as generally described in ANSI 21.11/AWWA C111. Restrained push-on joints shall provide the following maximum deflection:

PIPE SIZE MAXIMUM DEFLECTION (DEGREES)

4” through 12” 5.0 16” through 18” 3.0 24” through 36” 1.5

G. Restrained joint pipe shall be:

1. American Pipe Product – Flex-Ring

2. U.S. Pipe Product – TR Flex

3. Griffin Pipe Product – SNAP-LOCK

H. Each pipe length and fitting shall be clearly marked with:

1. Manufacturer’s name and trademark.

2. Nominal pipe size and class.

3. Material designation.

I. Provide ductile iron pipe with polyethylene sheave encasement conforming to ANSI 21.5/AWWA C105.

1. The encasement shall be continuous 8-mil thick polyethylene sleeve.

2. The joints in the sleeve shall be overlapped a minimum of 12 inches and taped with a 2-inch wide polyethylene adhesive tape wrapped a minimum of three times around the pipe to secure the tube of polyethylene to the pipe.


2.02. GATE VALVES

A. All underground gate valves shall be non-rising stems, 2-inch operating nuts, O-ring seal and shall open counterclockwise (left).

1. Underground gate valves shall be of the iron body, bronze mounted type conforming to AWWA Standard C500.

2. Mechanical joint type designed for underground use at 150 psi.

3. Underground gate valves shall be U.S. Pipe Metroseal 250.

B. Resilient seated gate valve shall conform to all applicable provisions of Articles 2.01 and 2.02 of this section.

C. All resilient seated gate valves shall provide a full pipe opening when fully opened.

D. Valve shall be compatible with domestic wastewater.

E. Resilient seated gate valves shall conform to AWWA Standard C509.

F. Valve body and bonnet shall be coated on all exterior and interior surfaces with a fusion bonded epoxy conforming to the requirements of AWWA Standard for Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants: C-550-90. Manufacturer shall certify that the coating will conform to following section of the Standard:

1. Section 2 Materials

2. Section 4 Tested and Inspection relating to qualification and production testing

2.03. VALVE BOXES

A. Valve boxes shall be provided for all buried valves unless they are housed in valve chambers.

B. Valve boxes shall be constructed of cast iron and shall be of the sectional adjustable type. The long section shall be a minimum of 5 inches in inside diameter and fit around the stuffing box of the valve; or over the valve operator, if a two-section box is used; or to fit a circular or oval-base section if a three-section box is used.

C. The upper section shall be arranged to screw on over the adjoining long section and shall also be full diameter. Screw-type valve boxes shall be used unless otherwise specified. Valve boxes shall be provided with cast iron lids or covers.

D. Lids or covers shall be marked for the service for which the valve is used by casting “SEWER”. An arrow shall be provided on the cover to indicate the direction in which the valve is turned to open; this arrow shall be labeled with the word “OPEN”.

E. The overall length of each valve box shall be sufficient to permit the top of the box to be set flush with the established finished grade. In asphalt concrete pavements, the top of the box to be set 1/2-inch below finished grade. Asphalt concrete to be compacted 12 inches wide around the upper section for a depth of 12 inches below finished grade.

F. Valve boxes shall be set truly vertical and fully supported until sufficient backfill has been placed and compacted to ensure vertical alignment of the box.


2.04. PIPE ACCESSORIES

A. Fittings - Same materials, class, coatings and linings as pipe, unless under Article 2.01 it was specifically described otherwise. Fittings molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design and in required tee, bends, elbow, couplings, adapters, and other configurations.

B. Where piping is to be installed, above ground or within structures provide adequate supports and bracing by means of hangers, brackets or concrete supports as may be required by the location.

C. Pipe openings in walls shall be precast or core drilled and completely sealed against water seepage with a mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links and nuts with pressure plates wider at ends, the seal shall be link seal manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, Wayne, MI, or equal.

2.05. UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Provide 4-inch wide metallic detectable-type underground warning tape over all non-metallic buried piping.

B. Tape shall be colored yellow with warning legend describing buried piping.

C. Tape shall be manufactured by Seton; EMED Company; THOR Industries; Panduit; or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Verify that trench cut, excavated base and pipe bedding are ready to receive pipe and that excavations and pipe bedding dimensions and elevations are as shown on Drawings.

B. All pipe or fittings which have been damaged in transit or which are obviously deformed or refinished in any way shall be rejected, marked, and removed from the site the work.

C. Any pipe or fitting which the Owner suspects is improper for the job shall be temporarily rejected, marked, and set aside for subsequent investigation to determine its conformity with the specifications.

D. All pipe fittings and specials shall be carefully inspected in the field before lowering into the trench. Cracked, broken, warped, out-or-round, damaged pipe joints including damaged pipe lining or coatings or specials, as determined by the Owner, shall be culled out and not installed.

1. Such rejected pipe shall be clearly tagged in such manner as not to deface or damage it, and the pipe shall then be removed from the job site by the Contractor at his own expense.

E. The drawings and specifications may contain information relating to conditions below the ground surface at the site of proposed work, but such information is furnished without guarantee as to it being complete or correct. The Contractor shall assume all risk and responsibilities and shall complete the work in whatever manner and under whatever conditions he may encounter or create without extra cost to the Owner. Location of existing underground facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to the Owner by owners of such underground facilities or others, and Owner and Owner do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof.


F. The Contractor shall perform exploratory excavations in advance of this work to verify the location, depth, size, and material of existing utilities which may interfere with the work to be performed under this contract. All damage to existing utilities shall be the Contractor’s cost to repair or replace.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. The Contractor shall have on the job site with each pipe laying crew, all the proper tools, gauges, pipe cutters, lubricants, etc. to handle, cut and join the pipe.

B. Flat-bottom trenches of required width shall be excavated to the necessary depth as required and maintained in accordance with Section 02225, Trenching.

C. Prior to installing the pipe foundation material, trenches shall have all water removed and all work performed in a dry trench. Pipe installation in frozen trench bottom is not permitted.

D. All pipes, fittings and specials which are to be installed in the open trench excavation shall be properly bedded in and uniformly supported on pipe foundations of the type specified in Section 02225, Trenching, Type A-2 and shown on the Drawings. In particular, stones 2 inches and larger shall be removed from the bearing surface of the pipe foundation.

E. Pipe foundation bedding material shall be spread in maximum 8-inch layers and each layer shall be compacted up to the spring line of the pipe.

F. Compaction methods include hand tamping with T-bars, flat heads, shovel slicing as well as mechanical compactors.

G. The Contractor shall perform his bedding operations with care to maintain line and grades.

H. Suitable holes or depressions shall be provide in the pipe bedding to permit adequate bedding of bells, couplings, or similar pipe projections.

3.03. LINES AND GRADES

A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, surveying instruments, and tools to establish and maintain all lines and grades. The Contractor shall have personnel on duty or on standby call, at all times, who are qualified to check line and grade of pipe lines as they are installed.

B. During construction, the Contractor shall provide the Owner, at his request, all reasonable and necessary materials, opportunities, and assistance for setting stakes and making measurements, including the furnishing of one or two rodmen or chainmen as needed at intermittent times.

C. The Contractor shall carefully preserve bench marks, reference points and stakes established by the Engineer or Owner, and in case of willful or careless destruction by his own operations he will be charged with the resulting expense to reestablish such destroyed control data and shall be responsible for any mistakes or delay that may be caused by the unnecessary loss or disturbance of such control data.

3.04. TOLERANCES

A. Pipes shall be installed at the lines and grades shown on the Drawings.

B. Minimum depth of cover shall be maintained shown on the Drawings or as described herein.


3.05. INSTALLATION

A. Installation of ductile iron pipe or plastic pipe to be in conformance with AWWA C600 or ASTM D2774, respectively, except as modified in this Section or referenced Sections or as shown on the Drawings.

B. The Contractor shall furnish slings, straps and/or approved devices to provide satisfactory support of the pipe when it is lifted. Transportation from storage areas to the trench shall be restricted to operations which can cause no damaged to the pipe or lining or castings.

C. The pipe shall not be dropped from trucks onto the ground or into the trench.

D. Each pipe section shall be placed into position in the trench on the pipe bedding in such manner and by such means required to cause no injury to the pipe, persons or to any property.

E. The method of laying and jointing the pipe shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and as approved by the Owner. Each pipe shall be aligned with that already in place, forced home completely with horizontal axial movement and held securely in position. The bell of each pipe length to be laid in the same direction the installation is proceeding.

F. At the joints, enough depth and width shall be provided to permit the pipe layer to reach entirely around the pipe so that the joints may be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Mechanical type joints shall be tightened within the AWWA recommended torque range.

G. Pipes, fittings, and specials shall be firmly bedded in the pipe foundation and shall have full bearing throughout their entire length, which shall be accomplished by combination of shaping the bedding and adequately compacting the pipe bedding and backfill under and around the pipe to the spring line of the pipe. The remaining backfill placed in 12-inch lifts to 1-foot above the crown or the pipe in accordance with Table 1, Minimum Compaction Requirements, of Section 02228, Compaction. The remaining backfill installed in accordance with Sections 02225, Trenching and 02228, Compaction.

H. When installed in tunnels, pipes shall be blocked in such a manner as to take the weight off the bells. Pipe laid in normal trench excavation shall not be laid on wood blocking.

I. Backfill material within 12 inches of the pipe shall be free of stones greater than 2 inches in any dimension.

J. Refer to Section 02225, Trenching, for other installation guidelines and requirements.

K. To deflect a pipe joint, first join the pipe in the proper manner and then deflect the pipe within the allowable deflection recommended by the manufacturer.

L. Manufactured pipe plugs or temporary bulkheads shall be placed in the open ends of sewer pipes whenever pipe installation is stopped overnight, over weekends, or whenever dirt or debris could enter the pipe during construction. Newly installed pipe shall not be used to remove groundwater from trench.

M. Ceramic epoxy coating shall be field applied to the first 6-inches of force main piping on the exterior of the pipe.

N. All epoxy coated ductile iron pipes that are field cut shall be coated at the spigot end.


3.06. PIPE CONNECTIONS

A. The following connection methods shall be used when connecting dissimilar pipe materials or when connecting new pipe to existing pipe:

Type to Type


Coupling Cast

Coupling MJ

Adapter Butt

Fused Electro- fusion

PVC Gasketed

Repair Sleeve

Flanged Coupling Adapter

Sch 40/80 PVC to Sch 40/80 PVC

SDR, Sch 40/80 PVC to CIP/DIP

SDR, Sch 40/80 PVC to asbestos cement

CIP/DIP to CIP/DIP CIP/DIP to asbestos cement

SDR PVC to SDR PVC

B. Cast Couplings - For pipe sizes up to 16 inches, couplings to be ductile iron fittings, Smith-Blair Model 441 or 442, or equal with stainless steel bolts and nuts. The couplings shall receive two coats of coal tar epoxy paint on all exterior surfaces prior to installation.

C. Restrained Couplings - Restrained couplings shall be provided as necessary for pipe sizes up to 12 inches instead of cast couplings when connecting ductile iron pipe, C900 PVC or SDR 26 pipe. Coupling shall be Series 3800 by EBAA Iron, Inc. or equal.

3.07. TEMPORARY PLUGGING

A. At all times when pipe laying is not actually in progress, the open ends of the pipes shall be closed temporarily with pipe plugs or by other means such that there is no possibility of any water or foreign material entering the line. If water is in the trench when work is resumed, the plugs shall not be removed until the water has been removed and work can proceed in a dry stable trench.

3.08. CLEANING PIPELINE

A. At the conclusion of the work, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all new pipes by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood, etc., which may have entered during the construction period.

1. If, after this cleaning, any obstructions remain, they shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Owner. Pipes shall be flushed at a rate of 2.5 feet per second for a suitable duration.

B. Where required the Contractor shall use mechanical methods to clean pipes when flushing does not remove all obstructions or material.

3.09. TESTING

A. Testing of the force main pipelines shall be performed in accordance with Section 02741, Pressure Tests of Force Mains.


B. Any section of pipe that fails the pressure or leakage test shall be dug up and replaced or permanently repaired as approved by the Owner. The replaced or repaired section shall be retested.

3.10. ENCASEMENT

A. Where shown on the Drawings, pipes shall be encased in Class 2500 concrete. Details and requirements for encasement of pipes are described in Section 02225, Trenching.

B. Requirements for encasement of pipes 10 inches and smaller, shown under a base slab, are described in Section 02225, Trenching.

C. Where shown on the Drawings, pipes shall be encased in a polyethylene sleeve.

1. Damage to wrapping during pipe laying or backfilling operations shall be repaired with additional sleeve material and adhesive tape.

3.11. VALVES

A. Valve details are shown on the Drawings.

B. Refer to drawings for locations of valves to be installed on this project.

C. Valve boxes shall be installed vertically and valve box extensions shall not impede use of T-wrench.

3.12. PROXIMITY TO WATER MAINS

A. Whenever possible, pressure sewers shall be laid with a minimum of 10 feet horizontal separation between the sewer and potable water lines. Should a lateral separation of 10 feet not be possible, the following methods of protection must be employed:

1. Lay sewer and water main in separate trench.

2. Lay the sewer and water main in same trench with the water main at one side on a bench of undisturbed earth.

3. In both above cases, the water main invert shall be 18 inches above the sewer crown and there shall be a minimum of 3+ feet of horizontal separation between the pipe outside diameter.

B. Whenever sewers must cross under water mains, the sewer shall be laid at such an elevation that the top of the sewer is at least 18 inches below the bottom of the water main. When the elevation of the sewer cannot be varied to meet the above requirements, the water main shall be relocated to provide this separation or reconstruct the sewer line (per water line standards) with mechanical-joint, cement lined ductile iron pipe for a distance of 20 feet on each side of the sewer. One full length of water main should be centered over the sewer so that both joints will be as far from the sewer as possible. The sewer shall not be located above the water main.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02741

PRESSURE TESTS OF FORCE MAINS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pressure testing of force mains.

B. Test requirements.

C. Required replacement or repair if test fails.

D. Project records.


A. Section 01026 - LUMP SUM ITEMS: Requirements applicable to Lump Sum prices for the work of this Section.

B. Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

C. Section 02740 - SEWAGE FORCE MAINS

1.03. REFERENCES

A. AWWA C-600 - Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances

1.04. TEST REQUIREMENTS

A. All force mains and pressure sewer systems shall be tested in accordance with AWWA Standard C-600. The following procedure shall be used:

1. All newly installed pipe or any valves section thereof, shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure 50 percent in excess of the working pressure at any point in the section being tested, but in no case less than 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two hours.

2. The Contractor shall accomplish the required tests by individually testing each section of the installed main.

B. Test Pressure Restrictions - Test pressure shall:

1. Not exceed pipe or thrust restraint design pressures.

2. Be of at least three-hour consecutive duration.

3. Not vary by more than +5 psi.

4. Not exceed twice the rated pressure of the valves when the pressure boundary of the test section includes closed valves.

C. Leakage Test

1. All leakage tests shall be conducted concurrently with the pressure test. Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02741-1 PRESSURE TESTS OF FORCE MAINS

2. Leakage Defined - Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly installed pipe, or any valved section thereof, to maintain pressure within 5 psi of the specified test pressure throughout the duration of the test after the pipe has been filled with water to the test pressure.

3. The rate of leakage shall not exceed 11.65 gallons per day, per mile of pipe, per inch of nominal pipe diameter based on a test pressure of 150 psi. To calculate allowable leakage in gallons per hour (gph) for other test pressures, refer to Table 6 of AWWA C600, A copy of which is at the end of this Section, including the basic formula for calculating leakage.

4. If the section of force main tested does not meet the test pressure requirement within 5 psi or the allowable leakage rate is exceeded, the test shall be considered a failure.

1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. For each test, submit completed GHD Form 31.



B. Contractor to complete and submit for each test the GHD Form 31 for recording data for flushing and testing pressure pipe (see form at end of this Section). Owner shall fill out form and both Contractor and Owner shall sign upon completion.


A. Submit proof of testing as required by local, county or state agencies and this section of the specifications.


A. Measure length of test section.

B. Measure quantity of water used to maintain test pressure during test period.

C. Measurements required to complete GHD Form 31.

1.09. COORDINATION

A. Contractor is responsible for obtaining water for flushing and pressure test.

B. Provide 48-hour notice to local water department, if potable water for flushing and testing is required.

C. Owner of existing water system to operate all valves and hydrants unless Contractor has been authorized by Owner to operate water systems valves and hydrants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. WATER SUPPLY

A. Contractor shall supply water for flushing from clean, clear potable sources acceptable to the Owner.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02741-2 PRESSURE TESTS OF FORCE MAINS

B. All water for flushing shall be furnished and disposed of in accordance with all federal, state, and local requirements by the Contractor at his expense.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Backfilling of the pressure pipe trench to ground surface or road surface shall be in place and completed, except for final paving, for seven calendar days or as approved by the Owner prior to start of testing of each section of force main.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. The Contractor shall supply all plugs, pumps, weirs, gauges, etc., necessary to conduct the tests, including means to accurately measure the quantity of water used to maintain test pressure during the test period.

B. Flush all piping systems with water prior to testing. Flushing shall be sufficient to remove all dirt/debris from force main.

3.03. TESTING

A. Pressure and leakage tests shall be conducted on all force main and pressure pipe.

B. The Owner shall witness all tests.

C. All test results shall be recorded on GHD Form 31 attached at the end of this section.

D. Contractor is responsible for temporary connections to facilitate filling of force main, release of air from force main, and pressure testing. Connection devices shall be reviewed by Owner before starting testing. All temporary connections shall be plugged after a successful test.

E. When filling force mains with water for flushing or testing, a direct connection from potable water source to force main is strictly prohibited.

F. Pressurization - Each valved section of pipe shall be slowly filled with water. The specified test pressure, based on the elevation of the lowest point of the pipe or section under test and corrected to the elevation of the test gauge, shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe.

G. Air Removal - Before applying the specified test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the pipe and valves.

H. Examination - Any exposed pipe, fittings, valves, and joints shall be examined carefully during the test. Any damaged or defective pipe, fittings, or valves that are discovered following the pressure test shall be repaired or replaced with sound material and the test shall be repeated.

I. All visible leaks, regardless of the amount, shall be repaired.

J. If the section being tested fails to pass the pressure or leakage test, the Contractor shall determine, at his own expense, the source or sources of leakage, and he shall permanently repair or replace all defective materials and/or workmanship. The extent and type of repair as well as results, shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. The completed pipe installation shall then be retested and required to meet the pressure and leakage requirements of this test.


K. Testing and retesting shall be completed prior to final paving.

L. The use of sealants, applied from outside or inside of pipe, is not acceptable.

(continued)


FLUSHING AND TESTING OF FORCE MAINS TABULATION SHEET

Job No.________________ Location Contract No. ___________ Contractor Project Contractor’s Representative Observed by

FLUSHING Date____________ Weather __________________ Temperature Section Flushed_____________ ____ ft. of ____-inch diameter pipe Line Flushed__________ hrs. _________ min. @ ___________ gal/min. Line Flushed Through_______________________ Manhole #_________

PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING Date _____________ Weather Section Tested ____ ft. of ___-inch diameter _____ pipe in ___-ft laying lengths Time Started ______ Time Finished ______ Elapsed Time Test Pressure: Start ____________ psi Finish ____________ psi Allowable leakage, as calculated ________________________ gallons Actual leakage gallons

Pass _________ Fail _________ Ductile Iron Pipe/HDPE PVC Pipe

*133,200

PSDL =

7,400PND

L =

L = Allowable leakage in gallons/hour S = Length of pipe tested (linear feet) D = Nominal diameter of pipe (inches) P = Average pressure during test, psi N = Number of joints *Refer to C600 for additional allowance leakage against closed metal-seated valves.

WITNESS: OWNER Name Title Signature

WITNESS: CONTRACTOR Name Title Signature

GHD Form No. 31

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02980

SITE REHABILITATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Topsoil, fertilizer, seeding, mulching and planting.

B. Site rehabilitation of fences and all other artificial features.

C. Site modifications and development to meet new conditions.

D. Removal and disposal of all excess materials, equipment, trash and debris used for, or resulting from, the work included in this Section.


A. Section 01026 - LUMP SUM ITEM: Requirements applicable to lump sum prices for the work of this Section.

B. Section 01039 - COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

C. Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS

D. Section 02223 - BACKFILLING: Rough grading.

1.03. REFERENCES

A. The American Association of Nurserymen Standards - ANSI Standard 2-60.1, “Nursery Stock.”

B. Soil Conservation District of the Department of Agriculture.


A. Areas and Features to be Restored

1. All areas, including natural features occurring thereon, which are damaged or disturbed by the Contractor’s operations, shall be restored, repaired or replaced to the same or superior condition which existed prior to construction or as modified herein or as shown on the Drawings.

2. Artificial features shall be restored equal to a new condition or as modified herein or as shown on the Drawings.

1.05. SUBMITTALS


B. Topsoil - Submit sieve analysis and characteristics of topsoil as listed in PART 2 - MATERIALS.

C. Seed mixture data.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 02980-1 SITE REHABILITATION

1.06. PACKING AND SHIPPING

A. All seed furnished for this project shall be delivered in standard size unopened bags of the vendor, showing weight, mixture, vendor’s name and guaranteed analysis.

1.07. STORAGE

A. Seed shall be properly stored in dry conditions at the site of the work.

1. Any seed damaged or spoiled during storage shall be replaced by the Contractor.

1.08. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Topsoil shall not be delivered or placed in a frozen or muddy condition.

B. Seeding is to be done on dry or moderately dry soil.

1. Seeding is to be done when the wind velocity does not exceed 5 miles per hour.

1.09. SCHEDULE

A. The Contractor is advised to do all seeding during the periods of May 1st to June 15th, or August 15th to October 1st.

1. Seeding may be conducted under unseasonable conditions without additional compensation, and at the option and full responsibility of the Contractor.

1.10. GUARANTEE

A. Any new, reestablished, replaced or disturbed plant material that fails to respond properly within the one-year guarantee period shall be replaced as specified above at the Contractor’s expense.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIAL

A. Topsoil

1. Topsoil shall be natural, fertile, friable agricultural soil capable of sustaining healthy vegetative growth.

2. Topsoil shall meet the following gradation requirements free of stones, roots, sticks and other foreign substances:

GRAIN DIAMETER SIEVE SIZE PERCENT PASSING BY

WEIGHT 6.3 mm 6.3 mm 100 4.75 mm No. 4 60-85 .075 mm No. 200 20-45 .002 mm -- 7-27


a. Topsoil shall contain less than 52 percent sand.

3. The pH of topsoil shall be between 5.0 and 7.0.

4. Topsoil shall contain no less than 6.0 percent organic matter.

5. Topsoil may be from previously excavated, stockpiled and protected materials, provided the materials meet the requirements for topsoil.

B. Fertilizer

1. General Fertilizer

a. Fertilizer shall be a complete, partially organic, commercial 10-6-4 fertilizer.

b. All fertilizer shall contain a minimum of 10 percent nitrogen, 6 percent available phosphorous and 4 percent potash.

c. Other commercially available fertilizers, such as 20-10-10 and 12-6-6, may be utilized provided that spreading rates are adjusted to provide the aforementioned minimum requirements for nitrogen.

2. Plant Fertilizer - As recommended by local Soil Conservation District of the Department of Agriculture for the type(s) of soil(s) and plant(s).

C. Seed

1. All seed shall be fresh, recleaned and of the latest crop year.

2. Each component shall meet or exceed the minimum State and Federal requirements for purity and germination for that component.

3. The weed content of each component shall not exceed 0.1 percent.

4. The following seed mixture is suggested for lawns or cultivated (landscape) areas:

PERCENT BY WEIGHT

VARIETY PURITY GERMINATION

50 Kentucky Blue Grass 85% 80% 20 Red or Chewing Fescue 97% 80% 30 Red Top 92% 90%

a. Variations may be recommended by qualified personnel, but shall not be used without approval by the Owner.

D. Mulch for Tree or Shrub Plantings - Mulch shall consist of dry, clean, hardwood chips.

E. Mulch for Seeded Areas - Mulch shall be oat, wheat or rye straw, or hay, free from noxious weeds and other materials which may interfere with the establishment of a healthy stand of grass.

F. Plantings - Trees, shrubs, vines, ground cover and other vegetation to be replaced or installed new as specified which meet the requirements of the American Association of Nurserymen.


1. Classifications of plants, dimensions, planting procedures, etc., shall conform to ANSI Standard Z-60.1, “Nursery Stock.”

G. Peat Moss - As recommended by the supplier of nursery stock.

H. Metal Edging

1. Edging shall be 3/16-inch thick by 4-inches high steel in 16- and 20-foot lengths.

a. Secure edging with 16-inch long tapered steel stakes at 30 inches on center.

b. All steel materials shall be painted with one coat of epoxy primer and two coats of epoxy finish.

I. Weed Barrier - Weed barriers shall consist of two plies of 6-mil thick black polyethylene film.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Determine that surface area is ready for fine grading and/or to receive topsoil and seeding or plantings.

1. Remove trash, debris, large stones and other foreign materials from surface areas to be restored or rehabilitated.

2. Topsoil shall be free of frozen fragments, debris, large stones, and other foreign materials.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. Fine Grading - Areas requiring topsoil shall be fine graded to within 4 inches of finished grade to provide a minimum compacted thickness of 4 inches of topsoil at all locations.

1. All such areas, whether in cut or fill, shall be raked to a depth of 1 inch, be parallel to finished grade as shown or required and shall be free of all stones, larger than 1 inch, roots, rubbish and other deleterious material.

3.03. INSTALLATION

A. Areas to be Developed

1. When the project site is to be modified and developed to meet new conditions, the Contractor shall perform all required grading, topsoiling, fertilizing, seeding, planting, mulching and maintenance of areas, all in accordance with the Drawings and as specified herein.

2. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, the entire unpaved area within the grading limits and within the overall areas excavated and backfilled shall be so developed.

3. New landscaping work and artificial features, if any, are shown on the Drawings and specified elsewhere.

B. The Contractor shall reestablish all existing cultivated or landscape items, trees, shrubs, vines and ground covers as practicable.


1. He shall provide additional or modify existing vegetation, as shown on the Drawings.

2. Existing trees, plants, shrubs, saplings, ground cover, vines, etc., which are disturbed or damaged by the Contractor’s operations shall be replaced with new plant materials.

3.04. TOPSOILING

A. Topsoil shall be furnished and spread in the required areas to a depth of approximately 4 inches.

1. Stockpiled topsoil may be used if it is acceptable to the Owner.

2. In the event this topsoil is not satisfactory, or is inadequate to cover the required areas, the Contractor shall furnish the required amount of satisfactory topsoil from approved sources off the site.

B. The soil shall be uniformly compacted with a light hand roller to a final depth of not less than 2 inches.

1. When finished, the surface shall conform to the finished grades shown or required and shall have a smooth pulverized surface at the time of seeding.

2. Any irregularities shall be corrected before the fertilizer and seed are placed.

3. Any subsequent settlement or displacement of the topsoil shall be restored to an acceptable condition at the Contractor’s expense.

3.05. FERTILIZING

A. The fertilizer shall be uniformly spread by a mechanical spreader at the rate of 25 pounds per 1000 square feet.

1. The fertilizer shall be incorporated into the upper 2 inches of topsoil immediately after spreading.

2. Other commercial fertilizers, such as 20-10-10 or 12-6-6 may be used at rates adjusted to provide the same quantity of nitrogen per 1000 square feet.

3.06. SEEDING

A. Seed shall be applied at a rate of not less than 5 pounds per 1,000 square feet, using a mechanical spreader.

1. Upon completion of the seeding, the area shall be raked lightly and rolled with a light hand roller.

B. The process of spraying grass seeds, water, fertilizer and mulch known as hydro-seeding or hydro-mulching may be utilized provided that water hazards are minimized.

1. Presoaking, the spraying of the materials and watering after spraying shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. All materials, protection, maintenance, etc., shall be in conformance with this specification.

3. The mulch may be a wood fiber material compatible with the spray equipment.


3.07. PLANTING

A. All new plant materials which are to replace existing plant materials shall be of the same genus and species as the original, and shall be placed in the same location as the item being replaced.

1. The size of the new plant materials shall, if practical, match that of the item being replaced, consistent with normally available sizes from nursery stock.

2. Depending on the size and type of material, and when ordered by the Owner, guy wires, stakes, anchors and wrappings shall be furnished and installed in a proper manner to brace and protect the plant.

3. The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable, water and maintain all reestablished, replaced or disturbed plant materials until final acceptance of total.

B. Plant shall be set plumb and true.

1. Shape area around saucer to form drainage grades as shown on the Drawings.

C. Install wooden posts, guy wires and hose section for protection as shown on the Drawings.

1. Provide three guy wires per planted item.

D. For all trees of 2-inch caliber or larger, wrap with tree wrap.

1. Begin at base of tree and work upward to the first branches.

2. Tie the burlap wrap with cord (no synthetic cord nor wire) at 2-foot intervals and at the bottom and top.

E. Place weed barriers on prepared subgrade at depth shown on the Drawings.

1. Turn up weed barrier at all edges and corners.

F. Place washed stone over weed barriers to the specified depths.

1. Rake stone to produce a smooth, uniform surface.

G. Install metal edging such that the top edge projects 1/4-inch above surrounding soil and stone.

3.08. MULCHING AND PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall protect and maintain seeded areas to assure a full even stand of grass.

1. Immediately after seeding and rolling, the Contractor shall apply oat, wheat or rye straw, or hay, free from noxious weeds, as a mulch, to a loose depth of about 1 inch.

2. The Contractor shall perform all watering and reseeding as necessary for a minimum of 30 days and until final acceptance of the Contract, to ensure the establishment of a uniform stand of specified grasses.


3.09. MAINTENANCE

A. Any portion of seeded areas failing to produce a full uniform stand of grass from any cause, shall be reseeded at full rate and refertilized at one-half rate and protected and maintained until such a full stand has been obtained.

B. Plantings to be maintained for one year.

3.10. SPECIAL CONDITIONS

A. Damaged Trees - Vegetation which has been damaged by site preparation activities and deemed non-functional by the Owner, shall be replaced by the Contractor with vegetation of the same caliper, genus and species at no additional compensation to the Contractor.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03001

CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Miscellaneous concrete.

B. Formwork.

C. Reinforcing steel bars and accessories.

D. Concrete mixes.

E. Bonding agent.

F. Concrete finishes.

G. Concrete curing.

H. Concrete slab sealer.

I. Non-shrink grout.

J. Adhesive system to install dowels and bolts.

1.02. REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

ACI 211.1 Selecting Proportions for Concrete ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete ACI 304 Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting ACI 306 Cold Weather Concreting ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete ACI 309 Practice for Consolidation of Concrete ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement ACI 315R Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structures ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM C31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 03001-1 CONCRETE

ASTM C39 Compressive Strength of Concrete Specimens ASTM C88 Soundness of Aggregates ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete ASTM C136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM C143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete ASTM C150 Portland Cement (Rev. B) ASTM C231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C618 Fly Ash and Pozzolan for Use in Concrete ASTM C989 Iron Blastfurnace Slag for Use in Concrete

1.03. SUBMITTALS

Submit shop drawings and catalog cuts for the following:

A. Concrete Mix Design - Concrete mixes used on this project shall be either established mixes verified by “Field Test Data”.

All data shall be dated within the last year. Partial submittal will not be reviewed.

1. List amount and sources of mix ingredients:

• cement • pozzolans • fine aggregate • coarse aggregate • water • admixtures

2. Certified tests of fine and coarse aggregates meeting the requirements of ASTM C33.

3. Certified statement from source of fine and coarse aggregates pertaining to history of alkali-aggregate reactivity (ASR) or DOT confirmation that ASR issues are not evident at the aggregate source.

4. Strength Test Reports - The average strengths shall be higher than the required average compressive strengths (f’cr) as per ACI 301, paragraph 4.2.3.3.

5. Typed letter signed by officer of supplier stating that all ingredients for proposed mix(es) are identical and from the same source as ingredients used for concrete in provided test reports.

6. Certified mill test of cement and fly ash or slag.

7. One-page admixture catalog cuts.

B. Submit one-page catalog cut for bonding agent.

C. Submit catalog cuts for grout used to set equipment and adhesive system used to install dowels and bolts into concrete and masonry.

D. Submit catalog cut for slab sealer.


1.04. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate all concrete placements with mechanical and electrical plans and specifications.


A. Bar Identification and Mill Test Reports - All steel shall have the manufacturer’s mill marking rolled into the bar which shall indicate the producer, size, type, and grade.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. REINFORCING STEEL

A. Deformed Reinforcing Steel - ASTM A615, Grade 60.

2.02. CONCRETE

A. Concrete Classes and Their Use

Mix A – All concrete

B. See the following table:

MIX

28-DAY COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH (PSI)

AGGREGATE SIZE

PER ASTM C33

MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT

(LBS/CY)

MAXIMUM WATER/CEMENT

RATIO (BY WEIGHT)* A 4,500 #57 575 .42

*W/C ratio calculations shall include weight of free water in fine and coarse aggregates. Provide 6 percent (+1 percent) air-entrained concrete. Slump for flat work shall not exceed 4 inches.

2.03. MATERIALS

A. Cement shall be Portland cement Type I or Type II and shall conform to ASTM Specification C-150.

B. Pozzolans

1. Fly ash shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C618 Class F except as modified below:

a. Loss of Ignition, Maximum - 5.0 percent.

b. Maximum Retained on #325 Sieve - 30 percent.

2. For ground iron blastfurnace slag concrete, the blastfurnace slag shall meet the requirements of ASTM C989. A blend of Portland cement and ground iron blastfurnace slag shall contain no more than 50 percent slag. The resulting blend of cementitious material shall meet the requirements of ASTM C595.


3. The ground iron blastfurnace slag material shall be specifically manufactured to produce higher concrete strengths and provide greater resistance to chloride penetration and sulfate attack.

C. Aggregates

1. Fine Aggregate (Sand)

a. Natural or manufactured siliceous sand.

b. Quantity of deleterious substances as approved by DOT or as limited by Table 1 of ASTM C33.

c. Graded within the limits of ASTM C33.

2. Coarse Aggregate

a. Crushed stone or crushed gravel.

b. Quantity of deleterious substances as approved by DOT or as limited by Table 3 of ASTM C33 for Class 4S aggregates.

c. Graded within the limits of ASTM C33.

3. Five cycle soundness tests for fine and coarse aggregates shall meet the requirements of ASTM C33.

PERCENT LOSS

MAGNESIUM SULFATE SODIUM SULFATE

Fine Aggregate 15 10 Course Aggregate 18 12

4. Source of fine and coarse aggregates shall not have a history pertaining to alkali-aggregate reactivity. In the event that aggregate source with potential alkali-aggregate reactivity is unavoidable, at least two of the following measures shall be taken to minimize this reaction:

a. Provide low alkali cement (<.6 percent alkalies).

b. Use lithium-based additives.

c. Test aggregates to show non-reactive.

d. Use fly ash or slag.

D. Mixing Water - Clear and potable.

E. Acceleration admixtures associated with cold weather concrete are not allowed to shorten cold weather protection periods.

2.04. OTHER PRODUCTS

A. General - Admixtures other than those specified may only be used after written approval by the Engineer.


B. Admixtures shall be as manufactured by Master Builders Company, Ltd; W.R. Grace, Inc.; or equal.

C. Water Reducing Admixture - All concrete shall contain a water reducing admixture that meets the requirements of ASTM C494 Type A (Water Reducing). This admixture shall not contain chlorides.

D. Bonding Agent - For all equipment pads, and when placing freshly-mixed concrete against existing hardened concrete, use a corrosion inhibiting, non-vapor barrier, extended open time bonding compound. Use Sika “Armatec 110 EpoCem” or Sonneborn “Sonoprep.”

E. Non-Shrink Grout - shall be a fluid or flowable non-gas liberating cement base product which is manufactured premixed, requiring only the addition of water at the job site. All components shall be inorganic.

Non-shrink grout shall have a minimum strength of 4500 psi in 7 days for precision support of bases for smaller equipment of 10 HP or less.

F. Adhesive anchor system to install bolts and dowels into concrete shall be a premeasured, two-part, self-mixing, cartridge-type adhesive, such as “HIT HY 150” or “HIT HY 20” by Hilti, the “Acrylic-Tie Adhesive” by Simpson; Strong-Tie Company, Inc.; or equal.

G. Liquid curing compound shall be a dissipating, VOC-compliant, water-based membrane forming with fugitive dye, conforming to ASTM C309, Type 1-D. Use Euclid Chemical Company “Tammscure WB 30D,” SYMONS Corporation “Resi-Chem Clear Cure 1D,” or equal.

H. Slab sealer shall be Sika Corporation “Sikagard 701W,” Euclid Chemical Company “Clearseal 300,” or equal.

I. After material sources have been established and approved, these sources shall not be changed for the duration of the project.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. FORMS

A. Earth cut forms shall not be used; all concrete shall be formed.

B. Contractor is responsible for design of all forms for strength, integrity, and to produce the desired end result.

3.02. TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES

A. Tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only, not to positioning of reinforcing steel or embedded items.

1. Variation from plumb: 1/4 inch 2. Variation from level or from grades specified: 1/4 inch 3. Variation in the sizes and location of sleeves, floor openings, and wall

openings: +1/4 inch

4. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions in the thickness of slabs and walls: -1/4 inch +1/2 inch

3.03.


3.04. CONCRETE COVER

A. Clear concrete cover shall conform to ACI 318. However, in no case shall the clear cover be less than 1-1/2 inches.

B. The use of brick or CMU block supports for reinforcement shall not be permitted. Only special made wire bar supports or special cast, precast concrete blocks shall be allowed.

C. Light gage sheet metal plates shall be used under all bar supports bearing on grade to prevent settlement during construction activities.

3.05. CLEANING

A. Prior to concrete deposition, reinforcing steel shall be free from mortar, mud, loose mill and rust scale, grease, oil or any other coatings, including ice, that would destroy or reduce bond with the concrete.

3.06. PREPARATION, MIXING, AND HANDLING OF CONCRETE

A. Batch Plant Requirements - Measurement of materials at the batch plant shall be in accordance with ASTM C-94.

B. Mixing Methods - All concrete shall be ready mixed to meet the requirements of ASTM C94.

A written delivery slip or ticket, prepared and signed by the plant operator shall be made out at the proportioning plant for each truck load batch. Each slip shall show the following information:

• Truck number • Date and time truck is batched • Ticket number • Mix designation of concrete (per paragraph 2.02.A) • Cubic yards of concrete • Cement brand, type and weight in pounds • Weight in pounds of each size and type of aggregate • Admixtures, brand and weight in pounds and ounces • Moisture content of fine and coarse aggregates • Water added to the batch at the plant • Water added to the batch at the job site

The driver shall record the number of gallons of water added at the job site. In no case shall the w/c ratio be exceeded. Any truck delivering concrete to the job site without a delivery slip will be rejected and shall immediately depart from the job site.

C. Heating and Cooling of Materials - The batch plant shall be equipped to heat aggregates and water, or cool water with ice, and cool aggregates by shading and/or spraying with cool water to obtain acceptable concrete delivery temperatures in the range of 55 to 85 degrees F. Aggregates shall not contain ice or have frozen lumps nor shall they be heated to a temperature over 120 degrees F.


3.07. CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of 48 hours in advance of placement to allow sufficient time for inspection and for any corrective measures which are subsequently required.

B. Concrete shall be placed in accordance with ACI 304 and ACI 318.

C. Concrete shall be placed and vibrated in a single lift.

D. Curing and protection of the concrete shall begin immediately after completion of the finishing operation.

3.08. FINISHING

A. Forms shall not be removed in less than 24 hours after concrete placement, and then only if the concrete has attained sufficient strength and the surface is not marred or damaged during form removal.

B. As-Cast Wall and Slab Edge Finishes: Edges of foundation pads and equipment pads shall receive a smooth form finish as described below.

1. Type II - Smooth Form Finish - The form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. Tie holes and defects shall be patched. All fins shall be completely removed and the entire exposed vertical surface shall be “cleaned up” using a grinder for a uniform appearance.

C. Slab Finishes – All slabs and equipment pads shall receive a Type B Troweled Finish as described below.

1. Type A - Floated Finish - After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, the concrete shall not be worked further until ready for floating. Preferably a magnesium float will be used.

Floating shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared and when the surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation. During or after the first floating, planeness of surface shall be checked with a 10-foot straightedge. If water has been brought to the surface by the rough floating operation, additional floating shall not proceed until this water has evaporated. The slab is further floated, with all high spots cut down and all low spots filled during this procedure. The slab shall be finish floated to a uniform sandy texture.

2. Type B - Troweled Finish - The surface shall first receive a Type A floated finish. It shall then be power troweled for thorough consolidation.

Apply a broom finish after trowel consolidation to top of all slabs used as walking surfaces.

3.09. CURING

A. All freshly placed concrete shall be protected from adverse weather elements, and from defacement. As soon as the concrete has been placed and horizontal top surfaces have received their required finish, provision shall be made for providing sufficient water for hydration and preventing loss of moisture from the concrete for at least a seven-day period.


B. Slabs and Other Flatwork

1. After finishing and immediately after the concrete surface has hardened enough to prevent dilution of the cement paste, spray the surface with water to provide continuous moist curing for at least the first 24 hours.

2. After the initial 24-hour period, soak with water and cover for an additional six days with waterproof paper or white polyethylene blankets. Wet burlap coverings may be used if the burlap is kept wet by continuous sprinkling with water. Lap the cover material at least 12 inches, covering the top and sides of the concrete.

3. If cover material is not used, the concrete surfaces shall be kept continuously wet by spraying or other approved methods.

C. In hot weather conditions (defined in ACI 305), provide curing procedures as outlined above along with additional provisions required by ACI 305.

D. In cold weather conditions (defined in ACI 306) where heated enclosures are provided and continuous moist curing of walls and slabs is not practical, use liquid membrane forming curing compounds with fugitive dye, applied at twice the manufacturer’s standard rate of application.

3.10. SEALING OF CONCRETE

A. All interior and exterior slabs shall be sealed as follows:

1. The first coating shall be applied as soon as possible after finishing and curing, and the second coating shall be applied near project completion after installation of all equipment and piping and after completion of other related construction activities.

2. Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.11. REPAIR OF CONTRACTOR-CAST CONCRETE

A. Areas of concrete in which cracking, spalling, or other signs of deterioration develop during initial curing or thereafter until the end of the guarantee period shall be removed and replaced, or repaired in accordance with this Article.

The Contractor may propose to use a specific method most suitable to the situation and have the method approved by the Engineer prior to repair. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s product data sheets and recommended application procedures to the Engineer for approval.

B. Random shrinkage or structural cracks shall be repaired utilizing a low viscosity, 100 percent solids, two-component epoxy resin injection system. Remove all dust, debris or disintegrated material from crack or void by use of oil-free compressed air or vacuuming.

Inject epoxy in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Where cracks extend through members and are accessible, seal bottom of crack which is to receive the epoxy. Epoxy resin system shall be Sika Chemical Corporation “Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod LV,” or equal.

C. All spalled, weakened, damaged or disintegrated concrete shall be removed to sound concrete.


For spalled areas involving depths generally less than 3 inches, utilize a polymer-modified cementitious repair mortar, such as Sika Corporation “Sikatop 122 or 123,” Tamms Industries “Duraltop Fastset or Gel,” or equal. Surface preparation, mixing, priming and application shall be in conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.12. TESTING FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The Owner shall hire and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform concrete testing for quality assurance.

B. This testing shall consist of calculation of w/c ratio; measuring slump; air content; and tests for the compressive strength. Tests shall be in accordance with the relevant ASTM specifications.

C. The Contractor shall schedule and provide 48 hours’ notice to the independent testing laboratory. The Contractor shall provide free access to work and cooperate with the testing laboratory.

D. One set of 5- 4”x8” cylinders shall be obtained for both the generator pad placement and the control building foundation placement. One cylinder shall be tested at 7-days, three at 28-days, and one shall be reserved. If the placement is considered a “cold weather placement” per ACI 306, an additional cylinder shall be obtained and field-cured adjacent to the placement site with the same protection provided the cast concrete. The field cured cylinder shall remain for 28 days, and then shall be transported to the testing facility for laboratory curing for a further 28 days.

E. Copies of all test reports shall be mailed directly to the Owner and Engineer by the testing laboratory.

F. The Owner shall have the right to reject any concrete that does not obtain 85% of specified design strength at 28-days. Rejected concrete shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. The Contractor retains the right to obtain filed cores to prove adequate concrete strength. Such testing shall conform to ASTM C42.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03481

PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Factory design and manufacture of precast concrete wet well vault and accessories.

B. Quality assurance and control.

C. Field installation of vault.

D. Waterproofing and epoxy coating of vault.

E. Installation of custom hatch and fall protection.

F. Vault schedule.


A. Section 03001 - CONCRETE

1.03. REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute

ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete Buildings ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement ACI 315R Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structures ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete ACI 350 Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures

B. American Society for Testing and Materials

ASTM C150 Portland Cement ASTM C207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes ASTM C478 Precast Reinforced Manhole Sections ASTM C858 Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures

C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

CRSI 63 Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars

1.04. DESIGN

A. Vault shall be designed by a licensed professional engineer registered in the State of Maryland, and engaged by the manufacturer. All dead loads, live loads, flotation, erection, temperature and anchorage stresses shall be considered.

B. The calculations and drawings shall be prepared in a neat and legible manner, sealed by the licensed Professional Engineer performing the calculations.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 03481-1 PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS

C. The sealed calculations shall include a summary page to list all design loads, material specifications, and design criterion used in the calculations.

D. For design, groundwater shall be assumed at grade and the design shall provide for a 15 percent factor of safety against floatation.

E. Vault shall be designed for full height soil lateral loads assuming 90 pcf equivalent fluid pressure. Design shall also include 100 psf uniform lateral surcharge pressure. Top slab shall be designed for H-20 live loading.

1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. Submit evidence that shows current PCI and/or MDOT certification.

B. Submit shop drawings of wall sections and base proposed for this project, include joint design and related details for field assembly as applicable.

C. Submit certification of conformance with Contract Documents, ASTM C478, and ASTM C858.

D. Submit catalog cut and installation details for custom aluminum hatch with fall protection grate, exterior waterproofing system, ladder and slab sealer.

E. Submit catalog cut for epoxy coating system used at interior of wet well vault.

F. Under a separate submittal, provide two file copies of calculations indicating each load and load combination. Other than the summary page, calculations will not be reviewed by the Owner’s Engineer; calculations will not be returned to the Contractor.


A. Manufacturer shall be a PCI-and/or MDOT-certified plant for production of precast vaults as specified herein.

B. Aggregate used in producing concrete shall be from MDOT approved sources.

1.07. QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION

A. The quality of all materials, the process of manufacture and the finished sections shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer. Such inspection may be made at the place of manufacture, and or on the work site after delivery.

B. All sections shall be inspected for general appearance, dimensions, soundness, etc. The surface shall be dense, close-textured and free of honeycomb, cracks, roughness, exposure of reinforcement, damaged joints, or other irregularities.

C. All sections which have been damaged after delivery will be rejected, or if already installed, shall be repaired or removed and replaced entirely at the Contractor’s expense.

Rejected sections shall be tagged as such, segregated from other sections, and removed from the job site.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. CONCRETE

A. Minimum 28-Day Compressive Strength - 4500 psi.

2.02. REINFORCEMENT

A. Reference Section 03001, Concrete.

2.03. PRECAST OR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE BASES

A. Design and manufacture of precast concrete bases shall conform to the requirements of this Section and ASTM C478 and C858. Cast-in-place concrete bases shall conform to Section 03001, Concrete.

B. Bases shall conform to the dimensions indicated on the Drawings or as required by design. The horizontal joint at the top of the base shall be compatible with that of the precast wall section.

2.04. PRECAST CONCRETE WALLS

A. Design and manufacture of precast concrete walls shall conform to the requirements of this Section and ASTM C478 and C858.

B. All tongue-and-groove joints in the precast wall, including the joint at the top of the base, shall be made up using gaskets.

The precast sections shall be provided with a special groove to receive and hold the gasket in position during joint assembly.

C. After joint assembly, the gap between sections shall be packed on the inside and outside with “Masterflow 713” by Master Builder; “Five Star Grout” by U.S. Grout Corp.; or equal, and shall be troweled smooth so that no projections remain on the inside. There shall be concrete to concrete bearing between the various sections. The gasket shall not support the weight of the section.

2.05. PRECAST CONCRETE SLAB TOPS

A. Precast reinforced concrete slab tops shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM C478 and C858. Openings and frames shall be provided for hatches where shown. Slab tops shall be set in a full bed of mortar.

B. Slab tops shall be crowned minimum 3/16” per foot to allow drainage.

C. Concrete slab tops shall receive a non-slip broom finish and a concrete sealant per Section 03001, Concrete.

2.06. PIPE SEALS

A. Where polyethylene, plastic or PVC pipe is utilized, connections between vault and pipes shall be made with flexible rubber sleeves with stainless steel straps and bolts. Provide an elastomeric waterstop gasket where sleeve sizes are not commercially available.


B. The annular space around the pipe wall or sleeve shall be packed with “Masterflow 713” by Master Builders, “Five Star Grout” by U.S. Grout Corp.; or equal. Before the grout has set, the Contractor shall recheck invert elevations of the pipe.

C. For steel or ductile iron pipe, provide a pipe sleeve sized to accept the pipe plus link seal.

2.07. HATCHES

A. Hatch shall be a custom design as shown on the Contract Drawings and as described herein.

1. Aluminum single leaf, watertight gasketed floor hatch. Floor hatch shall be furnished with flush stainless steel hinges, aluminum stiffeners, and lockable slam latch. Hatch shall have extended aluminum frame to match concrete thickness with continuous anchor and shall be constructed of 1/4-inch minimum aluminum diamond pattern plate design.

2. Hatch shall be provided with auto-lock, hold-open devices and torsion spring assemblies. All hardware, including all parts of the latch and lifting mechanism assemblies, hold-open arms and guides, and all brackets, hinges, pins and fasteners shall be stainless steel or bronze.

3. The hatch shall be designed for H-20 wheel load.

4. Aluminum hatch shall be similar to Bilco “PCM” or as manufactured by Washington Aluminum Company or equal.

B. Provide a hinged aluminum grate fall-through protection system.

2.08. OPENINGS AND INSERTS

A. All openings required in the concrete shall be reinforced with additional diagonal bars tied to each layer of wall or slab reinforcement.

B. Any required inserts and wall openings shall be coordinated with mechanical requirements prior to casting the units.

2.09. WATERPROOFING

A. Around the exterior of all wall joints, apply the “Bituthene” primer and membrane waterproofing system by W.R. Grace Company, or equal.

B. Exterior wall surfaces shall be waterproofed using manufacturer’s standard two-coat system, specifically designed to waterproof the exterior of concrete surfaces in a below-grade submerged condition.

For the top slab, the concrete shall be sealed with two coats of a slab sealer per Section 03001, Concrete.

2.10. EPOXY COATING

A. The interior surface of the wet well vault shall receive a factory applied epoxy coating. Apply at wall surfaces (full height) and ceiling. Surfaces shall be abrasive blasted and allowed to cure minimum 28 days prior to coating.

Follow manufacturer’s instructions for primer, application temperature, etc. Use Sika “Sikagard 62”, Euclid Chemical Company “Duraltex 1707”, or equal.


2.11. ALUMINUM LADDER

A. Rungs

1. Square or rectangular in profile with ridged or serrated non-slip top surface, capable of supporting a 300-lb. concentrated load at any point along the length of the rung without failure or permanent deformation.

2. Vertical spacing of rungs to be equal throughout the length of the ladder, from floor to upper landing, and not to exceed 12 inches.

3. Centerline of rungs to be 7 inches from wall or other surface or obstruction opposite climber.

B. Ladders to conform to the minimum requirements of OSHA 1910.27.

C. Side rails shall be 1/8-inch minimum thickness rectangular tube or channel in profile and to have minimum dimensions of 1-1/16 inches wide by 2-1/2 inches deep.

D. Side rails shall be supported by aluminum brackets with a maximum vertical spacing of 48 inches o.c. Secure brackets to wall with 5/8-inch diameter Type 316 stainless steel adhesive anchors, 4-inch minimum embedment.

E. Construction

1. 6061-T6 or 6063-T5 mill finish aluminum.

2. All welds and sharp edges to be ground smooth.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade elevations for vault base is correct, excavation is dewatered, and subgrade is precompacted.

B. Verify that rejected units have been removed from site.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. Provide foundation mat of run-of-crusher stone to support base. Mat shall be 6 inches minimum depth and shall bear on sound undisturbed earth; excavate and remove subgrade material as necessary to reach sound subgrade.

B. Stone subgrade mat shall be a minimum of 1 foot greater than the footprint of the vault base, and shall be compacted to a uniform, level surface.

3.03. INSTALLATION

A. Vault shall be accurately located and uniformly supported on the foundation mat in a level position.

B. Install wall sections in properly oriented position; follow manufacturer’s instructions for joining together each section using the gaskets. Pack joints with grout.

C. Units shall be laid-up plumb and level.


D. The Contractor is responsible for the integrity of all materials and protection against flotation during the installation and backfilling process.

3.04. COATINGS

A. All exterior below-grade wall joints shall be sealed using a membrane waterproofing system. Next, all below-grade wall surfaces shall be waterproofed, applied per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. After installation is complete, the cover slab shall be sealed as specified above.

C. After installation of mechanical equipment in the wet well vault, provide touch-up painting at joints and at damaged epoxy finish.

3.05. BACKFILLING

A. Backfill, being careful to provide full support under connecting pipes using compacted bedding material.

B. All visible leaks shall be sealed in an approved manner.

3.06. SCHEDULE OF VAULTS

VAULT IDENTIFICATION REFERENCE DRAWING Wet Well Vault M-01

END OF SECTION


SECTION 05500

MISCELLANEOUS FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Shop-fabricated ferrous and non-ferrous metal items, including bollards, bearing plates, anchor bolts, wall brackets, specialty pipe supports, etc.


A. Section 03001 – CONCRETE: Adhesive-type concrete anchors.

B. Section 03481 - PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS

1.03. REFERENCES

ASTM A36 Structural Steel shapes (36 ksi) ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dip Galvanized ASTM A123 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip Galvanized) on Steel Products ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip Galvanized) on Steel Hardware ASTM A276 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 ksi Tensile Strength ASTM A325 Structural Bolts, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Tensile Strength ASTM A489 Carbon Steel Eyebolts ASTM A500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in

Rounds and Shapes ASTM A992 Structural Steel Shapes (50 ksi) ASTM B209 Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM B221 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes ASTM B308 Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes ASTM B632 Aluminum Tread Plate ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs AWS A2.0 Standard Welding Symbols AWS D1.1 Welding Code - Steel AWS D1.2 Welding Code - Aluminum SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings - Indicate profiles, sizes, connections, attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of holes, fasteners, and accessories.

B. Include detailed fabrication drawings, erection drawings, bill of materials, finishes, and applicable details.

C. Submit manufacturer’s product data for manufactured items to include details of manufactured product with installation instructions.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 05500-1 MISCELLANEOUS FABRICATIONS

1.05. QUALIFICATIONS

A. Weld procedures and welder personnel must be AWS qualified. Maintain procedures and certificates on file.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS

A. Steel Channels, Angles, and Plates - ASTM A36.

B. “W”-Shape Steel Beams - ASTM A992.

C. “S”-Shape Steel Beams - ASTM A36.

D. Rectangular and Square Hollow Structural Sections (HSS) - ASTM A500, Grade B.

E. Aluminum Sections - ASTM B308 Alloy 6061-T6. Use Aluminum Association shapes.

F. Stainless Steel Beams, Angles, and Plates - ASTM A276, Type 316.

G. Aluminum Checkered Floor Plate - ASTM B632 Alloy 6061-T6.

H. Pipe - Schedule 40; steel ASTM A53 Grade B; aluminum alloy 6061-T6.

I. Fiberglass Fabrications - All structural shapes shall be manufactured using the pultrusion process with a minimum glass content of 45 percent. Use extra corrosion-resistant vinyl ester resin material for all shapes and plates. All fiberglass resin shall contain an integral UV inhibitor and be produced with a resin-rich surface to protect against exposure and wear.

J. Bolts - F593 stainless steel, Type 316; ASTM A325 carbon steel and F1554 anchor rods galvanized to ASTM A153; ASTM A489 steel eyebolts. Stainless bolts to have raised letter of symbol indicating manufacturer.

K. Bolted Attachment to Concrete - Use adhesive anchors as specified in Section 03001, Concrete. Expansion anchors are not allowed unless specifically requested by Contractor for a particular application and approved by Engineer.

L. Welding Materials - AWS D1.1 and D1.2; type required for materials being welded.

M. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces - Zinc-rich paint.

N. Isolate dissimilar metals with dielectric and appropriate fasteners. Fasten aluminum with Type 316 stainless steel bolts.

O. Bollards - 6-inch steel pipe; concrete filled, crowned cap; prime and finish paint.

P. Anchorage for metal items cast in concrete shall have welded-on strap anchors 2 feet o.c., made from 1/4-inch thick x 1-inch wide x 6-inch long bar stock with each end bent 90 degrees.

2.02. FINISHES

A. Prepare steel surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-6.

B. Do not prime surfaces where field welding is required. Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 05500-2 MISCELLANEOUS FABRICATIONS

C. Galvanize in accordance with ASTM A123 or A153. Provide minimum 2.0 oz/sq.ft. galvanized coating.

D. Prime paint steel items, not galvanized, with one coat and top coat after installation.

E. Unless noted otherwise, aluminum shall be mill finish.

F. Aluminum in contact with concrete or masonry shall be backpainted with bituminous paint.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Ensure that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. Measurements and dimensions to be field verified.

B. Beginning of installation means Contractor accepts existing conditions.

3.02. FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

C. Welds shall be continuous unless noted otherwise.

D. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings - Unobtrusively located, consistent with design of component.

E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Aluminum and fiberglass fabrications require stainless steel fasteners.

F. Fiberglass Fabrications - At all cuts and drilled holes, shall be sealed with vinyl ester resin to provide maximum corrosion resistance.

3.03. FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness - 1/8-inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.

B. Maximum Offset Between Faces - 1/16-inch.

C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members - 1/16-inch.

D. Maximum Bow - 1/8-inch in 48 inches.

E. Maximum Deviation From Plane - 1/16-inch in 48 inches.

3.04. INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS.


D. Obtain Engineer approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not indicated.

E. Prior to installation, aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete and/or masonry require backpainting.

F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed.

G. Top paint all exposed steel and galvanized surfaces as scheduled.

H. Fiberglass Fabrications - At all field cuts and drilled holes, shall be sealed with vinyl ester resin as supplied by the manufacturer to provide maximum corrosion protection.

3.05. INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb - 1/4-inch.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment - 1/4-inch.

C. Maximum Out-of-Position - 1/4-inch.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 09900

PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface preparation, field and shop application of paints and coatings.

B. Color coding of pipe and conduits.

C. Coordination of shop and field painting.


A. Section 02740 – SEWAGE FORCE MAINS

1.03. REFERENCES

ASTM B117 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus ASTM D522 Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings

(Method A, Conical Mandrel) ASTM D870 Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Water

Immersion ASTM D1014 Standard Practice for Conducting Exterior Exposure Tests of Paints and

Coatings on Metal Substrates ASTM D1653 Moisture Vapor Transmission ASTM D2794 Impact ASTM D3363 Hardness ASTM D4541 Adhesion (Type II Fixed Alignment Adhesion Tester) ASTM D4541 Adhesion (Type V Self-Aligning Adhesion Tester) ASTM D4585 Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Controlled

Condensation ASTM D16 Standard Terminology for Paint-Related Coatings, Materials, and

Applications ASTM D4060 Abrasion Resistance (CS-17 Wheel, 1000 Grams Load) ASTM D3359 Adhesion by Tape Test ASTM G53 QUV Exposure (UVA-340 Bulbs, 4 Hours Light, 4 Hours Dark) ASTM G85 Prohesion NACE NACE International (formerly “National Association of Corrosion Engineers”)

– certification program NSF International ANSI/NSF Standard 61 SSPC-Volumes 1 and II

Steel Structures Painting Council - Steel Structures Painting Manual

SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning SSPC-SP5 White Metal Blast Cleaning

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 09900-1 PAINTING

SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP10 Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal N.S.F. (National Sanitation Foundation)

1.04. DEFINITIONS

A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.

1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a complete schedule of paint systems and surface preparations proposed. Submit paint color samples.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. MANUFACTURERS

A. Paint and paint products shall be as designated for the following uses and as manufactured by the following manufacturers or approved equal:

1. Industrial - Materials shall be as manufactured by Tnemec Company, Inc., or DuPont.

B. Products for each specified function and system shall be of a single manufacturer.

C. Where thinning is necessary, only the products of the particular manufacturer furnishing the paint shall be used and all such thinning shall be done in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

2.02. MATERIALS

A. Paint - Refer to Table A-1, Coating System Schedule.

B. All materials used on this project, whether shop applied by equipment manufacturer or field applied by Contractor, shall comply with all current federal, state and local Clean Air Act-related regulations. It shall be the responsibility of equipment manufacturers to comply with laws in effect at their painting facilities. Where laws or regulations prohibit field applications of any scheduled paint product, Contractor shall submit for Owner’s approval, an alternate product of similar performance characteristics which complies with those laws. If approved, those products shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Lettering

1. Stencil lettered legends on the piping at the horizontal or vertical center lines. Place letterings below the horizontal center line where pipelines are too close together or where located above normal line of vision.

Locate lettered legends and bands at the following locations:

a. Where pipes enter or leave the room space.

b. At junction points and points of distribution.


c. Adjacent to valves and equipment.

d. At changes in direction.

e. At five (5) feet maximum intervals along the piping where necessary for identification.

Stencil same size arrows as letters, indicating direction of flow pointing away from the legend. Letter sizes and band widths are given in the schedule below:

OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF PIPE COVERING

HEIGHT OF LETTERING

WIDTH OF COLOR BAND

¾ to 1-¼ inches

½ inch

4 inch

1-½ to 2-½ inches

¾ inch

6 inch

3 to 6 inches

1-¼ inches

8 inch

7 to 10 inches

2-½ inches

12 inch

over 10 inches

3-½ inches

12 inch

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Ensure that substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Correct any condition that may potentially affect proper application.

3.02. SURFACE PREPARATION

A. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared with the objective of obtaining a clean and dry surface free from dust, rust, scale and all foreign matter. No painting shall be done before surfaces meet requirements of paint manufacturer.

B. Hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place prior to cleaning and painting, and not intended to be painted, shall be protected or removed during painting operations and repositioned upon completion of painting operations.

C. All surface preparations shall be in strict accordance with the recommendations of the paint manufacturer.

D. Ferrous Metals

1. All ferrous metal to be primed shall have all rust, dust, and scale removed by abrasive blast cleaning in accordance with SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) procedures designated in the Specifications or on Contract Drawings. Cleaned metal shall be primed or pretreated immediately after cleaning to prevent rusting. If rusting beyond ASTM Rust Grade 8 occurs in the field, rusted portions of shop-primed ferrous metals shall be field-cleaned in accordance with SSPC blast cleaning specification appropriate for service and immediately field primed.


2. All ferrous metals not primed in shop shall be abrasive blast cleaned to SSPC-SP10 Near White Blast or an SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast, depending on exposure, prior to application of any primer, pretreatment, or paint.

E. Nonferrous Metals - All nonferrous metals, whether shop or field primed, shall be solvent cleaned (SSPC-SP1) prior to application of primer.

F. Touchup - Any abraded areas of shop or field applied coatings shall be touched up with the same type of shop or field applied coating, even to the extent of applying an entire coating, if necessary. Touchup coatings and surface preparations shall be in addition to and not considered as the first field coat.

3.03. APPLICATION

A. Contractor shall be responsible for cleanliness of all painting operations and use covers and masking tape to protect work. Contractor shall protect not only his own work, but also all adjacent work and materials by adequate covering with drop cloths.

B. Any unwanted paint shall be carefully removed without damage to finished paint or surface. If damage does occur, the entire surface adjacent to and including damaged area shall be repainted without visible lap marks.

C. Do not use plumbing fixture or waste piping for mixing of paint or disposal of any refuse material. All waste shall be disposed of properly into a suitable receptacle located outside of building.

D. All paint shall be applied without runs, sags, thin spots, or unacceptable marks. Paint shall be applied at the rate specified to achieve minimum dry mil thickness required. Additional coats of paint shall be applied, if necessary, to obtain dry film thickness specified.

E. A minimum of 24 hours drying time shall elapse between application of any two coats of paint on a particular surface, unless otherwise recommended by coating manufacturer. Longer drying times may be required for abnormal conditions in concert with manufacturer’s recommendations.

F. No painting whatsoever shall be accomplished in rainy or excessively damp weather when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when the general air temperature cannot be maintained at 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or above throughout entire drying period.

3.04. FINISHING SHOP PAINTED MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. All fabricated steel work and equipment delivered to job site shall receive at factory at least one shop coat of approved prime paint in concert with paint system required by these Specifications. Surface preparation prior to shop painting shall be scheduled in Table A-1. All shop painted items shall be properly packaged and stored until they are incorporated in work. Any painted surfaces that are damaged during handling, transportation, storage, or installation shall be cleaned, scraped, and patched before field painting begins so that work shall be equal to original painting at shop. Equipment or steel work that is to be assembled on the site shall likewise receive a minimum of one shop coat of paint at factory. Paint and surface preparation used for shop coating shall be identified on equipment shop drawings submitted to Owner.

B. Where exact identity of shop primer cannot be determined, or where primer differs from that specified, Contractor shall perform blast cleaning appropriate for service, followed by specified paint system. In lieu of above, Contractor has the option of shipping bare metal to job site and performing appropriate blast cleaning, followed by field prime coat of specified material immediately thereafter.



A. Prior to receiving a Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall arrange for manufacturer to inspect the application of his product and shall submit his report to Owner identifying products used and verifying that said products were properly applied and that paint systems were proper for the exposure and service. The manufacturer’s representative shall also certify that all coats in each system are compatible with one another.

B. Each field coat of priming and finishing paint shall be inspected by the Owner or his authorized representative before the succeeding coat is applied. The Contractor shall follow a system of tinting successive paint coats so that no two coats for a given surface are exactly the same color. Areas to receive black protective coatings shall be tick-marked with white or actually gaged as to thickness when finished.


TABLE A-1

COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE Pipe inside the building: Grey with Black Label

SYSTEM M-4 TNEMEC DUPONT REMARKS Surface preparation

SSPC-SP6 Commercial blast SSPC-SP6 Commercial blast

Shop

Prime coat Series N69-1211 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 3.0-5.0 mils

CORLAR 2.1 ST 3.0-5.0 mils

Shop

Intermediate coat

Series N69-Color Hi-Build Epoxoline II 3.0-5.0 mils


--

Finish coat Series 1075-Color Endura-Shield II 2.0-3.0 mils

IMRON 2.8 HG 2.0-3.0 mils

Total DFT = 10.5 mils minimum

Pipe in Wet Well: Grey


SSPC-SP10 Near White blast

SSPC-SP5 White blast

--



Shop

Intermediate coat



--

Finish coat Series N69-Color Hi-Build Epoxoline II 3.0-5.0 mils



Vent Pipe: Grey with White Band


SSPC-SP10 Near White blast

SSPC-SP5 White blast

--



Shop

Intermediate coat



--

Finish coat Series N69-Color Hi-Build Epoxoline II 3.0-5.0 mils



END OF SECTION


SECTION 11300

PUMPING EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Gauges on discharge side of pumps.

B. Nameplate requirements.

C. Shop and field tests.

D. Services of manufacturer’s representative.


A. Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS

B. Section 01640 – EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

C. Section 01650 - STARTING OF SYSTEMS

D. Section 09900 - PAINTING

E. Section 11310 – SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMP STATION

1.03. SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Sections 01300, Submittals; 01640, Equipment – General, and as specified herein. Submittals shall include as a minimum:

1. Pump Discharge Pressure Gauges

a. Submit a complete schedule of all gauges and proposed ranges.

2. Pump Nameplate Designations

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. GAUGES

A. One pressure gauge shall be installed on the discharge side of each pump, as shown on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with the following specifications:

1. Gauges shall be of the bourdon tube type with 4-1/2-inch diameter dial and with diaphragm seal.

2. Case and ring shall be black epoxy coated aluminum, bourdon tube shall be phosphor bronze with a brass tip and window shall be glass.

3. Gauges shall be stem mounted and shall be installed close to the suction and discharge flanges of the pump.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 11300-1 PUMPING EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

4. Gauges shall be calibrated to read zero at atmospheric pressure.

5. The discharge gauges shall be calibrated to read from 0 feet to a minimum of 5 feet of water pressure above pump shutoff head.

6. Gauges shall be Ashcroft No. 1379A (discharge) and No. 1379AC (suction); U.S. Gauge; or equal.

7. All gauges shall have continuous duty, clamped Teflon diaphragm seals as manufactured by Ashcroft, Type 300; U.S. Gauge; or equal.

8. Each diaphragm seal shall have Type 316 stainless steel upper and lower housings.

9. The lower housing shall be a threaded connection.

10. Gauges and diaphragm seals shall be by same manufacturer and shall be shipped as complete units, factory filled with silicone fluid.

11. Each gauge and diaphragm seal unit shall be connected with the necessary brass pipe fittings and a brass stopcock.

12. The Contractor shall coordinate with the various pump manufacturers so that all gauges are of one manufacturer.

13. No gauges shall be required for the sump pump.

2.02. NAMEPLATES

A. A stainless steel nameplate shall be furnished for each pump with stamped characters readable under ordinary lighting conditions.

1. Pump nameplate shall give the rating in gallons per minute, rated head, speed and efficiency.

2. Additional data may be in accordance with the manufacturer’s regular practice.

3. Nameplates shall be securely attached and NOT PAINTED OVER.

2.03. SHOP TESTS

A. Tests shall be performed on the pumps in accordance with Section 01640, Equipment - General.

1. Each pump unit shall be shop tested to determine compliance with the specifications, and the manufacturers shall submit to the Engineer and receive approval of five certified copies of test data before shipment of the pumps is made.

2. The Engineer reserves the right to witness the shop test on each pump before the pumps are assembled for shipment to the job site.

3. The pump manufacturer shall give the Engineer ample notice of these tests so that the Engineer can arrange to witness the tests.

4. Final acceptance, however, will be dependent upon the satisfactory operation and performance after installation.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. PAINTING

A. Painting, including surface preparation, shall be in full accordance with Section 09900, Painting.

1. The pump manufacturer shall coordinate fully with the Contractor the system and application of paints used.

3.02. INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Pumping equipment shall be installed by the Contractor in accordance with Section 01640, Equipment - General.

3.03. FIELD TESTS

A. Field tests shall be made in conformance with Section 01640, Equipment - General.

B. Preliminary field tests shall be made after installation of the pumps. Final field tests shall demonstrate the following:

1. That the units have been properly installed and are in proper alignment.

2. That the units operate without overheating or overloading of any parts and without objectionable vibration.

3. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts.

4. That the pumps can deliver the specified pressure and quantity at the rated speed. All field tests shall be conducted with clean water supplied by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide all temporary flow measurement devices as necessary to achieve accurate measurement of the pumped flow during the field tests.

5. That the pumps can pass the size of solids specified and the type of liquid for which the pumps are to be used.

3.04. SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE

A. Unless stated otherwise in the individual equipment section, the Contractor shall arrange for the equipment manufacturer to furnish the services of a qualified representative in accordance with Section 01640, Equipment - General.

1. For each series of pumps of the same model and size, the representative shall supervise and check the installation for not less than two days and supervise its initial operation, instruct the operators in operation, proper maintenance and repairs for not less than one day or for a length of time defined in the individual equipment section.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 11310

SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMP STATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Furnishing and installing a duplex submersible sewage pump station inclusive of submersible chopper pumps, custom access hatch and guardrail for wet-well vault, davit crane, wet-well vent, pump guide rail system, lifting chain, valves, discharge piping from pumps to force main complete with all accessories and ready to operate in compliance with the specifications and as shown on the Contract Drawings.

B. Pump manufacturer is responsible for supplying the submersible chopper pumps with motors, guiderail brackets, discharge base elbow, and lifting cable. Contractor is responsible for coordination and supply of all additional items specified.

C. Coordination between the supplier of the pump control panel and the pump manufacturer shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.




C. Section 02733 - SANITARY SEWER PIPING

D. Section 02740 - SEWAGE FORCE MAINS

E. Section 02741 - PRESSURE TEST OF FORCE MAIN

F. Section 03001 - CONCRETE

G. Section 03481 - PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS

H. Section 11300 - PUMPING EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

I. Section 16055 – ELECTRICAL WORK

J. Section 16100 - GROUNDING

K. Section 16903 – AUXILIARY CONTROLS AND RELAYS

L. Section 16990 – CONTROL PANELS

1.03. REFERENCES

A. Standards of the Hydraulic Institute, latest edition.

B. AFBMA Std. 11 – Load and Fatigue Life of Roller Bearings.

C. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel, Carbon Steel.

D. ASTM A48-83 - Gray Iron Castings. Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 11310-1 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMP STATION

E. ASTM A276-83 - Standard Specifications for Stainless Steel and Heat Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes.

F. ASTM A322-82 - Steel Bars, Alloy Standard.

G. NEMA MG1-78 - Motors and Generators.

H. UL 1004 - Motors, Electrical.

I. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.

J. NEC - National Electric Code.

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with the requirements of Section 11300, Pumping Equipment - General.

B. Submittals shall be in accordance with Sections 01300, Submittals; 01640, Equipment – General; and applicable Division 16 specifications and as specified herein. Submittals shall include as a minimum:

1. Complete fabrication, assembly and installation drawings, together with detailed specifications and data covering material used, parts, devices, and other accessories forming a part of the pumping unit.

2. Prior to startup, the Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance manuals and recommended spare parts list for the pump and control panel components.

3. Manufacturer’s equipment warranty for both pump and control panel components.

4. Manufacturer’s certificate, including installation certificate and performance affidavit, for all equipment furnished under this section in accordance with Section 01640, Equipment - General.

5. Submit catalog cut for davit crane.

6. Shop drawings shall present complete and accurate information relative to all working dimensions, equipment weights, assembly, and section views, and all necessary details pertaining to coordinating the work of the contract. Shop drawings shall contain information such as special tools and other items of information that are required to demonstrate detailed compliance with the Contract Documents.

7. Where deviations from the contract specifications and drawings are proposed, a list of these deviations shall be furnished with the submittal with reference to either the specification section or drawing.

8. Pump-Specific Submittals

a. Pump manufacturer, type, model, size, weight, dimensions, speed, size of discharge nozzle, and type of bearings.

b. Motor manufacturer data shall include type, model, type of bearings and lubrication, weight, rating size of motor, temperature rating, service factor, efficiency at full load and pump design points, full load current, and locked rotor current.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 11310-2 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMP STATION

c. Certified pump performance curve showing the shutoff head, minimum safe operating capacity, head, capacity, maximum pump capacity, efficiency, and brake horsepower for the specified speed. The design total dynamic head at the specified capacity shall clearly ne indicated on the curve. The pump curve shall include a minimum of five operating points including shutoff head, run out condition, design operating point and two additional points in order to clearly define the pump curve.

d. Written certification that the motors are explosion proof suitable for a Class 1, Division 1 Groups C and D atmosphere.

e. Manufacturer’s equipment warranty.


A. The manufacturer of the equipment specified herein (as named) shall be regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of the type of equipment described herein for at least 10 years. The manufacturer’s experience shall include at least 20 installations of similar design as that specified herein for municipal wastewater applications that have been in operation for at least 5 years.

B. Upon request from the Engineer, the pump manufacturer shall prove financial stability and ability to produce the products within the specified delivery schedules.

C. All centrifugal pumps shall have a continuously rising curve. In no case shall the required horsepower at any point on the performance curve exceed the rated horsepower of the motor.

1.06. FACTORY TESTING

A. Each pump shall undergo a certified hydrostatic test at 125 percent of the pressure developed at shutoff head. During the test, the casing shall show no undue deflection, nor shall the pump casing show signs of sweating through the metal or leakage at the gaskets or develop any cracks.

B. A certified performance test shall be performed on each unit utilizing its specified drive.

C. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute of Test Standards for Submersible Pumps (ANSI/HI 11.6-2001).

D. The Contractor shall submit five copies of the certified pump performance tests to the Engineer.

1.07. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Ship pumping units in weathertight, sealed containers with flange protective covers, and protective covers during storage.

B. Comply with pump manufacturer’s written rigging instructions for handling.

1.08. SPARE PARTS

A. The Contractor shall provide the following spare parts for each new pump furnished:

1. One set of bearings.

2. One mechanical seal.


3. One set of impeller.

4. One cutter bar.

5. One cutter nut.

1.09. GUARANTEES AND WARRANTY

A. After completion, the Contractor shall furnish manufacturer’s written guarantees, that the pumping equipment will operate with the published efficiencies, heads, and flow ranges and meet these specifications.

B. The pump manufacturer shall provide a written warranty certifying the equipment complies with these specifications is free of defects and material and workmanship. The pump motor shall include a standard 1-year warranty from start-up and the pump components shall include a 1-year warranty from start-up against defects in workmanship and materials under normal use and service.

C. Components failing to perform as specified by the Engineer, or as represented by the manufacturer, or as proven defective in service during the warranty period, shall be replaced by the manufacturer without cost of parts or labor to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. PUMPS - GENERAL

A. Submersible chopper pumps shall be supplied by one manufacturer and include a direct connected, submersible type motor. The pumps shall be manufactured by:

1. Hayward Gordon

2. Vaughn Co., Inc.

3. Or equal

B. Each pump shall be provided with a Type 316 stainless steel nameplate, as specified in Section 11300, Pumping Equipment – General, and include the following:

1. Manufacturer’s name, address and telephone number.

2. Model Number.

3. Serial Number.

4. Head, capacity and speed at design point.

5. Motor horsepower and speed .

C. Dimensions and locations shown on the Contract Drawings for the pumps and accessories are based on a single manufacturer. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating pipe penetrations and access hatch locations and pump placement for alternative manufacturers and models at his or her expense.


2.02. PUMP PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. The submersible chopper pumps shall be capable of continuous operation while pumping unscreened sewage containing hair, rags and fibrous materials.

B. The integral pump/motor shall not require external cooling with heat transfer accomplished by convection through the stator wall to the surrounding liquid. Designs requiring cooling jackets shall not be acceptable.

C. The materials shall be chopped/macerated and conditioned by the pumps as an integral part of the pumping action. The pump must be capable of chopping and pumping high concentrations of solids such as plastics, heavy rags,hair balls, wood, paper products and stringy materials without plugging, both in tests and field applications.

D. Submersible chopper pumps shall conform to the following:

1. Number of Units - 2

2. Service - Intermittent

3. Drive - Constant Speed

4. Capacity at Design Point (gpm) - 340

5. Maximum Pump Head (TDH) at Design Capacity (ft) - 30

6. Minimum Pump Efficiency at Design Point - 43

7. Minimum Shutoff Head (ft) - 40

8. Minimum Pump Capacity (gpm) - 150

9. Maximum Pump Capacity (gpm) - 410

10. Maximum Pump Head (TDH) - 28 Maximum Pump Capacity (ft)

11. Liquid to be Pumped - Raw Sewage

12. Maximum Pump Speed (rpm) - 1750

13. Maximum Motor Size (hp) - 10

14. Power Supply - 460V/3Ø/60 Hz

15. Discharge Flange Size (in) - 4

16. Flange Rating (psi) - 150

2.03. PUMP CONSTRUCTION

A. Casing and Back Pull-Out Plate: The pump casing shall be of semi-concentric design with the first half of the circumference being cylindrical beginning after the pump outlet and the remaining circumference spiraling to the discharge flange. The pump casing shall be constructed of ASTM A48 cast iron. Back pull-out plate or split shims shall be constructed ASTM A48 cast iron and allow removal of pump components and allow external adjustment


of impeller-to-cutter bar clearance. Both the casing and back pull-out plate shall be smooth, free of blow holes and imperfections for good flow characteristics. Flanged discharge connection shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B16.1, Class 125 or ANSI B16.5 Class 150.

B. Impeller: The pump impeller shall be the semi-open type with sharpened vane edges. Pump out vanes or partial back shroud must be provided across the entire diameter of the impeller on the backing plate, in order to reduce seal area pressure and draw lubricant down from the reservoir should leakage occur. The impeller shall be constructed of ASTM A148 grade 90-60 heat treated cast alloy steel case hardened to a minimum 60 Rockwell C hardness and shall be dynamically balanced. Primary chopping/maceration of materials shall be accomplished by the action of the sharpened leading edges of the impeller moving across the cutter bar at the intake openings with a set clearance between the impeller and cutter bar of 0.010 to 0.015 inches. The impeller shall be keyed to the shaft and secured to the shaft with either a hardened threaded cutter nut or deflector nut and have no axial adjustment. Impellers which extend past the cutter bar shall not be acceptable.

C. Cutter Bar: The cutter bar shall be recessed into the pump bowl and extend diametrically across the intake opening to within 0.015 to 0.030 inches of the cutter nut or deflector nut. Segment bars shall extend inwardly to within 0.050 inches of the shaft, thereby assuring all incoming solids will be chopped and conditioned. The cutter bar shall be machined from either Ti alloy steel plate or cast from ASTM A148 Gr. 90-60 cast alloy steel and heat treated to a minimum 60 Rockwell C hardness.

D. Upper Cutter: The upper cutter shall be cast steel and heat treated to a minimum of 60 Rockwell C hardness. The upper cutter shall be threaded into the back pull-out plate above the impeller and designed to cut against the pump-out vanes and impeller hub. Alternatively, the area behind the impeller shall be protected from fouling by the cutting and expulsion of serrated and sharpened teeth in the rear of the impeller shroud sweeping across the spiral grooves in the back-plate.

E. Cutter Nut: The cutter nut shall be secured to the impeller to the shaft and designed to cut or deflect stringy material at the pump inlet. The cutter nut shall be heat treated steel with a minimum 60 Rockwell C hardness.

F. Shaft: Pump shaft be directly coupled to the motor shaft with a bolt and keyway. The shaft shall be constructed of AISI 4140 heat treated steel with a minimum diameter of 1.5 inches. Slip clutches and shear pins between the shaft and motor shall not be acceptable.

G. Bearings: All bearings shall be rated for a minimum L10 life of 100,000 hours and separate bearing and seal subassembly. Bearings shall be permanently lubricated with premium moisture resistant grease containing rust inhibitors and shall be suitable for operation over a temperature range of -25 oC to +120 oC.

2.04. SUBMERSIBLE ELECTRIC MOTORS

A. The pump motor shall be explosion proof certified for Class 1, Division 1, Groups C & D hazardous locations by either Factory Mutual (F.M.) or Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) with a 1.15 service factor, NEMA B design and Class F insulation.

B. Motor shall be equipped with tandem independently mounted mechanical seals in oil bath and with dual moisture sensing probes. The inner and outer seals shall be separated by an oil filled chamber. The oil chamber shall act as a barrier to trap moisture. The oil shall provide lubrication to the internal seals. The inner seal shall be a standard UL listed John Crane Type 21 or equal, with carbon rotating faces and ceramic stationary faces. The outer seal construction shall be designed for easy replacement. Outer mechanical seal shall be 316 stainless steel pusher type with tungsten carbide faces. Elastomers shall be Viton®. Motor shall include two normally closed automatic resetting thermostats connected in series and


imbedded in adjoining phases. Motor frame shall be cast iron with the shaft and all other hardware constructed of stainless steel.

C. Motor for pump shall be premium efficient designed for 15 starts per hour.

2.05. POWER CABLE

A. The pump manufacture shall furnish a power cable, moisture sensor cable and a motor thermal overload sensor cable for each pump. The Contractor shall furnish a common protective hose for each pump which will house the cables supplied by the pump manufacture. Contractor shall be responsible for determining the required size and length of the protective hoses.

B. The heavy-duty flexible hose which houses the pump cables shall be secured to the upper guide holder assembly and pulled tight. The protective hose shall safeguard the power cable from abrasion and/or piercing objects in the fluid.

C. Contractor shall coordinate the required length of cable for installation and provide a minimum of 10 feet length to be coiled around the frame mounted cable holder.

2.06. PUMP GUIDE BRACKET AND RAIL SYSTEM

A. The pump guide rail system for each pump shall be a non-sparking design and consist of two stainless steel guide rails, cast aluminum-bronze guide bracket, cast iron discharge elbow flanged elbow confirming to ANSI B16.1, Class 125 with mounting feet and intermediate guide brackets spaced every 10 feet. Pump manufacturer shall provide upper guide bracket, intermediate brackets and base discharge elbow. Contractor shall furnish guide rails and be responsible for coordinating size with pump manufacturer.

B. Pump manufacturer shall furnish 30 feet of Type 304 stainless steel ¼-inch diameter lifting cable for each pump suitable for a safe load of 1,200 pounds. Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing the frame mounted stainless steel cable holder.

2.07. CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

A. Pump control panel, instrumentation, electrical controls and enclosure shall be in accordance with the applicable electrical sections under Division 16.

B. The Contractor shall furnish a high level alarm float switch, as shown on the Contract Drawings and in Section 16900, Instrumentation - General.

C. Provide pump seal fail/thermal protection relays for installation in electrical panels.

2.08. FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface preparation, shop painting and field painting shall be in accordance with Section 09900, Painting.

B. Anchor bolts shall be Type 304 stainless steel HILTI-style epoxy anchors.

C. Back paint metals in contact with concrete with 5 mils of Tnemec Series 66-gray, Hi-Build Epoxoline or Dupont 25 Epoxy.

D. All bolts, nuts, washers, and other fasteners shall be Type 304 stainless steel unless otherwise noted.

E. Isolate dissimilar metals with dielectric unions or couplings suitable for the given application.


F. Welds shall be continuous unless otherwise noted.

G. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make expose joints butt tight, flush and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

H. Where it does not impact equipment performance, all sharp edges of equipment shall be rounded with edge grinding or other means to provide satisfactory paint adherence and prevent injury.

2.09. RESILIENT SEATED GATE VALVES

A. Valves shall be of standard manufacturer and of highest quality, both as to material and workmanship, conforming to the latest edition of AWWA standards specified.

B. Resilient seated gate valves shall conform to AWWA Standard C509-87 and C500-86.

C. All resilient seated gate valves shall provide a full pipe opening when fully opened.

D. All resilient seated gate valves shall be as manufactured by U.S. Pipe Metroseal 250, or equal.

E. All valves shall have the manufacturer’s name monogrammed or initialed by the manufacturer thereon and shall be identified by catalog numbers.

F. All valves shall be provided with hub, spigot, mechanical joint, flange or screwed ends as described herein.

G. Valves, 2 inches in nominal diameter and smaller shall be all brass or bronze.

H. Valves over 2 inches in nominal diameter shall be iron bodied, fully brass or bronze mounted.

I. All surface forming joints or bearing surfaces shall be machined to a perfect fit.

J. All disc and seat rings shall be carefully and thoroughly secured in place with the iron castings machined where the rings are bare and the backs of the rings machined all over.

K. After the rings have been fastened securely in place, the front shall be machined all over to a perfectly true and smooth bearing surface.

L. All valves with non-rising stems shall have valve position indicators.

M. Valves shall open counterclockwise (left) unless otherwise specified.

N. All underground gate valves shall be non-rising stems, 2-inch operating nuts, O-ring seal and shall open counterclockwise (left).

O. Epoxy coat in accordance with C-550-90.

2.10. BALL CHECK VALVES

A. Body and cover shall be cast iron, A126 CL.B.

B. Ball shall be vulcanized Buna-N rubber cover over metal core.

C. Bolts shall be stainless steel.

D. Cover shall be bolted to valve body and allow for frequent inspection/ removal of ball. Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 11310-8 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMP STATION

E. Ball check valve shall be GA Industries Model 240 with flanged ends, or equal.

2.11. STAINLESS STEEL BALL VALVES

A. Stainless steel ball valves shall be provided on air release lines where shown on the Drawings.

B. All stainless steel ball valves furnished are to be of the full port threaded design and manufactured of 316 stainless steel material with UHMWPE seats.

C. Pipe, fittings, and valves are to be of one manufacturer and of the same specified material to assure compatibility of system components.

D. Manufacturers – Apollo, Model 86R-100 or equal.

2.12. COMBINATION AIR/VACUUM VALVES

A. Combination air/vacuum valves shall be of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel with a conical body shape designed to maintain the maximum distance between the liquid and sealing mechanism.

B. The valve shall have a minimum two (2) inch NPT inlet for a 2-inch valve assembly. Combination air/vacuum valves shall be designed with a funnel shaped lower body to ensure that residual sewage matter sinks to the system and gets carried away without remaining in the valve. Combination air/vacuum valves with spherical floats shall not be accepted.

C. Flushing of the system shall be possible while the valve is under pressure by opening the ball valve in the lower part.

D. All taps for combination air valves shall be provided with service saddles.

E. The isolation ball valve shall be provided with NPT threads and connected with stainless steel piping. The isolation ball valve shall be rated for 200-psi service or greater.

F. Valve shall be provided with threaded connection for venting through a pipe to the wet well.

G. Combination air/vacuum valves shall be provided by:

1. ARI

2. Or Equal.

2.13. MATERIALS - DUCTILE IRON

A. Ductile Iron Pipe - AWWA C151/ANSI A21.51: Ductile iron pipe material, minimum rated water pressure of 150 psi with a surge allowance of 100 psi and a safety factor of 2. Flanged ductile iron pipe shall be Class 53.

B. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be double cement lined and seal coated inside and out in accordance with ANSI/21.4/AWWA C104.

C. All wastewater force mains shall be constructed with ductile iron pipe provided with interior corrosion protection coatings as specified herein. All ductile iron wastewater force mains and fittings for sewer construction shall receive an interior ceramic epoxy coating, consisting of an amine cured novalac epoxy containing at least 20% by volume of ceramic quartz pigment, such as manufactured by Protecto 401. The interior coating shall be applied at a nominal dry


film interior thickness of 40-mils. All DIP bells and spigots shall be lined with 8-mils of joint compound by Protecto 401 or approved equal applied by brush to ensure full coverage. All pipe supplied with Protecto 401 interior lining shall be provided free of holidays. Pipe installed with defects in the lining will be rejected. Patching of Protecto 401 coating defects after installation shall not be approved.

D. All exposed ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned and given a shop coat of rust inhibitor primer and field painted according to specification Section 09900, Painting.

E. Fittings shall conform to ANSI A21.10/AWWA C110. Bolt circle and bolt holes shall match those of ANSI B16.1 Class 125 and ANSI B16.5 Class 150 flanges. The flange fittings shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 250 psi.

F. Joints - Fittings shall be flanged joint.

1. Flanges shall be screw-on type flanges and the face of the flange shall be machined after installation of the flange onto the pipe.

2. No raised surface is allowable on cast iron flanges. Flanges shall be 125-pound ASA Flanges rated for a minimum working pressure of 250 psi.

3. The fittings shall be of standard lengths given under the ANSI Specification B16.1, unless otherwise noted.

4. The pipe lengths shall be fabricated to meet the requirements of the Drawings.

G. Gaskets - Gaskets shall be the “ring gasket” type, 1/8 inch minimum thickness, and be constructed of Buna-N with dimensions conforming to AWWA C110.

H. Bolts

1. Size, length, and number in accordance with AWWA C110.

2. Material - ASTM A193, AISI Type 304 stainless steel.

3. Dimensions - ANSI B18.2.1, heavy hex. Bolts shall be of such length that after installation, bolts will project 1/8 to 3/8 inch beyond the face of the nut.

I. Nuts

1. Size, length, and number in accordance with AWWA C110.

2. Material - ASTM A194, AISI Type 304 stainless steel.

3. Dimensions - ANSI B18.2.2, heavy hex.

2.14. VENT PIPE

A. Wet well vent piping shall be ductile iron pipe with 90-degree bends and stainless steel insect screen.

2.15. COUPLING AND ADAPTERS

A. Couplings and/or adaptors shall be used for alignment of similar types of pipe or connecting dissimilar pipe material.


B. Couplings and adaptors shall be provided with Type 304 stainless steel tie rods restrained to the piping.

C. The gasket shall be EPDM and suitable for wastewater service.

D. Bolts and nuts shall be 304 stainless steel high strength low alloy steel with heavy semi-finished hexagon nuts to AWWA C111 standards.

E. The assembly shall be finished with fusion bonded epoxy.

F. Flanged adapters for ductile iron pipe shall be Model 913 by Smith-Blair, Style 127 by Dresser, or equal.

G. Couplings for pipe shall be Model 2100 – Megaflange by EBAA Iron, Model 411 by Smith-Blair, Style 38 by Dresser or equal.

2.16. CABLE HOLDER

A. To support float switches and lifting cables, a stainless steel cable holder shall be provided. The cable holder shall be Type 304 stainless steel with six J-hooks. The cable holder shall be Model J4A by Halliday Products or equal.

2.17. HATCH

A. Provide a single leaf custom hatch. Refer to Section 03481, Precast Concrete Vaults.

2.18. DAVIT CRANE

A. Davit crane and equipment shall be as manufactured by Thern, Inc. or equal.

B. Crane shall be self-supporting unit of tubular construction with a pedestal base. Unit shall be hot dip galvanized construction using stainless steel fasteners and accessories.

C. Crane shall provide 360-degree rotation with a sleeve bearing in the base.

D. Crane boom shall be adjustable with a telescoping boom and a height adjustment with ratchet-style screw jack.

E. Provide manual stainless steel winch attached to crane for load raising and lowering.

F. The cable shall be flexible, high-strength, 304 stainless steel wire rope, and have a load safety factor of at least 5 to 1. Cable shall be of adequate length to reach lower level floor.

G. The load block shall be of rugged construction containing a stainless steel swivel hook with anti-friction bearings.

H. Provide Thern, Inc. davit crane models as follows:

1. Up to 1,000-lb. capacity 5110 M3 GAL

2. Or equal.

2.19. ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Anchor bolts shall be stainless steel adhesive type. Expansion anchor bolts are not permitted.


2.20. PVC PLASTIC PIPE

A. Plastic Pipe - ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC material; bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint.

B. Solvent cement for PVC pipe joint shall conform to ASTM D256. Socket-type fitting shall conform to ASTM D2467.

2.21. PORTABLE FALL ARREST POST

A. Portable Fall Arrest Post shall be Model DH-AP-1 and the stainless steel base plate shall be Model DH-AP-12 as manufactured by Miller DuraHoist or equal.

B. Provide three independent swivel tie-off points for fall arrest anchorage.

C. Design shall include three-stage/four-position telescoping and shall be of aluminum construction.

D. Post shall include leveling screws to allow the system to be plumbed to vertical on inclines.

E. The base anchor plate shall be of stainless steel with epoxy grout and shall have stainless steel anchor bolts and fasteners.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. SITE REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install polyfelt TS600, or equal, over the entire pump station site as shown on the plans. The polyfelt is to be covered with minimum 2 inches of round ½” stone.

3.02. INSTALLATION

A. Pumps shall be installed in a precast concrete wet-well vault as shown on the Contract Drawings. Provide concrete fill benchwalls at the bottom of the wet well vault as recommended by the pump manufacturer. Reference Section 03001, Concrete.

3.03. FIELD TESTS

A. Field tests shall be made in conformance with Section 01640, Equipment - General.

B. Preliminary field tests shall be made after installation of the pumps. Final field tests shall demonstrate the following:

1. That the units have been properly installed and are in proper alignment.

2. That the units operate without overheating or overloading of any parts and without objectionable vibration.

3. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts.

4. That the pumps can deliver the specified pressure and quantity at the rated speed. All field tests shall be conducted with clean water provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide all temporary flow measurement devices as necessary to achieve accurate measurement of the pumped flow during the field tests.


5. That the pumps can pass the size of solids specified and the type of liquid for which the pumps are to be used.


A. The Contractor shall arrange for the equipment manufacturer to furnish the services of a qualified representative, as necessary, to check and supervise the installation for not less than one day at each station and to supervise initial operation, instruct the operators in operation, proper maintenance and repairs, for not less than one additional day. The operator training shall be videotaped. Original tape shall be left with the Owner. A written report covering the representative’s findings and approval shall be mailed directly to the Engineer covering both inspection and instruction.

All times are actual on site times.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 11316

SUMP PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01. DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Furnish, install, and test sump pumps ready to operate, complete with all necessary accessories as specified herein and in compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Pumps shall be complete with motor, controls, level switches, mounting brackets, and all necessary accessories.

C. Sump pumps shall be Type A - Submersible Sump Pump.


A. The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification; provide these sections to the equipment suppliers:

1. Section 01300 – SUBMITTALS

2. Section 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL

3. Section 01600 – MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

4. Section 01640 – EQUIPMENT – GENERAL

5. Section 09900 – PAINTING


A. Pumps shall be capable of operating under the following conditions of service:

Requirement Type A Minimum Pumping Rate (gpm) 20 Head @ Minimum Pumping Rate(ft) 15 Discharge Diameter (in) 1.5 Max. Sphere Size Passing (in) 3/8 Maximum Motor Speed (rpm) 3450 Motor Horsepower 1/3 Cable Length 20 FEET

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Sections 01300, Submittals; 01640, Equipment – General; and as specified herein. Submittals shall include as a minimum:

1. Shop drawings including performance curves.

2. Manufacturer’s operation and maintenance manuals and information.

3. Manufacturer’s equipment warranty.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 11316-1 SUMP PUMPS

1.05. SPARE PARTS

A. None.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. MANUFACTURERS

A. The sump pump manufacturer and model shall be the following or equal:

1. Type A - Goulds Pump, Model LSP03.


A. Submersible Sump Pumps

1. Casing - pump casing shall be constructed of stainless steel.

2. Impeller - each pump shall have a glass-filled thermoplastic impeller and casing designed for solids handling. The impeller shall be threaded or keyed to a heavy-duty stainless steel shaft.

2.03. ACCESSORIES

A. Type A - Submersible Sump Pumps

1. Built-in float switch.

2. Provide sufficient power cord for the pump with adapter to connect to electrical receptacle furnished and installed by others, and wires to connect the pump and controls.

2.04. MOTORS AND DRIVES

A. Type A - Submersible Sump Pumps

1. Motors for the pumps shall be single phase, 120 volts, 60 Hertz, Class F insulation.

2. Motors shall be mounted on the pumps. The motor shall be provided with thrust and radial bearings to carry the entire load, which may be imposed upon it under all operating conditions.

3. The motor shall have a mechanical seal to keep the motor free from moisture. The motor shall be fully submerged in high-grade turbine oil. The power cord shall have an epoxy seal at the motor end. The motor shall be approved by the Underwriters for sump pump application.

2.05. PUMP CONTROLS (TYPE A)

A. The pump supplier shall provide a control system for the sump pumps. The control system shall consist of a piggyback wide-angle float switch.


A. Surface preparation, shop painting and field painting and other pertinent detailed painting specifications shall be in accordance with Section 09900, Painting.


B. All bolts, nuts, washers, and other fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted.

C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

D. Nameplates shall be provided for each piece of equipment.

1. Equipment nameplates of stainless steel shall be engraved or stamped and fastened to the equipment in an accessible location with No. 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins.

2. Nameplates shall contain the manufacturer's name, model, serial number, size, characteristics, and appropriate data describing the equipment performance ratings.

E. Where it does not affect system performance, all sharp edges of equipment shall be rounded with edge grinding or other means to provide satisfactory paint adherence and prevent injury.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. SHOP TESTING

A. Not applicable.

3.02. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Furnish and install the equipment according to the Contract Documents and the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions and elevations and shall notify Owner of any specific differences.

C. Furnish all necessary materials (including lubricants, chemicals, etc.) and equipment (including measuring devices, etc.) for initial operation and testing.

3.03. FIELD TESTING AND INITIAL OPERATION

A. Start-up and initial operation shall be performed in accordance with Sections 01640, Equipment – General; 01650, Starting of Systems; and this specification section.

B. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Owner.

C. Final acceptance of the equipment will be made after the equipment has been demonstrated in the field to meet the performance requirements stated in this specification under all normal operating conditions and verification that the motors are not overloaded in normal operating conditions.

D. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace any components of the system, which fail to meet all specified requirements.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 13120

PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Contractor shall furnish and install one pre-engineered, pre-assembled, precast concrete building as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.

B. Buildings shall be delivered to the job site complete with roof, walls, insulation, exterior doors, interior fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) laminated panels and all related accessories pre-installed by the building supplier.

C. Contractor shall install precast building on foundation as provided by the General Contractor.


A. Specification sections listed below are an integral part of equipment specification, and Contract shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers.

1. Section 01300 – SUBMITTALS

2. Section 03001 – CONCRETE

3. Section 05500 – MISCELLANEOUS FABRICATIONS

4. Section 15140 – SUPPORT AND ANCHORS

5. Section 16055 – ELECTRICAL WORK

B. All electrical equipment and wiring shall be in full compliance with Division 16, Electrical Specifications and as specified herein.

1.03. CODES AND STANDARDS

A. ACI-318, “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.”

B. Concrete Reinforcing Institute, “Manual of Standard Practice.”

C. ANSI/ASCE 7, “Building Code Requirements for Minimum Design Loads in Buildings and Other Structures.”

D. Fabricator must be producer member of National Precast Concrete Association (NPCA) and participate in its Plant Certification Program.

E. National Electric Code.

F. Building fabricator must have a minimum of five years’ experience manufacturing and setting transportable precast concrete buildings.

1.04. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. The precast concrete building shall meet the following minimum requirements:

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 13120-1 PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDING

1. Building shall protect electrical and mechanical equipment from exposure to weather and permit walk-in access for system operation.

2. Building plan dimensions and inside wall height shall be as shown on Drawings.

3. Building shall meet all applicable 2009 IBC plus Maryland Building Performance Standards, ANSI, and ACI requirements.

4. Structural components of building shall be entirely precast of 4,000 psi (minimum) steel-reinforced concrete.

5. Roof live and dead loads, wind pressures and seismic design criteria shall be as shown on the Structural Design Criteria table of the Structural Drawings.

6. Building shall be watertight.

7. Minimum thermal resistance value of insulation shall be R10.

1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. Submit complete shop drawings for the precast concrete building, including product data sheets for all accessories provided with the building.

B. Two copies of calculations shall be submitted for file.

C. All shop drawings and calculations shall be prepared in a neat and legible manner, sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Maryland.

D. Building manufacturer shall submit certification letter signed by an officer of the company, vice president or higher certifying all material and equipment in the building is compatible and is corrosion resistant. Certification shall also state that the building design and construction is in accordance with applicable codes.

E. Confirm electrical breaker sizes shown on the electrical drawings are adequate for electric unit heaters and power ventilator requirements.

F. Submit operation and maintenance information.

G. Submit warranty information.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. MANUFACTURERS

A. Building manufacturer and model shall be the following or equal (with the features specified herein, and as shown on the Drawings):

1. Smith-Midland Company, Midland, VA, EASI-SET Precast Building.

2. A-Z Precast Concrete Products, St. Petersburg, FL.

B. FRP laminated plywood panel manufacturer shall be Dyrotech (Crane), Great Lakes Plastic Company, Buffalo, NY or equal.


2.02. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT DESIGN

A. Precast concrete building shall be composed of precast concrete roof and wall components to be factory-assembled to the fullest extent possible.

1. Roof shall be post-tensioned to seal against moisture.

2. Roof shall be minimum 4 inches thick. Walls shall be minimum 3 inches thick.

3. Roof shall slope front to back (away from the doors) with a 2-1/2-inch overhang from exterior wall face (all sides).

4. Roof and wall joints shall be sealed with a weatherproof polyurethane sealant.

5. Walls shall be provided with a red faux brick finish.

6. Building shall be structurally complete. Building manufacturer shall coordinate with Contractor for footing requirements, foundation requirements, foundation dimensions and anchoring system.

B. Building shall include the following, to be supplied and installed by the precast building manufacturer prior to delivery to site:

1. Insulated interior walls and ceilings with rigid polyurethane insulation panels.

a. Thickness of insulation shall be minimum 2.0 inches and shall have minimum R-value of 10.

b. Water absorption of insulation shall be 0.3 percent by volume maximum (in accordance with ASTM C272).

c. Minimum compressive strength of insulation to be 25 psi.

d. Apply to concrete surfaces with fire retardant adhesive per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Cover interior walls and ceiling insulation with FRP laminated plywood panels.

a. Panels shall have 0.09 inch thick FRP panel laminated over 1/2–inch thick exterior grade plywood with matching vinyl trim and fasteners.

b. Provide wood framing materials between FRP panels and wall to provide support for wall-mounted equipment and electrical panels. Building manufacturer shall coordinate with Electrical Contractor, Drawings, and specifications.

c. Wall panels shall extend from the roof down to the top of the foundation. Bottom of wall panels shall be capped with moisture resistant vinyl and plate seal that provides water-tight coverage of both the insulation and plywood.

d. Piping wall sleeves shall extend through interior panels.

3. Provide two man-doors as shown on the Drawings. Both doors shall be 1 ¾” thick FRP outward opening with FRP frames.

a. Door hardware shall be stainless steel full mortise hinges and locksets.


b. Provide 0.05-inch stainless steel kickplates on all doors(8 inches high).

c. Thermal resistance of door to be R10, minimum.

d. Face sheets shall be 0.125 inches thick with a gel-coated surface of no less than 15 mil.

e. Frames shall be 3/16-inch thick minimum pultruded FRP or solid with a 25 mil gel coat and polyurethane foam core. Double rabbet 2-inch face with 5-3/4-inch profile and 1-15/16-inch rabbet.

f. Resins shall be premium grade with light stabilizing additives. Minimum ratio of glass to resin shall be 25 percent.

g. Fire-retardant resin to produce a flame spread of 25 or less per ASTM E84 and shall be self extinguishing per ASTM D635.

h. Doors shall be dark bronze.

i. Door Manufacturers

1) Fib-R-Dor Division of Advance Fiberglass, Inc., Maumelle, AR.

2) Chem-Pruf Door Co., Ltd., Brownsville, TX.

3) Corrim Company, Oshkosh, WI.

4) Approved equal.

C. Openings

1. Openings shall be provided for intake louvers, exhaust louvers, and doors.

2. The openings shall be adequately sealed to be air and weathertight.

D. All bolts and fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel.


A. Building manufacturer shall coordinate all accessory installation and attachments with individual equipment manufacturers.

2.04. HVAC REQUIREMENTS

A. Each room of the building shall be provided with separate heaters, separate intake louver and separate exhaust louver with electric fan. The building shall be prewired for unit heaters and louvers.

B. Heating System

1. Heaters shall be wall or ceiling mounted type with stainless steel support frame and stainless steel epoxy anchors.

2. Heaters shall be sized to maintain above 40-degree Fahrenheit temperature during winter months. Heaters shall be provided with adjustable thermostat.

3. Reference Electrical Drawings for amp, Kw, phase and voltage requirements. Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 13120-4 PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDING

4. Locate heaters away from existing equipment to avoid conflict with access.

5. Reference Electrical Drawings for heater locations to avoid conflict with proposed electrical panels.

6. Conduit and wire to be provided by Contractor and installed by Contractor to avoid conflict with Contractor provided panels and equipment.

7. Heater Manufacturers

a. Chromalox Type LUH

b. Approved Equal

C. Ventilation Systems

1. Provide a louver/fan combination in each room of the building.

2. Louvers shall be wall mounted type. Roof mounted units are not acceptable.

3. Exhaust fans shall be provided with galvanized rain hood, aluminum shutter, mounting bracket and wall mounted HOA switch with thermostat.

4. Intake louvers shall be provided with motorized damper for exhaust fan.

5. The intake and exhaust fan systems shall be interconnected to automatically open the intake louver when the exhaust fan operates.

6. Louver shall be dark bronze.

7. Obtain power for each ventilation fan from a different circuit breaker.

8. Reference Electrical Drawings for unit heater locations to avoid conflict with proposed electrical panels.

9. Conduit and wire to be provided by Contractor and installed by Contractor to avoid conflict with Contractor provided panels and equipment.

10. Min. fan capacity = 200 cfm (valve room), 100 cfm (electrical room)

2.05. HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose bibbs shall be supplied and installed where shown on the Drawings.

B. Provide 1-inch bronze, three-piece body, full port with 316 stainless steel trim with 1-inch male-by-male hose and pipe nipple. Hose bibbs shall be as manufactured by Apollo 35-201-10; Nibco N-54-C-006; or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Contractor shall be responsible for construction of cast-in-place foundation, installation of mechanical equipment, and controls and connection of building wiring to external power supply.


B. Attach building to concrete foundation providing a weathertight seal. Follow building manufacturer’s written details and recommendations to satisfy design loads.

C. Coordinate equipment location with that shown on the Drawings to avoid conflict between equipment, conduit, switches, panels, controls, etc.

D. Building manufacturer shall coordinate terminating conduit and wire locations with the Contractor such that electrical systems provided by the building manufacturer terminate at appropriate locations for connection to the electrical panelboards shown on the drawings.

E. Contractor shall adjust foundation dimensions as necessary to accommodate the precast building per the building manufacturer’s requirements.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15170

MOTORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. All electric motors supplied under these Contract Documents shall conform to this specification as minimum requirements.

B. All electric motors shall conform to ANSI Standards for Rotating Electrical Machinery (Designation C50) and to NEMA Standards MG-1 for Motors and Generators (NEMA Standard Publication latest revision) and to NEC, Article 430.

C. The rating of the motors offered shall in no case be less than the horsepower required in the Contract Documents.

D. Motors shall operate without an undue noise or vibration and shall show no signs of electrical unbalance.

E. Motor efficiency shall be a prime consideration in selection of all motors. Unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specifications, motors shall meet the requirements of paragraph 1.07 of this section. Owner shall receive all rebates from the utility, if applicable.




C. Section 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT

D. Section 09900 - PAINTING

E. All other sections where motors are specified or required.

1.03. SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings of Electric Motors - Submit in accordance with Sections 01300, Submittals and 01640, Equipment - General.

B. Include with Submittals

1. Electric characteristics

2. Design characteristics

3. Mechanical construction

4. Manufacturer’s name

5. Manufacturer’s type

6. Pertinent specifications for the use intended

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 15170-1 MOTORS

7. Name of the equipment to be driven

C. Tabulate the following information in one location on each electric motor shop drawing submittal:

Motor manufacturer Nameplate horsepower Model Motor rpm, full load nameplate Frame number Insulation class Type of enclosure Service factor Volts Maximum ambient temperature Hertz Maximum temperature rise Phase Shop painting NEMA design Nominal efficiency Code letter Guaranteed minimum efficiency at 50, 75 and 100% full load Locked rotor amps Minimum power factor at 50, 75 and 100% load Locked rotor torque Resistance temperature device information (if applicable)

1.04. INSULATION

A. Minimum NEMA Class B insulation unless otherwise noted in the individual equipment specifications.

B. Provide Class F insulation if required by the manufacturer to meet specified energy efficiency.

C. Use Class F or H insulation where ambient temperatures exceed 104 degrees F (40 degrees C) as shown on the Contract Drawings or elsewhere in the Specifications.

D. Where motors are to be used with variable frequency drives (VFDs), Insulation systems shall be “Inverter Grade” with Class F thermostats. Insulation system shall meet NEMA MG 1-30 standards.

1.05. RATINGS AND DESIGN

A. Furnish with adequate ratings to accelerate and drive connected equipment under all normal operating conditions without exceeding nameplate ratings.

B. Furnish with service factors in accordance with NEMA standards as follows unless otherwise noted in individual equipment specifications.

TYPE OF MACHINE MINIMUM SERVICE FACTOR (SF)

Mill and chemical duty 1.15 Open drip-proof 1.15 All others 1.0 Submersible 1.15 Inverter duty 1.0

C. Motors shall operate successfully under running conditions at rated load and frequency with a voltage variation up to 10 percent; at rated load and voltage with a frequency variation up to 5 percent; and at rated load with a combined variation in voltage and frequency not more than 10 percent above or below the rated voltage and frequency provided that the frequency variation does not exceed 5 percent.


D. Assume voltage unbalance to be 1 percent. Assume altitude to be less than 3,300 feet.

E. Assume ambient temperatures to be 40 degrees C for motors in air and 25 degrees C for submersible motors.

F. Motor winding temperature rise shall be as follows:

CLASS OF INSULATION B F H

Open, drip-proof motors 80°C 105°C 125°C Totally enclosed fan-cooled motors 80°C 105°C 125°C Totally enclosed non-ventilated motors 85°C 110°C 135°C Explosion-proof motors 80°C 105°C 125°C All other motors with 1.15 SF or higher 90°C 115°C --

G. Use the applicable paragraphs of NEMA MG1-12.42 in making design selections.

H. Unless otherwise specified, all three-phase motors shall be constant speed, squirrel cage induction type.

1. The Contractor shall provide multi-speed (multiple windings, consequent poles single winding, wound rotor, etc.) where required as specified in individual equipment specifications.

I. Motor Voltages

1. Motors of 1/2 HP and Larger - Squirrel cage induction type designed for 3 phase, 60 cycle, 230/460 volt operation unless otherwise specified.

2. Motors Smaller Than 1/2 HP - Capacitor type designed for single phase, 60 cycle, 120 volt operation unless otherwise specified.

3. Motors indicated on the Contract Drawings and/or specified in the specifications as 208 volt shall be specially wound for voltage indicated and/or specified.

4. Dual-rated motors (i.e., 208/230 volts) are not acceptable for operation on 208 volts.

J. Motors intended for inverter duty (those controlled through variable speed drives), shall be specifically manufactured for Inverter Duty.

K. Hazardous area motors shall be certified to meet UL requirements for operation over the motors entire speed range.

L. Unless otherwise specified, all single-phase motors shall be NEMA design letter M or N, designed to withstand full voltage starting in accordance with MG12.32.

1. Motors shall comply with NEMA Standards for Definite Purpose Motors (paragraphs 18.001-18.717).

M. In general, capacitor start induction run or split phase-type motors shall be used unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

N. Shaded pole motors larger than 1/8 HP will not be allowed.


O. Thermal overload protectors and any auxiliary components necessary to provide required starting characteristics including capacitors, resistors and automatic switching devices shall be furnished and mounted integrally unless motor starters with overload protection are provided.

1.06. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION

A. Unless otherwise specified, electric motors shall be of the following types of construction according to the degree of mechanical protection:

1. Totally Enclosed, Explosion-Proof Motors - When located in areas designated as hazardous locations (explosion-proof) (NEC locations Class I, Div. 1 or 2).

a. See the Drawings for other hazardous area classifications.

2. Totally Enclosed, Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Motors - When located outdoors or indoors in wet areas such as washdown areas or elsewhere if specified.

a. Winding heaters shall be provided when specified.

3. Mill and Chemical Duty or Severe Duty - Suitable for use in corrosive areas unless otherwise specified in individual equipment specifications.

4. Submersible Motors - For submerged application.

a. Provide motor winding thermal protection in motors 1 HP and larger.

5. In all other cases, they shall be open drip-proof.

B. Encapsulated Windings - Where specified, an additional “dip and bake” will not be acceptable. Encapsulation shall be Contour Mold Everseal by U.S. Motors; Costum Polyseal by General Electric; or Life Guard Epoxy Seal by Westinghouse; or equal.

C. Bearings

1. Unless otherwise specified or required, motors rated above 2 HP shall have the bearings of the grease lubricated, anti-friction ball type with conveniently-located grease fittings.

2. Provide a means of preventing bearings from becoming overgreased (such as double shields on bearings or pressure sensitive relief fittings).

3. Unless otherwise specified, bearings shall be rated at a minimum B-10 life of 20,000 hours under axial loads.

4. Submersible motors shall have bearings rated of an L-10 or B-10 life of minimum of 17,500 hours.

D. Vertical shaft construction, the motors shall have adequate thrust bearings to carry all motor loads and any other operating equipment loads.

1. Grease slingers to be provided.

E. Horizontal Shaft Construction - Coupled to fluid pumps, the motors shall either have adequate thrust bearings or they shall have the couplings end play and rotor float coordinated to prevent damage to rotor bearings.


F. Rotors

1. Statically and dynamically balanced.

2. Have secondary bars of heavy copper silver-brazed to one-piece end rings or they shall have rotor windings of one-piece cast aluminum.

3. Where applicable, construct with integral fans.

G. Inverter duty motors shall have enhanced rotor and stator designs.

H. Non-reversing ratchets shall be provided where specified in the individual equipment specifications.

I. Nameplates - Stainless steel furnished with all motors, with markings in accordance with NEMA MG1, latest revision, MG1-10.38.

J. Terminal Boxes

1. Sized in accordance with NEC, Article 430-12 and of sufficient size to accommodate conduits and conductor sizes as shown on Contract Drawings.

2. Furnish rubber gasketed terminal boxes with splash-proof and totally enclosed motors.

3. Horizontal Motors - Locate on the left hand side, when viewing the motor from the drive shaft ends and design such that conduit entrance can be made from above, below or either side of the terminal box.

4. Include grounding lug in terminal box.

5. Oversize terminal boxes in the following applications:

a. Motors 7-1/2 hp and larger operating at 208 or 230 volts.

b. Motors 20 hp and larger operating at 460 volts.

K. Motors used with belt drives shall have grease slingers on the sheave end and sliding bases to provide for belt take-up.

L. Cast iron construction for all motors, when available for the application.

1.07. MOTOR POWER FACTORS

A. Provide when called for on the Contract Drawings.

B. Provide for all three-phase motors, 7-1/2 HP or larger, 1200, 1800, and 3600 rpm (nominal), 60 Hertz, squirrel cage induction-type, which do not have a minimum power factor of 85 percent. Motors which cannot meet this criteria shall have power factor correction capacitors, switched integrally with the motors, which will bring the power factor up to a minimum of 90 percent.

C. Furnish and install, at no additional cost to the Owner, the capacitors and provide all necessary wiring to connect them to the motor terminals or motor controller terminals.

1. Properly size fused switch or circuit breaker to serve as a disconnect for the capacitor.


D. Capacitor and Disconnect Enclosure

Indoors mounting (non-hazardous) NEMA 12 wall mounted Indoor wet areas NEMA 4X wall mounted Outdoors mounting NEMA 4 wall, pad, or mounting stand mounted Explosionproof areas NEMA 7 wall mounted (DS only)* Corrosive areas NEMA 4X wall mounted*

*Locate capacitor outside the hazardous or corrosive area.

E. Size capacitors so they do not increase the self-excitation voltage above the motor nameplate rating.

F. Do not use capacitors on motors controlled by variable frequency drives.

G. When used with solid-state starters, energize only after bypass or full speed bypass contactor is energized. Verify with starter manufacturer their connection requirements and follow them.

1.08. MOTOR EFFICIENCY

A. All single speed, three-phase, squirrel cage induction-type motors 1 HP or larger, 60 Hertz, shall have nominal efficiencies in accordance with attached Table 1, unless specifically otherwise specified in the respective equipment section.

1. Determine efficiencies by using IEEE Test Procedure 112, Test Method B using segregated losses. Motors shall be listed by their manufacturers and be nameplated with words such as “High Efficiency,” “Premium Efficient,” and “Energy Saver.”

2. List guaranteed minimum efficiencies on motor nameplate. Adhere to the latest nominal efficiencies eligible for a rebate published by the local utility where rebates are available. Those efficiencies may be higher than those listed in Table 1.

3. Where rebates are available, submit to the Owner paid invoices for each specific motor supplied for which a rebate is being sought.

1.09. FIELD TESTING

A. All three phase electric motors 1/2 HP and larger and all single phase electric motors 1 HP and larger shall be field tested by the Contractor at as near operating conditions as possible. Complete and submit all of the information required by the attached “Motor Test Record” for all motors to be tested per the above. Submit record prior to the issuance of the “Substantial Completion Certificate.” See Section 01700, Contract Closeout. Contractor, for the purposes of this item, is the one furnishing and/or installing the final motor-driven unit.

B. All testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer.

C. Submit completed forms in quadruplicate (one set to be submitted at the time when substantial completion is requested, and one set to be placed in each of the submitted O&M manuals).

1.10. MOTOR SHOP TESTS

A. Perform motor shop tests in accordance with the IEEE Code for Polyphase Induction Machines. Use NEMA report-of-test forms and submit results to the Engineer, in five copies, for his approval.


B. Test each motor and submit report; for power factor and efficiency at 50, 75 and 100 percent of its rated horsepower; for insulation resistance and dielectric strength; for heating; and for compliance with all specific performance requirements.

C. For motors less than or equal to 100 HP, provide guaranteed performance data based on previous testing of the motor design. For motors larger than 100 HP, make complete tests of each motor and furnish certified test data sheets.

1.11. VERTICAL HOLLOWSHAFT MOTORS

A. Where specified, design vertical hollowshaft motors to carry the motors, pumps, and associated equipment full thrust. Equip motors with oil lubricated spherical roller thrust bearings and lower grease lubricated radial guide bearings. Provide motors with visual oil level indicators and sufficient oil to fill the motor.

B. Vertical Adjustment - By means of a lockable nut at the top of the shaft.

C. Non-Reversing Ratchets - Provide where specified in the individual equipment specifications and where suitable for continuous operation at any speed between 50 percent and 100 percent of rated speed.

1.12. TWO-SPEED MOTORS

A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger Specified as Two-Speed Motors - Two windings unless otherwise noted. Motors less than 1/2 HP will be permitted with single windings. Speeds of the motors shall be as specified. Two-speed motors shall be tested at the higher speed.

1.13. PAINTING

A. All motors shall have a manufacturer’s standard shop rust-resisting priming coat. Finish coat, either shop or field applied, shall be in accordance with Section 09900, Painting.

1.14. HAZARDOUS OR EXPLOSION-PROOF AREAS

A. All areas noted as hazardous or explosion-proof (as defined in the latest edition of the National Electrical Code) shall have all work done in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) for that particular “class” and “division” and all equipment enclosures (for motors, starters, switches, capacitors, etc.), fittings, conduits and appurtenances shall be of a type approved for the area.

B. Unless otherwise shown, all hazardous or explosion-proof areas shall be Class I, Division 1 (Groups C and D); locations and all equipment enclosures, fittings, conduits and appurtenances shall be NEMA Type 7 and approved for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D atmospheres.

C. All wiring in these areas shall be done in accordance with the applicable NEC provisions.

(continued)


TABLE 1 NOMINAL EFFICIENCIES FOR “NEMA PREMIUM™” INDUCTION MOTORS

RATED 600 VOLTS OR LESS (RANDOM WOUND) OPEN DRIP-PROOF* TOTALLY ENCLOSED FAN-COOLED*

hp 900 1200 1800 3600 900 1200 1800 3600 1 74.0 82.5 85.5 77.0 74.0 82.5 85.5 77.0

1.5 75.5 86.5 86.5 84.0 77.0 87.5 86.5 84.0 2 85.5 87.5 86.5 85.5 82.5 88.5 86.5 85.5 3 86.5 88.5 89.5 85.5 84.0 89.5 89.5 86.5 5 87.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 88.5

7.5 88.5 90.2 91.0 88.5 85.5 91.0 91.7 89.5 10 89.5 91.7 91.7 89.5 88.5 91.0 91.7 90.2 15 89.5 91.7 93.0 90.2 88.5 91.7 92.4 91.0 20 90.2 92.4 93.0 91.0 89.5 91.7 93.0 91.0 25 90.2 93.0 93.6 91.7 89.5 93.0 93.6 91.7 30 91.0 93.6 94.1 91.7 91.0 93.0 93.6 91.7 40 91.0 94.1 94.1 92.4 91.0 94.1 94.1 92.4 50 91.7 94.1 94.5 93.0 91.7 94.1 94.5 93.0 60 92.4 94.5 95.0 93.6 91.7 94.5 95.0 93.6 75 93.6 94.5 95.0 93.6 93.0 94.5 95.4 93.6 100 93.6 95.0 95.4 93.6 93.0 95.0 95.4 94.1 125 93.6 95.0 95.4 94.1 93.6 95.0 95.4 95.0 150 93.6 95.4 95.8 94.1 93.6 95.8 95.8 95.0 200 93.6 95.4 95.8 95.0 94.1 95.8 96.2 95.4 250 94.5 95.4 95.8 95.0 94.5 95.8 96.2 95.8 300 -- 95.4 95.8 95.4 -- 95.8 96.2 95.8 350 -- 95.4 95.8 95.4 -- 95.8 96.2 95.8 400 -- 95.8 95.8 95.8 -- 95.8 96.2 95.8 450 -- 96.2 96.2 95.8 -- 95.8 92.2 95.8 500 -- 96.2 96.2 95.8 -- 95.8 96.2 95.8

The shaded areas indicate motor classes generally covered by the efficiency standards of utilities or state agencies. *Nominal speed; for two-speed motors, the efficiency applies to the highest speed. For submersible motors, other motor horsepowers, speeds, and for Design C and D motors, the efficiencies shall be in accordance with the applicable equipment specification sections.


MOTOR TEST SPEED Equipment Description_____________________________ Equipment No.______________ Equipment Loc. ________________________________________________________________ Drawing Nos. and Rev. _________________________________________________________ MCC/Panel No._________________________________ Section/CKT. No._______________ Control CKT. No. ______________________________________________________________

NAMEPLATE DATA Motor Mfr.___________________________________ HP_______ Rpm_____ S.F._________ Volts________________ Phase________ F.L. Amp______ KVA Code_____ O Rise ______ Serial No.____________________ Other __________________________________________ Locked Rotor KVA __________________________ Efficiency ______________________ Prestart Checks Date Lubrication Checked (Motor and Driven Equipment) __________ Motor Rotates Freely __________ Overload Heater Size/Setting_______________ (located at starter) __________ Control Circuit Tested __________ Breaker Size (Frame Size/Trip Element Rating)_________________ __________ Motor Insulation Resistance (Megger) Test Volts_________________ (500V for up to 250V motors and 1000V for up to 600V motors) Test Duration - 1 minute Phase A to Gnd_________ Phase B to Gnd_________ Phase C to Gnd_________ Phase A to B___________ Phase B to C___________ Phase C to A___________

UNCOUPLED DATA

(Provide this only when motor is shipped, uncoupled. Do not uncouple motor from drive to test.)

Bus Voltage_______ Inrush Current_______Amps ________Sec Run in Time ________ Average Running Current________A ________B ________C Rotation * ______________ Rpm_____________ Performed by_____________________________________ Date_______________________ Approved by______________________________________ Date_______________________

Test Engineer

COUPLED DATA Bus Voltage_______ Inrush Current_______Amps ________Sec Run in Time ________ Average Running Current________A ________B ________C Rotation * ______________ Rpm_____________ System Lineup/Conditions _____________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ Test Equipment Control Nos. ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ Remarks: ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ Performed by_____________________________________ Date_______________________ Approved by______________________________________ Date_______________________

Test Engineer *As viewed from motor outboard end. EQUIPMENT NO._________________________

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15870

POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. One supply blower with inverter duty motor and vibration isolation.

B. Flexible connection on blower outlet.

C. Acoustical blower enclosure (to house blower and motor).

D. Blower control panel complete with speed control and packaged controls.



B. Section 15170 - MOTORS

C. Division 16 Electrical Specification Sections

1.03. REFERENCES

AMCA 99 Standards Handbook AMCA 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes AMCA 261 Directory of Products Licensed to Bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal AMCA 300 Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices AMCA 301 Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices NEMA MG1 Motors and Generators NFPA 70 National Electrical Code NFPA 820 Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection

Facilities, 2008 Edition UL 705 Power Ventilators


A. The supply blower and accessories shall be packaged at the factory as a complete system with all necessary controls and accessories. System shall be capable of automatically achieving the specified dual airflow rates at the specified conditions. The blower with acoustical enclosure shall not exceed 50 decibels within 30 feet of the blower enclosure.

1.05. SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data - Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Submit fan bearing life information.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 15870-1 POWER VENTILATORS

C. Control Panel layout drawings showing panel exterior face and interior components. Provide manufacturer’s information on all electrical components so that compliance with the division 16 specifications can be confirmed.

D. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

E. Submit information on corrosion-resistant finishes, including applicable corrosion resistance charts. Units requiring corrosion-resistant construction are noted on the Contract Drawing equipment schedules.

F. Submit documentation confirming AMCA rating for performance and sound.

G. Prior to startup, the Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance manuals and recommended spare parts list for the blower and control panel components.

H. Manufacturer’s equipment warranty for both blower and control panel components.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. SUPPLY BLOWER

A. General - The supply blower shall be manufactured in accordance with the following specifications and shall meet or exceed the performance requirements as specified within this section. All system components located within the blower enclosure shall be explosion-proof, rated for NEC Class I, Division 2, Group D.

1. Manufacturer

a. New York Blower – Backward Inclined SWSI, Acoustifoil, Model 12.

b. Or Approved equal.

2. Supply Blower

a. The blower shall be a single width single inlet with arrangement 4. Housing shall be fabricated from heavy gauge, continuously welded steel and reinforced with rigid bracing to increase structural integrity and prevent vibration. Bearings shall be rated for L10 100,000 life. Entire housing interior and exterior shall be epoxy coated. Provide with flanged inlet and outlet, OSHA approved inlet screen, OSHA approved motor/shaft guard, cleanout door, housing drain, stainless steel shaft. Mount to epoxy coated steel frame and provide with vibration isolation.

b. Blower shall be AMCA rated for performance and bear the AMCA seal.

c. Fan wheels - shall utilize non-overloading flat, single thickness blades.

d. Motor – Inverter duty, high efficiency (0.50 HP, 3600 rpm, 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz) shall be explosion-proof rated for NEC Class I, Division 2, Group D areas. Refer to specification 15170 for additional requirements.

e. Wiring Terminations - Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70. Refer to division 16 electrical specifications for addition requirements.


f. Performance – Variable to 550 cfm at 0.5 inches water column.

3. System Accessories

a. Acoustical enclosure – Enclosure shall be removable to allow access for maintenance to blower. Provide with necessary ventilation to maintain temperature within enclosure less than 104 degrees F during summer design conditions. Enclosure shall be FRP. Enclosure shall provide sound attenuation of 70 dBa at 20 feet from enclosure.

b. System Control Panel - All panel components shall be in strict conformance with the National Electric Code and the division 16 electrical specifications. The system supplier shall provide one prewired NEMA 12 electrical control panel to house controls, motor starters, hand/off/auto switch, timers, control transformers, and indicating lights. Locate as shown on contract drawings. Provide all necessary components to achieve sequence of operation described within this specification. The panel shall include a lockable disconnect switch; be wired suitable for connection to 480 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hertz source. Provide intrinsically safe relay for wiring to the hatch switch to the wet well.

c. Ductwork - All ductwork shall be provided as shown on the contract drawings. Ductwork shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM Standard D2996 for filament-wound, reinforced thermosetting resin pipe, or National Bureau of Standards PS15-69, “Custom Contact Molded Reinforced Polyester Chemical-Resistant Process Equipment.” Installation of ductwork shall be in accordance with ductwork manufacturer’s guidance and SMACNA Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual guidelines.

The ductwork shall meet the performance criteria below:

1) Working Pressure: 2-inch w.c. positive and negative pressure.

2) Resin System: The ductwork resin system shall be suitable for temperatures up to 210 degrees F, resistant to continuous concentrations of hydrogen sulfide, mercaptans, and other organic and inorganic compounds typically associated with municipal wastewater treatment plants and meet the requirements of a Class 1 ASTM E84 flame rating (25 or less).

3) Corrosion Resistance: The ductwork material shall be suitable for handling hydrogen sulfide, mercaptans, and other organic and inorganic compounds typically associated with municipal wastewater treatment plants. An interior corrosion barrier shall be provided which is resistant to the known air contaminants. Provide 50 mil interior corrosion barrier.

4) Ductwork Finish: Ductwork shall receive an exterior finish compatible with the FRP resin system used. Finish color shall be a custom finish color as selected by the OWNER.

5) Joints: FRP ductwork shall be provided with joints as described: Flanged Joints


a) Provide flanged connections to flexible connectors, expansion joints, fans and other locations as shown on the Drawings.

b) Gaskets shall be EPDM, full face, and minimum 1/8-inch thickness.

c) All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

Field Joints (Joints at elbows, tees, and between straight lengths of ductwork shall be as follows)

d) Provide butt and strap joints in accordance with NBS PS 15-69.

d. Flexible Connections – Provide flanged, molded EPDM flexible connections at blower outlet rated for 5 psig working positive pressure, 3-inch Hg vacuum pressure, as manufactured by Mercer Rubber, or equal. Flexible connections shall be provided with 316 stainless steel backer flanges, minimum 16 gauge construction.

4. Sequence of operation

a. The supply blower system control panel shall control the operation of the supply blower. Whenever the “hand/off/auto” switch (HOA) is placed in the manual position, the blower shall run at full speed. Anytime the fan is running an indicating light located on the face of the control panel shall energize indicating that the fan is operating.

Whenever the HOA switch is placed in the “Auto” position and the hatch to the wetwell is closed (as indicated by a limit switch attached to the hatch) the blower shall cycle on and off to provide two complete air changes per hour (40 cfm). Whenever the HOA switch is placed in the “Auto” position and the hatch is open (as indicated by a limit switch attached to the hatch) the blower shall increase speed to provide thirty complete air changes per hour (550 cfm). An indicator light shall be installed on the face of the control panel to indicate that the hatch is “open”.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION

A. Locate equipment as shown on contract drawings and install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16055

ELECTRICAL WORK

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General work description and requirements for electrical work included in this contract.

B. Raceways, fittings and boxes.

C. Conductors and accessories.

D. Wiring devices.

E. Grounding.

F. Panelboards.

G. Disconnect and safety switches.

H. Nameplates and labels.

I. Equipment testing.

J. Spare devices.

K. Dry type – two winding lighting transformers.

L. Lighting Fixtures, Poles, Accessories.

M. Surge Suppression Devices.

N. Enclosures

O. Access door and access hatch security switches


A. Section 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK

B. Section 01300 – SUBMITTALS

C. Section 01564 - EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

D. Section 01640 – EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

E. Section 01650 – STARTING OF SYSTEMS

F. Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

G. Section 02205 – PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

H. Section 02222 – EXCAVATING

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16055-1 ELECTRICAL WORK

I. Section 02223 – BACKFILLING

J. Section 02225 – TRENCHING

K. Section 03001 – CONCRETE

L. All Division 16 specifications


A. All work shall be subject to applicable sections of these specifications, not necessarily the aforementioned related Sections.

B. Examination of Premises

1. Before submitting a proposal, the Contractor shall examine all drawings and specifications relating to work of all trades to determine scope and relation to other work.

2. Ascertain access to site, available storage, and delivery facilities.

3. Before commencing work, verify all governing dimensions and examine all adjacent work at site and/or buildings.

1.04. SCOPE OF WORK

A. The principal items of electrical work include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Provide all electrical power, control, instrumentation, ductbanks, communications, including exposed and concealed raceway systems, conductors, cables, fittings, special control, wiring devices, distribution equipment, starters, overcurrent protection, terminations, connections, and interconnections, and all related appurtenances to provide a complete and operating electrical system.

2. Provide all system and equipment grounding in conformance with the requirements of these Specifications and the NEC. Refer to Section 16100, Grounding.

3. Provide electrical labels, signs, and nameplates as specified.

4. Install all electrical equipment, conduit, wire, conductor cable, connections, etc., required for complete and operating systems.

5. Coordinate work with the work of others for timely completion of the work of this Contract.

6. Repair, fill and/or patch surfaces of all structural components including walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs damaged or left open or bare as a result of the electrical work.

7. Contractor shall have an Owner approved inspecting agency inspect electrical installation. Submit a final certificate approving all work to the Owner prior to final acceptance of the electrical work.

8. Refer to Section 01700, Contract Closeout, for additional requirements for record drawings, operation and maintenance manual, final testing and inspection, and guarantees and warranties.


9. Provide all materials, equipment, and labor required for complete and operating electrical systems electric power and pressure transmitter system.

10. Perform all trenching, backfilling, restoration of surfaces, dewatering, ductbank fabrication, lighting pole installation, grounding systems, electric services and distribution and instrumentation.

1.05. REFERENCES

A. The following references comprise standards and codes applicable to this Contract. Refer to specifications under Division 1 – General Requirements for additional references that may pertain.

ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code ANSI American National Standards Institute

1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103

CSA Canadian Standards Association 178 Rexdale Blvd. Rexdale (Toronto) Ontario, Canada M9W 1R3

ETL ETL Testing Laboratory, Inc. Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045

FM Factory Mutual System 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike, P.O. Box 688 Norwood, MA 02062

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 2101 “L” Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20037

NFPA National Fire Protection Association Battery March Park Quincy, MA 02269

UL Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062

LPI Lightning Protection Institute IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association

B. Contractor shall conform with all applicable codes and requirements as a minimum standard of performance.

In the case of a discrepancy between the requirements of the Contract Documents and other regulating groups or agencies, the stricter requirements shall apply.

C. U.L. Listed Equipment

1. All material and equipment of a type listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories shall be so labeled. All equipment labeling shall indicate the intended application of the equipment.


2. Equipment and material not covered by UL Standards will be accepted provided equipment and material are listed, labeled, certified or otherwise determined to meet safety requirements by a nationally recognized third-party testing laboratory such as ETL, FM, or CSA. Equipment of a class not listed, labeled, certified or approved by any acceptable reviewing body will be considered only if inspected or tested in accordance with national industrial standards, such as NEMA or ANSI. Evidence of compliance shall include certified test reports and definitive shop drawings.

D. The Contractor shall be held responsible for adherence to all rules, requirements and specifications as included herein.

Any additional work or material necessary for adherence will not be allowed as an extra, but shall be included in the bid price. Ignorance of any rule, requirement or specification shall not be allowed as an excuse for non-conformity. Acceptance by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor from the expense involved for the correction of any errors which may exist in the drawings submitted or in the satisfactory operation of any equipment.


A. Conform to applicable State of Maryland and local County, and Town Building Codes for electrical work.

B. Conform to NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.

C. Conform to ANSI C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.

D. Conform to REA - Rural Electrification Association.

E. Obtain permits, and request inspections as required from local authority having jurisdiction, or other Owner approved inspecting agency. Contractor shall provide a final inspection certificate to the Owner from the inspecting agency. Separate inspection certificates shall be submitted as required to accommodate phasing of the electrical work.

1.07. DEFINITIONS

A. Listed - Equipment is “listed” if of a kind mentioned in a list which:

1. Is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection of production of such equipment; and

2. States that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner.

B. Labeled - Equipment is “labeled” if:

1. It carries a valid label, symbol, or other identifying mark of an organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation that makes periodic inspections of the production of labeled equipment or materials; and

2. Whose labeling indicates compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a specified manner.

C. Certified - Equipment is “certified” if:

1. Equipment has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner; or


2. Production is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory; and

3. It bears a label, tag, or other records of certification.

D. Nationally recognized testing laboratory - A testing laboratory which is approved in accordance with OSHA regulations by the Secretary of Labor.

1.08. CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Reference to various codes and standards are a minimum installation requirements standard. In case(s) of discrepancy between the Contract Documents and the NEC, the stricter requirement shall apply.

B. All work, equipment, and materials furnished shall conform with the existing rules, requirements, and specifications of the Insurance Rating Organization having jurisdiction; the National Electrical Code (NEC); the National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA); the Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.); and the respective utilities.

C. All material and equipment shall bear the inspection labels of Underwriters Laboratories, unless otherwise allowed by the Owner in writing and if the material and equipment is of the class inspected by said laboratories. All labeling shall be for the intended usage.

1.09. SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300, Submittals.

B. The Owner approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material for which shop drawings are required before delivery to the job site. Delivery, storage or installation of equipment or material which has not had prior approval will not be permitted at the job site.

C. Provide submittals for all conduit, wire, cable, boxes other than device boxes, enclosures, fittings, hangers, supports, outlets, disconnect switches, starters, overloads, overcurrent devices, panelboards, control panels, outlets, seal-offs, generators, automatic transfer switches, transformers, utility equipment, and all other electrical equipment as listed in other Sections.

D. Product Data - Submit outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and accessories, unit weight, voltage, kVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics, tap configurations, insulation system type, and rated temperature rise.

E. Contractor shall be certified by the PVC coated rigid steel conduit manufacturer for installation of their products. Submit copies of certifications for each person who would be installing the conduit.

1.10. RECORD DRAWINGS

A. In addition to the requirements of Section 01700, Contract Closeout, regarding record drawings, prepare and submit two additional copies of the marked-up field record drawings, which shall include all addenda items and changes made during construction, to the Owner prior to final acceptance. Additionally, submit record drawings consisting of the following three types of drawings:

1. Elementary or Schematic Diagrams - All control schematics and elementary diagrams. Those constructed as shown on Contract Drawings need only be verified on the marked-up field set. For those that changed, submit preliminary diagrams before work on the final block diagrams is begun.


2. Block Diagrams - Prepare and submit fully labeled block diagrams, showing all point-to-point connections giving conduit size and fill (each conductor number, size, and color listed) showing all junctions boxes, pullboxes, panels, etc., together with terminal numbers at all conductor terminations. Drawings shall be 24-inch by 36-inch reproducible Mylar. Block diagrams are to be updated to reflect all final connections (connections labeled) or other changes. When there is more than one sheet of block diagrams, an index shall be included to indicate on which sheet the respective pieces of equipment can be found. See sample attached to end of this Section.

3. Contractor’s As-built Drawings - Provide one 24-inch by 36-inch Mylar copy of electrical as-built drawings of the Contract Drawings with all field notes and comments to illustrate actual construction conditions. As-built drawings shall include all addenda items issued during bidding and all other changes to the documents that occurred during construction. Drawing to be titled “Contractor’s As-built Drawing, Prepared by: (name of Contactor , Date Issued: .”

B. Provide the final approved record drawings on 24-inch by 36-inch Mylar.

C. All drawings shall be produced using the computer aided drafting system, AutoCAD 2006 or later.

D. One Mylar reproducible (24-inch by 36-inch) showing all concealed conduit including ductbanks that cannot be shown clearly on the marked-up field set. All underground conduit routings and ductbanks shall be dimensioned from aboveground structures. All manholes, handholes, and pullboxes shall have at least two ties.


A. Manufacturer - Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided. Handle carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosure, and finish.

C. Do not tip or tilt electrical equipment enclosures or control panels.

1.13. AREA CLASSIFICATION SCHEDULE

Area Description

Dry Location

Wet Location

Hazardous Location

Reference Notes

General Outdoor Areas X Electric Room X Valve Room X Wet Well X Cl. 1, Div. 1 1 All Other Areas X Reference Notes: Areas Designated as both Wet Location and Hazardous Locations shall meet the requirements for both locations.


A. Wet Locations (WL)

1. Where installed outdoors or in areas designated as Wet Locations, all work shall meet the requirements of the NEC for Wet Locations.

B. Hazardous Locations (HL)

1. Where installed in Hazardous locations, all work shall meet the requirements of the NEC Article 500.

PART 2 MATERIALS AND EXECUTION

2.01. RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND BOXES

A. Raceways

1. Type D - Rigid Non-metallic Conduit Schedule 40 (PVC)

a. This conduit shall be used in ductbanks.

This type conduit shall not be used for stub-ups from ductbanks. Stub-ups shall be Type E-1.

b. Description - Rigid, non-metallic conduit shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), Schedule 40 and shall conform to Federal Specifications W-C-1094 and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Standard UL-651.

c. Manufacturers

1) Pittsburgh

2) Jones-Manville

3) Orangeburg

4) Carlon

5) Or equal

2. Type E-1 - Polyvinyl Chloride Coated Rigid Steel Conduit with an Interior Urethane Coating

a. Application – This conduit shall be used in all locations including wet locations, and to/from equipment, including duct bank stub-ups.

b. Description -Polyvinyl chloride coated, hot dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit. Shall conform to Federal Specification WWC-581d and be coated with a heat polymerizing adhesive prior to plastic coating. PVC coating shall be applied by plastisol method. The interior coating shall be a factory-applied two part 2 mil thick chemically cured hot dipped urethane coating. The conduit shall conform to NEMA Standard No. RNI-1986.

c. Manufacturers

1) Robroy


2) Ocal

3) Or equal

3. Type G-1 - Liquid-tight, Sunlight-Resistant Flexible Conduit

a. Application – For use in areas, as final connections to equipment, process motors and other vibrating equipment where those connections are exposed to sunlight.

b. Description – Liquid-tight, flexible galvanized steel case with type “UA” rating UL listed as sunlight-resistant extruded polyvinyl chloride jacket.

c. Manufacturers

1) Cantex

2) Anamet Electrical – Anaconda

3) Olflex

4) Or equal

B. Conduit Fittings

1. Weatherhead - Cast type of non-ferrous metal or malleable iron thoroughly coated inside and outside with metallic zinc or cadmium; provide with heavy threaded hubs to fit the conduit required.

2. All Fittings - Cast type, material shall match conduit system it is to be used with.

3. Covers shall be of the same material as the fittings to which they are attached.

4. Fittings used for final connections to exterior equipment and components shall also be PVC coated.

C. Expansion Deflection Fittings

1. Material shall match conduit system it is to be used with, designed for 4-inch movement.

2. Coupling shall compensate for the following movements:

a. Axial expansion or contraction.

b. Angular misalignment.

c. Parallel misalignment.

D. Access Fitting and Pulling Fitting - Of the same construction as conduit fittings. Provide cover gasket in wet locations.

E. Boxes

1. Outlet and Device - Of the same construction as conduit fittings. Provide cover gasket in wet locations.


2. Junction and Pullboxes - Of the same construction as conduit fittings. Up to 100 cubic inches. Larger boxes shall be galvanized with hinged covers. Provide cover gasket in wet locations. Provide terminal strips for joining conductors in boxes over 100 cubic inches.

F. Elbows - Factory made by same manufacturer as couplings or conduit. Material to match conduit system it is to be used with.

G. Miscellaneous

1. Nipples, Locknuts, and Bushings - Factory made; material to match conduit system it is to be used with.

H. Conduit and Core Hole Sealing - Mechanical link type with elastomeric links joined by stainless steel bolts which also serve to expand the seal. Manufacturer - Thunderline Corporation, Model “Linkseal.”

2.02. CONDUCTORS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Conductors: Application - Material - Manufacturers

1. Service - Entrance cable in conduit.

a. Application - For use from the point of connection to the utility to the service disconnect then to the power distribution means. The power is distributed through the following: panelboard.

b. Description - Type RHW or USE.

1) Conductor – Copper

2) Insulation Voltage Rating - 600 volts

3) Insulation Material - EP

c. Manufacturers

1) Okonite Company - Model 112-32-3

2) Manhattan - Model M8628

3) Or equal

2. Building Wire and Cable

a. Application - For general use for all conductor applications unless specifically called out otherwise. Not for use as instrumentation cable or in manufactured control panels, service entrance cable, power distribution cable, and submersible cable.

b. Description - Single conductor insulated wire type as indicated below.

1) Conductor - Stranded copper

2) Insulation Voltage Rating - 600 volts


3) Insulation Type - Type THW for feeder and branch circuits larger than 4 AWG; Type THHW/THWN for feeders and branch circuits 6 AWG and smaller

4) Insulation Material - PVC or thermoplastic with nylon overall jacket

c. Manufacturers

1) Anixter - Model 6G

2) Okonite - Model 116-67

3) Or equal

3. Instrumentation Cable

a. Application - For use where called for on Contract Drawings.

b. Description - Single or multi, twisted pair, twisted triad cable, multiple pair with overall shield.

1) Conductor - Stranded copper, Size 16 AWG min.

2) Insulation Voltage Rating - 600 volts.

3) Insulation Material - Color coded PVC for individual conductors and nylon or overall jacket.

4) Shielding - Single pair or triad tinned copper braid. Multi-pair or triad 4 mil soft copper overall cover tape.

5) Drain - Tinned copper wire.

c. Manufacturers

1) Alpha - Model 5616B

2) Okonite - Model 261

3) Or equal

B. Wire Terminations and Connectors

1. General

a. Connector material shall be compatible with the wire that it is to be used with.

b. Connectors made of aluminum shall not be used with copper conductors.

c. Connectors listed below are for use with copper wire. Connectors to be used with aluminum wire shall be of the same general type and construction as those listed below, but shall be suitable for use with aluminum conductors.

2. Terminal Block Manufacturer’s

a. Control Wiring


1) Buchanan - Model 0241

2) Connectron - Model NSS3

3) Substitutions - Under provisions of Section 01600, Material and Equipment.

b. Equipment Power Wiring

1) Buchanan - Model 416

2) Connectron - Model NC3

3) Substitutions - Under provisions of Section 01600, Material and Equipment.

3. Two-Way Splices

a. Description - Tubular compression type for conductors 1/0 and larger. Rated 600 VAC and uninsulated.

b. Manufacturer

1) Burndy - Model YS-L “Hylink”

2) Thomas & Betts - Model 545

3) 3M - Model 10000

4) Or equal

4. Crimp Connectors

a. Description - For branch circuit connections, other than lighting and receptacle circuits.

b. Manufacturer

1) Ideal - Series 30; Model 410

2) Thomas & Betts - Model PT66M

3) Or equal

5. Bus or Lug Terminals, Manufacturer - 600 VAC, Crimp Type

a. Burndy - “HYLUG” Catalog, Series YA

b. Ideal - Catalog Series CCL and CC

c. Substitutions - Under provisions of Section 01600, Material and Equipment.

6. Terminal Strip Connectors

a. Description - For control and instrumentation connections to terminal strips. Locking fork, vinyl self insulated, crimp type connectors or tubular clamp type.


b. Manufacturers

1) Burndy - “VINYLUG” Types TP-LF and BA-EL

2) Thomas & Betts - Catalog Series 18RA, 14RB and 10RC

3) Ideal - Series 83-7

4) Or equal

7. Wire Nuts

a. For Unclassified Areas - Hexagonal-shaped for use with a nut driver, compact swept-wings, ribbed cap, UL-listed for 600V with temperature rating of 105 degrees C (221 degrees F).

1) Ideal - Models 341 and 342.

2) 3M - Models 212, 312, and 512.

3) Buchanan - Models B-1, B-2, and B-4

4) Or equal

b. For Wet, Corrosive Areas - Compact swept-wings, ribbed cap, filled with non-hardening sealant, UL listed for 600V with temperature rating of 105 degrees C (221 degrees F).

1) Ideal - Model DB Plus

2) Buchanan - Model BTS2 and BTS4

3) Or equal

8. Bolted Wire Connectors - Mechanical connectors for all combination of copper and aluminum conductors. Connectors shall be of a compact high-strength design, tin-plated copper alloy, two-piece connector, and shall utilize two hex head bolts.

a. Burndy - Model KVSU

b. Or equal

2.03. WIRING DEVICES

A. Wall Switches

1. Types, Manufacturers, and Catalog Numbers

CONTACT P&S LEVITON G.E. HUBBELL 1-pole 20AC-1 1221-2 GE5951-1G 1221

B. Receptacles

1. GFCI Receptacle

a. Pass & Seymour, Inc. - Model 2091-S


b. Hubbell - Model GF-5362

c. General Electric - Model GF-5342

d. Leviton - Model 6899

C. Wall Plates - Install receptacle and switch plates in accordance with the following schedule:

1. Dry Location

a. Cast aluminum weatherproof receptacle plate.

b. Stainless steel switchplate.

2. Wet location

a. All receptacles in wet location shall be wet location listed with cover closed while in use. Comply with 1993 NEC Article 410-57(b).

b. Manufacturers - Carlon, Hubbell, Tay Mac, Raco, or equal.

2.04. GROUNDING

A. Refer to Specification 16100, Grounding.

2.05. PANELBOARDS

A. General

1. Interiors

a. All interiors shall be completely factory assembled.

b. Panelboards shall be double row construction.

c. Neutral bars to be full size and insulated. Neutral bussing to have suitable lugs for each feeder. In subfeed panels, neutral shall be isolated from ground.

d. Provide a copper ground bus in each panel.

2. Boxes - Panelboard

a. Provide at least minimum gutter space in accordance with the NEC.

3. Trim

a. Provide barriers as required for completely dead-front construction.

b. Provide minimum projection, chrome-plated latch with key lock on panelboards. Key all locks alike.

c. Provide heavy plastic cover over permanent directory.

4. Bus Bars - All main bus bars shall be tin-plated copper sized in accordance with UL Standards to limit the temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 50 degrees C above air ambient of 40 degrees C maximum.


B. Panelboards (PP & GP)

1. Definition - Panelboards shall operate at power indicated on the Contract Documents. Panels may contain breakers to power equipment other than lighting and receptacles.

2. Panelboard breakers shall be molded case, thermal magnetic trip, bolt-on connection, quick-make, quick-break, toggle handle circuit breakers. Two-and three-pole units shall be internal common trip type. Contacts shall be silver alloy.

3. Main circuit breakers shall be as indicated on the drawings.

4. Panelboards for use at 240 volts AC maximum shall incorporate branch circuit breakers as shown or scheduled rated at 10k A.I.C. symmetrical at 240 volts.

5. Panelboards for use at 480 or 600 volts AC maximum to incorporate branch circuit breakers as shown or scheduled rated at 35,000 A.I.C. symmetrical at 480 volts

6. Provide three handle padlock attachments for each, 1 pole, 2 pole, and 3 pole breakers.

7. Design Basis - Square D Model NF and NQOD.

8. Panelboards for use at 480 or 600 volts AC maximum to incorporate branch circuit breakers as shown or scheduled rated at 35,000 A.I.C. symmetrical at 480 volts.

2.06. DISCONNECT AND SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Definitions

1. Disconnect Switches - Non-fusible switches

2. Safety Switches - Fusible switches. Provide door-mounted blown fuse indicator on heavy-duty types

B. Characteristics

1. Heavy-duty type construction.

2. Number of poles shall be equal to the number of current carrying conductors.

3. Lockable in “off” or “open” and in the “on” or “closed” position.

4. Quick-make, quick-break switch mechanism.

5. Dual cover interlock to prevent opening of the switch door when handle is in the “on” position, and to prevent closing of switch mechanism with the door open. Provide a defeat mechanism.

6. Visible blade construction.

7. Single throw unless noted otherwise.

C. Ratings

1. 600 volts for 480V systems and 240 volts for 208V systems. Ampere or horsepower rating as shown or required.


2. RMS symmetrical interrupting rating shall be 100,000 amperes for main service, 10,000 amperes otherwise.

3. Lugs shall be rated and U.L. listed for 60 degrees C and 75 degrees C wires.

D. Enclosures

1. U.L. listed.

2. NEMA 4X stainless steel for exterior, corrosive and wet locations; all others NEMA 12.

3. Provide with enclosure-mounted handle operator, operating through approximately 180 degree arc.

E. Fuses - Dual element RK1 current limiting type, time delay. Bussman Low-Peak LPN-RK or equal.

F. Manufacturers - Heavy-duty Square D Class 3110; General Electric Type TH; Westinghouse Type H-600; or equal.

2.07. SERVICE ENTRANCE CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. Definitions

1. SED – Service Entrance Disconnect Switch

B. Characteristics

1. Heavy-duty type construction.

2. Number of poles shall be equal to the number of current carrying conductors.

3. Lockable in “off” or “open” position.

4. Dual cover interlock to prevent opening of the switch door when handle is in the “on” position, and to prevent closing of switch mechanism with the door open. Provide a defeat mechanism.

5. Visible blade construction.

6. Single throw unless noted otherwise.

7. Integral circuit breaker type over current protective device.

C. Ratings

1. 600 volts, AT/AF as shown on drawings.

2. RMS symmetrical interrupting rating shall be 35,000 amperes minimum.

3. Lugs shall be rated and U.L. listed for 60 degrees C and 75 degrees C wires.

4. Suitable for use as service equipment with neutral assembly.

5. Ground Kit.


D. Enclosures

1. U.L. listed.

2. Enclosure, Control Panel or Device Applications – When no type is shown or specified, provide stainless steel.

3. Provide with enclosure-mounted handle operator, operating through approximately 180 degree arc.

E. Manufacturers – SquareD Circuit Breaker Enclosure J250DS w/ service entrance rated HGL Circuit Breaker and service ground kit or equal.

2.08. NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Nameplates

1. Material - Rigid laminated plastic

2. Lettering Height - 5/16-inch high

3. Lettering Color - White

4. Background Color - Black

B. Labels

1. Self-debossing, aluminum foil type.

2. Typewritten or preprinted black legends on white background.

3. Permanent Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive - Provide high temperature adhesive for labels on heat producing devices.

4. Use preprinted sleeve type for power, control, and instrumentation conductors. Label at each termination or splice and in each enclosure.

5. Manufacturers - Seton or equal.

C. Equipment and Control Identification

1. In addition to the requirements of the National Electrical Code, install an identification label which will clearly indicate information required for use and maintenance of items such as panelboards, cabinets, motor controllers (starters), safety switches, separately enclosed circuit breakers, individual breakers and controllers in switchgear and motor control assemblies, control devices and other significant equipment.

2. Provide nameplates for all electrical equipment and controls.

3. Attach nameplates with stainless steel or other non-corrosive metallic rivets or screws.

4. Provide a nameplate at each remote switch or control device when the controlled function is not readily identifiable.

5. All wiring except primary service major power conductors shall have each end of the conductor labeled. Label wires at each junction box.


2.09. SPARE DEVICES

A. Provide the following spare devices:

1. Two main fuses (installed in service switch enclosure).

2. One each of all other fuses.

3. One spare of each branch breaker scheduled on the Contract Drawings.

4. Two spare bulbs of each type, store in a NEMA 4X non-metallic enclosure 16-inch by 16-inch by 8-inch minimum mounted on equipment panel.

2.10. TWO-WINDING TRANSFORMERS

A. Product Description - NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air-cooled, dry-type transformers.

B. Primary Voltage - 480 volts, 1 phase.

C. Secondary Voltage - 240Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire.

D. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows:

1. 1-15 kVA - Class 185 with 115 degrees C rise.

2. 16-500 kVA - Class 220 with 115 degrees C rise.

E. Case Temperature - Do not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point at full load.

F. Winding Taps

1. Transformers Less than 15 kVA - Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full capacity taps on primary winding.

2. Transformers 15 kVA and Larger - NEMA ST 20.

G. Basic Impulse Level - 10kV.

H. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of visible flexible copper grounding strap.

I. Mounting

1. 1-15 kVA - Suitable for wall mounting.

2. 16-75 kVA - Suitable for floor mounting.

J. Coil Conductors - Continuous copper windings with terminations brazed or welded.

K. Enclosure - NEMA ST 20, Type 1. Furnish lifting eyes or brackets.

L. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.

M. Nameplate - Include transformer connection data and overload capacity based on rated allowable temperature rise.


N. Manufacturers

1. Square D

2. General Electric

3. Siemens

4. Or equal

2.11. MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Circuit breakers shall be of the molded case type.

B. Shall consist of the number of poles, ampere rating and interrupting rating as shown or specified.

C. Molded case circuit breakers shall have overcenter toggle type mechanism, providing quick-make, quick-break action. Mechanism shall be mechanically trip-free from the handle so the contacts cannot be held closed against short circuit currents.

D. Multiple pole breakers shall be common trip type.

E. ON and OFF positions shall be clearly marked and color coded.

F. All breakers in panels for switching duty shall be “SWD” or “T” rated, for switching duty.

G. Breakers 250 ampere frame and larger shall have interchangeable trip. Exchange guarantee for frame size ampere rating breakers with written certification shall be acceptable in lieu of interchangeable ampere rating breakers with the Owners’s permission.

H. All main service entrance breakers with frame sizes rated at 800 amperes or more shall have integral ground fault protection.

I. All main service breakers shall have 100 percent ampere rating and shall be service entrance rated.

J. Breakers over 100 ampere frame size shall have front adjustable magnetic trip elements to provide instantaneous tripping over a range of 400 percent to 1000 percent of the continuous ampere trip rating.

K. All breakers shall be of the bolt-on type.

L. Dimensions and Performance - NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.

M. Voltage - Provide fuses with voltage rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage.

N. Contacts shall be non-welding under rated operating conditions, silver-to-silver type. Provide with suitable arc interrupting devices.

O. Terminations

1. Circuit breakers shall have lugs that accommodate wire sizes shown on the Contract Drawings, including additional lugs where shown or required.

2. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper conductors only.


3. Breakers shall be UL listed for mechanical-type lugs.

P. 400 ampere frame circuit breakers or less.

1. Integral with circuit breaker

2. Push to test

3. Reset feature

4. Trip indication

5. 0.8 second maximum pickup time

Q. Breaker Trip Characteristics

All breakers shall be Type A thermal magnetic type unless noted otherwise on the Contract Drawings or specified.

Thermal Magnetic Type (Type A)

1. Long time, nonadjustable, thermal overload, trip

2. Instantaneous, electromagnetic trip

3. Ambient compensating

4. “Push-to-trip” test button

R. All circuit breakers shall meet or exceed the following unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings or specifications.

FRAME SIZE

MAX. CONSTANT CURRENT-AMPS

NEMA* INTERRUPTING CAP. SYMMETRICAL-

AMPS

POLES

MAXIMUM VOLTAGE RATING

100 10,000 @ 120 volts 1 120 100 10,000 @ 240 volts 2,3 240 100 18,000 @ 480/277 volts 1 480 100 18,000 2,3 600 250 Branch 25,000 2,3 600 250 Main 35,000 2,3 600 400 Branch 30,000 2,3 600 400 Main 35,000 2,3 600 1000 Branch 30,000 2,3 600 1000 Main 65,000 2,3 600 1200 100,000 2,3 600 2000 100,000 2,3 600 *Interrupt ratings are at 480 volts unless noted otherwise.

S. Circuit breakers shall be provided with NEMA 1 enclosures for interior control panel mounting and NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosures for external mounting.


T. Manufacturers

1. Square D Company

2. Siemens

3. Or equal

2.12. LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. General

1. Lighting fixtures shall be provided as scheduled on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein.

2. Each fixture type shall be provided with 6 spare lamps.

2.13. SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

A. General

1. The surge protective device shall be a modular parallel transient voltage surge suppression device (SPD), consisting of multistage metal oxide varistor suppression circuits.

2. Provide SPD mounted integrally with Panelboard as shown in Panelboard Schedules on Contract Drawings.

3. Minimum surge current capacity shall be 160 kA per phase.

4. The UL 1449 voltage protection ratings shall not exceed the following:

VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G L-L 480/277VAC, 3Phase, 4Wire

1200 V 1200 V 1200 V 2000 V

240/120 1Phase, 3Wire

700 V 700 V 700 V 1200 V

5. SPD shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of not less than 115% of nominal RMS voltage.

6. Surge suppressor shall be provided with the following features:

a. Individually fused suppression modes.

b. Thermal Cutout.

c. Solid State Bi-directional.

d. Front Panel Alarm with test/silence switch.

e. LED indicators to indicate loss of protection of fully operational circuit.

f. AC tracking filter with EMI/RFI filtering up to –50db from 100kHz to 100 MHz.

g. Surge Counter. Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16055-20 ELECTRICAL WORK

h. Dry Contacts for remote monitoring of alarm status.

i. NEMA 12 Enclosure with Disconnect Switch.

B. Manufacturers

1. Integral to Panelboard (for 120/240V): Schneider Electric – Square D NQ factory installed with circuit breaker. Or equal.

2.14. ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosure for control panel, control station, boxes, or device applications where not specified or shown elsewhere to be provided per the following table.

Exterior Locations NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Interior Wet Locations NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Corrosive Areas NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Hazardous Areas NEMA 7 Stainless Steel All Other Areas NEMA 12 Painted

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. General

1. Verify mounting supports brackets and hardware are properly sized and located.

2. Set all equipment level and plumb.

3. Identification nameplates and plaques shall be provided for all equipment.

B. Panelboards

1. Incorporate panelboard within box. Increase box width as required for additional space for auxiliary equipment, subfeeds or controls. Minimum depth 5-3/4 inches; increase if required to maintain 2 inches between edge of knockouts and front edge of cabinet. Height of cabinet as required. Maximum mounting height to top of cabinet is 72 inches. Locate panels as shown on the Contract Drawings.

2. Contractor shall include field time to install/replace panelboard circuit breakers with the spare parts to accommodate coordination issues with the process, motor, or other equipment ratings for the project.

3. Loading: Panelboards shall be loaded evenly on each phase. Maximum imbalance shall be limited to 1 kVA between phases (i.e., 3-4-5 is not acceptable; 4-5-4 is acceptable).

C. Circuit Breakers

1. Circuit breaker trip ratings and fuse sizings shown on the Contract Drawings are maximum for the specific application.


2. Breakers shall be removable from the front of the panel or board without disturbing adjacent units.

3. All breakers and fuses shall be suitably mounted in an enclosure and properly supported.

4. Individual-mounted circuit breakers and fused switches shall be provided with NEMA enclosures and installed at locations shown on Drawings and as required by National Electric Code at approximately 60-inches from floor to top of enclosure.

5. Fuses shall be of the rejection type unless otherwise shown or specified.

6. Handle Operators: All enclosures for individually-mounted circuit breakers or fuses shall have enclosure-mounted handle operators, operating through approximately 180 degree arc. Flush mounted circular rotating handle operators are unacceptable.

7. Disconnecting Means: For separately-mounted exterior circuit breakers, safety and disconnect switches, provide locking-type handles to be locked in both the ON (closed) or OFF (open) positions.

8. Circuit breakers shall be provided with uniformly designed nameplates to clearly indicate the type, rating, listing/recognition/certification marks, and other information as defined in UL 489.

9. All terminals shall comply with UL 486A and B and CSA 1165 Standards. Torque markings shall be provided and followed per UL 489.

10. Terminals shall be amply sized, including adapters or special lugs to connect the conductor(s) as shown, specified or required.

11. Adjust trip settings so that circuit breakers coordinate with other overcurrent protective devices in circuit.

12. Adjust trip settings to provide adequate protection from overcurrent and fault currents.

D. Transformers

1. Use flexible metallic conduit, 2 feet minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make connection to side panel of enclosure.

2. Mount transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets furnished by manufacturer.

3. Provide vibration isolators to prevent vibrations from transmitting to walls or other enclosures.

4. Install grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 16100, Grounding.

5. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.

3.02. CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Conduit System Fabrication

1. All interior conduit shall be installed exposed. No conduit shall be in or under slabs except for building incoming/outgoing systems.


2. No conduits within walls where the walls are below grade, i.e., in basements or galleries.

3. Conduit Defects - All conduit runs, cuts in coatings, to be free of indentations, elliptical sections, blisters, and other defects. Repair or replace damaged conduit sections as instructed by the Owner.

4. Conduit Cutting - Cut all conduit ends square and remove all burrs. Cut conduit ends exactly to avoid excessive penetration into boxes.

5. Expansion Joints - Provide approved conduit expansion joints wherever conduit crosses a structural expansion joint, is attached between two separate structures, the conduit run is 50 feet or more in a single length, or wherever shown or specified. Support conduit on each side of the expansion joint.

6. Preparation for Conductor Installation - Prior to pulling cables in any conduit system, thoroughly clean the inside of each length of conduit by swabbing or the use of compressed air to remove all foreign matter. Then temporarily plug the ends of each conduit to prevent the entrance of dirt or foreign matter.

7. Couplings

a. Tightly butt ends of conduit into the couplings.

b. In exposed work only, where standard couplings cannot be used, only union-type couplings are permitted or as otherwise acceptable to the Owner.

8. Cutting of Structures - Keep the cutting of walls or floors for conduit to a minimum. Where such cutting is absolutely necessary, take care so as not to weaken the walls or floor involved. Do not cut beams or other structural supports under any condition.

9. Connection to Devices - Conduit attachment to all electrical equipment, such as sheet steel junction boxes, pullboxes, switches, etc., to be made with approved fittings with non-metallic bushings.

10. Conduit Bends and Elbows

a. Rigid Metallic Conduit Systems (Types A, A-1, B, C, E, and E-1)

1) Heating metal conduit to facilitate bending is strictly prohibited.

2) Field bending metal conduit is permitted as follows:

a) Types A, A-1, B, E, and E-1 - Up to and including 3/4-inch size.

b) Type C - Up to and including 1-1/4-inch size.

3) For all rigid metal conduit larger than that above, use manufactured elbows or use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends.

4) Use manufactured elbows for all bends in Type A, A-1, B, E, and E-1 conduit systems.

5) Make all bends with radius no less than N.E.C. requirement.


b. Rigid Non-Metallic Systems (Types D, D-1, DB, and EB)

1) Join non-metallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe non-metallic conduit with appropriate cleaner, then dry before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.

2) Field bending of Types D and D-1 conduit is permitted only if a “hot box” is used.

3) Make all bends with radius no less than NEC requirement.

4) Kinked or crimped conduit bends are not acceptable. Remove and replace all such bends.

11. Routing of Conduits - Keep the number of bends, offsets, and crossovers to a mini-mum; however, not more than three 90-degree elbows or equivalent bends up to 270 degrees is to be installed in any run between pulling or access fittings.

12. Structural - Make holes around conduit or cables watertight or gas-tight via silicone masonry sealant upon completion of conduit or cable system.

B. Conduit Size - Minimum conduit sizes shall be as follows unless specifically shown otherwise:

1. 3/4-inch for exposed locations (includes those areas above drop ceiling of lay-in tiles)

2. 1-inch for any concealed conduit in walls or within or beneath slabs.

3. 2-inch for any conduit in ductbanks.

C. Changes in Conduit Sizes - Made at pull or junction boxes except where specifically shown via a pull fitting.

D. Conduit and Sleeve Sealing

1. Seal inside of conduit (after installing and testing conductors) where passing through exterior walls or walls containing vapor seals or required to be gastight. Sealing may be accomplished by locating junction or approved sealing fitting at wall and filling with an approved waterproof electrical putty or sealing compound. Seal around all interior conduit passing through floor and wall boxouts.

2. Where driptight and watertight NEMA 4X and 12 installations are required, use only watertight hubs for top or side entry. Locknuts with gaskets are not acceptable. Conduits entering the top of electrical equipment are to either be sealed or located in such a manner as to prevent water from entering the equipment through the conduit system. Install conduit for ease of sealing.

3. Provide sleeves where conduit passes through poured-in-place concrete floors or walls. Core drill all other concrete walls, new or existing. Make sleeves 1-inch minimum, larger than O.D. of conduit.

E. Access Fittings

1. May be used as required to facilitate installation of conductors or where shown.

2. Provide access fittings or conductors, as manufacturer recommends so as not to damage conductor or insulation during conductor pulling operations.


F. Pull and Junction Boxes - All pull and junction boxes shall be installed where shown or specified. Additional boxes may be installed as required to facilitate installation of conduit system.

G. Underground Conduits/Duct Banks

1. All duct banks shall be concrete encased. The duct bank/concrete encasement shall extend to the final panel/cabinet location within the structure.

2. General - Trenching, rock excavation, backfilling, concrete, reinforcing and rough grading shall be provided by this Contract in accordance with the applicable sections of the Contract Specifications. Finish grading shall be by the General Contractor.

3. Underground conduit shall consist of parallel runs of conduit as shown.

4. All underground, vertical conduit bends shall be 36-inch radius; all horizontal bends shall be long 36 radius, 36 inches minimum, for underground systems.

5. Stagger all joints.

6. Make underground joints watertight. Seal underground threaded conduit joints with Thomas & Betts “Cold Seal” strips and cover with electrical tape.

7. Slope ductbank continuously away from buildings at 3 inches per 100 feet to the nearest manhole unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings. Do not install ductbanks with a low point between structures.

8. Clean all spare conduits and seal watertight with removable duct plugs.

9. At concrete encased ductbank, make pour continuous wherever feasible. Where separate pours must be made, install 48-inch by #6 rebars, three at the top and three at the bottom, inserted 24 inches into the end of the first pour.

10. Exercise care not to overexcavate ductbank trenches. Any low spots must be brought to line with compacted crusher run granular material.

11. Terminate all spares in panelboards, or pullboxes unless otherwise indicated.

12. Provide a No. 6 ground wire (stranded bare, tinned copper cable) below conduits before backfilling.

13. Concrete Encased Ductbanks - Concrete: 2500 psi envelope at least 3 inches all sides; color top with red iron oxide. Minimum depth to top of concrete: 27 inches. Provide detectable electrical warning tape 4 to 6 inches above ductbank. Separate conduits in the ductbank in accordance with N.E.C.

14. Nominal depth to top row of conduits is 30 inches. Deeper installation may be required to avoid conflict with pipes or other objects. Maintain at least 6-inch separation between ductbank and other objects unless specific dimensions or locations are given. Secure Owner’s approval for installation of conduit shallower than 30 inches.

15. Conduits shall be terminated in concrete manholes with bell end fittings.

16. Seal conduits/ducts in all incoming underground conduits terminating in areas below grade, between warm, humid rooms, and cooler areas. Perform sealing after all


conductors are installed, testing and accepted by the Owner. No water shall enter any building, structure, or electrical equipment through any conduit.

17. Below grade instrumentation circuits (4-20mA signals) shall be installed in PVC coated rigid steel conduit (Type E-1). Instrumentation circuits shall be kept separated from power and 120VAC control circuits.

18. All duct banks shall be provided with red-oxide colored concrete on the top-surface of the concrete encasement. All duct banks shall be provided with warning tape as shown on the Contract Drawings. Spare ducts shall be provided with pull cords.

3.03. CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION

A. Installation

1. Install products in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.

2. Do not pull thermoplastic wire at temperatures below 35 degrees F.

3. Protect exposed cable from damage.

4. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.

5. Install electrical circuit loadings as designed on Contract Drawings unless approved otherwise by Owner.

6. Where instrumentation cables are installed in panels, etc., the Contractor shall arrange wiring to provide maximum clearance between instrumentation cables and other conductors. Instrumentation cables shall not be installed in the same bundle with conductors of other circuits.

7. Installation in Concrete Manholes and Handholes - Neatly bundle conductors and train them around the outside of the enclosure. Support conductors from hooks inside of enclosure.

8. Wiring Diagrams

a. Any wiring diagrams shown on plans for hookup of equipment furnished by others are approximate and are for bidding purposes only.

b. Obtain wiring diagrams, certified correct for the job, from respective supplier for all equipment and systems furnished by them.

c. Install all work in accordance with certified wiring diagrams.

9. Electrical trade to provide all power, control, and signal wiring and conduits between system components (including installation of any conductors supplied by other trades), including final connections to labeled terminal strips integral in equipment, as shown on Drawings, and in accordance with approved manufacturer’s wiring diagrams.

B. Color Coding

1. Provide color coding for all service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit conductors.

2. Grounded Conductor Color Coding in New Installations


a. Ground - Green

b. Neutrals - White*

*Exception - Where neutrals of more than one system are installed in the same raceway or box, each neutral shall be white with a different colored (not green) stripe.

3. In addition to existing facilities, ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems shall match the existing system and/or be as follows:

a. 120/208 - volt, 3 phase: Phase A - Black Phase B - Red Phase C - Blue

b. 277/480 - volt, 3 phase: Phase A - Brown Phase B - Orange Phase C - Yellow

c. 120/208 - volt, single phase: Red and black

d. DC Power - Positive Lead - Red - Negative Lead - Black

e. DC Control - All blue

f. 120-volt Control Wiring - Single conductor AC control wire shall be red, except a wire entering a motor control center compartment or control panel which is an interlock shall be color coded yellow.

g. 24-volt Control Wiring - Orange

h. Neutral (Grounded Conductor) - White or gray

i. Grounding Conductor - Green

C. Conductor Sizing

1. Conductor sizes that are shown for equipment branch circuits are the minimum sizes allowed. Refer to Schedule in paragraph 3.02.C.2.c. below for sizing conductors on circuits longer than the minimum length shown for the various voltages. Adjust conduit sizes accordingly.

2. Wiring shown without size to be sized by one of the following methods, whichever is larger. No additional payment will be made for oversized conduit or conductor.

a. Power and Lighting Circuits - Minimum size No. 12 AWG. Quantity as required for proper operation. Use 3/4-inch conduit types as required for the area where conduit is installed.

b. Control Circuits - Minimum size No. 14 AWG. Quantity as required for proper operation, use 3/4-inch conduit, type as required for the area where conduit is installed.

c. Increase minimum size conductors for 20 ampere single phase circuits where distance between power source and item served exceeds noted length in


accordance with the following table. No more than 2 percent voltage drop of all branch circuits at equipment’s rated full load current is permitted.

120 VOLTS 60’ to 100’ #10 100’ to 150’ #8 150’ up #6 208/240 VOLTS 100’ to 150’ #10 150’ to 225’ #8 225’ up #6 265/277 VOLTS 125’ to 200’ #10 200’ to 300’ #8 300’ up #6 460/480 VOLTS 225’ to 350’ #10 350’ to 525’ #8 525’ up #6

d. Minimum size of branch circuits over 20 amps per requirements of NEC Tables 310.16 thru 310.31.

3. Neutral Wire - To be equal to ungrounded wires unless otherwise shown or where connecting computers; neutral at least one size larger than ungrounded wires.

4. Ground Wire - Minimum size as required by the NEC Table 250-122.

D. Spare Conductors - Wherever groups of control and instrumentation conductors are required, provide the following minimum numbers of spare conductors. Terminate at terminal strips on both ends and mark as spare and indicate the location of opposite end.

CONDUCTORS SPARES

Up to 10 2 11 to 18 4

3.04. CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS

A. Use manufacturer’s standard lugs for connection of conductors to equipment panel or devices.

B. Use UL approved wire nuts for lighting and receptacle circuits and for other circuits, compression connectors for connection of conductors to other conductors.

C. Terminal Board Terminations - All interconnecting instrumentation wiring to terminal boards and strips to be made with insulated crimp type connectors (locking fork type). Stranded wire is not to be directly connected to terminals without the use of connectors unless the terminations are specifically made to accept bare stranded wire, i.e., tubular clamp type termination. No loose strands shall be permitted outside of the connector, whichever is utilized.

D. Motor Connections

1. Motors Less Than 1 HP - Use wire nut appropriate for the environment where the motor is located.

2. Motors From 1 to 20 HP - Use branch circuit crimp-type connectors.

3. Motors Above 20 HP - Use bolted wire connectors. Insulate the connector with insulating putty to at least 7/64 inch and tape the insulated connection with two layers half lapped of neoprene splicing tape.

E. Splicing - Make splices in accessible locations and in junction boxes. No splices will be permitted in pulling fittings or MCC wiring spaces.


3.05. GROUNDING

A. Maintain electrical integrity of conduit system throughout. Provide bonding jumpers at fittings as required; jumpers to be no longer than required. Provide separate ground wire for all non-metallic conduit systems and where grounding integrity is doubtful.

B. Basic intent of grounding specification is that grounding conductor be completely separate from system neutral and that neutral only be connected to ground at the main service grounding point. Run equipment ground independently back to main service ground. Use separate insulated (green) grounding conductors for all grounding conductors. Where ground passes through panels and disconnects, braze ground lugs to panel or disconnect housings. Isolate neutral bus or lug from ground. Ground all conduits at each panel.

C. Shielding to be continuous and grounded at one point only unless otherwise required by equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.06. EQUIPMENT TESTING (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

A. Operational - Perform operational test to determine that all components including controls, protective and switching devices and auxiliary associated equipment are in operable condition and can function as described and shown on relevant specifications, operating instructions and drawings. Provide a tabulation of all breaker trip settings.

B. Final Operational Check - Provide a check of each item in each system to determine that it is set for proper operation. With the Owner present, operate each system in a test run of appropriate duration to demonstrate compliance with performance requirements. If final corrections or adjustments are required, conduct additional test runs to make the final corrections or adjustments of systems refining and improving performances where possible. These additional test runs shall include noise and vibration reductions, elimination of hazards, better response of controls, signals and alarms, and similar system performance improvements. Provide testing or inspection devices to permit observation of actual system performances and demonstrate that controls and items requiring service or maintenance are accessible. A final test run shall be conducted with both the Owner and Owner present to demonstrate the complete system operation and to describe to the Owner the full functionality of each system.

C. Cleaning and Lubrication - After final performance test run of each electrical system, clean system both externally and internally, comply with manufacturer’s instructions for lubrication of both power and hand operated equipment, and remove excess lubrication. Touch up minor damage to factory-painted finishes and other painting specified as electrical work. Refinish work where damage is extensive.

3.07. EQUIPMENT AND DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Mounting heights shall be in accordance with all applicable ADA codes and standards. The following mounting heights shall be used as a guide only.

1. Receptacles - 48 inches.

2. Switches - 45 inches.

3. Thermostats - 54 inches.

4. Enclosed Starters or Circuit Breakers - 66 inches to top.

5. Control Panels - See Section 16990, Control Panels.


6. Lighting Panelboard - 72 inches to top.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16100

GROUNDING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Grounding

1. Items to be grounded include all new or modified work of this Contract, but not be limited to metallic water services, equipment housings, motor frames, metal raceways, grounding terminals of outlets, outdoor lighting fixtures, footing rebar, ductbanks, manholes, pullboxes, and transformer secondary neutrals. In addition to the NEC requirements and the above, the following, where a part of this Project, shall be permanently and effectively grounded:

a. All structural metals.

b. All metallic panels and conduit.

c. Motor frames 10 HP and larger.

d. All metallic equipment bases and equipment mounting racks.

e. Metallic hand-railing and gaurdrails.

f. Concrete Equipment Pads (Rebar)

g. Manhole and handhole ground rods

h. Below Grade metallic piping.

i. Metallic fence posts

j. Outdoor light poles

k. Well Casing

2. Take special precautions to ground all equipment in strict accordance with the NEC and as otherwise noted in these specifications.


A. Section 01300 – SUBMITTALS

B. Section 02222 – EXCAVATING

C. Section 02223 – BACKFILLING

D. Section 02225 – TRENCHING

E. Section 02228 - COMPACTION

F. Section 16055 – ELECTRICAL WORK

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16100-1 GROUNDING

G. Section 16900 – INSTRUMENTATION - GENERAL

H. Section 16902 – ANTENNA AND MOUNTING

I. Section 16950 - TESTING AND INSPECTION

J. Section 16990 – CONTROL PANELS

1.03. REFERENCES

A. All materials and installations shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following:

1. National Electric Code

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Provide submittals and samples in accordance with Sections 01300, Submittals and 16055, Electrical Work.

B. Submitted for all materials used in connection with the grounding system.

C. Submit a 12-inch sample of the ground system tinned grounding conductor and other samples as may be requested by the Owner.

D. Certified test reports of grounding system resistance.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.01. ELECTRODES

A. Electrolytic Ground Rods

1. Ground Rods shall be a self-contained system consisting of a 10-foot vertical copper tube with drilled holes, containing non-hazardous Calsolyte™ salts. Systems shall be permanently capped at the top and bottom ends. All Electrical connections to the ground rods shall be made via exothermic welding. All cables shall be copper. Backfill material shall be natural volcanic non-corrosive form of Bentonite, free of polymer sealants and bear the NSF mark. Backfill shall have maximum resistivity of 60 ohm-cm at 30% solids density.

2. System shall be UL listed.

3. System shall include a 30-year minimum warranty with 50-year life expectancy.

4. System access from grade shall incorporate the use of a composite Fiberlyte inspection box (test well) load rated for 20,000 lbs. Box shall be installed flush with finish grade.

5. Manufacturers:

a. Lyncole XIT Grounding System 800-962-2610

b. Or Approved Equal


2.02. CONDUCTOR

A. Ground Conductor (Above Grade) – Type THW insulated wire in conduit or other raceway. Color code insulation per NEC.

B. Ground System Conductor (Buried) - Soft drawn or soft annealed stranded copper, tinned bare concentric conductor.

C. Equipment Bonding Conductor – For sizes 8 AWG and smaller, solid ASTM B-1. For sizes 6 AWG and larger, stranded ASTM B-8.

2.03. CONNECTORS

A. Compression-Type Fittings

1. Construction – Two bolts and a minimum of 1-1/2 inches in length.

2. Manufacturers

a. Thomas & Betts

b. Burndy Corporation

c. Or Equal

B. Welded Connection

1. Construction – Molded fusion-welding process.

2. Manufacturers

a. Cadweld

b. Thermoweld

c. Or Equal

C. Mechanical Connection

1. Construction – Mechanical lugs securely fastened using silicon bronze hardware.

2. Manufacturers

a. Thomas & Betts

b. Burndy Corporation

c. Or Equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. GENERAL

A. Install ground system or grid as shown on the Contract Drawings. Install such that tops of driven ground rods are a minimum of 12 inches below grade, except for chemically filled ground rods which shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Ground rods


are to be driven at least 2 feet below the groundwater level. Depth of the conductor system is to be 30 inches minimum with a minimum length of 20 feet. Thermoweld rods to copper, grounding conductor or use approved mechanical connections to rods where grounding conductor is No. 4 or smaller.

B. When rods are shown and cannot be driven due to boulders or rock formations, install grounding plates below groundwater level or a minimum of 6 feet below grade.

C. Final resistance to ground of completed ground system shall be a maximum of 5 ohms in accordance with Section 16950, Testing and Inspection. If tests indicate higher than 5 ohms resistance, then the Contractor shall install additional rods or plates at no additional cost to Owner to lower the resistance to below 5 ohms.

D. Chemically filled ground rods shall be used for all building and equipment ground grids, ground rings, building and electrical service grounds, and where shown on the Contract Drawings.

3.02. CONNECTIONS

A. Buried Connection - Made with thermal welded connections specially made for grounding systems

B. Exposed Connection - Made with grounding system compression-type fittings.

C. Connection to Metal – Make all connections to water pipes, steel surfaces, etc., using mechanical connectors.

D. Thoroughly clean all surfaces to bright bare metal to accept ground connections.

3.03. GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR

A. Size per NEC 250-66 unless larger size is shown on the Contract Drawings:

3.04. MAIN SERVICE GROUNDS

A. Bond ground system securely to:

1. Connect grounding electrode conductor to building water service. (If available and if metallic water pipe is used and is of sufficient conductive length to insure continuity, provide jumpers around meters or other removable devices as required.)

2. Building structural steel (if available). One No. 2/0 minimum two places, opposite corners or building. Buildings over 60 feet in length No. 2/0 ground at each corner.

3. One No. 2/0 to foundation (footing) steel reinforcing (20-foot minimum length 1/2-inch rebar).

4. Connect two grounding electrode conductors in conduit to facility grounding grid or system.

3.05. BUILDING GROUND CONNECTION

A. Connection from main ground to building systems shall be as specified herein and as required. Positively connect equipment housings and conduit system to main service ground, only at main service ground.


3.06. INDIVIDUAL GROUNDS

A. If individual equipment or individual building grounds are made, separate grounding conductors (in earth where possible) shall connect these grounds to main service ground. (This requirement applies only within each system of subsystem fed from a distribution transformer.) Intent is that main ground shall be at the main or incoming power source and not at utilization point unless positively connected to same.

3.07. INTERIOR CONDUIT AND RACEWAY SYSTEM

A. Electrical integrity of conduit system shall be maintained throughout. Provide bonding jumpers at fittings as required; jumpers shall be no longer than required. Provide separate ground wire for all conduit systems.

3.08. EXTERIOR CONDUIT AND RACEWAY SYSTEM

A. Provide separate ground wire for all conduit systems leaving the building interior. Size per NEC 250-122 in NEC.

3.09. FEEDERS

A. Include an insulated grounding conductor, sized per NEC 250-66, in each conduit. Bond all served equipment frames, enclosures, ground bars, etc., to this conductor. Make all conductor terminations and connections using compression lugs or fittings designed and UL labeled for the purposes.

3.10. SEPARATE GROUND

A. Basic intent of grounding specification is that grounding conductor be completely separate from system neutral and connect neutral to ground at the main service grounding point only. Run separate insulated (green) grounding conductors from all grounding points independently back to main service ground. Where ground passes through panels and disconnects, ground lugs shall be brazed or bolted to panel or disconnect housings with neutral bus or lug isolated from same. Ground all metallic conduits at each panel. Clean paint from metal to accept ground lugs.

3.11. METALLIC, NON-CURRENT CARRYING ENCLOSURE

A. Connect to ground bar at load center supplying same through conduit system using proper fittings at junction boxes, expansion joints, and between ground bushings on each conduit within all sheetmetal enclosures.

3.12. SHIELDED CABLE

A. Shielding to be continuous and grounded at one point only unless otherwise required by equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.13. CONDUIT SEALS

A. Where non-metallic conduits protecting grounding conductors enter the building from the exterior, provide watertight wall seals on each conduit and a sealing bushing on the enclosed conductor. Sealing bushings on all conduits penetrating the floor. Make bonding jumper connection to metallic conduit, where equipped with sealing bushings, with water pipe ground connections of proper size. Seal watertight the inside of all conduits.


3.14. GROUND CONDUIT LABELS

A. Label all service, equipment frame or motor grounding conduits containing only grounding conductors – “SUPPLEMENTAL GROUND” Label to identify item being grounded.

3.15. INDIVIDUAL MOTOR CONNECTION

A. Make connections from frames of motors over 10 HP directly to the exterior/buried ground system. Motors up to this HP shall be connected to the circuit or raceway grounding system. Where motor is separate from and not mounted on a major equipment frame, bond frame to motor ground.

3.16. MAJOR EQUIPMENT FRAMES

A. Make connection from major equipment frames, i.e., belt dewatering equipment, mechanical screens or grit equipment, directly to the exterior/buried ground system. Conductor shall be installed in conduit the full length from the grounded item to outside below grade.

3.17. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM

A. Ground the neutral of the generator through a service entrance type ground link at the generator transfer switch, in accordance with the NEC.

B. Connect generator equipment frame to ground system at two points via No. 4/0 ground conductors. Install 1-inch conduit where conductor is in or under slab.

3.18. CONCRETE MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

A. Provide one 3/4-inch diameter by 10-foot long ground rod in or at each manhole / handhole driven outside.

B. Provide No. 4/0 ground conductor from ground rod to all metallic parts including cable racks and manhole frame.

C. Bond ductbank grounds to manhole / handhole ground rod.

3.19. DUCTBANK GROUND CONDUCTOR

A. Bond ductbank ground conductor to the building ground system when provided, or when a new building ground system was not provided, install a new ground rod and bond the ductbank ground to it.

B. Bond ductbank grounds to manhole ground rod, if available.

3.20. GROUND ROD INSPECTION/TEST WELLS

A. Provide ground rod inspection/test wells where shown on the Contract Drawings.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16191

ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND FASTENERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Conduit and equipment supports.

B. Anchors and fasteners.

C. Equipment Mounting Racks (EMRs).

1.02. REFERENCES

A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association.

B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.



B. Section 16055 – ELECTRICAL WORK

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Provide submittals for all conduit supports and anchors.

B. Equipment Mounting Racks

1. Submit shop drawings which shall include the following:

a. Scaled and dimensioned drawings showing front, side, and plan view of each type of equipment mounting rack.

b. Weight of equipment being mounting to the rack. Weight information shall be obtained from the equipment manufacturers for each piece of equipment.

c. Submit materials of construction for all parts and components including fasteners and hardware.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or other third-party testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS, ANCHORS 8612289 16191-1 AND FASTENERS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and Finishes - Provide products which incorporate corrosion resistance adequate for the conditions in which they are to be installed.

B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products and designing system supports.

2.02. EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Conduit Supports

1. Stainless Steel

a. Description - For the purpose of this Section, all stainless steel shall be Type 316.

b. All fasteners, fittings, clamps, saddles and accessories shall be stainless steel.

c. Manufacturers:

1) Uni-Strut

2) 2) B-Line

B. Equipment Mounting Racks

1. Stainless Steel or Aluminum

a. Description - For the purpose of this Section, all stainless steel shall be Type 316.

b. Main vertical and horizontal supports shall be 3” x 3” angle members or 2” x 2” square tubing.

c. All fasteners, fittings, clamps, saddles and accessories shall be stainless steel.

d. Equipment mounting racks shall be designed to support the required equipment. Equipment mounting racks shall be constructed to maintain a rigid installation minimizing movement and racking.

e. Materials

1) Sq. Tubing: 316 S.S or 2” x 2” x ¼” Aluminum Alloy (6063-T52)

2) Backplate: ¼” thick aluminum plate (up to 24” x 24” maximum)

3) 3/8” thick aluminum plate (for sizes larger than 24” x 24”)

4) Bottom Plate: 6” x 6” x ½” Aluminim Alloy Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS, ANCHORS 8612289 16191-2 AND FASTENERS

5) Hardware: 3/8” stainless steel locknuts, bolts, and washers

f. Assembly:

1) Corners and angles shall be ground smooth and shall be free of burrs.

2) Equipment mounting racks shall be constructed as required to accommodate field conditions such as handrails, mounting against walls or other structures, etc.

3) Equipment mounting racks installed in grass areas shall be provided with a concrete equipment pad. The concrete equipment pad shall extend a minimum of 6” around the perimeter of the equipment plus a minimum of 42” in front of the equipment to provide an area for operators to stand.

4) Equipment mounting racks shall be sized to facilitate access to the equipment controls. Controls shall be accessible controls are between 42” and 60” above finished grade.

5) Utilize 3/8” full welds as appropriate for the connection of the components.

6) Provide bituminous coating between all aluminum surfaces and concrete surfaces.

2.03. SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment Anchoring and Supports - All equipment shall be securely anchored to the building and properly supported to resist the seismic forces at the site. Anchorage for equipment subject to thermal expansion shall be in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. Anchors and fasteners shall be of such size and number to resist the shear and overturning moments from the seismic forces.

B. Contractor shall consider the equipment weight, dimensions, center of gravity, standard connections, manufacturer’s recommendations and behavior problems (vibration, thermal expansion, etc.) associated with equipment or piping so that the supports are proper for the installation.

C. Seismic restraints shall be as detailed on the Contract Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. Anchor conduits to or support from structural members only.

3. Fasteners used to wall mount any material or equipment weighing 75 lbs or more to concrete or masonry shall be adhesive grouted Type 316 stainless steel anchors in accordance with Section 03001, Concrete. All floor-mounted equipment and other


wall-mounted materials or equipment weighing less than 75 lbs may be supported via drilled anchors. For exception for seismic restraints, see paragraph 2.05 above.

4. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.

5. Do not use powder-actuated anchors.

6. Do not drill or cut structural members.

7. Install supports in a manner that does not interfere with or weaken the bolts when attaching to structural steel. Obtain the Engineer’s written approval of any drilling or cutting on the structure.

8. Through spaces where surface mounting is not available, install multiple conduits on electrical channel rack, either hung or wall mounted. Provide space on each rack for 25 percent additional conduits.

9. All hung systems with conduits 3-inch or larger shall also have lateral seismic supports at each hanger.

10. Support conduit passing through above-grade floors so that sealing sleeves or mechanical link seals do not carry the weight of the conduit.

11. Secure conduit installed in poured-in-place concrete to reinforcing bars with tie wires. Install suitable brackets secured to forms in the absence of reinforcing bars.

12. Install individual surface mounted conduit with two-piece cast malleable iron clamp assembly.

13. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four or six anchors, depending upon the number of normal anchor points. See table at the end of this section.

14. In wet and damp locations use PVC coated stainless steel channel supports to stand cabinets, panelboards and mounting panels 1/2-inch off wall.

15. Finish of all supports shall be compatible with the conduit system applicable for the area classification where installed.

16. After thorough investigation of architectural, structural and shop drawings related to work to determine how equipment, fixtures, conduit, panelboards, etc. are to be supported, mounted or suspended, provide:

a. Extra steel bolts, inserts, pipe stands, brackets, or any other items required for proper support.

b. Supporting accessories where required, whether or not shown on Drawings.

17. Refer to details on the Contract Drawings for free standing and railing mounted construction and for any other details of special conditions. For other situations, the Contractor shall, prior to installation, submit mounting details to the Engineer for approval.

B. In areas where spray insulation is to be applied, install steel channel standoffs for electrical conduit, boxes and enclosures prior to installation of insulation.


Provide conduit extensions to all boxes and enclosures. Install connecting conduit, boxes and/or enclosures over the installed insulation.

C. Support Applications

1. All Locations – Stainless steel channel system.

D. Anchor and Fastener Application Schedule - See Schedule at end of this Section.

E. Support Spacing

1. Metallic Conduit - Not more than 8 feet on center. Types A, A-1, B, E, E-1 within 3 feet of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. Type C, within 18 inches of box or fitting. Support boxes, fittings, or cabinets independent of conduit system.

2. Non-Metallic Conduit

a. Sizes up through 1-1/4-inches diameter - not more than 3 feet on center.

b. Sizes 1-1/2-inches diameter and larger - Not more than 4 feet on center.

c. Within 18 inches of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting.

3. Maximum Deflection

a. Metallic Conduit - 1/100th of span between supports.

b. PVC Conduit - 1/360th of span between supports.


ANCHOR AND FASTENER APPLICATION SCHEDULE

ITEM CATEGORY

MOUNTING SURFACES WOOD,

PLYWOOD WALLBOARD, GYPSUM,

FRP, COMPOSITION HOLLOW

MASONRY SOLID

MASONRY CAST

CONCRETE SHEET METAL

Individual conduit F G D A A E Steel/FRP channel F, I D D A A E Structures; i.e., conduit rack, cable tray F, I D D A A -- Devices and equipment less than 75 lbs. I Note 1 D A A Note 2 Devices and equipment 75 lbs. or more (Note 4) I Note 2 H B, H B, C, H Note 2 Mounting panels (Note 3) I Note 1 D B, H B, C, H Note 2

Key to Anchor Types: A - Drilled (lead insert in masonry, expansion bolt in concrete) B - Adhesive grouted anchor

C - Cast in place insert D - Toggle bolt, hollow wall fastener E - Sheet metal screw F - Wood screw G - Sheet rock screw H - Through bolt I- Lag screw

In wet, exterior, corrosive, or hazardous areas, all fasteners and anchors shall be Type 316 stainless steel. In all unclassified areas, cadmium-plated fasteners shall be used, except grouted anchors shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Notes: (1) Support via plywood mounting panel lagged to studs or via electrical channel lagged to studs. (2) Do not mount to these surfaces. (3) Panels mounted to masonry or concrete surfaces shall have 1/2-inch air space between surface and panel via stainless steel spacers. (4) Provide two additional support connections; minimum of four or six, depending on number of normal connection points. This requirement may

necessitate fabricating the additional connections. Maintain NEMA rating of enclosure.

END OF SECTION

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16191-6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND FASTENERS

SECTION 16421

UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical service from source to primary distribution equipment to service meter.

B. Underground service entrance.

C. Metering equipment.


A. Section 01640 – EQUIPMENT – GENERAL

B. Section 02222 - EXCAVATING

C. Section 02223 - BACKFILLING

D. Section 16055 - ELECTRICAL WORK

1.03. REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

B. Orange and Rockland - Specifications for electric installations.

1.04. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electric Utility (Power) – Southern Maryland Electrical Company (SMECO)

1. System Characteristics – 480/277 volts, three-phase, four-wire, 60 Hertz as shown on Drawings.

2. Service Entrance – Underground.

1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01640, Equipment - General and 16055, Electrical Work.

B. Submit utility company prepared drawings.

C. Submit to the Owner and the utility company the following:

1. Final locations of meter.

2. Utility metering compartment(s).

3. Contract Drawings and other equipment submittals as required by the Utility.

D. Submit a copy of the letter from the utility company indicating approval of the installation.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16421-1 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE


A. Perform Work in accordance with utility company requirements.

B. Maintain one copy of utility company and inspection agency documents on site.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

C. Conform to requirements of the utility.

1.08. UTILITY COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with the utility and arrange for a pre-installation conference to convene two weeks prior to commencing work of this section. Conference shall be at the site of the work and include the Owner.

B. The Engineer has made initial contact with the utility on behalf of the Owner regarding service(s) at these facilities.

C. The Contractor is responsible for completing any applications including all required application or inspection fees relative to permanent equipment, cable or devices.

D. Coordinate with the electric utility for connection of electrical service. Abide by utility requirements.

E. Contact Person

1. Electric Utility

Company: Southern Maryland Electrical Company (SMECO) Mr. Chris Coyle

Tel. No.: 301-274-8015

Pump Station Address: 2218 Wakefield Circle Waldorf, MD 20602


A. Verify that field measurements are as on utility company drawings.


2.01. UTILITY METERS

A. Meters will be furnished by utility company and installed by contractor.


2.02. UTILITY METER BASE

A. Manufacturers

1. General Electric.

2. Square D.

3. Delta Metal Products.

4. Substitutions - Under provisions of Section 01640, Equipment - General.

B. Description - Meter base rated as shown on Drawings continuous duty with 7 jaws, manual circuit closing type lever type bypass.

2.03. CT CABINET

A. Contractor shall provide and install CT Cabinet and revenue meter socket as required to provide a complete electrical service installation. Contractor shall coordinate with the utility for general equipment arrangements. All work shall be approved by SMECO and local inspection authority.

2.04. ELECTRICAL DUCTS

A. Provide primary electrical duct within 3’ of utility vault to new transformer as shown drawings. Provide secondary electrical ducts in concrete envelope from the utility service transformer. Electrical ducts shall be per utility company requirements and be coordinated with the utility. Contractor shall run all conduits prior to SMECO electrical inspection. Upon approval and bill payment, SMECO will run primary and secondary conductors within 2 weeks.

2.05. SERVICE ENTRANCE PLAQUES

A. Provide service entrance identification plaques and nameplates as required by the NEC.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Verify conditions under provisions of Section 01640, Equipment - General.

B. Verify that service equipment is ready to be connected and energized.

C. Provide inspection certificates.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. Make arrangements with utility company to obtain temporary electric service as required as to keep area in operation until such time as the new service can be brought online to the Pumping Station.

B. Make arrangements with utility company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project.

C. Coordinate location of utility company’s facilities to ensure proper access is available.


3.03. INSTALLATION

A. Install primary service conduits from vault to transformer within SMECO requirements. Install service entrance conduits in concrete envelope from utility company’s transformer to service entrance equipment.

3.04. UTILITY METERING ACCOMMODATIONS

A. Install all test devices furnished by the utility.

B. Utility shall provide all utility metering instruments. Mount all meter sockets as required.

C. Provide grounding, connections and miscellaneous materials required.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16484

CONTACTORS AND MOTOR STARTING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Manual motor starters.

B. Motor starters.

C. Magnetic contactors.

D. Overload Relays & Solid State Overload Relays




C. Section 16100 – GROUNDING

D. Section 16191 - ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND FASTENERS

E. Section 16903 – AUXILIARY CONTROLS AND RELAYS

F. Section 16990 – CONTROL PANELS

1.03. REFERENCES

A. UL listing is required for all factory-fabricated assemblies. Individual component listing is also required.

B. Size equipment per NEMA and UL standards to match motor or equipment controlled.

C. The following specifications and standards, except as hereinafter modified, are incorporated herein by reference and form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto. The issue in effect at time of construction shall be applicable. In text, such specifications and standards are referred to by basic designation only.

1. National Electric Code (NEC).

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) - UL-508.

3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

a. NEMA-1C-1

b. NEMA AB-1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers

4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

5. J.I.C. Standards for Industrial Control.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade CONTACTORS AND 8612289 16484-1 MOTOR STARTING EQUIPMENT

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Sections 01300, Submittals and 16055, Electrical Work.

B. Shop drawings shall be submitted for all starters and contactors. The submittal shall contain all the information needed to prove conformance with these specifications.

C. Submit elementaries and block diagrams for systems of relays and/or contactors.

D. Samples shall be submitted as may be requested by the Engineer.


A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.


A. Manufacturer - Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years’ experience.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.


2.01. GENERAL

A. All equipment furnished shall be of one approved manufacturer where possible.

B. Construction

1. Parts easily removable when subject to wear, arcing damage, or electrical failure.

2. Enclosures - Cold rolled, formed seam-welded steel or cast aluminum with suitable legend plates and NEMA enclosures as per Section 16055, Electrical Work.

3. Overload Protection

a. Magnetic Starters

1) Melting Alloy or Bi-metal - For all motors including those with internal protection, of proper size to match the controller. One sensing device per ungrounded motor lead. Exception: Windings used only during motor starting and automatically disconnected when the motor is running may be unprotected. Units shall be “standard,” “slow,” or “fast” response as required for the type motor and load per the suppliers’ recommendations. Size heaters per manufacturer’s table supplied with the starter for the actual motor full load current and enclosure indicated on the motor nameplates. Temperature compensating motor starter overloads where or when required.


2) Solid State - Overload relay, self powered, current sensing, phase unbalance and phase loss protection, NC standard trip contacts, visible trip indication, trip test function, power LED. Provide auxiliary NO contact (convertible to NC). Adjust solid state overload settings to match motor manufacturers nameplate motor data.

3) Manufacturers – Square D Company, or equal

b. Manual Starters - Thermal overloads in each phase leg or one for each motor winding. Use Type A for fractional horsepower and Type B for integral horsepower applications.

4. Auxiliary Contacts - Rated as required by interlocking and/or automatic control systems as indicated in these Specifications and/or on the Contract Drawings. Minimum 2 NO and 2 NC auxiliary contacts required.

2.02. MANUAL STARTERS

A. General

1. Contact Mechanism - Quick make, quick break toggle action.

2. Contactors - Silver alloy.

3. Enclosures - Adequately sized to contain the starter and all accessories and/or modification. NEMA classification to meet requirements of Section 16055 and 16990.

B. Fractional HP Type

1. Two-pole (unless shown or specified otherwise).

2. Toggle operated (unless shown or specified otherwise).

3. Full voltage.

4. Shall be non-reversing, reversing or two-speed as shown or specified.

5. Thermal overload device for each phase or motor winding.

6. Lock-off provisions and neon pilot light.

7. Selector switch as required, labeled for function performed.

8. Square D Company, or equal

C. Integral HP Type

1. Two- or three-pole polyphase.

2. Thermal overload device for each phase.

3. Full voltage, non-reversing, reversing or two-speed as shown or specified.

4. Pushbutton operated with handle guard and lockoff.

5. Neon pilot light(s).


6. Auxiliary contacts as required.

7. Low voltage protection to trip unit on power outage when shown or specified.

8. Square D Company, or equal.

2.03. MAGNETIC STARTERS

A. General

1. Size per NEMA and UL standard to match motor controlled. Exceptions: NEMA Size 1 minimum (except NEMA Size 0 may be used for ventilation equipment 2 HP and less and in a separate H&V control panel) or as shown otherwise.

2. Starter coil voltage shall be 120 VAC unless noted otherwise.

3. Provide auxiliary contacts as required.

4. Provide with melting alloy thermal overloads.

B. Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starting (FVNR)

1. Across-the-line type, rated 600 volts maximum.

2. Equipped with double break silver alloy contacts. (Single break shall be supplied on Size 8.)

3. Straight-through wiring.

4. Coils - Of molded construction through NEMA Size 7. Coils on Size 8 starters shall be form wound, taped, varnished and baked. Replaceable from the front without removing the starter from the panel.

5. Suitable for the addition of at least four auxiliary contacts.


C. Full Voltage Reversing Starting (FVR)

1. Across-the-line type, rated 600 volts maximum.

2. Contacts - Double break silver alloy.

3. Coils - Molded construction.

4. Suitable for the addition of at least four auxiliary contacts.

5. Mechanical interlock to prevent the operation of both devices at the same time.

6. Square D Company, or equal

D. Full Voltage Multi-Speed Starting (FVMS)

1. Furnish with overload relay and auxiliary relay for each speed.



2.04. COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTERS

A. Factory assembled of UL-listed components within a single enclosure containing MCP, magnetic starter, CPT, overloads, and pilot devices as called for.

B. Handle mechanism permanently connected to switch (operating through approximately a 180-degree arc) and installed in body of enclosure with interlock to prevent unauthorized opening or closing of door with switch on.

C. Provision for padlocking disconnect handle in off position.

D. Disconnect handle having clear indication of switch(es) position.

E. Auxiliary switches where indicated on Contract Drawings.

F. Magnetic starter, auxiliary controls and motor circuit protector as specified.

2.05. MAGNETIC CONTACTORS

A. General

1. Power and lighting contactors of the voltage, current rating, and number of poles as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

2. Continuously rated for all types of ballast and tungsten lighting, resistive and motor loads.

3. Totally enclosed, double break, silver-cadmium-oxide power type.

4. Auxiliary arcing contacts are not acceptable.

5. Auxiliary contacts and control circuit fusing as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

6. Industrial duty rated for 600-volt operation.

B. Electrically-Held Contactor Coils - Continuously rated and encapsulated.

C. Mechanically-Held Contactors - Coil-clearing contacts supplied so that the contactor coil shall be energized only during the instance of operation. Both the latching and unlatching coils shall be encapsulated.

D. Manufacturers

1. Mechanically Held Over 200 Amps - Square D Company, or equal

2. Electrically Held Over 200 Amps - Square D Company, or equal

3. Mechanically Held 20-200 Amps - Square D Company, or equal

4. Electrically Held 20-200 Amps - Square D Company, or equal

5. Multipole Lighting Contractors, 20 Amp - Square D Company, or equal

2.06. RELAYS (0-25 AMPS)

A. See Section 16055, Electrical Work.


2.07. SOLID STATE OVERLOAD RELAYS (SSOL)

A. SSOL relays shall be self powered, current sensing, phase unbalance and phase loss protection, NC standard trip contacts, visible trip indication, trip test function, power LED. Provide auxiliary NO contact (convertible to NC). Adjust solid state overload settings to match motor manufacturers nameplate motor data.

B. SSOL relays shall include current transformers, power supplies, discrete input and discrete output points as well as communication port.

C. Provide (2) remote programming units with interconnecting cables to connect to the SSOL relay.

D. Spare Parts

1. (2) SSOL relays with all accessories.

E. Manufacturers

1. Square D Company Class 9065

2. Or equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. GENERAL

A. Install according to the requirements of the National Electric Code and as shown or noted on the Contact Documents.

B. Mount all contactors in an enclosure as individual units or in a control panel as part of a control system.

C. Enclosures and control panels to comply with Sections 16055, Electrical Work; 16903, Auxiliary Controls and Relays; and 16990, Control Panels.

3.02. INDIVIDUAL RELAY OR CONTACTOR ENCLOSURES

A. Wall mount unless noted or shown otherwise.

B. Mounting Height - Approximately 60 inches to enclosure top from finished floor.

C. NEMA enclosure for area of mounting, per Section 16055, Electrical Work.

3.03. ENCLOSED STARTER MOUNTING

A. Height - Per Section 116055, Electrical Work.

B. Methods and Material - Per Section 16055, Electrical Work, and manufacturer’s requirements.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16497

TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01. SCOPE

A. Furnish Automatic Transfer Switch with number of poles, amperage, voltage, withstand and close-on ratings as shown on the drawings and as specified. Each automatic transfer shall consist of an inherently double throw power transfer switch mechanism and a microprocessor controller to provide automatic operation. All transfer switches and controllers shall be the products of the same manufacturer.



B. Section 01600 – MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

C. Section 16055 – ELECTRICAL WORK

D. Section 16100 – GROUNDING

E. Section 16620 – PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS

F. Section 16950 – TESTING AND INSPECTION

1.03. REFERENCES

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code NEMA ICS 1 General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems NEMA ICS 2 Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies NEMA ICS 4 Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems UL 1008 Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment NFPA 110 Emergency and Standby Power Systems IEC 947-6- Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear; Multifunction equipment;

Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings shall be submitted for all materials furnished under this Section.

B. Furnish the shop drawing for the automatic transfer switch shall include related systems and components.

C. The shop drawing shall include, as a minimum, the following equipment specification information. The information shall be highlighted and prove compliance with these specifications.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16497-1 TRANSFER SWITCHES

1. Electrical Ratings - voltage, switch ampere rating, and short circuit ratings.

2. Protective devices and ratings.

3. Layout drawings.

4. Performance functions.

D. Manufacturer’s Instruction - The Contractor shall furnish three copies of a composite instruction book covering this equipment. Each instruction book shall not necessarily be limited to, but shall include as a minimum, the following:

1. Instructions covering overall equipment.

2. Instructions covering all major and serviceable components.

3. Instructions covering all accessories.

4. Recommended spare parts with current prices, applicable to foregoing 1, 2, and 3.

5. Complete renewal parts information.

6. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.


A. Operation Data - Include instructions for operating equipment. Include instructions for operating equipment under emergency conditions when engine generator is running.

B. Maintenance Data - Include routine preventative maintenance and lubrication schedule. List special tools, maintenance materials, and replacement parts.


A. Manufacturer - Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site in accordance with the Division 1 specifications.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosure and finish.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

1.09. MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish service and maintenance of transfer switch for five years from Date of Substantial Completion.


1.10. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide two of each special tool required for maintenance.

1.11. WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer must warrant transfer switch to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period from one (1) to ten (10) years from date of shipment from its factory in accordance with at least the following schedule: Coverage to include:

Years 1-2 Parts, labor and associated travel/lodging expense, in on-site labor is

required Years 3-5 Parts against material defects for five(5) years from the date of shipment

from it’s factory Years 6-10

Main Contacts against material defects for a period of ten(10) years from the date of shipment from its factory.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. GENERAL

A. Manufacturer’s

1. General Electric Automatic Transfer Switch – Model ZTG

2. Or Equal

2.02. MECHANICALLY HELD TRANSFER SWITCH

A. The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The electrical operator shall be a momentarily energized, single-solenoid mechanism. Main operators which include overcurrent disconnect devices, linear motors or gears shall not be acceptable. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only two possible positions, normal or emergency.

B. All transfer switch sizes shall use only one type of main operator for ease of maintenance and commonality of parts.

C. The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary outages, so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and contact temperature rise is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life.

D. All main contacts shall be silver composition. Switches rated 600 amperes and above shall have segmented, blow-on construction for high withstand and close-on capability and be protected by separate arcing contacts.

E. Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. Switches rated 600 amps and higher shall have front removable and replaceable contacts. All stationary and moveable contacts shall be replaceable without removing power conductors and/or bus bars.


F. Designs utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts thereof, which are not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching or transfer between two active power sources are not acceptable.

G. Where neutral conductors must be switched as shown on the Contract Drawings, the ATS shall be provided with fully rated overlapping neutral transfer contacts. The neutrals of the normal and emergency power sources shall be connected together only during the transfer and retransfer operation and remain connected together until power source contacts close on the source to which the transfer is being made. The overlapping neutral contacts shall not overlap for a period greater than 100 milliseconds. Neutral switching contacts which do not overlap are not acceptable.

H. Where neutral conductors are to be solidly connected as shown on the plans, a neutral conductor plate with fully rated AL-CU pressure connectors shall be provided.

2.03. MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER

A. The controller's sensing and logic shall be provided by a single built-in microprocessor for maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and the ability to communicate serially through an optional serial communication module.

B. A single controller shall provide twelve selectable nominal voltages for maximum application flexibility and minimal spare part requirements. Voltage sensing shall be true RMS type and shall be accurate to ± 1% of nominal voltage. Frequency sensing shall be accurate to ± 0.2%. The panel shall be capable of operating over a temperature range of -20 to +60 degrees C and storage from -55 to +85 degrees C.

C. The controller shall be connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness. The harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the controller to be disconnected from the transfer switch for routine maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be provided on multi-layer printed circuit boards. Interfacing relays shall be industrial grade plug-in type with dust covers. The panel shall be enclosed with a protective cover and be mounted separately from the transfer switch unit for safety and ease of maintenance. The protective cover shall include a built-in pocket for storage of the operator’s manuals.

D. All customer connections shall be wired to a common terminal block to simplify field-wiring connections.

E. The controller shall meet or exceed the requirements for Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) as follows:

1. EN 55011:1991 Emission standard - Group 1, Class A 2. EN 50082-2:1995 Generic immunity standard, from which:

EN 61000-4-2:1995 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) immunity

ENV 50140:1993 Radiated Electro-Magnetic field immunity

EN 61000-4-4:1995 Electrical fast transient (EFT) immunity

EN 61000-4-5:1995 Surge transient immunity

EN 61000-4-6:1996 Conducted Radio-Frequency field immunity

IEEE472 (ANSI C37.90A) Ring Wave Test.


2.04. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

A. Description - NEMA ICS 2, automatic transfer switch.

B. Configuration - Electrically operated, mechanically held transfer switch.

C. Furnish and install automatic transfer switch for utility and generator service as shown on the Contract Drawings. The ATS shall be the product of a single manufacturer and shall be completely factory interconnected and tested.

D. The ATS switch shall be assembled in a single enclosure. The switch shall only require field connections of incoming source and outgoing load cables.

E. The assembly shall be provided with a visual position indicator to indicate the switch positions.

F. The switch assembly shall be designed to allow for testing, inspection, and maintenance purposes without interrupting service to the load.

G. The ATS shall be suitable for continuous operation.

2.05. SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Service Conditions - NEMA ICS 1.

B. Temperature - 90 degrees F.

C. Altitude – 500ft.

2.06. RATINGS

A. Voltage – 277/480 Volts, three phase, four wire, 60 Hz.

B. Switched Poles - 3.

C. Continuous Rating

D. 150A (minimum) or as shown on the Contract Drawings.

E. Interrupting Capacity - 600 percent of continuous rating.

F. Withstand and Closing Rating - UL Standard 1008 for the size switch to be utilized unless otherwise specified.

2.07. ENCLOSURE

A. Enclosure – NEMA 12 suitable for mounting in the Pumping Station Electrical Room.

B. Finish - Manufacturer’s standard gray enamel.

2.08. CONTROLLER DISPLAY AND KEYPAD

A. A four line, 20 character LCD display and keypad shall be an integral part of the controller for viewing all available data and setting desired operational parameters. Operational parameters shall also be available for viewing and limited control through the serial communications input port. The following parameters shall only be adjustable via DIP switches on the controller:


1. Nominal line voltage and frequency

2. Single or three phase sensing

3. Operating parameter protection

4. Transfer operating mode configuration – Delayed Open transition. All instructions and controller settings shall be easily accessible, readable and accomplished without the use of codes, calculations, or instruction manuals.

2.09. VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY AND PHASE ROTATION SENSING

A. Voltage and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources (as noted below) shall be continuously monitored, with the following pickup, dropout, and trip setting capabilities (values shown as % of nominal unless otherwise specified):

Parameter Sources Dropout / Trip Pickup / Reset

Undervoltage N&E,3φ 70 to 98% 85 to 100% Overvoltage N&E,3φ 102 to 115% 2% below trip

Underfrequency

N&E 85 to 98% 90 to 100%

Overfrequency N&E 102 to 110% 2% below trip Voltage unbalance N&E 5 to 20% 1% below dropout

B. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within ± 0.5% over an operating temperature range of -20°C to 60°C.

C. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments either locally with the display and keypad or remotely via serial communications port access.

D. The controller shall be capable (when activated by the keypad or through the serial port) of sensing the phase rotation of both the normal and emergency sources. The source shall be considered unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred rotation selected (ABC or CBA).

E. Source status screens shall be provided for both normal & emergency to provide digital readout of voltage on all 3 phases, frequency, and phase rotation.

2.10. TIME DELAYS

A. An adjustable time delay of 0 to 6 seconds shall be provided to override momentary normal source outages and delay all transfer and engine starting signals. Capability shall be provided to extend this time delay to 60 minutes by providing an external 24 VDC power supply.

B. A time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes, for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency.

C. Two time delay modes (which are independently adjustable) shall be provided on re-transfer to normal. One time delay shall be for actual normal power failures and the other for the test mode function. The time delays shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable.

D. A time delay shall be provided on shut down of engine generator for cool down, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes.


E. A time delay activated output signal shall also be provided to drive an external relay(s) for selective load disconnect control. The controller shall have the ability to activate an adjustable 0 to 5 minute time delay in any of the following modes:

1. Prior to transfer only.

2. Prior to and after transfer.

3. Normal to emergency only.

4. Emergency to normal only.

5. Normal to emergency and emergency to normal.

6. All transfer conditions or only when both sources are available.

F. The controller shall also include the following built-in time delays for optional Delayed Transition operation:

1. 0 to 5 minute time delay for the load disconnect position for delayed transition operation.

G. All time delays shall be adjustable in 1 second increments, except the extended parallel time, which shall be adjustable in .01 second increments.

H. All time delays shall be adjustable by using the LCD display and keypad or with a remote device connected to the serial communications port.

2.11. ADDITIONAL FEATURES

A. A three position momentary-type test switch shall be provided for the test / automatic / reset modes. The test position will simulate a normal source failure. The reset position shall bypass the time delays on either transfer to emergency or retransfer to normal.

B. A SPDT contact, rated 5 amps at 30 VDC, shall be provided for a low-voltage engine start signal. The start signal shall prevent dry cranking of the engine by requiring the generator set to reach proper output, and run for the duration of the cool down setting, regardless of whether the normal source restores before the load is transferred.

C. Auxiliary contacts, rated 10 amps, 250 VAC shall be provided consisting of one contact, closed when the ATS is connected to the normal source and one contact closed, when the ATS is connected to the emergency source.

D. LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided; one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the normal source (green) and one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the emergency source (red).

E. LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided and energized by controller outputs. The lights shall provide true source availability of the normal and emergency sources, as determined by the voltage sensing trip and reset settings for each source.

F. The following features shall be built-in to the controller, but capable of being activated through keypad programming or the serial port only when required by the user:


1. Provide the ability to select “commit/no commit to transfer” to determine whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if the normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load.

2. Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact which opens to signal the ATS to transfer to emergency and for remote contacts which open to inhibit transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal. Both of these inhibit signals can be activated through the keypad or serial port.

3. The ATS shall include provisions for a programmed transition of up to a 10 second delay on re-transfer from the generator source to the utility source. This shall be set such that the motor inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents of the motors or VFDs.

4. The controller shall be capable of accepting a normally open contact that will allow the transfer switch to function in a non-automatic mode using an external control device.

5. Engine Exerciser - The controller shall provide an internal engine exerciser. The engine exerciser shall allow the user to program up to seven different exercise routines. For each routine, the user shall be able to:

a. Enable or disable the routine.

b. Enable or disable transfer of the load during routine.

c. Set the start time

- time of day - day of week - week of month (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, alternate or every)

d. Set the duration of the run. At the end of the specified duration the switch shall transfer the load back to normal and run the generator for the specified cool down period. A 10-year life battery that supplies power to the real time clock in the event of a power loss will maintain all time and date information.

6. System Status - The controller LCD display shall include a “System Status” screen which shall be readily accessible from any point in the menu by depressing the “ESC” key a maximum of two times. This screen shall display a clear description of the active operating sequence and switch position. For example,

Normal Failed Load on Normal TD Normal to Emerg 2min15s

Controllers that require multiple screens to determine system status or display “coded” system status messages, which must be explained by references in the operator’s manual, are not permissible.

7. Self Diagnostics - The controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for the purpose of detecting system errors. This screen shall provide information on the status input signals to the controller which may be preventing load transfer commands from being completed.


8. Communications Interface – The controller shall be capable of interfacing, through an optional serial communication module, with a network of transfer switches, locally (up to 4000 ft.) or remotely through modem serial communications. Standard software specific for transfer switch applications shall be available by the transfer switch manufacturer. This software shall allow for the monitoring, control and setup of parameters.

9. Data Logging – The controller shall have the ability to log data and to maintain the last 99 events, even in the event of total power loss. The following events shall be time and date stamped and maintained in a non-volatile memory:

10. Event Logging

a. Data and time and reason for transfer normal to emergency.

b. Data and time and reason for transfer emergency to normal.

c. Data and time and reason for engine start.

d. Data and time engine stopped.

e. Data and time emergency source available.

f. Data and time emergency source not available.

11. Statistical Data

a. Total number of transfers.

b. Total number of transfers due to source failure.

c. Total number of days controller is energized.

d. Total number of hours both normal and emergency sources are available.

12. Communications Module - A full duplex RS485 interface shall be installed in the ATS controller to enable serial communications. The serial communications shall be capable of a direct connect or multi-drop configured network. This module shall allow for the seamless integration of existing or new communication transfer devices.

13. External DC Power Supply – An optional provision shall be available to connect an external 24 VDC power supply to allow the LCD and the door mounted control indicators to remain functional when both power sources are dead. This option shall be equivalent to ASCO accessory 1G.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. GENERAL

A. Standards and Tests - Equipment covered by these specifications shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of all applicable published ANSI, NEMA, and IEEE standards, and the requirements of the NEC.

B. The Contractor shall submit shop and field test reports and conduct field tests.


C. Owner Acceptance - Final acceptance by the Owner or his duly authorized representative of this equipment shall be contingent upon the equipment satisfactorily meeting these specifications and tests stipulated herein.

D. Rigging - The Contractor shall with his own forces or shall engage a rigging subcontractor as required to unload, move, transport, set in place, erect, etc., the engine-generator set(s), in accordance with Section 16055, Electrical Work.

3.02. MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES

A. Provide Manufacturer’s Field Services with the number of site visits per Section 01640, Equipment - General. Site Visits shall be separate visits for:

1. Installation Visits

2. Final Acceptance Visits

3. Training Visits

B. The ATS manufacturer shall maintain a national service organization of company-employed personnel located throughout the contiguous United States. The service center's personnel must be factory trained and must be on call 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

C. The manufacturer shall maintain records of each switch, by serial number, for a minimum of 20 years.

3.03. INSTALLATION

A. Install transfer switches in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.04. TESTING

A. Testing is included under Section 16950, Testing and Inspection.

3.05. DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide systems demonstration in accordance with the Division 1 specifications.

B. Demonstrate operation of transfer switch in normal and emergency modes.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16620

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Packaged EPA emissions compliant engine generator set with sub-base fuel storage tank and weatherproof acoustical enclosure.

B. Exhaust silencer and fittings.

C. Battery and charger.

D. Generator Elevated Work Platforms/Stairs

E. Generator weatherproof/sound-limiting (acoustical) enclosure.


A. Section 00300 – BID PROPOSAL

B. Section 01039 - COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

C. Section 01300 – SUBMITTALS

D. Section 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL

E. Section 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

F. Section 01640 – EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

G. Section 01650 - STARTING OF SYSTEMS

H. Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

I. Section 16055 - ELECTRICAL WORK

J. Section 16497 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

K. Section 16950 – TESTING AND INSPECTION

1.03. REFERENCES

NEMA AB1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NEMA MG1 Motors and Generators NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Max) NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code NFPA 70 National Electrical Code NFPA 99 Health Care Facilities NFPA 101 Life Safety Code NFPA 110 Emergency and Standby Power Systems

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16620-1 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of SectionS 01300, Submittals and 16055, Electrical Work.

B. Shop Drawings - Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Show plan and elevation views with overall and interconnection point dimensions, fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and combustion air requirements, and electrical diagrams including schematic and interconnection diagrams. Indicate weights of all major components.

C. Product Data - Provide data showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points, and internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, battery, battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators.

D. Submit detailed information on all generator controls and accessories specified and shown on the Contract Drawings.

E. Submit scaled layout drawings for weather protective enclosures, acoustical sound limiting enclosures. Drawings shall identify National Electric Code work space clearance for electrical equipment, panel and equipment layouts, lighting fixtures, switches, receptacles, louvers, battery and charger locations and other details.

F. Test Reports - Indicate results of performance testing.

G. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions - Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

H. Manufacturer’s Performance Affidavit - Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements in accordance with the General Contract Conditions and the standard specifications.

I. Manufacturer’s Field Reports - Submit in accordance with the General Contract Conditions and the standard specifications.

J. Manufacturer’s Field Reports - Indicate procedures and findings.


A. Operation Data - Include instructions for normal operation.

B. Maintenance Data - Include instructions for routine maintenance requirements, service manuals for engine and day tank, oil sampling and analysis for engine wear, and emergency maintenance procedures.


A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 110.

B. Maintain one copy of document on site.


A. Manufacturer - Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this Section with minimum five years’ documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of project site.


B. Supplier - Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum five years’ documented experience.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70, NFPA 110, and NFPA 101.

B. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.

C. Generator set shall be an EPA Compliant Product, certified and labeled to comply with the EPA’s Tier 2 Exhaust Emission Standards for Non-Road Equipment.

1.09. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section, in accordance with the General Contract Conditions and the standard specifications.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site in accordance with the General Contract Conditions and the standard specifications.

B. Accept unit on site on skids. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect equipment from dirt and moisture by securely wrapping in heavy plastic.


A. Furnish service and maintenance of engine generator for five years from Date of Substantial Completion.

1.12. WARRANTY

A. Provide 5 year/1500 Hour Parts & Labor comprehensive warranty with no deductible. Parts, labor and travel expenses shall be included.

1.13. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the engine generator system. Package tools in adequately sized metal toolbox.

1.14. EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide two of each fuel, oil and air filter element in accordance with the General Contract Conditions and the standard specifications.

1.15. FACTORY TESTING

A. Provide a factory certified load test report on the specific genset to be provided for this project. The factory test shall be conducted for two hours @ 0.8 PF. The manufacturer shall submit test report to Owner for review and approval prior to shipment from the factory.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. MANUFACTURERS

A. Cummins Power Generation (Onan)50DSFAC (Design Basis)

B. Caterpillar

C. Kohler

D. Or equal

2.02. PACKAGE ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM

A. Description - NFPA 110, engine generator system to provide source of power for Level 1 applications, and conforming to NFPA 99.

B. System Capacity – The Engineer has initially sized the generator at a nominal 50 kW (90 percent sustained voltage) at 125 degrees C and 480 volts using commercially available manufacturer’s software. The one generator shall be capable of powering the load configuration included at the end of this section. This sizing is for the loads and installation presented in this specification and for a unit located at or below 1,000 feet above sea level, rated “standby duty” with an engine-mounted radiator for the loads, steps, and voltage dip shown at the end of this section. The supplier/manufacturer shall verify this sizing as being either proper for the installation or provide a unit that will meet the requirements of this specification. The size shall not be less than shown above.

The supplier/manufacturer shall submit the sizing calculations with his shop drawing submittal. No additional costs will be allowed for the supplier/manufacturer’s compliance with these Contract Documents.

2.03. ENGINE

A. Type - Water-cooled inline or V-type, four-cycle compression ignition Diesel internal combustion engine.

B. Rating - Sufficient to operate under 10 percent overload for one hour in an ambient of 90 degrees F at elevation of 500 feet.

C. Fuel System – Number 2 Low Sulfur Diesel.

D. Engine speed – 1800 rpm.

E. Governor - Electronic governor, standard product of the generator manufacturer.

F. Safety Devices - Engine shutdown on high water temperature, low oil pressure, overspeed, low coolant level, and engine overcrank. Limits as selected by manufacturer.

G. Engine Starting - DC starting system with positive engagement, number and voltage of starter motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Include remote starting control circuit, with MANUAL-OFF-REMOTE selector switch on engine-generator control panel.

H. Engine Block/Coolant Heater - Thermal circulation-type water heater with integral thermostatic control, sized to maintain engine jacket water at 90 degrees F (32 degrees C).


The power supply shall be as shown on the Contract Documents. Contractor shall coordinate branch circuit breaker rating as required to feed the heater.

I. Radiator - Radiator using glycol coolant, with blower type fan, sized to maintain safe engine temperature in ambient temperature of 122 degrees F (50 degrees C). Radiator air flow restriction 0.5 inches of water (1.25 Pa) maximum.

J. Engine Accessories - Fuel filter, lube oil filter, intake air filter, lube oil cooler, fuel transfer pump, fuel priming pump, water pump. Include fuel pressure gauge, water temperature gauge, and lube oil pressure gauge on engine/generator control panel.

K. Mounting - Provide unit with suitable spring-type vibration isolators and mount on structural steel base.

2.04. ALTERNATOR

A. Generator - NEMA MG1, three phase, 4 pole, reconnectible brushless synchronous generator with brushless PMG exciter.

B. Size: Minimum 50kW @ 125 degrees C over 40 degree C ambient, at 0.8 PF, 480Y/277 volts, 60 Hz at 1800 rpm and minimum starting kVA to start the electrical loads as scheduled and shown on the Contract Drawings. Alternator shall be suitable for starting and running PWM type variable frequency drive type loads as scheduled or shown on the Contract Drawings.

C. Insulation Class - H.

D. Temperature Rise – 125 degrees C.

E. Enclosure - NEMA MG1, open drip-proof.

F. Voltage Regulation - Include generator-mounted volts per hertz exciter-regulator to match engine and generator characteristics, with voltage regulation +1 percent from no load to full load. Include manual controls to adjust voltage droop, voltage level (+5 percent) and voltage gain.

G. Alternator shall be provided with a condensation heater (power supply as shown on the Contract Documents).

2.05. ACCESSORIES

A. Skid-Mounted Fuel Tank – 24-hour supply at full load, double-wall steel tank with fill vent, leak detector, high level alarm set at 90 percent, lockable 2-inch fill cap, fuel level gauge, venting to UL 142 in both primary and secondary containments, and UL listed. Both fuel tank and piping shall be provided with secondary containment. Generator manufacturer shall coordinate the overall mounting height of the generator control panel and circuit breaker not to exceed 60” above finished grade. Fuel Tank alarm panel shall include low tank low level sensor and leak sensors with output contacts for remote annunciation of alarm conditions.

B. Exhaust Silencer - Critical type silencer, with muffler companion flanges, tailpipe, rain cap, flexible stainless steel exhaust fitting, sized in accordance with engine manufacturer’s instructions, and condensate drain with plug type drain valve in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. The drain shall be piped with copper tubing to the closest sump or waste drain. Provide stainless steel wall or ceiling thimbles as required for each specific application. All exhaust piping to be provided with insulation and stainless steel metal jacket. Unit shall be mounted within the generator enclosure.


C. Batteries - Heavy duty, diesel starting type lead-acid storage batteries, 170 ampere-hours minimum 700 cold cranking amps capacity. Match battery voltage to starting system. Include necessary cables and clamps.

D. Battery Tray - Treated for electrolyte resistance, constructed to contain spillage.

E. Battery Charger - Current limiting type designed to float at 2.17 volts per cell and equalize at 2.33 volts per cell. Include overload protection, full wave rectifier, DC voltmeter and ammeter, and 120 volts AC fused input.

F. Provide wall-mounted enclosure to meet NEMA 250, Type 1 requirements.

G. Line Circuit Breaker - NEMA AB1, 100% rated circuit breaker on generator output with integral thermal magnetic & LSI sized to the output of the generator set. Circuit breaker shall include a battery operated, 24 VDC shunt trip.

H. Engine-Generator Control Panel - NEMA 250, Type 1 generator mounted control panel enclosure with engine and generator controls and indicators. Include provision for padlock and the following equipment and features:

1. Frequency Meter - 45-65 Hz. range, 3.5 inch (89 mm) dial.

2. AC Output Voltmeter - 3.5 inch (89 mm) dial, 2 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch.

3. AC Output Ammeter - 3.5 inch (89 mm) dial, 2 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch.

4. Output voltage adjustment.

5. Push-to-test indicator lamps, one each for low oil pressure, high water temperature, overspeed, and overcrank.

6. Engine start/stop selector switch.

7. Engine running time meter.

8. Oil pressure gauge.

9. Water temperature gauge.

10. Auxiliary Relay - 3 PDT, operates when engine runs, with contact terminals prewired to terminal strip. These contacts shall be reserved for RTU monitoring and ventilation system interlocking. Provide addition contacts as required for ATS operation.

11. Additional visual indicators and alarms as required by NFPA 110 - Level 2 use.

12. Remote Alarm Contacts - Pre-wire SPDT contacts to terminal strip for remote alarm functions required by NFPA 110.

13. Generator manufacturer shall coordinate mounting location of the generator control panel. Mounting height shall not exceed 60” above finished floor.

14. Control panel shall be provided with a 120VAC, 1 phase condensation heater.


I. Vibration Isolators - Mount generator on adjustable spring isolators complete with side movement snubbers. At least four such isolators shall be utilized and be sized to load the spring within their proper working range for the unit supplied.

J. Provide a ground fault indication on generator set in accordance with the National Electric Code (latest edition).

K. Provide a manufacturer standard remote generator annunciator panel in accordance with NFPA 110.

2.06. WEATHER-PROTECTIVE ACOUSTICAL SOUND LIMITING ENCLOSURE

A. Weather-Protective/Sound Limiting Enclosure

1. Critical silencer mounted within the enclosure, with rain cap and rain shield.

2. Lockable access doors for control panel and service points.

3. All door hardware, latches and hinges made of stainless steel.

4. Air Louvers - If motorized, the louver shall be temperature controlled to prevent unit from overheating after engine shutdown.

5. The enclosure shall be designed for a maximum of 65 dBA at 23 feet (7 m) from the radiator end while the unit is running under full load.

6. Suitable for mounting on generator with sub-base tank.

7. Enclosure package shall be QuietSite Level 2 Sound Attenuated Aluminum Enclosure as manufactured by Cummins Power Generation or equal. Final color selection to be selected by Owner during submittal review.

2.07. GENERATOR ELEVATED WORK PLATFORM/STAIRS

A. General

1. Generator control panel shall be readily accessible from the exterior of the generator. Where the control panel and/or any controls/display height or disconnect switches operator mechanisms, generator main circuit breaker operating handle are over 60” above finished grade due to the height of the sub-base fuel tank and generator skid (or other construction arrangements), the generator manufacturer shall provide an elevated work platform around the perimeter (or minimum 3 access panel sides) of the generator. Platform shall be constructed of aluminum and shall include non-skid access steps, and aluminum handrailing/guardrailing. Platform shall be a minimum of 42” wide or larger to permit 90 degree opening of enclosure doors and to permit National Electrical Code work space clearances.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and Section 16055, Electrical Work.

B. Height – 60” max above finished grade for control panels, displays, and disconnect operating handles.



A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with the General Contract Conditions.

B. Provide full load test utilizing portable resistive load bank for four hours minimum. Simulate power failure including operation of transfer switch, automatic starting cycle, and automatic shutdown and return to normal. Testing shall include a “cold start” pickup of loads (one shot or step loaded per this section), full load test, and shutdown/cooldown.

C. Record in 20-minute intervals during four hour test:

1. Kilowatts.

2. Amperes.

3. Voltage.

4. Coolant temperature.

5. Room temperature.

6. Frequency.

7. Oil pressure.

D. Test all alarm and shutdown circuits by simulating conditions.


A. Prepare and start systems in accordance with the General Contract Conditions.

B. The Contractor will arrange for the supplier of the engine generator to furnish the services of qualified service technician(s) to perform the following:

SERVICE MINIMUM TIME AT SITE Observe the installation and test and calibrate the system.(1)

1/2 day (four hours)

Instruct Owner’s operators in the operation, maintenance, and repair of the entire system.

Two 1/2-day (four-hour) sessions(2)

1. If manufacturer’s representative determines that the installation is not acceptable or corrections to any part of the installation are required, the Contractor shall, at his expense, make all necessary modifications or corrections and reschedule the testing and calibration test. Cost of the rescheduled session is also at the Contractor’s expense. A written report of findings shall be delivered in duplicate to the Owner.

2. The first session shall be scheduled two weeks in advance of the actual date of instruction. The actual day shall be scheduled with the Owner. The second session will be as requested by the Owner at some time during the warranty period. The times of these training sessions shall be determined by the Owner.

C. The Owner’s initial instruction session for operation, maintenance, and repair of the entire system shall be videotaped by the Contractor at his expense. Video shall be VHS and left with the Owner. If the tape is not of good quality, as determined by the Owner, the Contractor shall have the service technicians redo the instructional session with an additional videotape


made for the Owner’s use. This second instructional session and videotaping are also at the Contractor’s expense.

D. All times are actual on-site times. All costs, including overtime, travel, and subsistence are the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.04. ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work in accordance with the General Contract Conditions.

B. Adjust generator output voltage and engine speed.

3.05. CLEANING

A. Clean work in accordance with the General Contract Conditions.

B. Clean engine and generator surfaces. Replace oil and fuel filters after load test.

3.06. DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide systems demonstration in accordance with the General Contract Conditions.

B. Describe loads connected to emergency system and restrictions for future load additions.

C. Simulate power outage by interrupting normal source, and demonstrate that system operates to provide emergency power.

D. Demonstrate sound attenuation requirements for external generator noise. Sound measurements shall be made at 7 meters from the enclosure at 16 different locations around the generator housing.


LOAD AND STEP CONFIGURATION Maximum Volt Dip: 15%, Maximum Frequency Dip: 10%

STEP NO. LOAD TYPE(1) LOAD DESCRIPTION HP OR KW STARTER TYPE(2) VOLTS/Ø COMMENTS

1 -- 6kVA General Loads 10 -- 480V/1Ø (3) 1 Motor Blower 1/2 FVNR 480V/3Ø (3) 2 Motor Submersible Pump 10 FVNR 480V/3Ø (4) 3 Motor Submersible Pump 10 FVNR 480V/3Ø (4) 4 Heat Unit Heater 5 -- 480V/3Ø (4) 5 Heat Unit Heater 5 -- 480V/3Ø (4)

(1) Load Types (2) Starter Types

PD = Positive displacement blower FVNR = Full voltage, non-reversing CP = Centrifugal pump VFD = Variable frequency drive CF = Centrifugal fans RVS = Reduced voltage starter ED = Equipment drive PDP = Positive displacement pump CHP = Chopper pump

(3) The loads in this step are powered as soon as the transfer switch closes into the generator. (4) These devices will start in the step indicated, but due to their cycle control, they may operate on/off in the step indicated.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16900

INSTRUMENTATION - GENERAL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This Section includes requirements for the complete instrumentation system for this project as shown, specified and as scheduled. Detailed specifications for instrumentation equipment are included herein, on the Contract Drawings, and where specifically referenced elsewhere in the specifications.

This Section shall apply to all instrumentation furnished under this project regardless of whether it is specifically identified in this Section unless otherwise specified.


A. Division 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – All Sections



D. Section 16100 – GROUNDING



G. Section 16990 – CONTROL PANELS

All electrical equipment and wiring shall be in full compliance with Division 16, Electrical Specifications.

1.03. REFERENCES

A. Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements have been specified herein:

1. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

2. ASME - The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

3. ASTM - The American Society for Testing Materials

4. NEMA - National Electric Manufacturers Association

5. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

6. ISA - Instrument Society of America

7. NEC - National Electrical Code

8. NEMA ICS 1 – General Standards for Industrial Control Systems

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16900-1 INSTRUMENTATION - GENERAL

9. NEMA ICS 3 – Industrial Systems

10. NEMA ICS 6 – Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings in accordance with Sections 01300, Submittals and 01640, Equipment - General.

B. Submittals for equipment and materials shall be clearly marked or noted with specific features, standard options, and wiring diagrams to indicate compliance with Contract Documents.

C. Where deviations to Contract Documents are proposed, submit a list of deviations. Provide a detailed description and explanation for each deviation.

D. Submit shop drawings which shall include the following:

1. Bill of Materials for all instrumentation and accessories.

2. Manufacturer’s catalog information for all instrumentation and accessories.

3. Manufacturer’s wiring diagram including field termination points and project specific requirements.

4. Spare Parts List (including specified spare parts to be furnished by the Contractor and manufacturer’s recommended spare parts list for each instrument).

5. Instrumentation Tag List.

6. Project specific installation and mounting details for each instrument type. Materials of construction for supports, brackets, and mounting hardware shall be provided with details. Mounting details shall include specific details of interfacing with other equipment such as tanks, handrails, and other equipment required.

E. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a set of system coordination drawings which shall show all instrument connections and interconnections as well as the functional and connection relationship of the instrumentation equipment to the related equipment and devices.

F. Submit calibration report for each piece of instrumentation, including spares. Report shall include as a minimum the following:

1. Project Name

2. Device Location

3. References

4. Instrument Tag/Description

5. Manufacturer/Model

6. Manufacturer Serial Number

7. Test Equipment Type and ID Number


8. Date and Time Calibrated

9. Calibrated By

10. Calibration Data showing the input value, output value and deviation percentage at 0, 10, 25, 50, 75, 90, and 100 % of full capacity

11. Ambient Temperature Conditions

12. Other relevant data where applicable, including temperature, pressure and type of process fluid or media.

G. Submit manufacturer’s certificate that final acceptance test has been successfully completed.

H. Submit Operations and Maintenance Manual in accordance with the Section entitled Electrical General and Division 1 specifications. Each shall include:

1. Index and tabbed section dividers.

2. Reviewed submittals

3. Wiring diagrams.

4. System coordination drawings.

5. Field adjustable settings (e.g. set points, ranges, spans, current alarm trips)

6. Manufacturer's instructions on care and operation of equipment.

7. Warranty certificates.

8. Spare parts list.

9. Complete typewritten operating instructions, covering all systems descriptions and operation, emergency operating instructions and precautions.

10. Name, address and telephone number of supplier and representative of manufacturer for each item of equipment in Contract.

Bind above items (all unused, clean, and legible) in three ring binders and submit to Owner for review. Provide before request for final acceptance.

I. Submit project Record Documents in accordance with Division 1 Specifications.


A. Uniformity: Unless otherwise specified, equipment or material of same type or classification, shall be products of same manufacturer. All material shall be new and of the latest design of manufacturer providing equipment or material.

B. Design: Equipment and accessories not specifically described or identified by manufacturer's catalog numbers shall be designed in conformity with ISA, ANSI, ASME, ASTM, and other applicable technical standards and shall have neat and finished appearance.


1.06. WARRANTY

A. All instrumentation shall be provided with a minimum of a (2) two year warranty covering sensors, transducers and transmitters. Warranty duration shall commence the date of substantial completion.

1.07. COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall coordinate with equipment suppliers to verify the proposed instrumentation equipment will function as designed for each specific application. Contractor shall verify field conditions and equipment submittals to verify mounting configurations and arrangements. Any deviations from that which is specified shall be brought to the Owner’s attention during shop drawing submittal reviews.

PART 2 PRODUCT

2.01. GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise specified, each measurement system shall be accurate within one percent of full scale reading over the specified range. This accuracy requirement shall apply to each overall system including any transmitters, re-transmitters, receivers, etc. that are shown or required.

B. All instrumentation equipment and components shall be supplied by the Contractor, who shall coordinate the equipment and its arrangements in the shop drawing, installation and start up stages of the work.

C. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of one year's supply of all charts, pens, special paper, ribbons, etc. for any and all instruments provided unless otherwise noted.

D. Relay contacts shall be rated a minimum of 5 amperes at 120 VAC, unless otherwise noted.

2.02. SIGNAL CARRIERS

A. Signal carriers for instrumentation shall include the electric wires, cables and conduits as shown, specified and required for a complete transmission of signals between transmitters and receivers.

B. Electronic instrument signals (4-20mA) shall be carried over shielded twisted pairs of wires as specified in Section 16055, Electrical Work.

C. All electric interconnections and terminations shall be in accordance with the requirements for control wiring specified in the Section 16055, Electrical Work.

D. Shielded, coaxial, or special cables, where specified or required by the manufacturer, shall be supplied by the Contractor regardless of whether they are specifically scheduled or shown.

E. Current isolators shall be provided and installed where required for proper operation of the equipment and signals.

2.03. LIGHTNING/SURGE PROTECTION

A. General

Lightning/Surge protection shall be provided to protect the electronic instrumentation


equipment from induced surges propagating along the signal a power supply lines. The protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument surge withstand level, shall be maintenance free, and self-restoring. Instruments shall be housed in a suitable metallic case, properly grounded. Ground wires for surge protectors shall be connected to an earth ground and where practical, each ground wire shall be installed individually and insulated from each other. The protection systems shall be mounted within the instrument enclosure or a separate NEMA 4X junction box connected via a PVC coated RGS conduit nipple to the enclosure. The units shall be as manufactured by Joslyn, Pheonix Contact, or equal.

B. Power Supply

Protection shall be provided for all 120 VAC instrument power supply lines. Cabinets, control panel enclosures and groups of field instruments shall be protected by isolation transformers and surge suppressors. Individual field instruments shall be protected by individual gas tube surge suppressors.

C. Signal Lines

All 4-20 mA analog signal loops containing field mounted (i.e. remote from control panel) transmitters shall include surge/lightning transient protectors at both ends of the loop (at instrument and in control panel enclosure). Transient protectors shall be Joslyn Model 1669-02, Phoenix Contact Pipe Trab, or equal.

2.04. GENERAL EQUIPMENT

A. Instrument housing or enclosures shall be suitable for installation in the location where the instrument is mounted as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings.

B. General Equipment Parameters

1. Provide (1) one transmitter assembly for each transducer. Multi-channel transmitters are not applicable for this project unless otherwise noted.

2. All memory shall be non-volatile EEPROM. Configuration parameters and alarm set points shall not be lost upon power loss.

3. Instruments shall be configured to energize up after a power outage.

4. All terminal strips shall be labeled for external electrical connections.

C. Signal Conditioners

1. Isolators: Current to current (I/I) or Current to Voltage (I/E) isolators shall be one of the following:

a. 4 wire type - Rochester Instrument System (RIS) Series 1300 AC, AGM Series PTA 4000, or equal with options as required for application.

b. 4 wire type - M-System Co., LTD Model KWVS, or equal with options as required for application.

c. 2 wire type - Rochester Instrument System (RIS) Series 2300, AGM series HPM, or equal with options as required for application.

d. Rack mounted type - Rochester Instrument System (RIS) Series SC-8300, AGM Series REA 4000, or equal with options as required for application.


D. Power Supplies

1. DC power supplies shall be of sufficient size to power all connected equipment with an additional 50% reserve. Provide individual dedicated power supplies where shown on the drawings. Provide common power supplies for powering multiple circuits where shown on the drawings. DC power supplies shall be one of the following:

a. Phoenix Contact

b. or Equal

E. Power Disconnection and Overcurrent Protection

1. Panel mounted instruments shall have integral or external fuse protection.

2. Panel mounted large case instruments shall be cord and plug connected or shall have toggle switch for power disconnection.

F. Digital Display Indicators

1. General: The digital display indicator shall be LED type, numeric display suitable for panel mounting.

2. Electrical:

a. Display Type: 7 segment, 3-1/2 digit LED direct readout.

b. Input Signal: 4-20mA into a 250ohm load (max), Isolated.

c. Accuracy: +/-0.5% of span

d. Power Supply: 120VAC or Loop Powered

e. Output: (2) Configurable Set-Point Relays

3. Mounting: Provide mounting hardware for panel mounting on front of enclosure doors, sub-panel mounting, or swing-out panel mounting as required for each individual application.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Red Lion Control – Apollo Series

b. Durant – Eclipse Series

c. Or Equal

G. Accessories

1. Nameplates – Provide nameplates for each instrument in accordance with Section 16055, Electrical Work.

2. Mounting Hardware – Provide stainless steel mounting hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s suggestions to mount equipment in locations as specified and shown on the Contract Drawings. Provide additional mounting brackets and hardware as detailed on the Contract Drawings. All bolts shall be epoxy grouted in concrete.


3. Conduit Connections – Transducer wiring shall be installed in PVC coated rigid steel conduit from the transmitter to the mounting surface of the transducer mounting bracket. Final connections to the transducer shall be made with liquid tight flexible metal conduit with PVC coated couplings and fittings. (Provide explosion proof flexible conduit for equipment located in Hazardous Locations). Provide conduit reducers as required to accommodate conduit fittings less than ¾”.

SPACE BELOW INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


2.05. LEVEL SWITCH – FLOAT

A. General

• Float switches shall be provided for level control and level monitoring where shown on the Contract Drawings and scheduled herein.

• Float (Ball) shall be direct acting, leak-proof, shock-proof, corrosion resistant and constructed of polypropylene or other corrosion resistant material. Switch shall be electromechanical microswitch or snap-action switch (change-over switch (mercury type float switches are not acceptable).

B. Switch: • Switch assembly shall be a hermetically sealed micro-switch that is activated by a moving counterweight as the switch assembly changes position in the fluid.

• Switch contacts shall be rated a minimum of 16 amperes at 250 VAC. Switch shall be provided with one normally open (NO) and one normally closed (NC) contact.

C. Cable: • Float switch cable shall be provided with sensor as an integral assembly. Cable shall be PVC insulated, oil resistant, and suitable for use in sewage and wastewater applications. Cable shall be sealed at the float utilizing a flexible boot and compression type lock seal.

• Cables shall be 3 wire cables, provided with a minimum size conductor of No. 17 AWG.

• Cables shall be provided in sufficient length to mount the float switches in the locations shown on the Contract Drawings plus an additional 10 feet (minimum) of cable. Cables shall be provided in continuous lengths between the float and the associated junction box or control panel.

• Excess cable shall be coiled and tie-wrapped to the cable mounting supports. D. Mounting: • Float switches shall be provided with support masts and mounting

bracketswhere shown on the Contract Drawings. Float switch masts shall be Model 874862W-BR as manufactured by J.M. Gillin Corp. or equal.

• Coordinate type of mast and bracket for each individual application with the Contract Drawings.

• Provided wire mesh grips to support cables.

E. Mfr.: • MJK Automation – Model 7030 (Mercury Free) • Anchor Scientific – Eco-Float SE/SI • Or Equal

F. Schedule: Instrument

Tag: Service Actuation Level Reference

Notes LSLL Low Water Level Alarm Float TBD Field

Adjustable 2,3

LSL All Pumps Off TBD Field Adjustable

2,3

LSH Lead Pump ON TBD Field Adjustable

2,3

LSHH High Water Level Alarm Float TBD Field Adjustable

2,3

Spares: Provide 2 spare float switches Reference Notes: 1. Provide control circuit lightning protection. 2. Float Switch Circuits shall be intrinsically safe. 3. Actuation Level shall be set by Contractor in the field. Coordinate final levels with Owner. 4. Attach float to pump support/lifting cable 6” above pump housing with stainless steel cable

clamps.



2.06. FLOW METER – MAGNETIC

SCHEDULE OF MAGNETIC FLOW METERING EQUIPMENT

NAMEPLATE DESIGNATION

FLOW TRANSMITTER/ ELEMENT

FLOW DESIGNATION

SIZE

LINER MATERIAL FLOW RANGE

(GPM) Wet Well Discharge Flow FE/FIT-1 4” Neoprene/

Urethane or Hard/ SBR Rubber

0-500GPM

A. General

Magnetic flow meters shall provide continuous flow measurement of municipal wastewater and waste activated sludge. The flow meter shall measure the average velocity of the media and produce a 4-20mA signal proportional to the flow rate. The flow tube and converter/transmitter assembly shall be by the same manufacturer.

Principle of Operation: The magnetic flow meter shall use Faraday’s law of Electromagnetic Induction to induce a voltage in a conductor (conductive liquid) moving through a magnetic field, the magnitude of induced voltage being proportional to the velocity of the conductor.

B. Process Application Parameters: Media: Municipal Wastewater Fluid Velocity Range: Less than 30 fps Pipe Size/Material: (See schedule below for pipe size) / Ductile Iron Pipe Orientation: Horizontal or Vertical Mounting: Inline type flow tube w/flange mounting. Pipe reduces

upstream and downstream of each unit. Standard Conditions: 0-140° F. C. Performance Requirements: Accuracy: ± 0.2% of rate in 10 to 100% of flow range. Not affected by

changes in percent solids, fluid density, temperature, or viscosity.

Repeatability: ± 0.1% of rate in 10 to 100% of flow range. Drift: Include zero stability as an inherent characteristic of the

metering system electronics Minimum Liquid

Conductivity: 5 micro-siemens per centimeter

D. Flow Element:

Flow Tube: Metering tube shall be constructed of non-magnetic type 304 stainless steel. Metering tube shall be capable of accidental submergence in 30’ of water for 48 hours. (NEMA 6P)

Liner: Neoprene/Urethene or Hard/SBR Rubber

Coil Excitation: Pulsed DC Sensing Element: Electrodes shall be constructed of type 316 stainless steel.

Unit shall be provided with high impedance amplifiers in the electrode sensing circuit to minimize the need for periodic electrode maintenance.

Mounting: Stainless Steel flange connections drilled to the 150 lb ANSI Standard.

Cable Connections: For Remote Transmitter Assemblies: Provide sensor Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16900-9 INSTRUMENTATION - GENERAL

manufacturer’s cable assembly(s) for interconnection between the flow tube and remote transmitter assembly. Flow tube shall be provided with a NEMA 4X terminal box and watertight cable entrance seals. Cable shall be provided in sufficient length to connect the equipment for the locations shown on the Contract Drawings.

E. Transmitter: Design: The transmitter shall consist of a magnet driver to power the

magnet coil and a signal converter. The converter shall be of integrated solid state circuitry and shall convert the transmitter output signal to a 4-20 mA signal which is linearly proportional to the flow measured.

Incorporate automatic zero stability without flow interruption. Electronic Converter: Transmitter electronics shall based on the principle of pulsed

dc coil excitation to eliminate the need to periodically reset zero signal at zero flow.

Low Flow Cutoff: Drive the output signal to zero when the measured flow rate is 0-10% (adjustable) of full scale and when fully developed flow no longer exists.

Input Span: Continuously adjustable between 0-1 fps and 0-31 fps via a calibrated range dial. Range adjustment shall be direct reading. Converter shall not be affected by quadrature noise nor shall it require zero adjustment or special tools for startup.

Enclosure: NEMA 4X fiberglass, remote or integral mounting from flow tube as scheduled.

Display: Integral LCD, scaled in gpm. Interface: Alphanumeric Keypad Power Supply: 120 VAC, 1 Phase, 60 Hz. Output Signal: 4-20mA signal isolated, into 600 ohms. Signal shall be linear

and directly proportional to flow. 1 Pulse output signal for remote flow totalization

Relay Outputs: Two (2) 0.5 amp, SPDT Field Adjustable Set Points (Alarm Signal)

Conduit Connections: Two (2) – 1/2" (1 Power, 1 signal) Surge Protection: As scheduled F. Options/Accessories:

Integral Totalizer Corrosion resistant ground rings/straps. Meters shall be hydraulically calibrated, traceable to the National Bureau of Standards.

G. Manufacturers: Endress & Hauser – Promag 53W Foxboro – Series 9100 w/IMT-25 Transmitter Or Equal

H. Schedule: Service

Instrument Range

Calibrated Range

Reference Notes

FE/FIT-1 Wastewater Flow 0-450GPM 4 Reference Notes: 1. Provide transmitter power supply and 4-20mA output signal circuit lightning protection

at the transmitter. 2. Electrical Classification: Flow tubes shall be FM approved for installation in Class I,

Division 2, Group D Hazardous Locations as defined by the National Electric Code. 3. Transmitters shall be mounted in NEMA 4X Instrument Enclosures. Instrument

Enclosures shall be provided with all accessories as shown on the Contract Drawings. 4. Transmitter Assembly shall be remotely mounted from Flow Tube. 5. Provide Submergence Rated Flow Tube.


I. Manufacturer’s Services (Authorized Service Representative) Installation: Installation Oversight, Calibration, Pre-Final Testing – 4 hours Final

Acceptance: Equipment Demonstration – 1 hours

Training: 2 hours of instruction Calibration: 3 Point Calibration



2.07. CIRCULAR CHART RECORDER

A. General Microprocessor based circular chart recorders shall be provided to record chlorine residual Chart recorders shall provide a continuous, permanent record on a paper chart. Recorder shall be capable of printing its own chart grid and background on blank thermal sensitive type charts. Recorder shall be provided with an alphanumeric display for digital indication of the channel reading and shall provide operator interface for configuration of the recorder.

B. Performance Requirements: Accuracy: ± 0.1% of input span

Sensitivity: ± 0.05% Span Step Response

Time: 6 seconds max with no filtering

Sampling Rate: 3 times per second C. Process/Mechanical:

Mechanism: Stylus shall be mounted on a swing plate such that all components are accessible from the front of the instrument.

Input Channels: 2 (1 Active, 1 Spare)

Number of Pens: 2 (1 Active, 1 Spare)

Pen Type: Thermal Sensitive

Output Channels: 2

Chart Size/Type: 12” (nominal)/ Circular Thermal Sensitive Paper

D. Electrical:

Design: Microprocessor based, field configurable Enclosure: NEMA 12, with Acrylic Window and Door Lock Display: Integral vacuum fluorescent, alphanumeric Power Supply: 120 VAC, 1 phase, 60 Hz. Battery backup for memory retention Input Channels: 4-20 mA, 250 ohms Output Channels: 4-20 mA, isolated into a 600 ohm (minimum) impedance,

proportional to flow range selected. Relay Outputs: Two form C, Field Adjustable Trip Points. Conduit Connection: ¾” Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Mounting: Wall Mounted E. Options/Access: Options: Totalizer shall be provided for each input channel. Totalizers shall

be field resettable (password protected). Provide Chart Illumination

Spare Parts: 100 blank circular 12” charts (thermal sensitive) F. Manufacturers: Honeywell – DR 4500 Truline (Smart Chart)

Chessel Or Equal

G. Schedule: Service Instrument Range

Calibrated Range

Reference Notes

FIQR-1 Well Flow Chart Recorder NA Field Coordinate

Reference Notes:


H. Manufacturer’s Services (Authorized Service Representative) Installation: Installation Oversight, Calibration, Pre-Final Testing – 2 hour(s) per

instrument Final Acceptance: Equipment Demonstration – 2 hour(s) per instrument type. Training: 2 hours of instruction Calibration: Field

2.08. POWER QUALITY METER

A. General A Power Quality Meter shall be provided for all three phase motors to provide continuous monitoring of current, voltage, power factor, and frequency in True RMS or displacement quantities.

B. Monitoring Requirements: General: Power analysis features shall include an event recorder, waveform

capture, trace memory, harmonic spectrum display and a data logger function. All analysis data shall be non-volatile.

Accuracy: 0.2% true RMS Sampling Rate: 64 times per cycle

C. Electrical:

Display: Local user interface with keypad and display Power Supply: 120V AC Communication: RS232 and RS485 ModBus RTU Input: Four (4) switch inputs for relay activation, reset, and alarms. Output: Four (4) relays for alarms, setpoints, kWh pulse, and

communications control. Four (4) isolated 4-20mA outputs programmable from measured and calculated parameters.

D. Manufacturers: GE PQM

Or Equal E. Schedule: Service Instrument

Range Calibrated

Range Reference

Notes RTU PQM Varies Field

Coordinate



2.09. BUBBLER LEVEL TRANSMITTER

A. General The Bubbler Level Transmitter is an automatic level measurement system. The pressure required to discharge air into the bottom of the wet well is proportional to the liquid level in the well. The BLT measures this pressure and generates a 4-20 milliamp current loop signal which represents the depth. The system controls two air compressors which are used to charge an air tank. The air tank pressure is monitored so that the pumps only operate when the tank needs charging and so that pump failures can be detected. The air flow rate through the bubbler tube is also monitored so that tube blockages can be detected.

B. Performance Requirements: Accuracy: ±1% of full scale

Temperature Range: -22ºF to 140ºF Depth Range: 0-35 feet

Operation: Automatic and timed cycle air tube purging.

Automatic air tank moisture drain valve control.

C. Electrical:

Controller: MC68HC11 microcomputer Non-volatile memory to retain programming during power loss.

Enclosure: NEMA 12 Display: Level digital display

Air compressor and system status indicators Power Supply: 115 VAC, 2A min Output Channels: System Failure SPDT Form C – 10A at 125VAC

Purge Freeze – OPEN Drain FET, Non-isolated 4-20mA current loop for wet well level

Comm Protocol: Modbus ASCII D. Options/Setup: Options: Four option switches on the controller circuit card are used to set

the configuration and facilitate calibration. No Purge This switch is used to disable purging. This can be used if the

liquid being measured is sensitive to large amounts of air. No Level (Not used)

No Flow This option disables the automatic flow calculations and the purge triggered by low air flow. This is useful where the chances of a tube blockage is low and very low airflow rate is used.

CALMODE This switch is used to command the system into Calibrate Mode. E. Manufacturers: Digital Control Company Model 12138-2

Or Equal F. Schedule: Service Instrument

Range Calibrated

Range Reference

Notes LIT-1 Wet Well Level 0-35 Feet Field

Coordinate



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Electronic instruments and systems shall operate on a universal 4-20mA signal system unless otherwise noted. Instruments shall be installed in the instrument loop so that the failure or removal of any instrument from the loop, other than primary element or power supply, will not affect the remaining instruments on the loop or the overall integrity of the loop. This shall be accomplished through the use of bias resistors at each receiver.

2. All instruments shall be installed as shown, specified, directed and recommended by the manufacturers.

3. The instrument enclosures shall be solidly grounded with a ground conductor as specified in Section 16100, Grounding.

4. Instruments shall be factory calibrated to minimize field adjustments and insure proper operation.

5. Installation: Erect equipment in neat and workmanlike manner; align, level and adjust for satisfactory operation; install so that parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from indicated arrangements may be made, but only after obtaining approval from Owner. All power and signal (4-20 mA / 1-5 VDC / other) cables shall be kept isolated and installed in separate conduit systems.

6. All instruments shall be labeled with nameplates. In addition identification tags, instrumentation equipment shall be tagged by means of metal tags or durable printed symbols with information regarding manufacturer, serial number, catalog number and model number.

7. Instrument panels complete with all accessories and appurtenances as shown, specified and scheduled.

8. Furnish and install all mounting stands, supports structures, brackets and accessories as required or detailed for the installation of the instruments furnished. Unless otherwise specified or required, supports shall be aluminum. All mounting hardware shall be stainless steel. Equipment mounted on walls in contact with ground or water shall be mounted offset from the wall a minimum of 1 inch.

9. Temporary storage of all instrumentation equipment shall be in a humidity controlled environment heated to a minimum of 55 degrees F, maximum of 85 degrees F and in accordance with the General Provisions of the Contract Documents.

10. Isolation of each device on 4-20 mA loops as required to prevent ground loops, with current to current isolators.

11. Current to current isolators as required to provide rated outputs into total impedance of each loop.

12. Cutting and drilling of existing panels for new instrumentation as shown, specified, or required, including repair and touch up painting of panel after installation.



A. General

1. Contractor shall furnish the services of a competent factory trained representative of the manufacturer who shall supervise the installation for proper assembly, start and operate the equipment, conduct field tests and make adjustments if required. Factory representative shall be certified by the manufacturer as being factory trained and competent to perform field calibration and adjustments, startup and demonstrations.

2. Factory representative shall verify proper mounting of the equipment, including hardware, mounting surface, and functional location.

3. Unless specifically waived in writing by the Owner, all tests and demonstrations shall be made in the presence of a duly authorized representative of the Owner.

B. Pre-Final Field Tests

1. After installation, instrumentation equipment shall be checked and the required adjustments shall be made by the representatives of the manufacturers.

2. Equipment shall be field tested in the presence of the Owner and shall be demonstrated to operate satisfactorily over the specified ranges.

3. The Contractor shall provide the necessary test equipment and qualified test personnel.

4. In the event of failure of the field test, the Contractor shall perform the necessary corrections and retest, at his own cost and expense, the equipment as directed by the Owner.

5. Submit field calibration report for each individual instrument.

C. Final Acceptance Tests (Functional Demonstrations)

1. Each piece of instrumentation shall be tested to demonstrate that the equipment has been properly installed, calibrated, and is functioning as specified including:

a. Demonstrate that configuration set points are not lost upon power loss. This shall be tested by disconnecting the transmitter from power for 30 minutes.

2. Final Acceptance shall be performed by a factory trained service Owner or representative.

3. Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing a minimum of two weeks in advance prior to the scheduling the final acceptance test.

4. Submit manufacturer’s certificate that final acceptance test has been successfully completed.

3.03. TRAINING

A. Training shall be provided for each piece of instrumentation provided for this project. Training shall be conducted on site, and shall be conducted by a factory trained service engineer or representative. Training shall include calibration, trouble shooting, and maintenance of each piece of instrumentation.


B. Manufacturer’s services for training time shall be performed separate from Installation and Final Acceptance services.

C. Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing a minimum of two weeks in advance prior to scheduling the training.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16901

GAS DETECTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Provide a complete gas detection system, including transmitters, sensors, displays, conduit, wiring, calibration equipment, and all other accessories required and as specified herein.


A. It is a requirement of this specification that the elements of the system be provided by a single supplier. This supplier shall have total responsibility for the entire system performance and compatibility of this section.

B. For ease of identification, symbols for the various components of the metering system to be furnished and installed are given in the Table 16901-1.

TABLE 16901-1

SCHEDULE OF GAS DETECTION EQUIPMENT

NAMEPLATE

EQUIPMENT DESIGNATIO

N SENSOR TYPE RANGE Valve Room combustible gas analyzer AE/AIT-

LEL-01 Combustible gas (methane)

0 to 100 percent LEL

Valve Room gas analyzer AE/AIT-02-01

Gas (O2) 0 to 25 percent




C. Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

D. Section 16055 – ELECTRICAL WORK


F. Section 16950 – TESTING AND INSPECTION All electrical equipment and wiring shall be in full compliance with Division 16, Electrical Specifications.

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings – Submit under provisions of Sections 01300, Submittals and 01640, Equipment - General.

1. Refer to Section 16055, Electrical Work, for shop drawing format and content.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16901-1 GAS DETECTION SYSTEMS

B. Operation and Maintenance Manual – Submit under provisions of Sections 01300, Submittals and 01640, Equipment - General.

1. Refer to Section 16055, Electrical Work, for operation and maintenance manual format and content.

C. Project Record Documents – Submit under provisions of Sections 01300, Submittals and 01640, Equipment - General.

1. Refer to Section 16055, Electrical Work, for project record documents format and content.

1.05. WARRANTY

A. Two-year full-replacement warranty on infrared-type combustible gas monitors. Warranty shall replace, with a new (not refurbished) sensor, any sensor that falls outside of its specifications within two years. Warranty duration shall commence the date of substantial completion.

1.06. SPARE PARTS

A. Provide one spare transmitter and sensor of each type provided.

B. Spare parts shall include all accessories, interconnecting cables and mounting brackets.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. MANUFACTURERS

A. The gas detection system equipment shall be the following, or equal.

1. Combustible Gas Sensors - Mine Safety Appliances (MSA) Company, Model A-Ultima XP.


A. Combustible Gas Monitors

1. Combustible gas sensor shall employ infrared light technology. The sensor must have a demonstrated resistance to degradation by silicones and reduced sulfur gases (hydrogen sulfide).

2. Sensor shall utilize one infrared light source that is directed through two different wavelength filters. One light beam shall be used as a reference and measure infrared light intensity outside of the hydrocarbon absorption range. The other infrared beam shall be the target gas beam and it shall traverse the gas diffusion volume in the signature wavelength of hydrocarbons. Each light beam shall be directed to its corresponding detector, and the difference in infrared light intensity shall be proportional to the target gas concentration. If no target gas is present, the difference between detectors shall be zero, and the transmitter shall output a zero gas reading.

3. Sensor shall not be susceptible to poisoning by background gases.

4. Sensor shall utilize humidity and temperature compensation.

5. Sensor performance shall not be affected in low-oxygen environments.


6. NEMA 4x housing shall satisfy Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D hazardous atmospheres.

B. All Gas Monitors

1. Integral Display

a. Sensor/transmitters shall utilize an integral LCD display for calibration instructions and for 0 to 100 percent LEL.

b. Display shall have “unsuccessful calibration”, “time to replace sensor”, and “last successful calibration” indications.

c. Display shall indicate error codes with logical English descriptions.

2. Each transmitter shall produce a directly proportional 4-20 mA output correlating to zero value at 4 mA and 100 percent full value at 20 mA.

3. Transmitter shall enable user interaction with a hand-held wireless remote control that utilizes infrared light to communicate with the transmitter and facilitates sensor zeroing and calibration without opening the transmitter enclosure. Magnetic-type interaction with the transmitter is not acceptable.

4. Transmitters shall have 316 stainless steel enclosure with UL approved NPT conduit entries.

5. Dual condulet for mounting sensors remote from transmitter shall be provided as indicated on Project Drawings.

6. LEDs integral to transmitter to indicate status.

7. Calibrations shall be performed without opening the transmitter enclosure.

8. Performance Requirements

a. Repeatability – Less than 2 percent full-scale for 0 to 100 percent LEL.

b. Operating Temperature - -4 to 122 degrees F.

c. Operating Humidity – 0 to 95 percent non-condensing.

d. Stability - +3 percent full-scale per year.

e. Linearity – Less than +2 percent full-scale.

f. Response Time – Less than 30 seconds.

g. Operating Voltage – 24 VDC, 3-wire.

2.03. REMOTE GAS ALARMING LIGHT STACK

A. Provide multiple-color light stack in quantities shown on the Contract Drawings for indication of the status of combustible and toxic gases. Light stack shall possess the following features:


1. Three LED lights with colored lenses. Top lens shall be red to indicate alarm gas concentrations. Middle lens shall be amber to indicate warning gas concentrations. Bottom lens shall be green to indicate the atmosphere is safe.

2. Each light shall be independently energized by a contact closure.

3. Unit shall utilize pilot lights that operate on 24VDC powered by contact closures to each lights LED.

4. Enclosure shall be rated NEMA 4X and mounted vertical in locations shown on the Contract Drawings.

2.04. ALARM LIGHT & HORN – EXPLOSION PROOF

A. Horn shall include following feature:

1. Vibrating horn producing 100db at 10ft (110db at 1m) to indicate warning gas concentrations.

2. Horn shall be energized by contact closure.

3. Unit shall operate on 120VAC power.

4. Units shall be rated for hazardous location Class I, Group D, Division 1 and mounted vertically where shown on the Contract Drawings. Provide wall mounting appurtenances.

B. Manufacturer - Federal Signal Corp. or equal.

1. Horn - Model 31X

2.05. ACCESSORIES

A. Nameplates - Provide rigid, laminated name tags with 5/16-inch high white letters on black background per Section 16055. Each monitor shall have nametags for the monitor designation and the designations for each of the sensors it monitors.

B. Mount transmitter and sensor with equipment materials suitable for the mounting locations.

C. Calibration Kit - Provide necessary canisters of gas as required to calibrate all supplied sensor/transmitters, a gas regulator, and any other equipment needed for calibration in an insulated, hard plastic, impact resistant carrying case. Case interior shall be padded to protect contents. Kit shall be MSA, A-CAL 40F

1. First Gas Canister of Span gas - MSA M/N: 10028058 which includes 1.45 percent methane (CH4), 15 percent oxygen (O2), and 10 ppm hydrogen sulfide in nitrogen (H2S).

2. Second Gas Canister of Zero gas - MSA M/N: 10028028 which includes 20.80 percent oxygen in nitrogen.

3. Third Gas Canister of Span gas – MSA M/N: 10028034 which includes 0.6 percent Propane in air for calibrating sensors for petroleum vapors.

4. Regulator to maintain manufacturer’s recommended flow rate or 1.5 LPM.


D. Hand-held Programming Unit – Provide one hand-held wireless remote control that utilizes infrared light to communicate with the transmitter and facilitates sensor zeroing and calibration. Unit shall be MSA, Ultima Controller M/N: 809086.

E. Provide manufacturer recommended cabling in contiguous lengths as necessary to mount the gas sensor (AE) on the gas transmitter (AIT) as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

2.06. CONTROLS

A. All equipment specified in this section shall be electrically complete in that the Contractor is required to furnish and install only exterior power and signal wiring, conduits, fittings, etc. Labeled terminal strips shall be utilized throughout.

B. Contractor shall furnish sufficient length cables as required by the equipment manufacturer. Cables shall be installed in conduit by the Contractor.

C. Where required, alarm and warning setpoint gas concentrations shall be as follows:

1. Combustible Gases – Warning 10.0 percent LEL; alarm 20.0 percent LEL.

2. O2 – Warning percent; alarm percent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the respective instructions of the manufacturers in the locations shown on the Contract Drawings.

3.02. FIELD TESTING AND INITIAL OPERATION

A. Calibrate sensors.

B. Configure warning setpoints.

C. Configure alarm setpoints.

D. Configure the transmitter to drive the analog output signal to 3.7 mA in the event of failed self-diagnostic tests.

3.03. MANUFACTURER’S OR SYSTEM INTEGRATOR’S FIELD SERVICES

A. Final Acceptance - Include 1/4 day for a manufacturer authorized service representative to test equipment to demonstrate that the system operates as specified.

B. Installation - Include 1/4 day for a manufacturer authorized service representative to verify proper mounting of the equipment, including mounting technique, mounting surface, and functional location.

C. Training - Provide one two-hour session of instruction to be conducted at the project site by the manufacturer. Notify the Engineer and Owner in writing a minimum of two weeks in advance. Duration of training is actual on-site training time with the operators; travel and other time shall be separate from this training requirement. Refer to Section 16055, Electrical Work, for additional training requirements.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16902

ANTENNA AND MOUNTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The Contractor shall furnish and install, ready to operate, the following antenna, antenna mounting pole, antenna cable, complete with all necessary accessories to mount antenna and furnish and cable connection to County RTU panel as indicated herein in compliance with the following specifications and as shown on the Contract Drawings.

1. For ease of identification, designations for the various antennas to be furnished and installed are given below:

TABLE 16902-1

SCHEDULE OF ANTENNAS

LOCATION NAMEPLATE DESIGNATION Wakefield Pumping Station Antenna-WAK


The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers.

A. Section 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT



D. Section 16900 – INSTRUMENTATION - GENERAL



1.03. REFERENCES

A. International Building Code 2003 (As amended by periodic supplements and Charles County Bill No. 2003-14)

B. Federal Communication Commission (FCC), Part 15.247.

C. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems.

D. NEMA ICS 3 - Industrial Systems.

E. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

G. Instrumentation Society of America (ISA) Standards 5.1 and 5.4.

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16902-1 ANTENNA AND MOUNTING

H. Industry Electric Code (IEC), Article 1131-3.

I. UL 508 (Underwriters Laboratories)

1.04. DEFINITIONS

A. Telemetry – Devices used for measuring and transmitting data from a remote location.

B. FCC – Federal Communications Commission.

C. Yagi – An antenna used to communicate between one location and another location.

D. Omni – An antenna used to communicate between one location and multiple other locations.

E. Transceiver – a radio transmitter and receiver in a single housing.

F. Spread Spectrum – A data transmission technique that deliberately distributes a transmitter’s signal over a wide bandwidth. License free operation of Spread Spectrum radios are allowed in the frequency band of 902 to 928MHz with limits on transmitter power and antenna system gain.

G. Spread Spectrum Radio – A radio that utilizes frequency hopping as means for communicating with other spread spectrum radios. Due to the nature of frequency hopping, these radios are not subject to frequency licensing from the FCC. They are, however, subject to limitations of use and installation by the FCC.

1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to shop drawing submittal the Contractor shall coordinate with County which has performed a preliminary radio site survey. County will conduct path and local electromagnetic environmental analysis to verify the feasibility of conducting reliable radio communications in the 900MHz ISM band. The final antenna mounting height and direction shall be coordinated with the Owner and the Engineer. Anticpated antenna mounting height is estimated at 40’ AFG. Pole height is estimated at 50’ AFG. It is anticipated data will be transmitted to a final destination of the Mattawoman WWTP via relay site(s) chosen by the County. Anticipated relay site is EMS tower adjacent to 3480 Rockefeller CT in Waldorf, MD.

B. Shop Drawings – Shop drawings not containing the required submittals, and format, outlined in Sections 01300, Submittals; 01640, Equipment – General; 16055, Electrical Work; and herein will be returned without further review.

1. Provide confirmation height and direction has been coordinated with County.

2. Prior to obtaining any equipment in connection with this Section, detailed shop drawings and descriptions of all equipment shall be submitted. The Engineer must have approved the formal link survey results before commencing with the submittals. Provide Bill of Materials for all equipment. All materials shall be labeled on the shop drawings and cross-references to the Bill of Materials.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manual – Submit under provisions of Sections 01300, Submittals; 01640, Equipment – General; and 16055, Electrical Work.

1. Provide the following in the three-ring binder specified under Section 16055, Electrical Work.

a. All AutoCAD drawings on CD. Provide CDs in a three-ring binder plastic pocket.


b. Maintenance, troubleshooting, and replacement of Radio Communication System components and all associated equipment.

c. Warranty – Provide warranties for the Radio antenna and associated equipment. Equipment covered, dates of expiration, and limitation of warranty shall be explicitly noted.

D. Project Record Documents – Submit under provisions of Sections 01300, Submittals; 01640, Equipment – General; and 16055, Electrical Work.

1. Record actual locations of controller cabinets and devices connected to system. Include interconnection wiring and cabling information, and terminal block layouts in controller cabinets.


A. Antenna mounting pole - Design of pole or tower and foundation shall be signed and stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the state of Maryland and adhere to all applicable local, state, and federal building codes.


A. Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with shipping.

B. Contractor is responsible for preparing antenna, mounting structure and associatedequipment for shipping and shipping them to the project site.

C. Deliver, store, protect and handle Radio Communication systems to site under provisions of Sections 01600, Material and Equipment; 01640, Equipment – General; and 16055.

D. Accept products on site in factory containers unless system is completely integrated into a pre-manufactured panel that has been factory tested. Inspect for damage.

E. Store products in clean, dry area; maintain temperature to NEMA ICS 1 requirements.


A. Furnish manufacturer's, or designated authorized representative’s, service and maintenance of radio antenna for a minimum of two years from date of substantial completion.

B. Provide Owner with a toll-free phone number for technical information and assistance on the antenna system or reimburse Owner for calls made due to system maintenance, debug, tunning, etc. requirement during the two-year warranty period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. MANUFACTURERS

A. Antenna: SCALA TY-900 or equal

B. Pole: Baldwin Lighting Manufacturer of Prestressed Concrete Poles Minette, AL (251) 937-1540 or equal

C. Feed Line Cable, Feed Line Jumper, Feed Line Ground Kit, Feed Line Ground Clamp: Refer to County Standard Antenna Mounting Detail on Contract Drawing E005.


D. Coaxial Cable Connectors:

1. Din Female: Andrew Type L4PDF-RCE or equal

2. Din Male: Andrew Type L4PDM-RCE or equal

3. DIN Male Ring flare: Andrew Type L4PDM6RCE or equal.

E. RF Connector Waterproof Kit: Provide waterproof kit for all outside coaxial cable connections, Andrew Type 221213 or equal.

2.02. GENERAL

A. General

1. The supplier shall be responsible for adhering to local FCC regulations regarding the use of spread spectrum antennas.

2. Supplier shall consider radio transmit power, frequency range, and antenna height in coordination with governing FCC regulations regarding the use of spread spectrum radios.

2.03. ANTENNA SYSTEM

A. General Description – Provide an antenna, and associated appurtenances, as required to facilitate radio communication. Optimal communication requires (minimally) that each antenna have a straight line of transmission, free from natural obstruction, to other site antennas.

1. Yagi (Directional) Antennas

a. SCALA, Model TY-900, or approved equivalent.

b. The antenna shall be sealed against moisture penetration.

c. Feedpoint method - Weatherproof gamma match for coaxial feedline.

d. The antenna shall gain shall be at least 12 dBi.

e. The mounting hardware shall be stainless steel and allow mounting of the antenna for vertical polarization.

f. The mounting hardware shall be capable of mounting on masts 1.25 to 2.375 inches in diameter.

g. Aim each antenna toward the designated hub site.

h. The RF connector shall be N-type female.

i. The antenna must be designed for operation frequency of the Verizon wireless modem.

B. Provide a directional Yagi antenna suitable for outdoor environments. Mounted antennas shall be of all aluminum construction and rated to withstand at least 120 MPH winds with 0.5-inch radial ice.


C. Antenna Mounting - Antennas shall be attached to a self-supporting concrete utility pole or freestanding, galvanized steel or aluminum tower. Design of pole or tower and foundation shall be signed and stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the state of Maryland and adhere to all applicable local, state, and federal building codes. Coordinate with County for value of maximum permissible deflection of pole which will maintain adequate communications. Pole must not exceed this deflection value for the antenna at the maximum wind rating of the pole. Structure design shall utilize soil data provided in Geotech Report in the appendices section.

D. Provide all mounting masts, or towers, as shown on drawings and as required to support the antennas at the elevations and orientations required. Masts, poles or towers shall be suitable for outdoor environmental conditions, provide adequate support and protection for transmission lines and be provided complete with all necessary mounting accessories.

E. Cable

1. Adequate lengths of low loss heliax cable shall be provided for connection to the antenna to the radio transceiver at each site. Involve Manufacturer of radio system in sizing of cable length.

2. Other Requirements

a. Impedance - 50 Ohm

b. Operating temperature - -40 to 80 degrees C

c. Gauge – 10 AWG

d. Attenuation – 1.25 dB/100 feet, maximum.

3. Transmission line shall be terminated only with connectors rated for the required service.

4. Provide a lightning arrestor between the transceiver and coaxial cable. The arrestors shall be direct current blocked, have 50 ohms impedance and have a VSWR of 1.1 or less over a frequency range 125 MHz to 1000 MHz. Arrestors shall be Polyphaser IS-50NX-C2 or approved equal.

5. Installer is responsible for cable damage due to neglect of manufacturer stated bending radius.

F. Installation

1. Provide antennas in locations listed in Table 16902-1 and secure according to paragraph 2.03. C and D.

2. Provide 316 stainless steel mounting hardware, including, but not limited to, nuts, bolts, washers, lock-washers, and U-bolts.

3. Where entering a structure/enclosure/building from out-of-doors, manage the cable into a drip loop. Where cabling enters structures from outside, provide a rubber boot with skirt to surround penetration by six times the penetration diameter. Fill gap between skirt and structure with appropriate adhesive. Shrinkwrap or use adhesive to permanently fix rubber boot to exterior exposed antenna cable for 6 inches outside penetration.


4. Yagis Antennas – Mounted antenna shall be able to rotate 360 degrees free from obstruction. Antenna shall be accessible, as future calibration of radio signal strength will require handling the antenna.

5. Install feed line ground kit in underground handhole as shown on contract drawings.

6. Install ground clamps as shown on contract drawings.

7. Install air terminal as shown on contract drawings.

8. Install all accessories as shown on Contract Drawings and for a complete and operable system.

2.04. RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide on-site assistance to County during antenna quality assurance testing program. Submit written proof to the engineer that this requirement was satisfied.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.

D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions.

E. Verify grounding of system.

3.02. INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. All electrical work performed in fabrication and installation of radios shall be in full accordance with the requirements of the Division 16 electrical specifications.

C. Contractor is responsible for storage and installation of the equipment on arrival at the site.

3.03. SUPPLIER’S FIELD SERVICE

A. Provide a minimum of 2 eight-hour days of on-site time for supervision of installation and hardware troubleshooting at Engineer’s request. The 2 days of on-site time may be required over a span of one month. Written notification of the days required for troubleshooting and installation supervision will be sent to the Contractor 10 business days prior to the first required day.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16903

AUXILIARY CONTROLS AND RELAYS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pushbutton.

B. Selector switches.

C. Indicating pilot lights.

D. Contact blocks.

E. Control power transformers.

F. Fuse blocks.

G. Limit switches.

H. Timers.

I. Time delay relays.

J. Electronic alternating relay.

K. Relays.

L. Intrinsically safe barriers.

M. Alarm horn.

N. Access Door Security Switches




C. Section 16484 – MOTOR STARTERS

D. Section 16900 – INSTRUMENTATION - GENERAL

E. Section 16901 – GAS DETECTION SYSTEMS

F. Section 16950 - TESTING AND INSPECTION

G. Section 16990 - CONTROL PANELS

1.03. REFERENCES

NEMA ICS 1 General Standards for Industrial Control Systems

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16903-1 AUXILIARY CONTROLS AND RELAYS

NEMA ICS 2 Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems NEMA ST 1 Standard for Specialty Transformers (Except General Purpose Type)

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300, Submittals.

B. Submit shop drawings to NEMA ICS 1 indicating control panel layouts, wiring connections and diagrams, dimensions, support points.

C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300, Submittals.

D. Submit product data for each component specified. The submittal shall be included as part of the system in which the component is specified.

E. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300, Submittals.

F. Submit samples as requested by the Engineer.


A. Submit record documents under provisions of Division 1 Specifications.

B. Accurately record actual locations of control equipment. Revise diagrams included in Drawings to reflect actual control device connections.


A. Submit operation data under provisions of Division 1 Specifications.

B. Include instructions for adjusting and resetting time delay relays, timers, and counters.

C. Submit maintenance data under provisions of Division 1 Specifications.

D. Include recommended preventive maintenance procedures and materials.


A. Manufacturer - Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum 10 years’ experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. GENERAL

A. All components shall be UL listed.

2.02. PILOT DEVICES

A. General

1. Pilot devices shall include indicating light, pushbuttons, and selector switches.

2. Heavy-duty, industrial type, construction. Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16903-2 AUXILIARY CONTROLS AND RELAYS

3. Area Classification

a. Non-Classified Area Device Rating - NEMA 13 oil-tight.

b. Wet Area or Exterior Device Rating - NEMA 4 and NEMA 13 oil-tight and watertight.

c. Corrosive Area Device Rating - NEMA 4X, non-metallic.

d. Hazardous Area Device Rating - NEMA 7, explosionproof.

4. Provide extra large nameplates in accordance with Section 16055 for all door or enclosure front-mounted devices.

5. Controls and relays shall be by one manufacturer wherever possible.

6. Provide enclosure for field mounted devices and individual controls in accordance with Sections 16055, Electrical Work and 16990, Control Panels.

7. 30-millimeter diameter.

8. Retaining ring and boot type.

B. Pushbuttons and Selector Switches (PB) and (SEL SW)

1. Lockout feature as indicated.

2. Color - Red for stop or terminate function; black for all others.

3. Operators:

a. Provide “gloved hand” knobs for selector switches.

b. Provide “mushroom head” button on emergency stop pushbuttons.

4. Stackable contact blocks.

5. Devices shall be either momentary, maintained, spring return, push-pull, or other operational types as shown or otherwise specified.

6. Manufacturer NEMA 4 and 13 Oil and Water Tight - Square D Type K.

7. Manufacturer NEMA 4X, Non-Metallic - Square D Type SK.

8. Manufacturer NEMA 7, Explosionproof - Crouse-Hinds Type EFS and Type EMP for panel-mounted units.

C. Indicating Pilot Lights (IL)

1. Glass or plastic lens.

2. 120-volt LED transformer type.

3. Push-to-test type. When six or more pilot lights are used in control panels, a single lamp test switch can be used in lieu of all lamps being push-to-test.


4. Lens color shall be as follows:

FUNCTION COLOR Motor running Red Malfunction Amber Ready White or Green

5. Manufacturers - Square D

2.03. CONTACT BLOCKS

A. Molded of an amorphous transparent polyamid material with high impact resistance and resistant to carbon tracking.

B. Contacts - Double break silver type rated at 10 amp at 120 VAC continuous.

2.04. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER (CPT)

A. Standard industrial control type, VA size as required for the powered load.

B. Dual voltage primary, with 120V ac, single phase secondary. All primary connections fused; size as required for the transformer.

C. Secondary control fuse with capacity for the control circuit indicated.

D. DIN rail-mounted type in control panels.

E. Manufacturer - Square D, or equal.

2.05. FUSE BLOCKS

A. General purpose Class H, K, and R phenolic fuse block for dual-element cartridge fuses.

B. DIN rail mounted in control panels.

C. Manufacturer - Buchanan or equal.

2.06. LIMIT SWITCHES (LS)

A. Contacts - Silver-to-silver snap-acting where practicable and in all cases where the motion is slow.

B. Switches - Operated by levers, plungers, or pushrods, depending on the application.

C. Rollers - Provided where excessive wear due to a sliding action would result.

D. Limit switches shall be suitable for installation in locations where shown on the Contract Drawings or specified.

E. Limit switches shall be provided with 2 – N.O. and 2-N.O. contacts for operation of fan or light circuits.

F. Manufacturer - Square D Class 9007 Type C, or equal.


2.07. MOTOR-DRIVEN RESET TIMERS (MTR)

A. Synchronous motor driven type.

B. Calibrated dial adjustment of time setting as well as indication of expired time.

C. Manufacturer - Eagle Signal Division HP 5 Series, ATC Series 305.

2.08. ELAPSED TIME METERS (ETM)

A. Minimum six digit, non-resettable hour meter panel mounted.

B. For operation on 120 volts.

C. Manufacturer - General Electric, or equal.

2.09. PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS

A. Microprocessor-based digital controller with eight channels, each channel programmable for each day of the week on a separate schedule, or repeat function for every day of week, with one setting.

B. Program entries shall be made by mechanical pushbutton and an acknowledgement of each entry into the unit shall be by audible signal.

C. Override switches shall be provided for continuous On or Off, automatic and visual indicators for each channel.

D. Controller shall provide 365-day programming in advance with up to 40 holiday dates and 8th day holiday schedule. Also, eight holiday blocks of unlimited duration, each capable of a different schedule.

E. Each channel shall have independent programming with 40 On/Off pairs per week.

F. User selectable a.m./p.m. or 24-hour military time.

G. Automatic daylight savings or standard time. Provide daylight saving option to offer U.S. option (first Sunday in April/last Sunday in October).

H. Up to nine different duty cycle patterns settable from 1-99 minutes On.

I. Pulsed or maintained output contacts, user selectable.

J. Plain English self-prompting display.

K. Timing sequences shall be fully detailed in the operations and maintenance manuals for the respective equipment controlled.

L. Manufacturer - Tork “K864Z” Series or equal.

2.10. TIME DELAY RELAYS (TR)

A. Solid-state type with calibrated dial head or dip switch adjustment, encapsulated coil, snap-action switch assembly of number of poles indicated.

B. “On-Delay,” “Off-Delay,” or “On-Off Delay” dual head type as indicated; timing range intervals as shown or specified.


C. Bases shall have captive screws for locking fork solderless connectors, single tier design, with relay retainer clips.

D. Dust-tight construction.

E. Provide auxiliary contacts where indicated.

F. Contacts rated 10 amps resistive at 120 VAC.

G. Manufacturer - Diversified Electronics Series “TD;” Square D, Type JCK; Timemark 300 Series, or equal.

2.11. GENERAL PURPOSE CONTROL RELAYS (CR)

A. Units shall be plug-in type.

B. Use - Shall be used in motor control centers where all relays are in separate sections and only for such things as indicating lights, alarm output, and motor starting coil seal in contact.

C. Number of poles and arrangement as shown or specified.

D. Contacts

1. Shall be rated 10 amps at 240 volts AC.

2. Material shall be silver cadmium oxide.

E. Coils shall be rated continuous duty.

F. Sockets

1. Supply with relay retainer clip.

2. Terminal connections with captive screw to accept locking fork solderless connectors.

3. Single tier design.

G. Manufacturers - Square D Company Class 8501 Type K relay and Type NR socket; Potter-Brumfield; or equal.

2.12. INDUSTRIAL CONTROL RELAYS (CR)

A. Industrial machine tool type.

B. Use - Shall be used to control equipment with power requirements, such as solenoid valves.

C. Shall be used in MCC for all control relay applications.

D. Contacts

1. Double break field convertible.

2. Rated 10 amps at 600 volts AC.

3. Rated 5 amps at 250 volts DC.


E. Coil shall be encapsulated, continuously rated of the voltage rating indicated on the plans.

F. Number of poles as indicated on Contract Drawings, but not less than four.

G. Holding and Operating Mechanism

1. Electrically held, electrically operated, Square D Company Class 8501, Type X; or equal.

2. Mechanically held/electrically held relay with mechanically-held attachment.

3. Time Delay - Pneumatic timer attachment for electrically-held delay; ‘on delay’ or ‘off delay” as indicated on plans.

2.13. ELECTRONIC ALTERNATING RELAY (ALT)

A. Relay type.

B. Contacts - Rated 10 amps at 120 VAC.

C. Electronic, continuous duty, capable of duplex or triplex operation.

D. UL listed.

E. Manufacturer - Diversified Electronics No. ARA-120-AME, or equal.

2.14. INTRINSICALLY SAFE RELAYS (ISR)

A. Intrinsically safe relays shall be UL listed for Class I, Group D, Division 1 Hazardous Locations, 120VAC, 1 phase operation, with 1-N.O. and 1-N.C. 8 amperes output contacts. Intrinsically safe relays shall be type S27A1D0 as manufactured by Warwick Controls, Harwil Corporation, or equal.

2.15. ACCESS DOOR SWITCHES (ZS-X)

A. Provide non contact magnetic door switches where shown on the Contract Drawings for monitoring “door closed” position of the entrance doors. Switches shall be industrial grade NEMA 4X rated. Switches shall be capable of being wired in series as an input to the plant process control system. Provide interface relays where required to provide appropriate voltage ratings. Switches shall be model 302 Guardswitch as manufactured by GE Interlogix or equal. Provide junction box with terminal blocks to provide interconnection of switch cables to hardwired control circuits.

B. Access hatch switches for installation in Hazardous Locations shall be suitable for installation in Class I, Group D, Division 1 or 2 Hazardous Locations. Provide GE Interlogix or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. GENERAL

A. Mount all individual controls in a suitable enclosure as specified per Section 16055, Electrical Work and 16990, Control Panels.

B. Identify all auxiliary controls per Section 16055, Electrical Work.


C. General purpose control relays shall be used in motor control centers manufactured or custom-built control panels. The Contractor shall use control relays as described in Article 2.15 to control equipment with power requirements, such as solenoid valves.

3.02. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER

A. Provide individual control power transformers for each control circuit.

B. Size as required by control circuit.

3.03. FUSE BLOCKS

A. Size as indicated on Drawings or as required.

3.04. LIMIT SWITCHES

A. Limit switches shall be provided where specified and where it is required to convert a mechanical motion into the control of an electric circuit.

3.05. PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

A. Units shall be back-mounted wherever possible.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16950

TESTING AND INSPECTION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical power distribution and control circuit testing.






E. Section 16497 – TRANSFER SWITCHES

F. Section 16620 – EMERGENCY GENERATOR


H. Section 16901 – GAS DETECTION SYSTEMS

I. Section 16902 – ANTENNA AND MOUNTING

J. Section 16990 – CONTROL PANELS

1.03. SUBMITTALS

A. Made in accordance with Sections 01300, Submittals; 16055, Electrical Work; and as specified herein.

B. Submit test records and reports for all testing.

1.04. CERTIFICATION OF TESTING

A. Perform all tests in the presence of a duly authorized representative of the Owner. When the presence of such representative is so waived, certified results of the tests made and the results thereof shall be furnished by the Contractor.

B. Perform all tests in the presence of the Owner. Give the Owner written notice of all tests at least two weeks in advance.

1.05. TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish all instruments and a qualified engineer to properly perform all tests required.

1.06. FACTORY-TRAINED SUPERVISION

A. Provide necessary factory trained supervision to check over equipment for proper functioning before putting the equipment into operation as may be required by these specifications. This

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16950-1 TESTING AND INSPECTION

shall include establishing a simulated fault on checking out the coordination of the protective devices.

B. Make necessary adjustments and testing in cooperation with the respective manufacturers and other Contractors when necessary. Perform all tests in accordance with the latest standards of the ANSI, IPCEA, IEEE and NEMA.

1.07. COSTS

A. Costs of all tests shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be included in the contract price.

1.08. DAMAGES

A. If damage is indicated or observed during testing or from the review of tabulated data, replace defective or damaged materials and retest at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.01. TESTING EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish all test equipment required to correctly perform the system tests.

2.02. SPECIAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. 500-volt dc Megger - For maximum 300-volt systems.

B. 1,000-volt dc Megger - For 600-volt systems.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. GENERAL

A. After completion of the work, thoroughly test the entire electrical system, including electrical work required for instrumentation, control and power, and adjust electrical system as required.

B. Test all electrical circuits to insure circuit continuity, insulation resistance, proper splicing, and freedom from improper grounds.

C. System performance test runs are required. Coordinate test runs of electrical systems with test runs of equipment served thereby (i.e., mechanical, heating, air conditioning, process systems and plumbing).

3.02. GENERAL TESTING METHODS

A. Panels - Test each panel with mains disconnected from the feeder, branches connected, branch circuit breakers closed, all fixtures in place and permanently connected, lamps removed or omitted from the sockets, and all wall switches closed.

B. Feeders - Test with the feeders disconnected from the panels.

C. Individual Power Circuits - Test each individual power circuit at the panel or motor control center with the power equipment connected for proper operation.


D. Transformers (Low Voltage) - Megohmmeter test all transformers in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Lighting and receptacle circuits do not need to be megger tested.

3.03. EQUIPMENT TESTING (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

A. Megohmmeter Tests

1. Conduct megohmmeter tests of the insulation resistance of rotating machines and power distribution feeders down to panelboard feeders. The results will be accepted when the megger shows the insulation resistance to be not less than 50 megohms at 20 degrees C using either a 500-volt or 1,000-volt megger. Wait 1 minute between each test for all conductors in the same enclosure and each conductor and ground.

2. Perform megohmmeter testing (Insulation Resistance Test) of all motor power and control wiring after the cables are in place and just prior to final terminations. Record all data as per Exhibit A. Lighting and receptacle panelboard branch circuits are not megohmmeter tested.

B. Voltage and Amperage Testing

1. Check all single and three phase motor amperage while the unit is running at as close to operating load as possible. Record voltage on each line and the amp draw for each leg. Provide results in a typed report format and submit as part of the Contractor’s closeout package.

2. Check the load current in each phase of each distribution, lighting and receptacle panelboard feeder and make modifications to the circuit loading to correct load unbalance to within 1 kVA phase to phase for each panelboard.

3.04. GROUNDING SYSTEM

A. Test the grounding system to verify a resistance to ground of 5 ohms or less. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, modifications shall be made to the system by adding additional ground rods or plates to bring the resistance test value to 5 ohms or less. Perform test a minimum of 90 days after the installation of the ground rods. Submit a record/report to the Owner. Include the following:

1. Time, date, temperature, frost information depth (if applicable), and weather conditions.

2. Location of ground grid under test.

3. Date of ground grid installation.

4. Driven depth of electrodes.

5. Moisture content of earth at time of measurement (wet, dry, etc.).

6. Ground test equipment, model numbers, and last date of calibration.

7. Detailed description of method used.

8. Plot of “distance from ground grid versus resistance.” Resistances shall range from 0-50 ohms with enough points to produce a smooth curve.


9. Maintenance information and recommendations (if applicable).

B. Test all grounding conductors and grounding systems for continuity. Where continuity does not exist, conditions will be corrected by an approved method and the system retested.

3.05. SYSTEM LOAD BALANCING

A. Check the load current in each phase of each distribution panel feeder and make modifications to the circuit loading to correct load unbalance to within 1 kVA phase to phase for distribution panels.

3.06. SYSTEM CHECKS

A. Preliminary

1. Connect all motors to protective devices and controls to give proper motor acceleration and correct motor rotation. Interconnect the control wiring to all the control devices associated with a machine, a group of machines, or other device to produce the correct operation, timing, and/or sequencing of the equipment.

2. Adjust overload elements in motor starters and check for coordination with the actual installed motor characteristics. Replace any overload element that is inadequate.

3. Check all motor nameplates for verification of proper voltage, horsepower, speed, phase, and power factor.

B. Operational

1. Then give the equipment an operational test to determine that all components including motors, controls, protective and switching devices, and auxiliary associated equipment are in operable condition and can function as described and shown on relevant specifications, operating instructions, and drawings.

2. Take motor current reading at full load or as close to full load as the driven machine will develop. If the ammeter reading is over the rated full load current or the proper current for the load at which the machine was operated, determine the reason for the discrepancy and take the necessary corrective action.

3. Remove the cause of any motor operating above full load rating instead of increasing the overload relay trip rating.

3.07. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. General - Sequence closeout procedures so that work will not be endangered or damaged, and so that every required performance will be fully tested and demonstrated. Closeout shall be in accordance with Section 01700, Contract Closeout, and as required herein.

B. Final Operational Check - Make a check of each item in each system to determine that it is set for proper operation. With the Owner present, operate each system in a test run of appropriate duration to demonstrate compliance with performance requirements. During the following test runs, make final corrections or adjustments of systems to refine and improve performances where possible, including noise and vibration reductions, elimination of hazards, better response of controls, signals and alarms, and similar system performance improvements. Provide testing or inspection devices to permit observation of actual system performances and shall demonstrate that controls and items requiring service or maintenance are accessible.


C. Cleaning and Lubrication - After final performance test run of each electrical system, clean system both externally and internally, comply with manufacturer’s instructions for lubrication of both power and hand operated equipment, and remove excess lubrication, touch up minor damage to factory-painted finishes and other painting specified as electrical work, and refinish work where damage is extensive.

D. Operating Instructions - General operating instructions are required. In addition to specific training of the Owner’s operating personnel specified in the individual sections, and in addition to preparation of written operating instructions and compiled maintenance manuals specified elsewhere in these specifications, provide general operating instructions for each operational system and equipment item of electrical work, and coordinate instructions with instructions for mechanical work, and other equipment where associated with electrical systems or equipment.

E. System Description and Operation

1. Perform in the presence of the Owner, the Owner’s operating personnel and the Owner.

2. Describe each basic electrical system and explain identification system, displayed diagrams, signals, alarms and audio visual provisions.

3. Describe interfaces with mechanical equipment, including interlocks, sequencing, startup, shutdown, emergency, safety, system failure, security, and similar provisions.

4. In the presence of the Owner’s personnel, display and conduct a “thumb-through” explanation of maintenance manuals, record drawings, spare parts inventory, storage and extra materials, meter readings, and similar service items.

5. The Contractor shall videotape these sessions and provide the Owner with two VHS tape copies.

3.08. CONTINUED SYSTEM OPERATIONS SUPPORT

A. Coordinate the Owner’s takeover of electrical systems with takeover of mechanical systems, including the provision of skilled electrical operating and maintenance personnel until the time the Owner’s personnel take over operation of entire mechanical and electrical plant. Respond promptly with continued consultation and services (beyond takeover date) on electrical systems, matching required continued services on associated mechanical systems and equipment until the end of the warranty period.

3.09. DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURE

A. Signed commitments are required. The transfer of electrical systems to the Owner for operation will not proceed until guarantees, warranties, performance certifications, maintenance agreements and similar commitments to be signed by Contractor and other entities have been executed and transmitted to and accepted by the Owner for placement in the Owner’s records.

3.10. THERMOGRAPH INSPECTIONS

A. Perform thermograph inspections on all service terminations, subfeed terminations, major power splices, transformer terminations, MCC terminations, and motor terminations for motors 5 HP or larger. Testing on major power distribution equipment will be performed with the plant running at a minimum of 70 percent capacity or the highest load that can be operated. Testing on individual pieces of equipment will be performed while the unit is operational at rated load and has operated for at least 30 minutes for continuously operated


equipment or near the end of a cycle for equipment that operates on/off. Loads shall be minimum of 40 percent of full load. Readings at overcurrent devices and starters will be for line and load; motors will be connections in motor terminal boxes; and for transformers, primary and secondary terminations. Provide a report of test results to the Owner including indication of any actions taken to resolve abnormal readings. See Exhibit B at the end of this section. All thermographic tests shall be reported on this form.

(continued)


EXHIBIT A

TESTING AND INSPECTION

ELECTRICAL INSULATION TEST RECORD INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST

EQUIP. I.D.

CKT/MARK NO.

TEST VOLTAGE

PHASE TO GND. MEG OHMS

PHASE TO PHASE MEG OHMS

DATE TESTED

A

B

C

N

A-B

A-N

B-C

B-N

C-A

C-N

TEST EQUIPMENT CONTROL NO. __________________ __________________ __________________ REMARKS:___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ PERFORMED BY: _______________________________________________ DATE: APPROVED BY: ________________________________________________ DATE:

Test Engineer


EXHIBIT B

TESTING AND INSPECTION THERMOGRAPHIC TERMINATION TEST

LINE/PRIMARY LOAD/SECONDARY LOAD

CONDITION (% OF FULL)

EQUIPMENT AMBIENT(1) 1 2 3 1 2 3 COMMENTS(2,3)

Thermograph Model Date of Test ____________________ Conducted by Outdoor Temperature _____________ Room Temperature Owner Witness (1) Ambient is the breaker case temperature, transformer winding temperature, or motor housing

temperature. For bus or cabling, it shall be the temperature of the bus or cable a minimum of 24 inches from the splice or termination.

(2) TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE CONDITION ACTION 1°C to 3°C Possible

deficiency Investigate, i.e., clean terminations/retorque

4°C to 15°C Deficiency Determine problem and repair; retest 16°C and above Major deficiency Immediate shutdown; determine problem and

repair and retest (3) Indicate any discrepancies the cause of any temperature differences and indicate action to be

taken. Test Parameters: • Imaging equipment shall be capable of detecting a minimum temperature difference of 1 degree at 30

degrees C. • Equipment shall detect and convert emitted radiation to a visual signal. • Tests to be run during periods of maximum possible loading, but at least 40 percent of rated load.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16990

CONTROL PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This Section includes requirements for new control panels as shown on the Contract Drawings, specified herein, and otherwise indicated or referenced.

B. The panel supplier shall furnish the minimum following control panels and equipment which shall include:

1. (2) Pump Motor Starter Control Panels W-Wak-WWEL-PMP-01, 02

2. (1) Secondary Control Panel

C. Equipment furnished under this Contract shall be installed in an industrial type environment and powered from an electrical source that may include harmonic distortion, surges, sags, and other electrical noise under normal operating conditions. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment furnished shall function correctly in an environment where electrical noise of the types referenced are common during normal operations. If the equipment is found to be unable to operate in this environment, the Contractor shall furnish additional and/or replacement equipment, surge protection, power line conditioners, UPS, or other equipment required to correct this problem at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. This Section includes power line surge protectors as shown on the Contract Drawings, specified herein, and otherwise required for appropriate equipment, including, but not limited to control panels, instrument cabinets, instruments, processors, and other equipment susceptible to damage from power surges in the electrical supply.






E. Section 16191 – ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND FASTENERS

F. Section 16484 – CONTACTORS AND MOTOR STARTING EQUIPMENT


H. Section 16903 – AUXILIARY CONTROLS AND RELAYS

I. Section 16950 – TESTING AND INSPECTION

1.03. REFERENCES

A. Material and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following:

Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade 8612289 16990-1 CONTROL PANELS

1. National Electric Code - NEC

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association - NEMA

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. - UL

4. JIC Standard EGP-1

5. UL508 and UL 508A


A. Qualifications of Manufacturer

1. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be furnished by manufacturers who meet the quality, workmanship, and experience requirements as specified in the General Provisions Section of this Contract.

B. Control Panel Supplier (CPS)

1. The CPS shall be regularly engaged in the business of instrumentation and controls and shall be responsible for the furnishing, coordination and the installation oversight of the equipment and components specified herein.

2. The CPS shall demonstrate the requisite resources of in-house staff, facilities and finances to complete the project in the schedule specified. These resources shall include personnel who are direct payroll employees of the CPS to engineer, design, implement, fabricate, stage, and test the entire integrated hardware and software system at the CPS’s facilities. In-house personnel shall include all disciplines associated with system manufacture, fabrication, and integration to include but not be limited to engineering, drafting, analog and digital control systems and wiring design, construction, wiring, labeling, software configuration, test/demonstration programming, project management, quality control, field engineering and training.

3. The CPS shall assign a specific person to be the CPS Project Manager for this project. The Project Manager shall be a direct employee of the CPS, shall be assigned to this specific project, and shall be skilled and experienced in project management, and in the type of work described herein. The Project Manager shall be assigned for the period of the Contract. Should it become necessary to replace the CPS project manager, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the credentials of the person assigned as a replacement.

4. The CPS shall maintain a UL 508 listed fabrication shop located at the CPS facility for the assembly of the various control panels, cabinets, consoles, instrument racks, enclosures, and wiring required for this project. This shop shall be available for inspection by the Engineer to observe quality control and workmanship. The CPS facilities shall include hardware and software owned by the CPS Subcontractor for development and support of any system software, and any testing and demonstration equipment to be utilized on the project.

5. The CPS shall be:

a. Company: Sherwood Logan & Associates, Inc. Contact: Robert W. Sherwood Telephone: 301/970-2181


b. Company: Micro-Tech Designs, Inc. Contact: Mark T. Duvall Telephone: 410/239-2885 c. Or Equal

1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be in accordance with the Special Provisions and as described herein.

B. Prior to obtaining any material in connection with this Section, detailed shop drawings on all material shall be submitted.

C. Submittals for equipment and materials shall be clearly marked or noted with specific features, standard options, and wiring diagrams to indicate compliance with Contract Documents. Terminal board wiring diagrams including terminal numbers and conductor color codes shall be indicated.

D. Where deviations to Contract Documents are proposed, submit a list of deviations. Provide a detailed description and explanation for each deviation.

E. Shop drawings shall present complete and accurate information relative to all working dimensions, equipment weights, assembly, and section views, and all necessary details pertaining to coordinating the Work of the Contract. Shop drawings shall contain information such as special tools and other items of information that are required to demonstrate detailed compliance with the Contract Documents.

F. Submit shop drawings which shall include the following:

1. Submittals shall include verification that panels will be fabricated to UL 508A standards and labeled as such. Submit short circuit current ratings (SCCR) for each individual control panel assembly.

2. Submittals shall contain the NEMA type designation and manufacturer data describing the enclosures and showing its compliance with specifications and associated standards.

3. Control panel assembly drawings detailing panel cut-out locations and sizes, back panel and device layout and locations.

4. Provide electrical point to point wiring diagrams showing detailed internal wiring and wiring to field devices. Device tag numbers shall be indicated where shown on the Contract Drawings. Terminal blocks and wiring numbers shall be identified on the wiring diagrams.

5. Bill of Materials for all equipment and accessories.

6. Manufacturer’s catalog information for all components and accessories.

7. Manufacturer’s standard wiring diagrams including all available terminal connections for each component.

8. Spare Parts List (including specified spare parts to be furnished by the Contractor and manufacturer’s recommended spare parts list for each type of unit).


9. Project specific installation instructions and mounting details for each component. Materials of construction for supports, brackets, and mounting hardware shall be provided with details for each type of equipment mounting rack.

10. A list of nameplate titles shall be submitted.

11. Identify spare control panel space for future equipment.

G. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for control panel equipment and components.

PART 2 PRODUCT

2.01. GENERAL

A. General

1. Control panels shall include display panels, relay panels, annunciator panels, termination boards, or any other assembly of electrical components shop assembled in enclosures.

2. The control panels and associated controls and instrumentation equipment shall be furnished as a coordinated assembly requiring only field connections of the power and control circuits for a complete and operating installation as specified and shown on the Contract Drawings.

3. Electrical equipment and controls shall be provided as required to perform the control function as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. Controls shall include motor starters, control power transformers, circuit breakers and power disconnecting devices and hardware, control relays, timing relays, intrinsically safe relays, and miscellaneous controls as required, or as specified. Electrical equipment and controls shall be provided in accordance with the specifications contained herein and in Division 16.

4. The control panel enclosure, components, and controls shall be UL Listed and Labeled. Control panels shall conform to the requirements of UL 508.

2.02. ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosure Construction

1. General

a. Dimensions of enclosures shown on the Contract Drawings are typical. Contractor shall size each enclosure as required to house the electrical equipment shown or specified. Each enclosure shall be sized such that a minimum of 20% spare open space is provided on the interior subpanel and/or swingout panel for mounting of future equipment. Spare Space shall be located in one clear and open, contiguous area of the subpanel.

b. Control panels shall include an equipment support system for mounting internal wiring and control components, and for the proper support of long case instruments. This system shall ensure that equipment is adequately supported by the main structural frame members. Fixed support members shall not be attached to front panels or removable access panels.


c. Steel enclosures shall be constructed of a minimum of 14 gauge steel and shall be constructed in accordance with NEMA requirements. Seams shall be continuously welded and ground smooth, with no holes or knockouts. Exterior hardware, including mounting hardware shall be stainless steel unless otherwise noted.

d. Panel cutouts shall be provided for mounting components as arranged on the Contract Drawings and shall include cutouts and coverplates, and shall be capable of being removed for the addition of future components. Components shall either be door mounted unless otherwise noted. Control panels requiring rear access shall have the components mounted on side opposite the door.

2. NEMA 12 Steel Enclosures

a. NEMA 12 enclosures shall be dust-tight, drip-tight suitable for protecting enclosed equipment and components from fibers, flyings, lint, dust and dirt. NEMA 12 enclosures shall provide a degree of protection against light splashing, seepage, dripping and external condensation of non-corrosive liquids.

b. Manufacturers

1) Hoffman

2) Saginaw SCE

3) Equal

3. NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Enclosures

a. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be water-tight and dust-tight suitable for outdoor installations. NEMA 4X enclosures shall protect enclosed equipment against splashing water, seepage of water, falling or hose-directed water, severe external condensation, and shall be corrosion resistant.

b. Enclosures shall be constructed of 14 gauge Type 304 stainless steel. Trim shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Exterior shall be unpainted.

c. Manufacturers

1) Hoffman

2) Saginaw SCE

3) Equal

B. Enclosure Doors

1. Enclosures shall be provided with front access single or double overlapping doors as required for the enclosure size. Door(s) shall be provided with heavy duty three point spring-roller latches operated by a key locking handle. Latch rods shall have rollers to facilitate door closing. Provide a minimum of two keys for each lock. Locks shall be keyed the same. Door assemblies for NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosures shall be constructed to maintain the NEMA rating of the enclosure assembly without the use of external door clips or hasps.


2. Door(s) shall be mounted with continuous piano hinges. Contractor shall cooridnate door swing (right hand or left hand) for each control panel to avoid interference with other equipment mounted adjacent to the control panels.

3. A rolled lip around minimum three sides of door shall be provided to prevent dirt and liquid from dropping into the panel when door is open.

4. Door(s) shall be fitted with a neoprene gasket applied with oil resistant adhesive and held in place with stainless steel retaining strips.

5. Enclosures mounted outdoors shall be provided with stainless steel door stops to hold the door(s) in the open position. The open position shall be field adjustable.

C. Interior Subpanels

1. Interior subpanels for component mounting shall be provided and assembled for each enclosure. Interior subpanels shall be constructed of 14 gauge steel finished in white enamel paint. Subpanels shall be provided with intermediate stiffeners where required to maintain surface flatness and panel rigidity. Fasteners, screws, and equipment mounting racks shall be stainless steel.

2. In addition to interior subpanels, provide ‘swing-out’ type panels where shown on the Contract Drawings. Swing-out panels shall be of similar construction to subpanels specified above. Swing-out interior panels shall be provided with a continuous stainless steel piano hinge along the side of the panel. A stainless steel catch latch shall be provided to lock the swing-out panel in-place to prevent unwanted movement. Heavy duty hinges shall be provided as required to carry the load of the swingout panels as mounted equipment.

D. Enclosure Finish

1. NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosures shall not be finished.

2. NEMA 12 enclosures: Sheet metal components shall be thoroughly cleaned, bonderized and finished with a prime coat and two topcoats of a two-component, catalyzed, polyurethane enamel. Texture semi-gloss finish shall be applied to provide a non-glare and abrasion resistant surface. Enclosures shall be provided with gray finish inside with a white enamel interior unless otherwise specified.

E. Enclosure Accessories

1. A large print pocket shall be provided on interior face of the enclosure door(s). Where this cannot be accommodated due to windows and other control devices mounted on the door, the print pockets shall be mounted on the interior side of the control panels.

2. Circuit Breaker Operators

a. Where shown on the Contract Drawings, circuit breaker disconnect handle operators shall provided. Handle operator shall be accessible from the face of the panel, and shall be capable of being locked in either the ON and OFF position with a padlock.

b. Handle operators shall prevent opening of the control panel doors with the handle in the ‘ON’ position. Operators shall be provided with a defeater mechanism to allow authorized personnel to open the door with the handle in the ‘ON’ position.


2.03. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Power Distribution

1. Control panels shall include provisions for distributing power to all three phase and single phase equipment shown on the Contract Drawings. Control panels shall include a main circuit breaker which shall disconnect power to the entire system. Incoming terminals shall be oversized to accommodate wiring and cable sizes as shown on the Contract Drawings.

2. Motor control panels which include motor controllers, motor starters, variable frequency drives, solid state reduced voltage starters, etc, shall have flange mounted disconnects mounted on the enclosure. “Through Door” type disconnecting handles are not acceptable.

3. Branch circuit breakers shall be provided on control power circuits and each individual circuit distributed from the panel. Circuit breakers shall be grouped on a single subpanel or DIN rail. Place subpanel so that there is a clear view of and access to the breakers when the door is open. Use branch circuit breakers rated at no more than twice the load.

4. Provide toggle switches to disconnect the control power to inside the panel where shown on the Contract Drawings. The toggle switch shall be mounted on the interior sub-panel of the control panel unless otherwise shown or specified.

5. Provide control power transformers and power supplies as required to obtain an operable system. Control power transformers shall be provided with suitable fusing on the primary and secondary side of the transformers. Control power transformers shall be sized as required to power equipment as shown on the Contract Drawings.

6. Place no more that 20 devices on any single circuit. Do not exceed 12 amperes on the branch circuit

7. Where multiple units provide parallel operations, do not group devices on the same branch circuit.

B. Circuit Protective Devices

1. Circuit Breakers

a. Circuit Breakers shall be of the thermal magnetic air type, and shall be as specified in the Section 16055, Electrical Work. Circuit breakers shall be appropriately sized to protect the equipment served per the requirements of the National Electric Code.

b. Thermal magnetic air circuit breakers shall be provided for branch circuit disconnect service and short circuit protection of motor control and auxiliary circuits.

c. Main circuit breakers for motor control panels which include motor controllers, motor starters, variable frequency drives, solid state reduced voltage starters, etc, shall be rated a minimum of 35kAIC.


2. Fuses

a. Provide fuses as required and specified for protecting individual control circuits and systems. Fuse ratings shall be sized to protect the equipment served per the requirements of the National Electric Code.

C. Terminal blocks

1. General

a. Terminal blocks shall be feed through, single level, and suitable for din rail mounting. Terminal blocks shall be fabricated complete with marking strip, covers, end plates, partitions, and screw type pressure connectors.

b. Terminal blocks shall be UL listed, rated for 600 VAC, 35 amperes unless otherwise noted.

c. Not less than 25 percent spare terminals shall be provided.

d. Terminal blocks for external connections shall be suitable for No. 12 AWG wire.

2. Terminal blocks for low voltage instrumentation circuits shall be rated for 300 VAC, 10 amperes.

3. Separate terminals shall be used for AC and DC voltages. These terminals shall be labeled AC and DC and shall be provided with two distinct colors. Separate wireways shall be installed for AC and DC voltages. AC and DC wiring shall be kept separate at all times.

4. Fuse terminal blocks shall be provided with LED blown fuse indicators and shall be capable of being disconnected without the use of any special tools.

5. Ground terminals shall be green.

6. Terminal blocks shall be located in the bottom of the panel, except where otherwise shown or noted. Terminal blocks shall be located near the doors or access panels of the enclosures to facilitate field wiring connections. Minimum spacing between terminal blocks shall be 5 inches and a minimum of 4 inches all around. Duplicate terminals shall be used to limit the number of wires at one terminal to two.

7. Terminals shall be labeled to agree with identification shown on supplier's submittal drawings. A terminal shall be provided for each conductor of external circuits, plus one ground for each shielded cable. Wires shall be numbered using wire markers. Wire numbers shall agree with terminal numbers, submittals, and remote equipment wiring designations.

8. Provide a screwdriver with blade suitable for operating each type of terminal screw provided.

9. Terminal blocks shall be as manufactured by:

a. Phoenix Contact

b. Equal


D. Internal Wiring

1. Internal instrument and component device wiring shall be as normally furnished by the manufacturer.

2. With the exception of low voltage instrumentation circuits (less than 30 V), interconnecting wiring and wiring to terminals for external connection shall be not less than No. 14 AWG copper, insulated for not less than 600 volts, with a moisture and heat resistant material and flame-retardant nonmetallic covering.

3. Wiring, except where noted, shall terminate on panel terminal blocks. Wiring shall be from terminal to terminal with no splices. Wiring from external devices shall terminate at the panel's field termination terminal blocks.

4. Instrumentation circuits shall be shielded.

5. Wiring shall be grouped or cabled and firmly supported to the panel. Not less than eight inches of clearance shall be provided between the terminal strips and the base of vertical panels for conduit and wiring space. Plastic wireway, Panduit or equal, shall be used to route wire within the panel. Wireways shall be provided with removable covers. Wireway shall be run in continuous length with snap on covers. AC and DC wiring shall be run in separate plastic wireways.

6. Tie-wraps used for bundling wire shall be cinched carefully to eliminate grooving the insulation.

7. Each control loop or system shall be individually fused, and fuses and circuit breakers shall be clearly labeled and located for easy maintenance.

8. Color code wiring as follows:

a. Line and Load Circuits (ac or dc power) Black b. Neutral White c. AC Control Circuits Red d. DC Control Circuits Blue e. Interlock Control Circuits on the panel energized from

external source. Yellow

f. Equipment Grounding Conductors Green

E. Circuit Identification

1. Devices mounted on or within the enclosures shall be permanently identified. The device and terminal identifications shall agree with those shown on the Contract Drawings.

2. Circuit identification shall be as specified in the Section 16055, Electrical Work.

F. Controls and Instruments

1. Panel mounted control relays, pushbuttons, indicating lights, selector switches, and instruments and components shall be as specified in the Section 16903.


2. Device, Junction, Pull Boxes and other conduit system accessories shall be as specified in the Sections 16055, Electrical Work.

G. Grounding

1. Enclosures shall be provided with two grounding lugs located on opposite sides of the enclosure for connection to external grounding system.

2. Provide a ground bus in each cabinet or panel for the shield and signal grounding circuits.

3. Swing-out panels shall be grounded and provided with flexible grounding braids that allow the swing-out panels to be opened.

2.04. CONTROL PANEL IDENTIFICATION

A. General

1. Control panels and enclosures shall be provided with nameplates on the exterior of each enclosure identifying the application function of the equipment enclosed such as "Fill Station Panel". Nameplates shall be mounted directly above equipment.

2. In addition, for selector switches and/or pushbuttons, a factory installed legend plate shall be provided to indicate the function each station performs, such as "ON" or "OFF."

3. Nameplates shall be engraved 1/4 inch high (1/2” inch high for enclosure titles) black capital letters on a 1/8" thick plastic black tag with white letters mechanically attached to enclosure. Lettering shall be in capitals except as shown. Nameplate text shall be as shown or scheduled on the Contract Drawings.

4. Legend plates shall be metal with black lettering mechanically attached to control panel.

5. Interior mounted components and equipment shall be provided with nameplates. Nameplates shall be located adjacent to, but not on, the given device and visibility shall not be obstructed by wire bundles or other equipment. Nameplates shall include device identification number as well as descriptive name.

6. Instrumentation Equipment shall be provided with brass identification tags.

7. Enclosures shall be provided with instruction plaques indicating any warnings or special instructions required by the component manufacturers. Warning plaques shall be red with white lettering.

8. Control panels that contain wiring fed from multiple external power sources shall be provided with a nameplate on the front of the enclosure indicating:

“WARNING -

THIS PANEL IS FED BY MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES”

9. Nameplates shall be permanently secured to enclosures and backpanels.


2.05. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. Wiring Diagrams

1. A glossy embossed elementary wiring diagram shall be provided, permanently attached to the inside door of each control panel. The wiring diagram shall include all shop drawing and field changes and revisions performed during construction.

B. Surge Suppressors

1. Surge suppressors shall be provided on all DC operated relay coils to minimize the high transient voltages generated when the circuit to the operating coil is opened.

C. Spare Parts

1. Each control panel shall be provided with the following spare parts:

One control relay of each type provided One timing relay of each type provided (where applicable) Five fuses of each size and type provided One lighting fixture lamp (where applicable) One indicating light (lamp) of each type provided. Two spare air filters.

D. Safety Barriers

1. Provide safety barriers for signal conductors connected to equipment located in Hazardous Locations. Barriers shall be Series MTL 700 by MTL, Inc., or equal.

E. Additional Control Components:

1. The CPS shall coordinate to provide additional control and interlock components and wiring and connections for each control panel as required to interface with the field wiring and controls. The CPS shall include time and services to provide connection of relays as directed by the Engineer during project submittal review period and during field wiring of the equipment. All components shall be wired to terminal blocks and each relay shall include wiring of relay coil and two normally open and two normally closed contacts.

a. (2) 120VAC Control Relays

b. (1) Timing Relay

c. (2) Control Interlocks

d. (1) LED indicating Light

e. (1) Pushbutton

f. (8) Nameplates

2. Components which are not installed shall be turned over to the Owner as additional spare parts.


2.06. POWER LINE SURGE PROTECTORS

A. General - Power line surge protectors shall be provided to protect equipment from transients on the AC power line. Surge Protectors shall meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE C62.41. They shall be of the type required to protect equipment installed in an industrial environment.

B. Hardwired Type - Hardwired power line surge protectors shall be wired to the input terminals of the respective panel or equipment. Power line surge protectors shall be by Topaz, Best, Tycor, Control Concepts, or equal.

C. Powerstrip Type - Integral surge protector/powerstrip shall be wired ahead of cord connected equipment that is being protected. The devices shall include NEMA 5-15R outlets and Power On indicator. Powerstrip shall be installed ahead of all cord connected equipment susceptible to damage due to incoming power line surge. Powerstrip type surge protector shall be by Best, Topaz, Tycor, Wm. Shape Co., or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. CONTROL PANEL FABRICATION

A. General

1. Fabricate control panels, install instruments and components plumb, and wire in the factory. Test wiring and check plumbing prior to shipment.

2. Use panel fabrication techniques that allow for removal and maintenance of all equipment after installation.

3. Cut, punch, or drill cutouts for panel mounted instruments and smoothly finish with rounded edges.

4. Place knockouts for the wiring of freestanding panels either at top or bottom of the panel. Cover holes for future devices with a plastic plate.

B. Wiring

1. Panel wiring shall be installed by the panel manufacturer and shall be brought out to identified terminal blocks. Interwiring between panel sections shall be from terminal blocks to terminal blocks. Terminal blocks for panel wiring shall be correlated with those for the electrical equipment by the panel manufacturer.

C. Component Location

1. Equipment shown or specified to be furnished with the panels shall be mounted by the panel manufacturer. Panel mounted controls shall be located such that they are easily accessible. Panel mounted controls and components shall be mounted a minimum of 30" above grade or finished floor and a maximum of 72" above finished floor, The panels shall be furnished as completely assembled units, requiring only field connections of power and control wiring.


3.02. INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Contractor shall verify placement of panel prior to fabrication and any and all shipping splits shall be provided.

2. Panels shall be grounded and all equipment and circuits included in the panels, as shown or required to be grounded, shall be connected to the grounding conductors.

3. The panels shall be installed as shown and directed. The final control panel locations shall be coordinated by the Contractor to avoid interference with standard operation and maintenance practices of the adjacent equipment. Wiring shall enter the panels as shown or specified.

4. Wall mounted control panels butting to masonry walls shall be provided with closure strips to seal the opening between the panel and the masonry.

B. Control Wiring: Contractor shall include time to install/replace/provide additional control and interlock components and wiring for each starter/VFD assembly as directed by the Engineer in the field. Modifications shall be performed as required to provide electrical interlocks and interface wiring to obtain a complete and operating control system.

3.03. POWER LINE SURGE PROTECTORS

A. Install power line surge protectors on the incoming power of all equipment susceptible to damage in an industrial or commercial environment due to line surges, lightning, transients, or other line disturbances.

B. All control panels containing electronic, microprocessor based, or other line powered equipment susceptible to damage be shall be provided with adequate line surge and transient protection.


A. Field Testing and Demonstration

Control panels shall be tested for proper operation and operational sequencing. Proper operation of control panels shall be demonstrated to the Engineer. Testing and demonstration shall be performed by a qualified service representative of the control panel fabricator or manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


APPENDIX I

STORMWATER EXEMPTION LETTER

May 11, 2011

Mr. Brandon GottGHD, Inc.16701 Melford Boulevard, Suite 330Bowie, MD 20715

RE: Wakefield Pumping Station Upgrade

Dear Mr. Gott;

This is in response to your letter dated April 28, 2011 (copy attached). We have reviewed theinformation you have provided with your letter and have determined that you will not have to addressstormwater management based on the limited activity proposed on the site having less than 2,500 sf ofdisturbance. However, if you make any changes or additions to the site work then you may need toprovide plans to this office. Changes and/or additions to the site work may constitute a need to addressstormwater management. This determination does not exclude you from having to obtain sediment anderosion control approval or a permit for any other purposes besides stormwater management.

If you have any questions you may contact Hamendra Mathur at 301-645-0623 or via e-mail [email protected].

Sincerely,

Frank WardChiefCodes, Permits & Inspection Services

cc: Hamendra MathurBob Harrington

F:\HOME\PGMS1\CPIS\DS\WPFILES\SWM&SD\Wakefield Pumping Station.doc

APPENDIX II

GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION

O’BO’BO’BO’BERRY ERRY ERRY ERRY EEEENGINEERINGNGINEERINGNGINEERINGNGINEERING,,,, IIIINCNCNCNC.... GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING • CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION

3161 Solomons Island Road, Suite 2 • Edgewater, MD 21037 (410) 956-7820 • FAX (410) 956-1537

[email protected] Robert A. O'Berry, P.E. Lisa P. Carroll President Project Manager June 15, 2011 Stearns & Wheler GHD 16701 Melford Boulevard, Suite 330 Bowie, Maryland 20715 Attention: Brandon Gott Re: Geotechnical Investigation Proposed New Wet Well and Related Structures Wakefield Pump Station Upgrades Charles County (Waldorf), MD OBEI Job No. 10087 Mr. Gott:

Submitted here is our report of the referenced investigation. The purpose of this

study was to determine the subsurface conditions by making a soil boring and, based on

an engineering analysis of those conditions, to develop geotechnical recommendations to

guide design and construction of the foundations and below-grade walls for the proposed

new wet well and related structures for the pump station upgrade. It is noted that the field

work was performed in July of 2010. Due to uncertainties in the proposed types of

structures and layout of the structures, the project was placed on hold from August of 2010

until April of 2011.

SITE AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION

The project site is the existing Wakefield Pump Station located on the east side of

Wakefield Circle north of its intersection with Paddington Court in Waldorf, Maryland. The

proposed wet well and related structures (valve/electrical building, generator pad, and

electrical equipment pad) will be located to the northeast of and adjacent to the existing

underground structures. Ground surface elevations in the pump station area generally

range between El 191’ and El 192’ with drainage generally toward the north and east.

Wakefield Pump Station Upgrades OBEI Job No. 10087 June 15, 2011 Based on information you provided to our office, the proposed precast 8-foot

diameter wet well will be situated on a 12’ x 12’ concrete slab at approximate El 168’. The

wet well will weigh about 90 kips empty and 163 kips when filled with water, exerting an

average soil contact pressure beneath the concrete slab of approximately 625 psf and

1150 psf, respectively. The 13’ x 23’ valve/electrical building will be located to the

southeast of the proposed wet well with an average soil contact pressure of less than

320 psf. The generator and electrical equipment pads will be situated to the northwest of

the proposed wet well and have average soil contact pressures of less than 250 psf.

Our geotechnical recommendations are based on the above. If any of the

information is incorrect or should change, our office should be contacted immediately so

we can review our recommendations and make any required changes, if necessary.

FIELD INVESTIGATION

To determine the subsurface conditions, one boring (labeled B-1) was made at the

location shown on the Site Plan included in Appendix A to this report. The location was

staked in the field by your office. The boring was made with a truck-mounted drill rig using

hollow stem augers and extended to a depth of 30 feet below the existing ground surface.

Split spoon samples were obtained in the boring at 2.5 to 5-foot intervals of depth by the

Standard Penetration Test (SPT) Procedure. A representative portion of each sample was

sealed in a glass jar and was subsequently inspected and visually classified by our

geotechnical staff.

A boring log giving descriptions of the various soils encountered and other boring

and sampling information is included in Appendix B. The natural moisture content of

selected samples is provided on the boring log. The depths given on the log were

referenced from the existing ground surface at the time of our investigation. The soils

have been classified using the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). The ground

surface elevation at the boring location was estimated based on the site plan that you

provided to our office. The results of laboratory Sieve tests are provided in Appendix C.

Wakefield Pump Station Upgrades OBEI Job No. 10087 June 15, 2011 Observations concerning groundwater were made while augering the boring, at

completion of the boring and 24 hours after completion, as indicated on the boring log.

The notation “wet” in the soil description portion of the log indicates levels where the soil

samples were visually noted to be saturated which can indicate groundwater presence.

GENERAL SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

The reader is referred to the Boring Log in Appendix B for details pertaining to the

specific subsurface conditions encountered at the boring location. Fill soils were

encountered from the ground surface to a depth of 14 feet. The Fill consists of a 2-foot

layer of Sandy Silty Clay (CL) with trace gravel underlain by Silty Sand (SM) with

intermixed Sandy Clayey Silt (ML) and gravel. The Fill is generally medium dense in

condition from the existing ground surface to a depth of 4.5 feet indicating a relatively good

compactive effort at the time of placement. The deeper Fill is generally loose to very loose

in condition indicating relatively poor compactive effort at the time of placement. It is likely

that the fill is related to construction of the existing wet well or mass grading at the time the

area was originally developed.

The subsurface profile beneath the Fill consists of fine Silty Sand (SM) to a depth of

23 feet underlain by Clayey Silt (MH). It is noted that the Silty Sand (SM) deposit

encountered between depths of 14 and 16 feet is classified as Possible Fill [Fill?] and

contains some gravel. Possible Fill is defined herein as material that had visual evidence it

might be Fill but no positive indicators. The Silty Sand (SM) deposit is generally loose in

condition. The Clayey Silt (MH) that underlies the Silty Sand (SM) is soft based on the

SPT “N” values. However, it has been our experience that these Clayey Silt (MH) soils are

generally sensitive to sampling by the SPT procedure and are typically stronger and less

compressible than indicated by the SPT “N” values. Pocket Penetrometer test results on

the disturbed SPT samples from the boring indicate unconfined compressive strengths of

between 1.2 and 1.5 tons/ft2.

Groundwater was encountered at the boring location at a depth of 14 feet

(El 177.5’±) while augering the boring as well as 24 hours after completion. It is noted that

Wakefield Pump Station Upgrades OBEI Job No. 10087 June 15, 2011 groundwater levels will vary at different times depending on seasonal conditions,

precipitation and local runoff.

CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

It is our opinion that mat foundations and concrete slabs located at the provided

design subgrade elevations and bearing either on approved natural soils, approved

existing Fill soils or newly compacted Structural Fill can be used to support the proposed

wet well, valve/electrical building, generator pad and electrical equipment pad. Minimal

settlement of the new wet well is expected provided care is taken during excavation to limit

disturbance of the subgrade soils. Due to the presence of loose to very loose Fill soils at

the boring location, a relatively low allowable soil bearing capacity is recommended for the

valve/electrical building, generator pad and electrical equipment pad to minimize

settlement. It is noted that settlement of up to 1.0-inch can be expected for any structures

located at the ground surface.

Any utility piping that extends between the wet well and valve/electrical building

will need to tolerate some movement as settlement occurs and must be isolated from the

structure to prevent damage. Minimal new surface fill is recommended at the site to

eliminate additional soil loadings that may cause increased settlement of the existing fill soils.

However, some grading may be necessary to promote positive surface water runoff and

prevent water infiltration into the subsurface profile which could also lead to increased

settlement.

Careful inspection by a geotechnical engineer or his/her representative must be

performed at the time of construction to verify that any existing Fill soils are in suitable

condition to support the proposed structures. Any unsuitable soil conditions will need to be

undercut and replaced with properly compacted structural fill or the foundation subgrade

elevation will need to be lowered.

Most of the soils that will be excavated to install the wet well and related utility pipes

are well above optimum moisture or are saturated with groundwater and will require

Wakefield Pump Station Upgrades OBEI Job No. 10087 June 15, 2011 substantial drying if they will be reused as backfill. Therefore, it is likely that off-site material

will be needed as backfill around the proposed wet well and within the utility trenches.

Water was at approximate El 177.5’± at the time the boring was performed and will be an

issue during construction of the proposed wet well as described later in this report.

Following are specific recommendations concerning design and construction of the

proposed new wet well and related structures.

Site Grading and Drainage

Minimal new surface Fill is recommended at the site to eliminate additional soil

loadings that may cause increased settlement of the loose existing Fill soils. However, some

grading will be necessary to promote positive runoff of surface water away from the proposed

structures. The site grading plan should include a grade of at least 2.5 percent for the first

20 feet away from the structures to facilitate runoff of surface water. A locally high

groundwater condition can develop immediately adjacent to the structures if surface

drainage is not properly controlled. In addition, in areas of poor surface water drainage,

the existing Fill soils may continue to settle as the surface water infiltrates into the Fill.

We recommend that adequate precautions be undertaken to minimize the possibility

of water collecting in the structural areas during construction. Adequate drainage should

be provided at the site to minimize this possibility of any increase in moisture content of the

foundation subgrade soils. Mat/slab subgrade areas should be sealed each night with a

smooth drum roller or covered.

Structural Fill and Below-Grade Backfill and Compac tion

All structural fill and utility trench backfill materials should be approved by a

geotechnical engineer prior to placement. Due to the high moisture content of the soils that

will be excavated at the proposed wet well location, it is expected that off-site material will be

needed as backfill around the well. Any off-site material should be SM classification or

coarser. Most of the soils that will be excavated to install the wet well and related utility

piping should be Silty Sands (SM) with some intermixed Sandy Clayey Silts (ML). These

soils are also suitable as backfill provided they are dried to within ±2 percentage points of

Wakefield Pump Station Upgrades OBEI Job No. 10087 June 15, 2011 optimum. It is noted that any substantial amounts of Silts (ML) or Clays (CL) should not be

used as backfill against below-grade walls.

Any structural fill required under foundations and slabs, as well as for wall and utility

trench backfill, should be placed in loose lifts not to exceed 12 inches and each lift should be

compacted to a density of at least 95 percent maximum density as determined by the

Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D1557). The subgrade in all fill areas should also be

compacted to a firm, stable condition prior to placement of the fill. We recommend that fill

placement below slabs extend a minimum of 5 feet horizontally beyond the edge of each

structure. Fill under foundations should extend beyond the edge of the foundations at a ratio

of 1.3 vertical to 1 horizontal. Moisture contents of structural and utility trench fills should

ideally be maintained within ±2 percentage points of optimum, thus adjustments to the natural

moisture contents of the soils may be required in order to obtain specified compaction levels.

All subgrade preparation, Fill placement, and compaction operations should be

monitored by a qualified soils inspector under the supervision of a geotechnical engineer.

This inspection should be performed on a full-time basis to ensure that all fill materials are

being placed and compacted in compliance with the project specifications. A number of in-

place density tests should be performed to verify that the proper degree of compaction is

being obtained. Should any compaction problems develop during grading operations, the

geotechnical engineer should be consulted for an evaluation of the problem.

Proposed New Wet Well

Mat Foundation

The proposed wet well foundation subgrade will be located in natural soil deposits

below El 168’, requiring excavations of at least 23.5’. We recommend that the wet well be

designed for a maximum allowable bearing capacity of 1500 psf and Subgrade

Modulus (k) of 50 psi/in. The mat foundation should contain reinforcing steel as

designated by a structural engineer and must bear on a subgrade approved by a

geotechnical engineer. Total settlement of less than 0.5-inches is expected based on the

provided loads.

Wakefield Pump Station Upgrades OBEI Job No. 10087 June 15, 2011 Groundwater

Groundwater was encountered at the boring location at a depth of 14 feet

(El 177.5’±) at the time the boring was performed. The soils from a depth of 14 feet to 23

feet are Silty Sands (SM) with minimal fines that should have relatively fast permeability

rates so water seepage through the soils should be comparatively rapid. Based on these

conditions, dewatering the wet well excavation during construction will require the use of

high volume pumps placed within the excavation limits or well points located outside the

excavation limits that will need to pump continuously during construction. The excavating

contractor should review the boring log and groundwater conditions and recommend the

appropriate system.

Shoring

Temporary shoring will be necessary during construction of the wet well to prevent

damage to the adjacent existing structures. It is recommended that a contractor who

specializes in this type of construction be retained to design and build the required system.

It is noted that the design should consider the existing groundwater table and need to

minimize loss of soil into the excavation that may cause undermining of any adjacent

existing structures. We further note that we do not recommend use of any system that

requires use of dynamic installation methods due to the possible negative effects on the

adjacent structures. It is noted that design of temporary construction shoring or

underpinning for adjacent structures is not included in the scope of this report.

Valve/Electrical Building, Generator Pad

and Electrical Equipment Pad

Although the existing Fill soil encountered at the boring location between depths of

4.5 and 14 feet is loose to very loose in condition, it has been in place for many years.

Any additional settlement related to its own weight should be negligible provided water is

not allowed to pond on the surface and infiltrate into the Fill. Therefore, positive

surfacewater runoff away from the structures must be established. Based on our analysis

of the subsurface soil conditions, use of a low allowable soil bearing capacity for design

and assuming minimal additional fill is placed at the site, total and differential settlements

Wakefield Pump Station Upgrades OBEI Job No. 10087 June 15, 2011 of less than 1.0-inch and 0.5-inch, respectively, are expected for structures located at the

existing ground surface. Provided the above-mentioned total and differential settlement is

acceptable, a deep foundation system or removal and replacement of the existing Fill are

not necessary.

Differential settlement between the wet well and surrounding structures may be as

much as 1.0-inch since minimal settlement of the wet well is expected. Therefore, it is

recommended that any utility pipes that enter or exit the valve/electrical building through

the mat foundation be isolated from the structure to prevent down-drag on the pipes and

possible damage. It is also recommended that the pipe connections between the wet well

and valve/electrical building as well as the seal around the force main pipes as they exit

the wet well be flexible enough to allow some movement. The design engineer should

review our report to verify that the piping that extends between the wet well and

valve/electrical building can tolerate the above-mentioned movement.

Assuming minimal new surface Fill will be placed at the structure locations, we

recommend that the mat foundation for the valve/electrical building and the slabs for the

generator and electrical equipment pads be designed for a maximum allowable bearing

capacity of 350 psf and Subgrade Modulus (k) of 50 psi/in. The mat foundation and slabs

should contain reinforcing steel as designated by a structural engineer and must bear on a

subgrade approved by a geotechnical engineer. It is noted that borings were not

performed at the locations of the valve/electrical building, generator pad and electrical

equipment pad and therefore some variations in the condition of the existing Fill soils at

these locations may exist. It is also noted that portions of these structures may be situated

on new structural backfill placed adjacent to the wet well and that minimal settlement of the

new structural backfill is expected if compacted according to the procedures recommended

in this report.

Inspection

All mat foundation and slab areas must be inspected by a geotechnical engineer

prior to the placement of concrete. This inspection should include hand auger borings and

Wakefield Pump Station Upgrades OBEI Job No. 10087 June 15, 2011 DCP testing to determine the shallow subsurface soil conditions at these locations. This

testing is especially important due to the presence of existing Fill at the boring location. If

soft or loose pockets are encountered in the foundation/slab excavations, the unsuitable

materials should be removed and the footings should be located at a lower elevation.

Alternatively, the unsuitable materials could be undercut and replaced with new Fill placed

and compacted in accordance with the recommendations of the Structural Fill and

Below-Grade Backfill and Compaction section of this report.

Soil Parameters for Below-Grade Walls

We recommend that all backfill against walls be of SM classification or coarser. Any

Silts (ML) and Clays (CL) that will be excavated are not desirable materials for backfill and

should not be used as backfill around the new wet well. Based on these criteria, we

recommend the general parameters listed below.

Soil Unit Weight (1)

Above groundwater Below groundwater

140 pcf 78 pcf

Soil Friction Angle (1) 30o Lateral Earth Pressure Coefficients Active (2) (3) 0.33 At Rest (2) 0.50

Notes: (1) Based on compacted structural Fill soils (SM or coarser). (2) Based on level exterior grade next to wall. (3) Wall must be allowed to yield otherwise At Rest pressure should be used for design.

The lateral pressure design should be hydrostatic in shape. The walls should be

designed to withstand hydrostatic pressure and any expected surcharge load should also

be included in the lateral pressure design of the wall.

GEOTECHNICAL INSPECTION

The conclusions and recommendations in this report are valid only if a geotechnical

engineer inspects all phases of wet well installation and foundation/slab construction for

the related structures. This inspection will include, but not necessarily be limited to the

items listed below.

Wakefield Pump Station Upgrades OBEI Job No. 10087 June 15, 2011

a) Inspection of the wet well subgrade soils prior to installation to include performing

portable penetration tests.

b) Inspection of any footing/mat excavations and slab areas prior to placement of

concrete to include performing portable penetration tests.

c) Inspection of any required undercutting.

d) Inspection and compaction testing of all Fill placement to include backfill placed

around the wet well and within the utility trenches.

REMARKS

This report was compiled based solely on the results of the soil test boring performed

at the project site. The recommendations were developed from the information obtained in

the test boring, which depicts subsurface conditions only at this specific location and at the

particular time designated on the log. Soil conditions at other locations may differ from

conditions occurring at this boring location. Also, the passage of time may result in a change

in the soil conditions at the boring location.

The nature and extent of variations in the boring may not become evident until the

time of construction. If variations then appear evident, it will be necessary to re-evaluate the

recommendations in this report after performing on-site observations during the excavation

period and noting the characteristics of any variation; however, only minor variations that can

be readily evaluated and adjusted during construction are expected.

Our professional services have been performed, our findings obtained and our

recommendations prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering

principles and practices. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties either expressed or

implied. This company is not responsible for the conclusions, opinions or recommendations

made by others based on this data. If during construction, any problems or deviations are

encountered contrary to our findings, O’Berry Engineering, Inc. should be notified

immediately.

Wakefield Pump Station Upgrades OBEI Job No. 10087 June 15, 2011 We have appreciated this opportunity to provide our services to you on this project. If

we can be of any further assistance, please do not hesitate to contact our office.

Respectfully, O’BERRY ENGINEERING, INC. Robert A. O’Berry, P.E. President RAO/mec Copies: Client – Mail (2); email (1) [email protected]

APPENDIX A

BORING PLAN

.

JOB NAME: WAKEFIELD PUMP STATION UPGRADES

SHEET TITLE: BORING PLAN

O’BO’BO’BO’Berryerryerryerry EEEENGINEERING, NGINEERING, NGINEERING, NGINEERING, IIIINC.NC.NC.NC. GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERS

3161 Solomons Island Road, Suite 2 Edgewater, MD 21037

Phone: (410) 956-7820 • Fax: (410) 956-1537PREPARED BY:

MEC JOB NO.:

10087 DATE:

06/3/11

SHEET NO.:

D1

B-1

APPENDIX B

BORING LOG

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Gravel - 2"

Moist Brown and Reddish Brown stiff

fine Sandy Silty Clay (CL)

w/trace gravel [Fill]

Very Moist Gray and Gray Brown

medium dense f-m Silty Sand (SM) w/

intermixed Sandy Clayey Silt (ML) and

gravel [Fill]

- loose to very loose below 4.5'

Wet Brown loose fine Silty Sand (SM)

- [Fill?] w/gravel from 14' to 16'

- brown and light brown below 16'

Very Moist Dark Gray soft Clayey Silt

(MH)

Bottom of Boring 30'

Note: Water on Rods at 14' depth

* set temp. water monitoring pipe

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

��

�� !"#$"%&��'()��* *$+,�-)./ &"0 ��1�� 1�� *" /,0�2��3"%"/��4 45�� 6��6��5��1� �""�7+/$,.��% , ��85��1� ��±�4�� "+( */$9�4/$%%$,.:��,;� ��4�7<� �5�4�� /';!4��5��=��5��1� �> 5 ��-��4��58�1�=��5��1� �> 5 ��-��

�� !��"�!��!�� !�#��$��

��85��16

4��

��<�7��:

�5��

514��45�5

-�� 4"0;/$)*$+, 1�?4��

��5145�4��1��5��1��

1��-��8��

��

��

�%�� &��#�

APPENDIX C

LABORATORY TESTING

PL

LL

NM

%M

AT

ER

IAL D

ES

CR

IPT

ION

US

CS

DA

TE

SA

MP

LE

DD

EP

TH

/ELE

V.

SA

MP

LE

#S

OU

RC

E

Pro

ject

No.

Pro

ject

Clie

nt

Part

icle

Siz

e D

istr

ibu

tio

n R

ep

ort

10

90

20

80

30

70

40

60

50

50

60

40

70

30

80

20

90

10

0

100

100

0

PERCENT FINER BY WEIGHTPERCENT COARSER BY WEIGHT

100

10

10.1

0.0

10.0

01

500

GR

AIN

SIZ

E IN

MIL

LIM

ET

ER

S

% C

OB

BLE

S%

GR

AV

EL

% S

AN

D%

SIL

T%

CLA

Y

63

21

-1/2

13

/41

/23

/84

10

20

30

40

60

10

01

40

20

0

U.S

. S

IEV

E O

PE

NIN

G IN

IN

CH

ES

U.S

. S

TA

ND

AR

D S

IEV

E N

UM

BE

RS

HY

DR

OM

ET

ER

0.0

38.6

44.2

17.2

10087

Ste

arn

s &

Wh

eler

GH

D

B-1

S-4

7.5

'-9'

07/2

8/1

0S

MG

ray

and G

ray

Bro

wn

Sil

ty S

and w

/gra

vel

Wak

efie

ld P

um

p S

tati

on

Upgra

des

O'B

err

y E

ng

ine

eri

ng

, In

c.

Fig

ure

0.0

0.0

82.3

17.7

B-1

S-7

20'-

21.5

'07/2

8/1

0S

MB

row

n a

nd L

igh

t B

row

n S

ilty

San

d

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...1.07. CONSTRUCTION PERMITS A. Contractors shall obtain and pay for...

Documents

Transcript of TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...1.07. CONSTRUCTION PERMITS A. Contractors shall obtain and pay for...